1

МИНИСТЕРСТВО ЗДРАВООХРАНЕНИЯ РЕСПУБЛИКИ БЕЛАРУСЬ

БЕЛОРУССКИЙ ГОСУДАРСТВЕННЫЙ МЕДИЦИНСКИЙ УНИВЕРСИТЕТ

КАФЕДРА ЛАТИНСКОГО ЯЗЫКА

А. З. ЦИСЫК

ФАРМАЦЕВТИЧЕСКАЯ ЛАТЫНЬ

THE PHARMACEUTICAL LATIN

Рекомендовано Учебно-методическим объединением по высшему меди-

цинскому, фармацевтическому образованию Республики Беларусь в качестве

учебно-методического пособия для студентов учреждений высшего образования,

обучающихся на английском языке по специальности 1-79 01 08 «Фармация»

Минск БГМУ 2016

2

УДК 811.124 (075.8)

ББК 81.2 Лат−923

Ц73

Р е ц е н з е н т ы: канд. филол. наук, доц. кафедры классической филологии Бе-

лорусского государственного университета А. В. Кириченко; канд. филол. наук, доц.

кафедры теории и практики английской речи Минского государственного лингвисти-

ческого университета Н. М. Алешко

Цисык, А. З.

Ц73 Фармацевтическая латынь = The pharnaceutical latin : учеб.-метод. пособие. /

А. З. Цисык. Минск : БГМУ, 2016. 252 с.

ISBN 978-985-567-577-9

Составлено на основе профессиональной фармацевтической лексики и содержит необходимый

теоретический и практический материал по фармацевтической и клинической части учебной про-

граммы, а также латинско-русский и русско-латинский словари. Особое внимание уделяется орфогра-

фии терминов и правилам оформления лекарственных форм в составе рецепта.

Предназначено для иностранных студентов фармацевтических факультетов медицинских

вузов, изучающих дисциплину «Фармацевтическая латынь» на английском языке.

УДК 811.124 (075.8)

ББК 81.2 Лат–923

ISBN 978-985-567-577-9 © Цисак А. З., 2016

© УО «Белорусский государственный

медицинский университет», 2016

3

PREFACE

This manual is meant for English-speaking students of medical universities of

the Republic of Belarus studying the subject «The pharmaceutical Latin». Its structure

corresponds to the syllabus presented in the State Educational Standard Plan for the

subject «The pharmaceutical Latin» taught in the medical universities. The manual has

been composed in accordance with generally accepted patterns expressed in well-

known manuals and textbooks of Latin and Fundamentals of Medical Terminology.

The manual is divided into two parts. First part unites phonetic rules, morphol-

ogy with the grammar rules, fundamentals of the chemical, biochemical and botanical

terminology which are necessary for understanding, building and translating pharma-

ceutical terms and simple sentences of professional content. After these theoretical ma-

terials rules of writing out the Latin part of prescription are given. The second part of

this manual includes fundamentals of Latin clinical terminology.

Every real lesson, as it is generally known, has a uniform structure: checking the

home task (orally and in writing), some explanation of a new topic, students’ work with

exercises. The manual contains all necessary components for this work — grammar and

terminological material, as well as exercises. In the latter, words are given in alphabetical

order, and every lesson is provided with Latin-English and English-Latin glossaries. Such

a distribution of educational material should help students in their work on exercises.

According to high school norms of studying linguistic subjects, students are to

learn 35–40 new words at every lesson, and these word memorizing can be managed

naturally only due to a strenuous efforts to do the homework. But then, this work is

constantly facilitated by lexical affinity of equivalent words in Latin and English.

In mastering the subject «The pharmaceutical Latin» both proper spelling and

grammar arrangement are of great value. Students’ skills of using proper grammar

rules and fundamentals of Latin pharmaceutical terminology for reading and under-

standing medicinal prescriptions and other pharmaceutical information in Latin are

controlled at every lesson. As these skills in the future practice work will be used

chiefly in written form so control tests at every lesson as well as summing up tests are

performed only in written form.

The students should bear in mind, that only systematic work on the topic and

vocabulary of every lesson on their own can result in success.

INTRODUCTION TO THE SUBJECT

The subject you are going to study is «The pharmaceutical Latin». To some point,

this name is relative, because nowadays there are no people speaking Latin. To more un-

derstand the situation, let’s recall the Europe history. From the school course of world his-

tory you can remember, that many centuries ago, where nowadays Italy is, there was the

Roman Empire. The Roman state which included many lands and people existed till 464

A.D. And initially, Rome was a small town, founded by an Italian tribe in 753 B.C. and

Latin was its native language. Gradually, century after century, Rome became the most

powerful state of the Mediterranean and Latin was widespread and acknowledged.

An event of tremendous historical importance for both Rome and the future of

European culture was the Roman conquest of Greece, the motherland of European cul-

4

ture and science. The Greek physician Hippocrates is namely considered to be the

founder of European scientific medicine. Hippocrates and other Greek physicians

made a great contribution into the development of medicine, that’s why Greek medi-

cine was extremely popular and prestigious among the population of the Mediterrane-

an area. For this reason, Greek medical terms were borrowed into Latin and came into

use in different countries. So originally the European medical terminology was formed

on the basis of Greek and Latin words.

In the new history of Europe, beginning with the Roman state’s collapse, the

Latin language was used for 1000 years as the language of state establishments, Catho-

lic religion, education and science, especially at universities founded in the 12-th cen-

tury. Every university would have a medical faculty. Diplomas and theses as well as

the process of education itself were in Latin. As to medicine and pharmacy, Latin be-

came the international professional language of physicians and pharmacists. Medical

and pharmaceutical terms rooting from Latin and Greek are presented in any European

language as borrowings. What’s more, there exist lists of biological and medical terms,

forming the so-called Nomenclatures, approved at the International Congresses of sci-

entists — anatomical, histological, microbiological, pharmacists etc. Latin terms of

those nomenclatures are used in education and scientific literature. There exists the In-

ternational Pharmacopeia — a book consisting of different types of recommendations

and general principles of creating and distributing of different medicinal formulation

and drugs. The World Health Organization is responsible for the International Pharma-

copeia. And every country has its public pharmacopeia based on international one de-

scribing drugs, chemical and medical preparations, issued by an officially recognized

authority and serving as a standard. That’s why future doctors and pharmacists must

study fundamentals of international medical terminology, based on Latin grammar and

Latin and Greek word building elements (roots, stems and affixes).

Among modern European languages English, and, particularly, medical English,

contains a great number of Latin and Latinized Greek words. It becomes evident when

comparing medical glossaries of Latin and English. To prove this one may compare

some medical terms in Latin and English presented in the table below:

Latin anatomical terms English equivalents

abdomen abdomen

canalis canal

cavitas cavity

ligamentum ligament

renalis renal

tonsilla tonsil

tractus tract

Latin pharmaceutical terms English equivalents

Acidum aceticum acetic acid

aether ether

Calcium calcium

dilutus diluted

herba herb

Mentha mint

tinctura tincture

5

Latin clinical terms English equivalents Meaning

adenitis adenitis inflammation of gland

cancerophobia cancerophobia fear of cancer

cholecystogramma cholecystogram results of gallbladder X-ray examina-

tion

haematuria hematuria blood in the urine

otogenus otogenic developing from the ear

tachycardia tachycardia abnormally fast heart rate

trichalgia trichalgia feeling of pain in the hair

As we see, in clinical terminology using Latin terms is particularly preferable,

because one Latin word can change the whole group of English words, expressing

some pathological phenomenon.

The proximity of medical and pharmaceutical terms in Latin and English can be

explained very simply: it is well known, that English medical terminology developed

from Medieval Latin terminology, which had absorbed ancient Latin and Greek medi-

cal lexical units. Both Latin and ancient Greek is an inexhaustible source for a new

term building, and this process keeps on going.

The course of the Pharmaceutical Latin at the Medical University you are going

to study is divided into 2 academic terms (semesters); each lesson is once a week. The

first term is devoted to learning phonetic and main grammar rules for building and

translating Latin pharmaceutical terminology and simple sentences of pharmaceutical

sense. During the second term the students continue getting acquainted with the fun-

damentals of the Latin pharmaceutical terminology and study clinical part of the pro-

gram. Each new lesson includes teacher’s explanation of the topic of the lesson, but

the main bulk of work for students their home task. A specific feature of studying dur-

ing both semesters is written control of checking home task preparation at every les-

son. Besides this regular test control, 6 written tests (for 90 minutes) are provided. The

purpose of these tests is to control the students knowledge of the course material.

There exist uniform (for all groups and teachers) rules of the control assessment and

the students will be acquainted with them. So, at every lesson, they will first work

orally, checking the home task with their teacher, and then their knowledge will be

controlled in written form (while books and notebooks are closed!). The principal

way to this knowledge is students own persistent work with textbook memorizing Lat-

in words and rules of its grammar. And, without doubt, every student can succeed in

learning «The pharmaceutical Latin», if his or her efforts are steady and diligent.

6

Part I

PHONETIC RULES OF PRONUNCIATION

LESSON 1 THE LATIN ALPHABET. PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS, CONSONANTS AND LETTER

COMBINATIONS

§ 1. The Latin alphabet

The Latin alphabet includes 25 letters.

Letters Names Latin pronuncia-

tion

Latin examples and

their transcription

English equiva-

lents

A a a [Λ] [a] Valeriana [vΛleriánΛ] valerian

B b be [be] [b] bulbus [bu:lbus] bulb

C c tse [tse] [ts]

[k]

coccyx [ko:ktsiks] coccyx, coccyg-

eal bone

D d de [de] [d] dens [dens] tooth

E e e [e] [e] vertebra [ve:rtebrΛ] vertebra

F f ef [ef] [f] forma [fo:rmΛ] form

G g ge [ge] [g] genu [ge:nu] knee

H h ha [hΛ] [h] like English

heart, here

hepar [he:pΛr] liver

I i i [ i] [i] iris[íris] iris

J j yot [yot] [j] like English yes,

you

jugularis [yuguláris] jugular

K k ka [kΛ] [k] skeleton [ske:leton] skeleton

L l el [el] l [as in English life,

love]

cellula [tse:llulΛ] cell

M m em [em] [m] mors [mors] death

N n en [en] [n] nodus [no:dus] node

O o o [o] [o] coronarius [coronárius] coronary

P p pe [pe] [p] palpebra [pálpebrΛ] eyelid

Q q ku [ku] [kv] together with

vowel u and vowels

a, e, i, o, u after u

Quercus [kve:rkus]

quartus [kvá:rtus]

oak

fourth

R r er [er] [r] renalis [rená:lis] renal

S s es [es] [s]

[z]

succus [sukkus]

usus [uzus]

juice

use

T t te [te] [t]

[ts]

tinctura[tínktura]

solution [solu:tsio]

tincture

solution

U u u [u] [u] succus [su:kkus] juice

V v ve [ve] [v] vitrum [vítrum] phial, glass

X x iks [iks] [ks] dexter [de:kster] right, right-hand

Y y Ipsilon [ípsilon] [i] oxydum [oksidum] oxide

Z z zeta [zetΛ] [z] Sulfadimezinum

[sulfadimezinum]

sulfadimezine

The last two letters, borrowed by Romans from Greek alphabet, are used, as a

rule, in the words of Greek origin.

7

§ 2. Division of Latin sounds

Six letters of the alphabet (a, e, i, o, u, y) correspond to vowels and nineteen (b,

c, d, f, g, h, j, k, l, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, v, x, z) denote consonants.

§ 3. Pronunciation of vowels

Vowels in Latin, except «y», sound practically the same, as the sounds of their

names in the alphabet (see above). So, the letter «a» sounds [a], the letter e — sounds

[e] and so on. One may add that the stressed vowel corresponds in pronunciation to a

long one in English, compare:

cavitas [cá:vitΛs] — cavity

tincture [tinktu:rΛ] — tincture

spirituosus [spirituo:zus] — spiritous

tabuletta [tΛbule:ttΛ] — tablet

The letter «y» (ípsilon) sounds as the Latin letter «i» (that’s why the Frenchmen

call it «i greque» [igrek],i. e. «the Greek «i»):

Terrilytinum [terrilití:num] — terrilytin (Latin names of drugs are to be written

with capital letter)

All the above given examples also indicate, that Latin vowels don’t practically

change their sound quality in different syllables. But the vowel «i» placed before the

vowels «a», «e», «o», «u», when making a common syllable with them, changes its

sound characteristics: now it sounds similar to the English vowel «y» in the yard,

yours, yourself, youthful, let’s compare:

maialis [mΛjá:lis] — referring to May

maior [má:jor] — greater

As in such cases the letter «i» sounds different compared to the vowel «i», the

scientists in the XVI century decided to introduce a new letter «j» into the Latin al-

phabet, so as to substitute the vowel «i»: majalis, major and so on. It is common to use

the letter «j» in medical, pharmaceutical and biological terms. Let’s, however, note

that in the terms of the Greek origin the vowel «i» never makes a syllable with the

subsequent vowels «a», «e», «o», «u» and therefore the letter «j» cannot be used:

iater [iá:ter] — physician, commonly geriater, paediater, psychiater, phthisiater

and so on — these terms will be discussed in the clinical part of our course. We can

also mention the noun Iodum [io:dum] — iodine (Latin names of chemical elements

are to be written with capital letters).

§ 4. Pronunciation of two vowels combination

Two vowels following each other can form the so-called diphthong that is pro-

nounced as a combination of two vowels in one syllable.

So au [au] is pronounced as in the English words down, sound, south, com-

pound and so on:

auris [áuris] — ear trauma [tráuma] — injury, wound.

Eu [eu] has no analogue in English, so its pronunciation must be learnt by the

spelling memorizing:

Eucalyptus [eukalí:ptus] — eucalyptus (Latin names of medical plants are to be

written with capital letter)

pneumonia [pneumoní:Λ] — pneumonia

8

However, you should pay attention to the letter combination «eu» at the end of

words, where it doesn’t make a diphthong and each vowel is pronounced separately:

sigmoideus [sigmoí:deus] — sigmoid

corpus luteum [ko:rpus lu:teum] — corpus luteum (yellow body)

Two vowels can also form a digraph, which sounds like the Latin vowel «e»:

ae — [e] — tabulettae [tabule:tte] — tablets

oe — [e] — oedema [ede:mΛ] — swelling

If each vowel in such digraphs is to be pronounced separately, two dots are

placed over the letter e:

aër [á:er] — air, Aloë (names of medical plants are to be written in Latin with

the capital letter) [á:loe] — aloe.

§ 5. Pronunciation of consonants

Consonants b, d, f, h k, m, n, p, q, s, t, v, x are similar in pronouncing to Eng-

lish. The difference is that consonants p, t, k are not aspirated, as in English. Pronun-

ciation of the rest consonants is to be explained.

The letter Cc before the vowels «e», «i», «y» and digraphs ae, oe is pronounced

as [ts], but before the vowels «a», «o», «u» and consonants (except h) is pronounced

as [k]:

acetylsalicylicus [atsetilsalitsí:likus] — acetylsalicylic

coeruleus [tseru:leus] — blue

The letter Gg is always pronounced like [g] in English get, glass, disguise:

gaster [gá:ster] — stomach

Progesteronum [progestero:num] — progesteron

vaginalis [vΛginá:lis] — vaginal

The letter Hh is pronounced approximately as [h] in English:

homo [ho:mo] — man

Hydrargyrum [hidrá:rgirum] — mercury

The letter Ll is pronounced in someway softer than in English and is palatalized

both before vowels and consonants (as in the pronunciation of such English words as

look and live):

albus [á:lbus] — white

cellula [tse:llulΛ] — cell

The letter Rr in Latin is pronounced always clearly and distinctly not as the

English Rr [a:]

dexter [de:xter] — right

posterior [poste:rior] — back

renalis [rená:lis] — renal

The letter Ss between two vowels is pronounced like [z], in other cases — as [s]:

basis [bá:zis] — base

succus [su:kkus] — juice

The letter Tt is commonly pronounced as [t] without aspiration: tinctura

[tinktu:rΛ] — tincture. But in such a letter combination, where i follows t plus some

other vowel, t is pronounced as [ts]:

articulatio [artikulá:tsio] — joint

scientia [stsie:ntsiΛ] — knowledge

9

There is, however, an exception from this last rule: if before the combination ti

+ vowel the consonants «s» or «x» are placed, then the pronunciation of ti is [ti]:

digestio [dige:stio] — digestion

mixtio [mí:kstio] — mixture

The letter Zz is pronounced as [z]:

zona [zo:nΛ] — zone

horizontalis [horizontá:lis] — horizontal

But in two cases we pronounce this letter as [ts]: influenza [influe:ntsΛ] —

grippus, influenza and Zincum [tsí:nkum] — zink.

§ 6. Pronunciation of consonant combinations

Two consonants can form a digraph, which is pronounced as a consonant:

ch is pronounced as [kh]:

hydrochloridum [hidrokhlo:ridum] — hydrochloride; charta [khá:rtΛ] — paper

ph is pronounced as [f]:

lymphaticus [limfá:ticus] — lymphatic pharynx [fá:rinks] — pharynx

rh is pronounced as [r]:

rhinorrhagia [rinoragí:a] — rhinorrhagia (nasal bleeding)

rhomboideus [romboí:deus] — rhomboid

th is pronounced as [t]:

thorax [to:raks] — chest Mentha [me:ntΛ] — mint

The combination of three consonants sch is pronounced as [skh]:

schema [skhe:mΛ] — scheme

Schizandra chinensis [skhizá:ndrΛ khine:nsis] — Chinese magnolia vine

§ 7. Pronunciation of some letter combinations

The letter combination ngu is pronounced as [ngv], if the vowel u is followed

by one of the vowels a, e, i, u:

lingua [lí:ngvΛ] — tongue, language

unguentum [ungve:ntum] — ointment

unguis [u:ngvis] — nail

But if a consonant follows «u», then ngu is pronounced as [ngu]:

angulus [á:ngulus] — angle

lingula [li :ngulΛ] — lingula, little tongue

The letter combination qu with the following vowel (a, e, i, o, u) is pronounced

as [kv] with a subsequent vowel:

aqua [á:kvΛ] — water

Quercus [kve:rkus] — oak

§ 8. Exercises

1. Read the following words paying special attention to the pronunciation of the

vowel c:

bácca (berry), mísce (mix), cerebrum (brain), Cálcii cítras (calcium citrate), co-

eruleus (blue), ductus (duct), Ácidum acetylsalicýlicum (acetylsalicylic acid), recipe

(take), massetericus (masticatory, chewing), cáncer recti (cancer of rectum), ulcus var-

10

icosum (varicose ulcer), tympánicus (tympanic), sáccus lacrimális (lacrimal bladder),

báccae exsicсátae (dryed berries)

2. Read the following words paying special attention to the pronunciation of the

letters g and q:

Hydrogenii peroxydum (hydrogen peroxide), nervus hypoglossus (hypoglossal

nerve), gemma gustatoria (taste bud), rámi gingiváles (gingival branches), gánglion

geniculátum (geniculate ganglion), gýrus anguláris (angular gyrus), humor aquosus

(aqueous humor), costa quínta (fifth rib), unguentum Hydrárgyri oxydi flávi (ointment

of yellow mercury oxide )

3. Read correctly the following words, paying special attention to the conso-

nants j, s and t:

Plantágo májor (greater platain), flexura duodenojejunális (duodenojejunal

flexure), juga alveolária (alveolar yokes), articulátio composita (complex joint), ostium

atrioventriculáre dextrum (right atrioventricular orifice), incisura juguláris (jugular

notch), segmentum basále anterius (anterior basal segment), básis ossis sácri (base of

sacrum), míxtio pro potione (mixture for drinking).

4. Read correctly the following words paying attention to combinations of vowels:

costae spuriae (false ribs), forámen caecum línguae (caecum foramen of

tongue), Oleum Eucalýpti (eucalyptus oil), oedema larýngis (edema of larynx), nervus

auriculáris (auricular nerve), aponeurosis línguae (lingual aponeurosis), cellulae haem-

atopoëticae (hematogenic cells), glándulae oesophageae (oesophageal glands), pneu-

monía mígrans (migratory pneumonia).

5. Read attentively the following words with vowel and consonant combina-

tions:

nervus ischiádicus (sciatic nerve), Strophanthínum (strophanthin), Synthomy-

cínum (synthomycin), febris haemorrhágica (hemorrhagic fever), ráphe pharýngis

(pharyngeal raphe), ásthma bronchiále (bronchial asthma), vertebrae thorácicae (tho-

racic vertebrae), unguentum ophthálmicum (ophthalmic ointment), labyrínthus eth-

moidális (ethmoidal labyrinth), Methylenum coeruleum (blue methylen), rhizoma

Glycyrrhízae (rhizome of licorice), Schizándra chinensis (chinese magnolia vine), sec-

tiones hypothálami (sections of hypothalamus), ductus choledochus (common bile

duct), cirrhosis hepatis (biliary cirrhosis), distántia trochanterica (trochanteric dis-

tance), hemispherium cerebelli (hemisphere of cerebellum), vena saphena (saphenous

vein), ty phus abdominális (abdominal typhus), nephrolithíasis chronica (chronic

nephrolithiasis), foetor ex ore seu halitosis (fetid or offensive breath or halitosis)

LESSON 2 ACCENT RULES

§ 9. Accent in the words consisting of two syllables

If a word consists of two syllables, there is always only one stress: the first syl-

lable is stressed:

á-qua, lá-rynx, ner-vus, suc-cus

11

§ 10. Accent in polysyllabic words according length and brevity of the second end

syllable

In polysyllabic words consisting of three and more syllables, the second or third

syllables from the end of the word can be stressed. The stress depends on the length or

brevity of the second word end syllable: if it is long, it is stressed, if it is short, it cannot be

stressed and then the third word end syllable is stressed.

The length and brevity of the second syllable and particularly in textbooks are

usually marked by special signs: a short line is placed over the vowel if it is long, and

a little arch — if it is short, compare:

ā — ǎ, ē — ĕ, ī — ĭ, ō — ŏ, ū — ŭ, y — ў.

So, if we find such words as forāmen, tinctūra, hepatītis etc. in the dictionary,

we can instantly determine that such words have an accent on the second syllable from

the end.

If in the dictionary we see such words as capsŭla, lamǐna, Camphŏra etc., we

understand that the third syllable from the end must be stressed: cápsŭla, lámǐna,

Cámphŏra.

Now, we should ask a crucial question: do we have to consult the dictionary

about the quality of the second end syllable in every case or not? Fortunately, there ex-

ist some rules helping us to determine at once the length or brevity of the second end

syllable, or more simply, of the second end vowel. First of all, there are suffixes con-

taining vowels which are long or short by nature. Such suffixes called accordingly

«long» or «short» can give us guidance about the length or brevity of the second end

vowel.

§ 11. Long suffixes

Suffixes Examples English equivalents Exceptions and their

translation

-āl- vaginālis vaginal encephălon (brain)

-ān- montānus mountain

-ār- vulgāris common

-āt- destillātus distilled prostăta (prostate)

-īn- Aspirīnum

officīna

aspirine

chemist’s shop

lamĭna (lamine, plate)

Ricĭnus (castor oil plant)

termĭnus (term)

-īv- gingīva

sedatīvus

gingiva, gum

sedative, soothing

-ōl- (in drug

names)

Allochōlum

Ichthyōlum

allochol

ichthyol

-ōs- Glucōsum

spirituōsus

glucose

spirituous

-ūr- tinctūra tincture

-ūt- dilūtus diluted

12

§ 12. Short suffixes

Suffixes Examples English

equivalents Exceptions

-iăc- cardiăcus cardiac

-ǐc- gastrǐcus tunǐca

gastric tunic, coat

vesīca ( bladder) Urtīca (nettle) Hyperīcum (Saint-John’s wort)

-ĭd- acĭdum fluĭdus

acid fluide, liquide

In drug names: Adonisīdum (adoniside) Chlozepīdum (chlozepid) etc.

-ǔl- Calendŭla mappŭla

pot marigold napkin

§ 13. The way of accent determination when the second

end vowel is not a part of a long or a short suffix

In many words the second vowel from the word end is placed before a conso-nant, but this vowel is not a part of a common long or short suffix. In such cases we can determine its length or brevity controlling those peculiarities of the given word in the textbook vocabulary, compare:

composĭtus (compound), Papāver (poppy), Sacchărum (sugar), and so on.

§ 14. Some rules of syllable length determination

In some cases we can determine the syllable length or brevity with the help of certain rules.

1. The syllable is long, when its vowel is placed before two or more consonants: linimentum (liniment) ampulla (ampoule) siníster (left) But, when the vowel is short by nature (it is shown in the dictionary) and it is

placed before two consonants, first of which being b, c, d, g, p, t and the second being l or r, this short vowel remains to be a short one:

vertěbra (vertebra), cerěbrum (cerebrum), multĭplex (multiple). And when this vowel is long by nature, our rule is valid:

cicātrix (cicatrix, scar), psychiātri (psychiatrists), salūbris (curative). 2. The syllable is long, when it includes the diphtongs au, eu or digraphs ae, oe:

amoeba (ameba), diaeta (diet), Althaea (althea). 3. The syllable is long when its vowel is placed before the consonants x or z: reflexus (reflex), Orýza (rice).

§ 15.The rules of syllable brevity

1. The syllable is short when its vowel is placed before another vowel: línĕa (line), superǐor (higher, upper) cornǔa (horns), Alumínǐum (aluminium)

There are, however, two points of exceptions from this rule:

1) in some words of Greek origin the last but one vowel was formed from the

diphthong ae, that’s why it keeps the length of the syllable:

coccygaeus → coccygēus (coccygeal)

13

peritonaeum → peritonēum (peritoneum)

2) in clinical terms with the ending -ia their vowel i and the syllable with it are

stressed:

dyskinesía (dyskinesia, disturbance of movement), otoscopía (otoscopy, internal

examination of an ear).

Some peculiarities of this exception will be discussed in the clinical part of our

course.

2. The syllable is short when its vowel is placed before the digraphs ch, ph, rh, th:

ductus choledŏchus (bile duct) nephrolǐthus (renal calculus)

§ 16. Exercises

1. Write down and determine the stressed syllable paying attention to the natu-

ral length or brevity of the last but one vowel:

incisūrae costāles (costal slits), vertĕbra thoracǐca (thoracic vertebra), ductus

choledŏchus (bile duct), forāmen apǐcis radīcis dentis (apical foramen of the root of the

tooth), vesīca urinaria (urinary bladder), Oleum Ricǐni (castor oil), Sirūpus Rubi idaei

(raspberry syrup), Solutio Iōdi spirituōsa (iodine spirituous solution), eczĕma aller-

gĭcum (allergic eczema), stomatītis chronǐca (chronic stomatitis), systēma condūcens

cordis (conducting system of heart), apertūra thorācis inferior (lower opening of

chest), muscǔlus levātor palpěbrae superiōris (levator palpebrae superioris), Tinctūra

Valeriānae (tincture of valerian), facies anterior partis petrōsae (anterior surface of pe-

trous part) , canāles palatīni minōres (lesser palatine canals), systēma lymphoideum

(lymphoid system)

2. Write down the terms putting the signs of length or brevity over the last but

one syllable (using if necessary words collected under this exercise) and determine in

writing the accent over a proper vowel:

cartilago thyreoidea (thyroid cartilage), Extractum Crataegi fluidum (liquid extract

of hawthorn), paralysis congenita (congenital paralysis), syndromum immunodeficientiae

acquisitae (acquired immunodeficiency syndrome), tuberositas pterygoidea (pterygoid tu-

berosity), anaemia myelogena (myelogenous anemia), arteria circumfexa humeri anterior

(anterior circumflex humeral artery), organum vasculosum laminae terminalis (vascular

organ of lamina terminalis), fissura longitudinalis cerebri (longitudinal cerebral fissure),

fasciculus uncinatus cerebelli (uncinate fasciculus of cerebellum), kyphosis thoracica (tho-

racic kyphosis), syndesmoses cranii (cranial syndesmoses), articulatio genus (joint of

knee), segmentum anterius mediale (anterior medial segment), infundibulum vesicae

felleae (infundibulum of gallbladder), musculi palati mollis et faucium (muscles of soft

palate and fauces), papilla duodeni major (major duodenal papilla), ostium atrioventricula-

re sinistrum (left atrioventricular orifice), membrana bronchopericardiaca (bronchoperi-

cardial membrane)

cartilāgo, paralўsis, congenĭta, syndrŏmum, acquisītae, tuberosĭtas, myelogĕna,

humĕri, orgănum, kyphōsis, duodēni

14

PART II

GRAMMAR FUNDAMENTALS OF MAKING TERMS

LESSON 3

NOUN AND GRAMMAR CATEGORIES OF NOUN. 1-ST DECLENSION

AND PHARMACEUTICAL TERMS WITH NOUNS OF THE 1-ST DECLENSION

§ 17. Grammar categories of noun

The grammar categories in the Latin noun are the following:

1. Gender. 2. Number. 3. Case. 4. Declension.

There are three genders in Latin:

masculine (masculīnum m); feminine (feminīnum f); neutral (neutrum n).

English nouns, in contrast to Latin, have only a natural gender: nouns denoting

males are masculine (boy, men), nouns denoting females are feminine (girl, women)

and nouns denoting inanimate are of neutral gender.

Latin nouns have always only grammar gender, which is determined by the ending,

but what is more significant, by a gender signs too (m, f, n). These gender signs are

given in the dictionaries, where nouns are presented in the so called dictionary form,

which we shall discuss later.

As to the number, so both English and Latin have two numbers — singular

(singulāris) and plural (plurālis). Just like English, nouns number in Latin shows,

whether we speak about one thing or more than one. Plural indications in English are

very simple (endings -s or -es). In Latin, these indications are more numerous and are

determined by the gender and declension.

Case as a grammar category is presented not in every language. It is absent, for

example, in French, Italian and Spanish. Six cases are used in the Russian language.

As to English, we can speak about a «common case» and a «possessive case». In con-

trast to English, in Latin there are six different kinds of noun endings corresponding to

each case:

Nominatīvus, Nominative (answers the questions who, what)

Genetīvus, Genitive (answers the questions whose, of what)

Datīvus, Dative (answers the question to whom, to what)

Accusatīvus, Accusative (answers the questions whom, what)

Ablatīvus, Ablative (answers the questions by whom, with what).

Vocatīvus, Vocative (expresses an address to a person).

The first two cases (Nominative and Genitive) are mainly used in the medical

and particular pharmaceutical terminology, the Dative and Vocative cases occur only in

the sentences; the Accusative and Ablative are used in pharmaceutical terms in combi-

nation with prepositions.

§ 18. Dictionary form of nouns

It is of vital importance to always remember, that each Latin noun must be

learnt in its «Dictionary form». This form consists of three components:

1. The full form of the Nominative singular.

2. The Genitive singular ending, indicating the type of declension.

3. Definition of the grammar gender (with the letters m, f, n):

15

Written form Oral form English equivalent

of the noun

aqua, ae f

nervus, i m

cancer, cri m

Eucalyptus, i f

usus, us m

unguentum, i n

aqua, aquae, feminīnum

nervus, nervi, masculīnum

cancer, cancri, masculīnum

eucalyptus, eucalypti, feminīnum

usus, usus, masculīnum

unguentum, unguenti, neutrum

water

nerve

cancer

eucalyptus

use

ointment

Attention! When doing exercises the dictionary form of each noun first is to be

presented. For example, you have to translate into Latin the term eucalyptus oil. You

write down the dictionary forms: eucalyptus — Eucalyptus, i f; oil — oleum, in.

Translation: Oleum Eucalypti.

§ 19. The stem of the noun and the way to determine it

The stem of the noun is essential for declining and word building. It is determined

by removing Genitive ending which indicates the type of the declension:

Dictionary form Full form of the Genitive Stem of noun

tabuletta, ae f (tablet) tabulett-ae tabulett-

succus, i m (juice) succ-i succ-

cancer, cri m (cancer) cancr-i cancr-

cortex, ǐcis m (bark) cortĭc-is cortĭc-

fructus, us m (fruit) fruct-us fruct-

facies, ēi f (face, surface) faci-ēi faci-

§ 20. Description of declensions

Nouns with the ending -ae in the Genitive singular belong to the 1st declen-

sion; they are mainly feminine:

aqua, ae f — water

tabuletta, ae f — tablet

Nouns having the ending -i in the Genitive singular belong to the 2end declen-

sion.

Nouns of the masculine gender can have the ending -us in the Nominative (the

greatest part) or -er (very limited in number):

nervus, i m — nerve

succus, i m — juice

cancer, cri m — cancer (the full form of Genitive — cancri)

Nouns of the neutral gender are also of two types: nouns with the ending form

-um (the main part), and nouns with the ending form -on (they are of Greek origin),

compare:

unguentum, i n — ointment

decoctum, i n — decoction

encephălon, i n — brain

orgănon, i n — organ

The 3rd declension is the most numerous one. Here are presented nouns of all

genders, with different endings in the Nominative having the ending - is in the Geni-

tive. They are commonly divided into two groups.

16

The first one includes nouns having equal quantity of syllables in Nominative

and Genitive (so called parisyllaba):

basis, basis f (basis, is f) — base

canālis, canālis m (canālis, is m) — canal

cutis, cutis f (cutis, is f) — skin

The second and the most numerous part of the nouns have one more syllable in

the Genitive compared to the Nominative (so called imparisyllaba):

apex, apǐcis m (the written dictionary form apex, ǐcis m) — apex, top

tuberosǐtas, tuberositālis f (tuberosǐtas, ātis f) — tuberosity

forāmen, foramǐnis n (forāmen, ǐnis n) — foramen, opening

If such nouns have only one syllable in the Nominative, then the complete form

of the Genitive is presented in the dictionary form:

dens, dentis m — tooth

os, ossis n — bone

pars, partis f — part

The 4th declension includes nouns of the masculine and neutral gender, having

the ending -us in the Genitive:

fructus, fructus m (fructus, us m) — fruit

processus, processus m (processus, us m) — process

cornu, cornus n (cornu, us n) — horn

gelu, gelus n (gelu, us n) — cold

To the 5th declension belong nouns, having the ending -ēi in the Genitive:

facies, faciēi f (facies, ēi f) — face, surface

species, speciēi f (species, ēi f) — species (in biology)

The endings proper to each declension in the Nominative and Genitive are pre-

sented in the table below:

Dec-

lension

Gender Ending in the

Nom. sing.

Examples in the

Nom. sing.

Ending in the

Gen. sing.

Examples in

the Gen. sing.

I f -a tabuletta -ae tabulettae

II

m

n

-us

-er

-um

-on

succus

cancer

unguentum

encephălon

-i

succi

cancri

unguenti

encephăli

III

m

f

n

different

different

different

cortex

basis

forāmen

-is

cortĭcis

basis

foramĭnis

IV m

n

-us

-u

fructus

cornu

-us fructus

cornus

V f -es facies -ēi faciēi

§ 21. Nouns of Greek origin not belonging to five types of Latin declensions

Two groups of nouns of Greek origin not belonging to five types of Latin de-

clensions occur in the pharmaceutical terminology:

1. Nouns of the feminine gender with the ending –e in the Nominative singular

and the ending –es in the Genitive singular:

Aloё, ёs f — aloe, raphe, es f — raphe

17

2. Nouns of the masculine gender with the ending –es in the Nominative singu-

lar and the ending –ae in the Genitive singular:

diabētes, ae m — diabetes, anyone of a group of diseases in which there is pol-

yuria and a disturbed metabolism.

Nouns of these two groups are considered to belong to the so called 1st Greek

declension. Their case endings are presented in the table below:

case singular plural singular plural

Nominatīvus raphe raphae diabētes diabētae

Genetīvus raphes raphārum diabētae diabetārum

Datīvus raphae raphis diabētae diabētis

Accusatīvus raphen raphas diabēten (diabētam) diabētas

Ablatīvus raphe raphis diabēta diabētis

§ 22. Capital and small letters of nouns in the pharmaceutical terms

Capital letter is used:

1. In the names of drugs: Codeīnum (codeine), Furacilīnum (furacil-

in),Validōlum (validol).

2. In the names of medical plants: Calendŭla (calendula), Eucalyptus (eucalyp-

tus), Frangŭla (buckhorn).

3. In the names of chemical elements: Ferrum (iron), Oxygenium (oxygen),

Zincum (zinc).

Attention! Nouns of these three groups are written with capital letter including

the dictionary form: Codeīnum, i n; Calendŭla, ae f; Ferrum, i n.

4. Being the first letter of the names of the drug form, if this name is the first in

the multiword term: Linimentum Streptocīdi (liniment of streptocid), Species anti-

asthmatĭcae (antiasthmatic species), Tinctūra Valeriānae (tincture of valerian).

5. Being the first letter of the names of the plant component, if this name is the

first in the multiword term: Herba Valeriānae (herb of valerian), Flores Chamomillae

(flowers of chamomile), Folia Menthae piperītae (peppermint leaves).

The small letter is used:

1. In the dictionary form of drug forms, parts of medical plants and other aux-

iliary words:

tabuletta, ae f (tablet); cortex, ĭcis m (bark); dosis, is f (dose); numĕrus, i m

(number, amount).

2. In the drug form names or the plant component names being not the first in

the term structure as well as in the dictionary form of these names:

Acĭdum acetylsalicylĭcum in tabulettis (acetylsalicylic acid in tablets) —

tabuletta, ae f; acetylsalicylĭcus, a, um.

Decoctum cortĭcis Quercus (decoction of oak bark) — cortex, ĭcis m; decoc-

tum, i n.

3. If the drug form name or the plant component name is used without drug

names:

unguenta et linimenta (ointments and liniments); solutio ad usum externum (so-

lution for external use); pulvĕres composĭti (compound powders); folia et flores

(leaves and flowers); radix et rhizōma (root and rhizome).

18

4. In constructions with a preposition indicating prescription, order of drug use

or way of storage:

Solutio Furacilīni ad usum externum (solution of furacilin for external use);

Tabulettae contra tussim (tablets for cough); Thea medicinālis pro infantĭbus (medic-

inal tea for children); Mixtio pro inhalationĭbus in vitro nigro (mixture for inhala-

tions in dark phial)

Some other peculiarities of using capital or small letter in pharmaceutical terms

will be further described in the subsequent parts of this textbook.

§ 23. Preliminary information on drug forms names

Every drug is produced in a physical form most adequate for use. Traditio- naly,

three main forms are used: solid, semisolid and liquid. Among solid forms common

used are the names tabuletta (tablet), pulvis (powder), pilŭla (pill), among semisolid

forms pasta (paste), cremor (cream), unguentum (ointment), among liquid solutio (so-

lution), tinctūra (tincture), infūsum (infusion). All drag forms will be discussed in de-

tail at the subsequent lessons.

It is essential to memorize that in the Latin terms consisting of two or more

words drug form is always on the first place:

Tabulettae Analgīni — tablets of analgin

Decoctum cortĭcis Quercus — decoction of oak bark

Extractum Glycyrrhizae siccum — dry extract of licorice

§ 24. 1st declension of nouns

As was said above, to the 1st declension belong nouns of feminine gender with

the ending –ae in the Genitive singular. Case endings of the 1st declension are present-

ed in the table below:

SINGULARIS PLURALIS

case ending example case ending example

Nominatīvus -a herbă Nominatīvus -ae herbae

Genetīvus -ae herbae Genetīvus -ārum herbārum

Datīvus -ae herbae Datīvus -is herbis

Accusatīvus -am herbam Accusatīvus -as herbas

Ablatīvus -ā herbā Ablatīvus -is herbis

Signs of length and brevity below ending –a are used to differ the Nominative

and Ablative cases. As the Vocative is practically not used in medical and pharmaceu-

tical terminology, it is not included into the table.

As to translation into English, the Latin Genitive case is always translated with

the proposition of:

color solutiōnis — color of solution

numerus tabulettārum — number of tablets

The Latin Dative is usually connected with a person in a sentence and is trans-

lated into English with a preposition or without it depending on the English verb which

is connected with the noun:

Da aegrōto tabulettam — give the patient a tablet

Adde aquae tinctūram Valeriānae — add to the water Valerian tincture

19

The Accusative and Ablative may be used both with preposition as well as

without it in the sentences and only with a preposition in a term:

Pharmacopōla praepărat tinctūram — the pharmacist is preparing a tincture

Medĭcus praescrībit tabulettas cum Tetracyclīno — the physician is prescribing

tablets with tetracycline

Solutio cum Aqua Mentae — solution with mint water

§ 25. Exercises

1. Write down the dictionary form of each word, determine its stem and number

of declension; translate the terms into English:

Tabulettae Analgīni, mixtio herbārum, Oleum Amygdalārum, Herba Convallariae,

Decoctum cortĭcis Quercus, Capsŭlae Validōli, Sirūpus Sacchări, Oleum Olivārum,

Infūsum herbae Leonūri, Succus Aloёs, Fructus Foenicŭli, Solutio Furacilīni

2. Write down the dictionary form of each word and translate the terms into Latin:

tablets of valerian extract, mint water, aloe juice, eucalyptus tincture, infusion

of juniper berries, oak bark, capsules of castor oil, root and rhizome of licorice, half of

a tablet, herb of motherwort, decoction of herbs, furacilin solution

Dictionaries to the lesson 3 Latin–English vocabulary

Aloё, ёs f — aloe Leonūrus,i m — motherwort

Amygdăla, ae f — almond (fruit) mixtio, ōnis f — mixture

Analgīnum, i n — analgin oleum, i n — oil

capsŭla, ae f ae f — capsule Oliva, ae f — olive

Convallaria, ae f — lily of the valley Quercus, us f — oak

cortex, ĭcis m — bark Sacchărum, i n — sugar

decoctum, i n — decoction sirūpus, i m — syrup

Foenicŭlum, i n — medicinal fennel solutio, ōnis f — solution

fructus, us m — fruit succus, i m — juice

Furacilīnum, i n — furacilin tabuletta, ae f — tablet

herba, ae f — herb Validōlum — validol

infūsum, i n — infusion

English–Latin glossary

aloe — Aloё, ёs f juniper — Junipĕrus, i f

bark — cortex, ĭcis m licorice — Glycyrrhiza, ae f

berry — bacca, ae f mint — Mentha, ae f

capsule — capsŭla, ae f motherwort — Leonūrus, i m

castor (oil) — Ricĭnus, i m oak — Quercus, us f

decoction — decoctum, i n oil — oleum, i n

eucalyptus — Eucalyptus, i f rhizome — rhizōma, ătis n

extract — extractum, i n root — radix, īcis f

furacilin — Furacilīnum, i n solution — solutio, ōnis f

half — dimidium, i n tablet — tabuletta, ae f

herb — herba, ae f tincture — tinctūra, ae f

infusion — infusio, ōnis f valerian — Valeriāna, ae f

juice — succus, i m water — aqua,ae f

20

LESSON 4

THE 2ND DECLENSION OF THE NOUNS. THE NOUNS OF THE 2ND DECLENSION AS TRIVIAL NAMES OF DRUGS. PREFIXES, SUFFIXES, GREEK AND LATIN

MORPHOLOGICAL ELEMENTS CARRYING INFORMATION ON PHARMACEUTICAL

CHARACTERISTICS OF DRUGS

§ 26. Nouns of the masculine gender of the 2nd declension

As it was mentioned in the previous lesson, all the nouns of the 2nd declension have in Genitive singular ending -i.

The absolute majority of the nouns of masculine gender have ending –us in the Nominative singular: numĕrus, i m (number), succus, i m (juice).

Nouns with ending –er are divided into two groups. In the first, the most numer-ous one, the vowel -e before the consonant -r disappears in the Genitive singular as well as in other cases: cancer, cri m (cancer), magister, tri m (teacher).

Nouns of the second group retain -e before -r in all cases: puer, ĕri m (boy). Examples of declension of all groups of the masculine gender as well as some

possible variants of its translation into English are presented in the table below:

Singular Plural

case ending example case ending example

Nomi-

nativus -us

-er

medĭcus (doctor)

magister (teacher)

puer (boy)

Nomi

na-

tivus

-i

medĭci (doctors)

magistri (teachers)

puěri (boys)

Ge-

netivus -i

medĭci (of doctor)

magistri (of teacher)

puěri (of boy)

Ge-

netiv

us

-ōrum medicōrum (of doctors)

magistrōrum (of teachers)

puerōrum (of boys)

Datīvus -o medĭco (to doctor)

magistro (to teacher)

puěro (to boy)

Datīv

us -is

medĭcis (to doctors)

magisris (to teachers)

puĕris (to boys)

Accu-

satīvus -um

medĭcum (call a doctor)

magistrum (call a teacher)

puěrum (call a boy)

Accu

cu-

satīv

us

-os medĭcos (call the doctors)

magistros (call the teachers)

puĕros (call the boys)

Ab-

latīvus -o medĭco ( by a doctor)

magistro (by a teacher)

puěro (by a boy)

Ab-

latīvu

s

-is medĭcis (by the doctors)

magistris (by the teachers)

puĕris (by the boys)

§ 27. Nouns of the neutral gender of the 2nd declension

There are two kinds of the nouns of the neutral gender in the 2nd declension. The most numerous are nouns with ending –um in the Nominative singular:

infūsum, i n (infusion) suppositorium, i n (suppository) In the second group of the nouns of the neutral gender are nouns of Greek

origin with the ending -on: orgănon, i n (organ) encephălon, i n (brain) The case endings of the neutral gender nouns in the Nominative and Accusa-

tive are the same both in singular and plural. Case endings of Dative и Ablative singular and plural coincide too. Examples of declension of two groups of the neu-tral gender as well as some possible variants of its translation into English are pre-sented in the table below:

21

Singular Plural

case ending example case ending example

Nom. -um

-on

(=Acc sing.)

infūsum (infusion)

orgănon (organ)

Nom. -a

(=Acc.

plur.)

infūsa (infusions)

irgăna (organs)

Gen. -i infūsi (of infusion)

orgăni (of organ)

Gen. -ōrum infusōrum (of infusions)

organōrum (of organs)

Dat. -o infūso (to infusion)

orgăno (to organ)

Dat. -is

(= Abl.

plur.)

infūsis (to infusions)

orgănis (to organs)

Acc. -um

-on

(= Nom.

sing.)

infūsum (use an infu-

sion)

orgănon (use an organ)

Acc. -a

(= Nom.

plur.)

infūsa (use infusions)

orgăna (use organs)

Abl. -o infūso (with an infu-

sion)

orgăno (with an organ)

Abl. -is

(= Dat.

plur.)

infūsis (with infusions)

orgănis (with organs)

§ 28. Gender exceptions in the 2nd declension

Some nouns of the 2nd declension in spite of their Nominative ending -us be-

long to the feminine gender. To these nouns belong first of all the tree names:

Crataegus, i f — hawthorn; Eucalyptus, i f — eucalyptus; Pinus, i f — pine.

Some tree names of Greek origin retain in Nominative their Greek ending -os: Strych-

nos, i f — nux-vomica poison-nut.

Besides tree nouns, some other nouns belong to exceptions:

bolus, i f — 1) white clay 2) bolus, a very large pill by weight of 0.5 g

crystallus, i f — crystal

diamĕter, tri f — diameter

virus, i n — 1) microbe poison 2) a virus

§ 29. Preliminary information on prepositions

Constructions with prepositions are widely used in the pharmaceutical terms.

Four prepositions are the most commonly used:

cum (+ Abl.) with; ex (+Abl.) from, of; in ( + Abl., when answering the ques-

tion «where») in; in ( +Accus., when answering the question «where to?») into; pro

(+Abl.) for:

Tabulettae cum Vitamīno C — tablets with vitamin С

Infūsum ex foliis Eucalypti — infusion of Eucalyptus leaves

Solutio Nitroglycerīni in ampullis — Nitroglycerin solution in ampoules

Injectio in venam — injection into vein

Pulvis Streptocīdi pro mixtūrа — powder of streptocide for mixture.

§ 30. Formation of the drug names — neutral gender nouns of the 2nd declension

Neutral gender noun of the 2nd declension is the most common grammar form in

which are presented the monosyllabic Latin names of drugs prepared of natural raw mate-

rials or made by synthetic way. Names of the first group are usually formed from the stem

of the noun by adding a suffix (-in- and -ol- are the most used) and ending -um:

22

Name of raw materials Stem of the noun Suffix Name of the drug

Mentha, ae f (mint) Menth- -ōl- Menthōlum, i n (menthol)

Strophanthus, i m (strophan-

thus)

Strophanth- -īn- Strophanthīnum, i n (stro-

phanthin)

pancreas, ătis n (pancreas) pancreat- -īn- Pancreatīnum (pancreatin)

But most of the modern drugs are produced by a synthetic way and such a drug is a

substance with a complex chemic composition. Those drugs obtain so called trivial names

(from the Latin adjective triviālis, e «common known»). Such a name consists of some

word building elements giving in a compact form some information on this drug composi-

tion or on its pharmaceutical application. So, two problems are solved. First, the necessity

of enumerating all chemical components of the drug is removing, as it is not light even for

a specialist. Secondly, a trivial name is not only convenient for spelling and writing, but it

permits to read pharmaceutical and therapeutic information after both the word building

and the sense distinguishing constituent elements. Let us look at a simple example. The

wide known drug name analgin from the point of view of its chemic structure is «1-

phenyl-2, 3-dimethyl-4-methylaminopyrazolon-5-N-sodium methansulphonate». It is

clear that such a name can not be used in every day life. But everyone can pronounce the

word analgin without any difficulty. This word consists of three morphological elements

and each of them has its sense part. So, the Greek prefix a-/an expresses denying or lack

of something, -alg- is a root of the Greek noun algos that means «ache, pain». The Latin

suffix -in- is a formal word building element (compare: aspirin, furacilin, tetracycline et

cetera). So we can define analgin as name of a drug used for removing a pain. But in or-

der to «decipher» quickly and competent such a «code» one should know the meaning of

these letter blocks which compose drug names. That is why both pharmacists and physi-

cians should know necessary information on Greek and Latin word building elements,

their spelling and meaning because that these elements are repeated in many drug names.

For the best memorizing the spelling of world building elements their writing

down several times should be recommended. The ancient Romans used to say: «Qui

scrībit — bis legit», i. е. «He who writes reads twice».

§ 31. Word building elements (part 1)

Word building ele-

ments and their ety-

mology

Pharmacologi-

cal or thera-

peutic infor-

mation

Latin examples and

exceptions

English equivalents

with black tipped

word building ele-

ments

-сillin- a part of the

word Penicillīnum, an

antibiotic name syn-

thesized from the fun-

gus Penicillium (from

the Latin penicillum,i n

little tail, little brush)

antibiotics of

penicillin group

Ampicillīnum, i n

Benzylpenicillīnum, i n

but: Furacilīnum, i n

ampicillin

benzylpenicillin

but: Furacilin

-cyclin- from the

Greek cýclos (kýklos)

circle

antibiotics of

tetracycline

group

Erycyclīnum, i n

Tetracyclīnum, i n

erycyclin

tetracyclin

-cycl(o)- from the

Greek cýclos (kýklos)

means influenc-

ing metabolic

Acyclovīrum, i n

Cycloserīnum, i n

acyclovir

cycloserin

23

circle processes

-fung-, -fungi-, -

fungin- from the Latin

fungus, i m fungus

antimycotic

means

Myfungārum, i n

Fungilīnum, i n Nitra-

fungīnum, i n

myfungar

fungilin nitrafungin

-menth- from the Lat-

in Mentha, ae f mint

- from the Greek mín-

thos mint

presence of mint

in the means act-

ing on sensitive

nerve endings

Menthōlum, i n

Boromenthōlum, i n

menthol

boromenthol

-mycin- from the

Greek mýces fungus

antibiotic of

streptomycin

group

Monomycīnum, i n

Oleandomycīnum, i n

monomycin

oleandomycin

-myc(o)- from the

Greek mýces fungus

antimycotic and

some other

means

Mycoheptīnum, i n My-

coseptīnum, i n

but: Gramicidīnum, i n

mycoheptin

mycoseptin

but: Gramicidin

-pyr- from the Greek

pyr fire, heat

means increas-

ing or reducing

temperature

Antipyrīnum, i n

Pyrogenālum, i n

but: Aspirīnum, i n

antipyrin

pyrogenal

but: aspirin

§ 32. Prefixes in pharmaceutical names

Prefix Meaning Examples

a-, an- (the se-

cond variant is

used before a

vowel)

denying, absence,

lack

Analgīnum, i n analgin (a medicine removing sen-

sation of pain)

Apressīnum, i n apressin (a medicine removing

high blood pressure)

anti- action against any

factor

Antipyrīnum, i n antipirin (a medicine removing

high temperature )

аntiasthmatĭcus, a, um antiasthmatic, making for

removing asthma

hyper- increase hypertonĭcus, a, um hypertonic, making for raising

blood pressure

hypo- decrease hypotonĭcus, a, um hypotonic, making for decreas-

ing blood pressure

syn- connection, junc-

tion, synthetic

means of drug

producing

Synoestrōlum,i n synoestrol (hormonal medicine

produced by synthetic way)

Synthomycīnum, i n synthomycin (antibiotic pro-

duced by synthetic way )

§ 33. Personal names in pharmaceutical and clinical terms

Names of drug inventors may be used in drug names. Mail names are Latinized as nouns of the 2nd declension, female as nouns of the 1st declension:

Lugol solution — Solutio Lugōli Burov liquid — Liquor Burōvi Wilkinson ointment — Unguentum Wilkinsōni Zolotareva ointment — Unguentum Zolotarevae. Some names are not changed: Schostacovsky balsam — Balsămum Schostacovsky Ringer-Locke solution — Solutio Ringer-Locke. Dictionary forms of personal names needn’t to be given.

24

Scientists’ names are widely used in the Latin microbiological terms for generic and species nouns of bacteria, fungi, viruses et cetera. For example, a genus of parasit-ical bacteria Rickettsia has obtained its name after the name of scientist H. T. Ricketts (1871–1910), a genus of pathogenic bacteria Salmonella after the name of scientist D. E. Salmon (1850–1914).

§ 34. Exercises

1. Write down the dictionary form of each word and translate the terms into English: Tinctūra foliōrum Eucalypti; Linimentum Synthomycīni; Solutio Furacilīni; dimidi-

um boli; infūsa et decocta ex foliis plantārum; Aspīrinum in tabulettis; Oleum Ricĭni in capsŭlis; Tabulettae Tetracyclīni numĕro 8; Emulsum olei Persicōrum; Unguentum Fura-cilīni in tubŭlis; pulvis et extractum pro mixtūra; Solutio pulvĕris Fungilīni

2. Write down the dictionary form of each word and translate the terms into Latin:

ointment of boromenthol; tablets of kanamycin for adults; ointment in tubs;

capsules and tablets of cycloserin; solution of gramicidin in castor oil; aspirin with vit-

amin C in tablets; syrup with ampicillin; injection of bicillin-1; suspension into mus-

cles; suppositories with sea buckthorn; films with lincomycin; ointment of chlortetra-

cycline for eyes; gramicidin paste

3. Write down in dictionary form the Latin names of drugs, taking in considera-

tion the correct spelling:

ampicillin, analgin, antipyrin, apressin, aspirin, bicillin, boromenthol, chlortet-

racycline, cycloserin, fungilin, furacilin, gramicidin, kanamycin, lincomycin, syntho-

mycin, synoestrol, tetracycline

Dictionaries to lesson 4 Latin–English vocabulary

Aspirīnum, i n — aspirin mixtūra, ae f — mixture

bolus, i f — 1) bolus, a large pill by weight

of 0.5 g 2) clay

numĕrus, i m — number

oleum, i n — oil

capsula, ae f — capsule Oleum Ricĭni — castor oil

decoctum, i n — decoction Persĭcum, i n — peach (fruit)

dimidium, i n — half planta, ae f — plant

emulsum, i n — emulsion pro (+ Abl.) — for

et — and pulvis, ĕris m — powder

Eucalyptus, i f — eucalyptus Ricĭnus, i m — castor oil plant

ex (+Abl.) — from, of solution, ōnis f — solution

extractum, i n — extract Synthomycīnum, i n — synthomycine

folium, i n — leaf tabuletta, ae f — tablet

Fungilīnum, i n — fungilin Tetracyclīnum, i n — tetracycline

Furacilīnum, i n — furacilin tinctūra, ae f — tincture

in (+ Acc., + Abl.) — in tubŭla, ae f — tube

infūsum, i n — infusion unguentum, i n — ointment

linimentum, i n — liniment

25

English–Latin glossary

adult — adultus, i m in — in (+ Acc., + Abl.)

ampicillin — Ampicillīnum, i n injection — injectio, ōnis f

analgin — Analgīnum, i n into — in (+Acc.)

and — et kanamycin — Kamycīnum, i n

antipyrin — Antipyrīnum, i n lincomycin — Lincomycīnum, i n

apressin — Apressīnum, i n muscle — muscŭlus, i m

aspirin — Aspirīnum i n ointment — unguentum, i n

bicillin — Bicillīnum, i n paste — pasta, ae f

boromentol — Boromenthōlum, i n sea buckthorn — Hippophaё, ёs f

capsule — capsŭla, ae f solution — solutio, ōnis f

castor oil — Oleum Ricĭni suppository — suppositorium, i n

chlortetracycline — Chlortetracyclīnum , i n suspension — suspensio, ōnis f

cycloserin — Cycloserīnum, i n synoestrol — Synoestrōlum, i n

eye — ocŭlus , i m synthomycine — Synthomycīnum, i n

film — lamella , ae f syrup — sirūpus, i m

for — pro (+Abl.) tablet — tabuletta, ae f

from — ex (+Abl.) tetracycline –Tetracyclīnum, i n

fungilin — Fungilīnum, i n tube — tubŭla, ae f

furacilin — Furacilīnum, i n vitamin — vitamīnum, i n

gramicidin — Gramicidīnum, i n with — cum (+Abl.)

LESSON 5

ADJECTIVES OF THE 1-ST AND 2-ND DECLENSIONS, THEIR GRAMMAR

DESCRIPTION AND DICTIONARY FORM. ADJECTIVES AND NOUNS GRAMMAR

AGREEMENT. SOME FEATURES OF ADJECTIVES’

USE IN PHARMACEUTICAL TERMS

§ 35. Grammar characteristics and dictionary form of adjectives

of the 1st and 2nd declensions

Adjectives in Latin, like Russian, have grammar signs of gender, number and case.

Like Russian, these signs are determined by gender, number and case of the Latin noun

connected by sense with its adjective. So, according this rule, adjectives in Latin have the

same genders, numbers and cases than nouns. But the Latin adjectives have only three

types of declension and are declined after nouns of the 1st, 2nd and 3rd declensions.

Depending on declension type all adjectives are divided in two groups. First

group includes adjectives which are declined after nouns of the first or second declen-

sion. The second one includes adjectives which are declined after nouns of the third

declension.

Adjectives of the 1st group have three gender endings, that is every gender form

has its proper ending: masculine adjectives have -us or -er, feminine –a, neutral adjec-

tives -um:

masculine feminine neutral

longus (long) longa longum

niger (black) nigra nigrum

liber (free) libĕra libĕrum

26

The dictionary form of this adjective group is given in the Nominative case

and includes the whole form of masculine gender and then, after a comma, end-

ings of the feminine and neutral gender forms (sometimes with a stem part):

longus, a, um — long dexter, tra, trum — right

liber, ĕra, ĕrum — free somnĭfer, ĕra, ĕrum — soporific

In an oral variant of dictionary form, all the three gender forms are pro-

nounced: longus, longa, longum; liber, libĕra, libĕrum; niger, nigra, nigrum.

After gender endings one can determine to what declension this or that ad-

jective belongs: -us, -еr, -um correspond to the endings of nouns of the 2nd declen-

sion, ending –a corresponds to the endings of nouns of the 1-st declension:

Nominative Genetive Declension Stem

longus longi II long -

niger nigri II nigr -

liber libĕri II libĕr -

somnĭfer somnifĕri II somnĭfer -

longa longae I long -

nigra nigrae I nigr -

libĕra libĕrae I libĕr -

somnifĕra somnifĕrae I somnifĕr-

longum longi II long -

nigrum nigri II nigtr -

libĕrum libĕri II libĕr -

somnifĕrum somnifĕri II somnifĕr-

As one can see above, the stem of adjectives is determined like stem of

nouns after the Genitive case via removing the Genitive ending: longus — long-

i; dextra — dextr-ae; libĕrum — libĕr-i.

Adjectives are written with small letter in the dictionary form as well as in

the combination with other words:

Extractum Glycyrrhizae siccum — dry extract of licorice

Folia Menthae piperītae — leaves of peppermint

§ 36. Table of case endings of adjectives of the 1st group

As it was already mentioned above, adjectives of this group are declined

like nouns of the 1st and 2nd declension:

Case Singular Plural

Masc. Fem. Neutr. Masc. Fem. Neutr.

Nom. longus

niger

liber

longa

nigra

libĕra

longum

nigrum

libĕrum

longi

nigri

libĕri

longae

nigrae

libĕrae

longa

nigra

libĕra

Gen. longi

nigri

libĕri

longae

nigrae

libĕrae

longi

nigri

libĕri

longōrum

nigrōrum

liberōrum

longārum

nigrārum

liberārum

longōrum

nigrōrum

liberōrum

Dat. longo

nigro

libĕro

longae

nigrae

libĕrae

longo

nigro

libĕro

longis

nigris

libĕris

longis

nigris

libĕris

longis

nigris

libĕris

27

Acc. longum

nigrum

libĕrum

longam

nigram

libĕram

longum

nigrum

libĕrum

longos

nigros

libĕros

longas

nigras

libĕras

longa

nigra

libĕra

Abl. longo

nigro

libĕro

longā

nigrā

libĕrā

longo

nigro

libĕro

longis

nigris

libĕris

longis

nigris

libĕris

longis

nigris

libĕris

§ 37. Grammar agreement of adjectives with nouns

An adjective in Latin, like in Russian, has grammar agreement with its sense

noun in gender, number and case. To make such a grammatical agreement, it is neces-

sary to do the following:

1) tо determine the dictionary form of the noun 2) tо determine the dictionary

form of the adjective 3) to choose the adjective gender form after noun gender form

4) to put the chosen adjective form in the same case and number as the noun and place

it after the noun. For example, let us make the grammar agreement of adjectives and

nouns in word combinations long root, black decoction, soporific powder. First of all,

according the rule, let us write down the dictionary form of nouns and adjectives:

root — radix, īcis f decoction — decoctum, i n powder — pulvis, ĕris m

long — longus, a, um black — niger, gra, grum soporific — somnĭfer, ĕra, ĕrum

Now let’s make grammatical agreement of adjective longus, a, um (long)

with the noun radix, īcis f (root). Noun root is feminine in Latin, that’s why it is

necessary to chose for this noun the feminine gender form of adjective longus,

a, um that is the form longa. As the noun radix is in Nominative case, so adjec-

tive has to be in the Nominative too that is in the form longa. That’s why we

write down first the Nominative form of noun radix, and after it the adjective

form in the same case — longa. As a result we have word combination radix

longa, in which adjective and noun are in grammatical agreement as to feminine

gender, Nominative case and singular number.

The Latin equivalent of noun decoction is of neutral gender. That’s why we

chose for it also neutral gender form of adjective — nigrum. As a result we have

word combination decoctum nigrum.

To arrange the word combination soporific powder in Latin let’s choose the Lat-

in equivalent of adjective for the noun pulvis, ĕris m. The masculine gender form

from adjective somnĭfer, ĕra, ĕrum is somnĭfer. So we write down this form after the

Nominative noun form pulvis and obtain the word combination pulvis somnĭfer.

The Latin word combinations noun + adjective with grammatical agreement

may be used in other cases. The most wide spread is Genitive singular construction.

For its proper grammar arrangement one should first determine the declension of

each part of these word combinations and use proper grammar endings. So, the

noun radix after its dictionary form belongs to the 3rd declension and its Genitive

form is radīcis. But the adjective longa is declined after nouns of the 1st declension

and its Genitive form is therefore longae. So, the word combination radix longa

gets in Genitive singular the form radīcis longae — «of long root».

In the word combination decoctum nigrum both noun and adjective belong

to the 2nd declension. That’s why Genitive form is decocti nigri — «of black

decoction».

28

In the word combination pulvis somnĭfer noun and adjective belongs to differ-

ent declensions: pulvis to the 3rd, somnĭfer — to the 2nd one. So in Genitive singu-

lar our word combination is pulvĕris somnifĕri — «of soporific powder».

§ 38. Some peculiarities of adjectives use in pharmaceutical terminology

Adjectives used as a part of multiword terms and expressing proprieties of drug

names take, as a rule, the last place of a Latin term:

Extractum Aloës fluĭdum — liquid extract of aloe

Solutio Hydrogenii peroxўdi dilūta — diluted solution of hydrogen peroxide

Tabulettae Aspirīni obductae — coated aspirin tablets

But in the multiword terms which include drug form names lamella,

membranŭla, mixtūra, species, spongia, suppositorium adjectives follow

immediately their nouns:

Lamellae (Membranŭlae) ophthalmĭcae cum Dicaīno — ophthalmic films

with dicain

Mixtūra sicca pro infantĭbus — dry mixture for children

Spongiae haemostatĭcae cum Kanamycīno — haemostatic sponges with

kanamycin

Species antiasthmatĭcae pro inhalatiōne — antiasthmatic species for inhalation

Suppositoria rectalia cum Synthomycīno — rectal suppositories with

synthomycin.

§ 39. Word building elements (Part 2)

Word building elements

and their etymology

Pharmaceutical or

therapeutic infor-

mation

Latin examples and

exceptions

English equiva-

lents with black

tipped word

building ele-

ments

-cyt- from the Greek cýtos

(kýtos) cell

means correcting met-

abolic processes at the

cellular level

Cytisīnum, i n

Cytochrōmum, i n

cytisin

cytochrom

-form- from the Latin

formīca, ae f ant

derivatives of the for-

mic acid

Chloroformium, i n

Formalīnum, i n

chloroform

formalin

-fura- from the Latin fur-

fur, ŭris m peel, husk

antimicrobic means Furacilīnum, i n furacilin

-ichthy- from the Greek

ichthýs fish: substance

ichthyol is produced of

shales (slates) which are

remains of fossil fishes

antipyretic means Ichthyōlum, i n

Ichthyosulfōnum, i n

ichthyol

ichthyosulphon

-poly- from the Greek

polýs numerous

multitude of compo-

nents

Polyamīnum, i n

Polyglucīnum, i n

polyamin

polyglucin

-rheo- from the Greek

rrhéo to flow

means improving

blood circulation

Rheopolyglucīnum,i

n

rheopolyglucin

29

§ 40. Exercises

1. Make grammar agreement of adjectives with nouns in the Nominative and

Genitive singular cases:

white clay; pure acid; concentrated solution; big tablet; black crystal; soporific

poppy; sulphuric ointment; red berry; yellow vaseline

2. Write down the dictionary form of each word and translate every term into

English:

Solutio Formaldehўdi seu Formalīnum; Оleum Olivārum sterilisātum; Mem-

branŭlae cum Cytisīno; Linimentum Chloroformii composĭtum; Tabulettae Tetracy-

clīni obductae; Rheopyrīnum in tabulettis; Extractum Aloës fluĭdum; Pix liquĭda

Betŭlae; Linimentum balsamĭcum Wischnevsky

3. Write down the dictionary form of each word and translate every term into Latin:

granules of rheopyrin; aqueous cytiton solution in ampoules; microcrystalline

powder of iodoform; rheopolyglucine with glucose; polybiolin solution in dark phial;

coated tetracycline tablets; mixture of furoplast with chloroform; peppermint oil; poly-

vitamins for adults; red berries of raspberry for syrup

4. Write down in dictionary form the Latin names of drugs, taking in considera-

tion the correct spelling:

chloroform, cytisin, cytiton, formaldehyde, formalin, furoplast, glucose, iodo-

form, polybiolin, polyvitamin, rheopolyglucin, rheopyrin, tetracycline

Dictionaries to lesson 5 Latin–English vocabulary

Aloё, ës f — aloe Linimentum Wischnevsky —

Wischnevsky liniment balsamĭcus, a, um — balsamic

Betŭla, ae f — birch liquĭdus, a, um — liquid (tar)

Chloroformium, i n — chloroform membranŭla, ae f — film

composĭtus, a, um — compound obductus, a, um — coated

cum (+Abl.) — with oleum, i n — oil

Cytisīnum, i n — cytisin Oliva, ae f — olive

extractum, i n — extract Pix liquĭda — tar

fluĭdus, a, um — liquid pix, picis f — pitch

Formaldehўdum, i n — formaldehyde Rheopyrīnum, i n — rheopyrin

Formalīnum, i n — formalin seu — or

in (Abl., Acc.) — in sterilisātus, a, um — sterilized

idaeus, a, um — belonging to mountain Ida

in west-north of the Turkey

tabuletta, ae f — tablet

linimentum, i n — liniment

English–Latin glossary

acid — acĭdum, i n mixture — mixtūra, ae f

adult — adultus, a, um; adultus, i, m ointment — unguentum, i n

ampoule — ampulla, ae f oil — oleum, i n

aqueous — aquōsus, a, um pepper — piperītus, a, um

berry — bacca, ae f phial — vitrum, i n

big — magnus, a, um polybiolin — Polybiolinum, i n

30

black — niger, gra, grum polyvitamin — polyvitamīnum , i n

chloroform — Chloroformium, i n poppy — Papāver, ĕris n

clay — bolus, i f powder — pulvis, ěris m

coated — obductus, a, um pure — purus, a, um

concentrated — concentrātus, a, um raspberry — Rubus idaeus

crystal — crystallus, i f red — ruber, bra, brum

cytiton — Cytitōnum, i n

dark — fuscus, a, um rheopolyglucine — Rheopolyglucīnum, i n

fluĭdus, a, um (extractum) — liquid rheopyrin — Rheopyrīnum, i n

for — pro (+Abl.) solution — solutio, ōnis f

furazolidon — Furazolidōnum, i n soporific — somnĭfer, ĕra, ĕrum

furoplast — Furoplastum, i n sulphuric — sulfurĭcus, a, um

glucose — Glucōsum, i n syrup — sirūpus, i m

granule — granŭlum, i n tablet — tabuletta, ae f

in — in (+Acc.,+Abl.) tetracycline — Tertracyclīnum, i n

iodoform — Iodoformium, i n vaseline — Vaselīnum, i n

microcrystalline — microcrystallīnus, a,

um

white — albus, a, um

with — cum (+Abl.)

mint — Mentha, ae f yellow — flavus, a, um

LESSON 6

VERB AND ITS DICTIONARY FORM. STEM OF VERB IN THE PRESENT TENSE SYSTEM.

PRAESENS INDICATIVI ACTIVI ET PASSIVI (3-RD PERSON OF SINGULAR ET PLURAL).

VERB «ESSE» IN THE PRAESENS INDICATIVI ACTIVI. THE STEM OF THE SUPINE AND

THE PARTICIPLE IN THE PAST TENSE SYSTEM. WORD ORDER IN A SIMPLE SENTENCE

§ 41. Grammar characteristics of verb

Verbs in Latin may be used in the three tense systems (Present, Past, Future),

can be conjugated after 3 persons in the Singular and Plural in active or passive voice

and, finely, every verb belongs to Indicative, Conjunctive or Imperative mood. Every

verb has the Infinitive form, too.

According to the educational program, students have to learn only the 3rd per-

son forms in the Singular and Plural of the Indicative and Conjunctive both in active

and passive voice. Imperative forms are to be learned, too.

After the Infinitive form are defined four types of Latin conjugations:

Infinitive form English transla-

tion

Ending of Infini-

tive

Type of conju-

gation

signāre to label -āre I

miscēre to mix -ēre II

dividĕre

diluĕre

recipěre

to divide

to dilute

to take

-ĕre III

finīre to finish -īre IV

Ending of the Infinitive form is presented in the dictionary form of every

verb.

31

§ 42. Dictionary form of verb

Dictionary form of verb consists of four elements. The first one is the form of the

first person in the Indicative Present tens of active voice (Prasens indicatīvi actīvi). This

form has as a rule ending -о: signo (I label), misceo (I mix), divĭdo (I divide), diluo (I di-

lute), recipio (I take), finio (I finish). Ending -о is adding to the stem of verb (see below

§43), but it is combined in the first person form of the 1st conjugation with stem vowel -а

to one vowel-o : signo < signa + o.

The second element is the first person form of the Latin past completed tense

(Perfectum indicatīvi actīvi). This element has always ending -i: signāvi (I have la-

beled), miscui (I have mixed), recēpi (I have taken), divīsi (I have divided), dilui

(I have diluted), finīvi (I have finished).

The third element is the supine form (supīnum). It has endings -tum or –sum:

signātum, mixtum, divīsum, dilūtum, receptum, finītum. Supine forms are not translat-

ed. They are used for participles and nouns forming.

The fourth element of the verb dictionary form is Infinitive or, as usual, the ending

of Infinitive (see above § 41) with pointing the conjugation: āre 1, ēre 2, ĕre 3, īre 4.

In the full the dictionary form is to be presented in such a form:

signo, signāvi, signātum, signāre 1 — to write on the label, to label

finio, finīvi, finītum, finīre 4 — to finish

So namely the dictionary form should be given when giving it orally. The 2nd,

3rd and fourth elements are shorted when giving the written dictionary form of verbs

of the 1st and 4th conjugations. These verbs are as a rule regular and have in the 2nd

and 3rd elements of the dictionary form standard endings –āvi, -ātum (the 1st conjuga-

tion) and –īvi, -ītum (the 4-th conjugation):

signo, āvi, ātum, āre 1– to write on the label, to label

finio, īvi, ītum, īre 4 — to finish

Full forms of the 2nd and 3rd elements of the dictionary form are given in irregu-

lar verbs of the 1st conjugation (do, dedi, datum, are 1 — to give) and in verbs of the

2nd and 3rd conjugations:

misceo, miscui, mixtum, ēre 2 — to mix

diluo, dilui, dilūtum, ĕre 3 — to dilute

divĭdo, divīsi, divīsum, ĕre 3 — to divide

recipio, recēpi, receptum, ĕre 3 — to take

§ 43. Stem of present tense

The stem of present tense is used for forming personal forms of present and

other tense forms as well as for forming participles of present tense.

The stem of verbs of the 1st, 2nd, 4th conjugations is defined by removing end-

ing –re in the infinitive form, and by removing ending –ĕre in verbs of the 3rd conju-

gation:

Conjugation Infinitive form Stem of present time

I signāre signā-

II miscēre miscē-

III

III

dividĕre

diluĕre

divid-

dilu-

IV audīre audī-

32

The verb recipěre belongs to a particular subgroup of verbs of the 3rd conjuga-

tion the stem of which is defined not after infinitive form, but after the first element of

the dictionary form by removing ending -o: recipio stem is recipi-. Many wide

spread verbs belong to this subgroup e. g. to take (recipio, recēpi, receptum, ĕre 3 ) and

to do (facio, feci, factum, ĕre 3).

§ 44. Indicative mood forms in present indicative tense of active voice (Praesens indicatīvi actīvi)

Two forms of the Praesens indicatīvi actīvi are formed by adding to the stem of

present tense ending –t for the 3rd person of singular and ending –nt for the 3rd person

of plural. These endings are added directly to the stem of the verbs of the 1st and 2nd

conjugations. But in verbs of the 3rd conjugation (with a consonant stem and –u vowel

stem) the conjunctive vowel –i– before ending –t and the conjunctive vowel -u- before

ending –nt are inserted. In verbs of the 4-h conjugation ending –t is added directly to

the stem, but before ending –nt vowel –u– is placed. The same vowel –u– before end-

ing –nt should be placed in verbs like capio, facio, recipio:

Conju-

gation

Infinitive

form Stem 3-rd person of singular form

3-rd person of

plural form

I signāre

to label

signā- signat — he (she, it) labels signant –they

label II miscēre

to mix

miscē- miscet — he (she, it) mixes miscent — they

mix III

dividĕre

to divide

divid- divĭdit — he (she, it)

divides

divĭdunt –they

divide

diluĕre

to dilute

dilu- diluit — he (she, it)

dilutes

diluunt — they

dilute

recipĕre

to take

recipi- recĭpit– he (she, it) takes recipiunt — they

take IV finīre

to finish

finī- finit — he (she, it)

finishes

finiunt — they

finish

Attention! Personal pronouns attached to their corresponding verb forms, as

one can see at the table, are omitted in the Latin.

§ 45. Indicative mood forms in present indicative tense of passive voice

(Praesens indicatīvi passivi)

Two forms of Present passive voice are formed by adding to the stem of present

tense ending –tur for the 3rd person of singular and ending –ntur for the 3rd person of

plural. These endings are added directly to the stem of the verbs of the 1st and 2nd

conjugations. But in verbs of the 3rd conjugation (with a consonant stem and –u vowel

stem) the conjunctive vowel –i- before ending –tur and the conjunctive vowel -u- be-

fore ending –ntur are inserted. In verbs of the 4th conjugation ending –tur is added

directly to the stem, but before ending –ntur vowel — u- is placed. The same vowel –

u- before ending –ntur should be placed in verbs like capio, facio, recipio:

33

Conjuga-

tion

Infinitive

form

Stem 3-rd person of singular

form

3-rd person of

plural form

I signāre

to label

signā- signātur – he (she, it) is

labelled

signantur — they

are

labeled

II miscēre

to mix

miscē- miscētur – he (she, it) is

mixed

miscentur — they

are mixed

III

III

dividĕre

to divide

divid- dividĭtur — he (she, it)

is divided

dividuntur — they

are divided

diluĕre

to dilute

dilu- diluĭtur — he (she, it)

is diluted

diluuntur — they

are diluted

III

recipĕre

to take

capi- recipĭtur — he (she, it) is

taken

recipiuntur —

they are taken

IV finīre

to finish

audī- finītur — he (she, it) is

finished

audiuntur — they

are finished

§ 46. Present tense Participle (Participium praesentis activi)

This Participle is formed by adding suffix –ns to stem of present tense in Nomi-

native singular and suffix –ntis in Genitive singular in verbs of the 1st and 2nd conju-

gations and accordingly endings –ens /-entis in verbs of the 3rd и 4th conjugations:

Verb in the In-

finitive and its

conjugation

Verb

stem

Participles in the

Nom. sing. and Gen.

sing. forms

Participles in the

dictionary form

Translation

of Participle

forms into

English

signāre

to label l

signā- signans, signantis signans, ntis labelling

miscēre 2

to mix

miscē-

miscens, miscentis

miscens, ntis

mixing

dividĕre 3

to divide

divid- divĭdens, dividentis divĭdens, entis dividing

diluĕre 3

to dilute

dilu- diluens, diluentis diluens, entis diluting

recipĕre 3

to take

recipi- recipiens, recipientis recipiens, entis

taking

finīre 4

to finish

finī- finiens, finientis finiens, entis finishing

Forms of Present tense Participle are declined after nouns of the 3rd declension.

More information about declension of these Participles will be given in the following

lessons.

§ 47. The stem of supine and Participles of the past completed tense

The stem of supine is used for building Participles of the past completed tense

(Participium perfecti passīvi). This stem is defined by removing in supine form end-

ing–um and adding gender endings –us, -a, -um:

34

Dictionary form of verb Supine Supine

stem

Participles of the past complet-

ed tense and its translation

signo, āvi, ātum, are 1 signātum signāt- signātus, a, um — labelled

misceo, miscui, mixtum, ēre

2

mixtum mixt- mixtus, a, um — mixed

divĭdo, divīsi, divīsum, ĕre 3 divīsum divis- divīsus, a, um — divided

diluo, dilui, dilūtum, ĕre 3 dilūtum dilūt- dilūtus, a, um — diluted

recipio, recēpi, receptum,

ĕre 3

receptum recept- receptus, a, um — taken

finio, finīvi, finītum, īre 4 finītum finīt- finītus, a, um — finished

So, forms of Participles of the past completed tense correspond grammatically

to forms of the adjectives of the 1-2 declensions with endings –us, -a, -um and are de-

clined like them (see §35-36 ).

§ 48. The verb esse in the Present tense forms

Verb esse (to be) is used both in professional sentences and in proverbs as well.

Its dictionary form is sum, fui, esse. These forms are not standard ones. We can see

here the first form sum (I am), the second form fui (I was or I have been) and the third

form is the Infinitive form esse (to be). The verb esse is to be learned only in the Indic-

ative Present forms of active voice.

Person Singular

forms

English equiva-

lents

Person Plural

forms

English

equivalents

1. sum I am 1. sumus We are

2. es You are 2. estis You are

3. est He (she, it) is 3. sunt They are

In officīna solutio Furaculīni est — At a chemist’s furacilin solution is available.

Salvia officinālis et Urtĭca dioĭca sunt plantae medicināles — Garden sage and

stinking nettle are medical plants.

§ 49. Word order in simple narrative Latin sentences

In a simple narrative Latin sentence the subject as a rule is at the first place.

Subject is following by predicate, and then other members of sentence are proceeding:

Pharmacopōlae praepărant aegrōtis formas varias medicamentōrum.

Let’s make the grammar analysis of this Latin sentence, writing down dic-

tionary forms. So:

Pharmacopōlae (pharmacopōla, ae m pharmacist) is without doubt the sub-

ject of the sentence — a noun in the form of Nominative plural case i. e. phar-

macists.

Praepărant (praeparo, āvi, ātum, āre 1 to prepare) is accordingly the predi-

cate of the sentence — a verb in the form of the 3rd person of present indicative

tense of active voice (Praesens indicatīvi actīvi) i. e. (they) prepare.

The noun aegrotis (aegrōtus, i m patient) is connected grammatically with

the predicate praepărant. In this situation in Latin the Dative case, namely Da-

tive plural, is understood: prepare to whom? To «aegrōtis». In English after the

verb prepare can be used a direct object without a preposition i. e. patients.

35

The noun formas (forma, ae f form) is connected grammatically with the

predicate: praeparant what? formas (a direct object in Accusative plural form);

in English as the equivalent may be used only the plural form forms.

The adjective varias (varius, a, um different) is in grammatical agreement

with the noun formas, because it is in the same gender form (feminine) and in

the same case (Accusative plural); in English the form different as the most pos-

sible variant of the equivalent translation is to be used.

The noun medicamentōrum (medicamentum, i n drug), as the ending -ōrum

indicates, is used in the form of Genitive plural; as already is known, this Latin

case is translating into English by the help of preposition of, so as result we have

the word combination of drugs.

Now, thinking logically, let us try to translate our sentence into the English,

resulting in such a correct variant of translation:

Pharmacists prepare the patients different drug forms (=forms of drug).

Personal pronouns in the subject function are missed in the Latin as a rule,

compare:

Cogĭto ergo sum — I think, therefore I am.

Now, let’s try to translate from English into Latin the sentence «Doctors

prescribe the patients new drugs».

First of all, let’s write down dictionary forms:

doctor — medĭcus, i m

to prescribe — praescrībo, praescripsi, praescriptum, ĕre 3(+Acc.)

patient — aegrōtus, i m

new — novus, a, um

drug — medicamentum, i n

Now, let’s begin translating. At the first place is to be put our subject — the noun

medĭcus in the Nominative plural form medĭci.

After medĭci we must put the predicate prescribe in the form of the 3rd form

of plural in present indicative tense of active voice — praescribunt.

Then the word patients is to be translated. In Latin, to point a person, for which

an action is doing, Dative case is using. So, we search for Dative plural form from the

noun aegrōtus (belonging to the 2-end declension) and find the form aegrōtis.

Now, locking at the word group new drugs we should remember that in a Lat-

in sentence a noun is placed at the 1st place and adjective is following the name.

That’s why we translate first the noun drug (medicamentum, i n) in the Accusa-

tive plural form — medicamenta. After that we translate the adjective new

(novus, a, um) in grammar agreement with the noun drug and have as a result

the form nova. The whole translation is: Medĭci praescrībunt aegrōtis medica-

menta nova.

36

§ 50. Word building elements (part 3)

Word building ele-

ments and their et-

ymology

Pharmaceutical or

therapeutic infor-

mation

Latin examples

and exceptions

English equiva-

lents with black

tipped word build-

ing elements

bil-, bili- from the

Latin bilis, is f bile

means for increase

bile secretion or for

bile ducts diagnostic

Bilignostum, i n

Bilimīnum, i n

bilignost

bilimin

chol-, chole- from the

Greek сholé bile

means for increase

bile secretion

Allochōlum, i n

Cholagōgum, i n

allochol

cholagog

-сid- from the Latin

occidĕre to kill

antimicrobial and an-

tiparasitical action

Streptocīdum, i n

fungicīda, ōrum n

streptocide

fungicides

gnost- from the

Greek gnostós rec-

ognizable

diagnostic means Acignostum, i n

Bilignostum, i n

acignost

bilignost

hist-, hista-, histi-

from the Greek his-

tós tissue

antihistaminic means

and means regulating

metabolic processes

Histadīnum, i n

Histimētum, i n

histadin

histimet

strept- from the

Greek streptós curved

(after form of bacil-

lus)

means of different ther-

apeutic action

Streptocīdum, i n

Streptodecāsum, i

n

streptocide

streptodecase

vir- from the Latin

virus i n poison

antiviral means Acyclovīrum, i n

Nevirapīnum, i n

acyclovir

nevirapin

§ 51. Exercises

1. Write down the dictionary form of every word and translate the sen-

tences into English:

1. Ex viro viperārum remedia varia conficiuntur. 2. Decocta praeparāta in

vitris nigris servantur. 3. Medĭcus aegrōto Acyclovīrum et remedia antihis-

taminĭca praescrībit. 4. In officīna sunt multa medicamenta in forma

tabulettārum. 5. Fungicīda contĭnent remedia contra fungos parasitĭcos.

2. Write down the dictionary form of every word and translate the sen-

tences into Latin:

1. Allochol is a drug promoting the flow of bile 2. Bilignost is used in di-

agnostic of gall bladder diseases. 3. Antibiotics don’t act on viruses. 4. The pa-

tient takes a mixture prepared from medical herbs. 5. Allergies are treated by an-

tihistaminic drugs.

3. Write down in dictionary form the Latin names of the following terms, taking

in consideration the correct spelling:

acyclovir, allochol, antihistaminic, bilignost, bilimin, cholagog, fungi-

cide, nevirapin, streptocide, streptodecase

37

Dictionaries to lesson 5 Latin–English vocabulary

Acyclovīrum, i n — acyclovir officīna, ae f — a chemist’s; drug-

store antihistaminĭcus, a, um — antihistaminic

conficio, confēci, confectum, ĕre 3 —

to produce

parasitĭcus, a, um — parasitical

praeparātus, a, um — prepared

contineo, continui, contentum, ēre 2 —

to contain

praescrībo, praescripsi, praescriptum,

ĕre 3 — to prescribe

contra (+ Acc.) — 1) against

2) for (a disease)

remedium, i n — medicine

fungus, i m — fungus servo, āvi, ātum, āre 1 — to keep

fungicīdum, i n — fungicide vipēra, ae f — viper

medicamentum, i n — drug virus, i n — 1) poison 2) virus

multus, a, um — many

English–Latin glossary

to act — ago, egi, actum, ĕre 3 flow — secretio, ōnis f

allergy, heightened reactivity to an aller-

gen — allergia, ae f

medical — medicātus, a, um

neviramin — Neviramīnum, i n

allochol — Allochōlum, i n patient — aegrōtus, i m

antibiotic — antibiotĭcum, i n prepared — praeparātus, a, um

antihistaminic — antihistaminĭcus, a, um to promote — promoveo, promōvi,

promōtum, ēre 2 (+Acc.)

bile — bilis, is f; fel, fellis n streptocide — Streptocīdum, i n

bilignost — Bilignostum, i n streptodecase — Streptodecāsum, i n

bilimin — Bilimīnum, i n to take — recipio, recēpi, receptum, ĕre 3

bladder — vesīca, ae f to be — sum, fui, esse

cholagog — Cholagōgum, i n to treat — curo, āvi, ātum, āre 1

drug — medicamentum, i n virus — virus, i n

LESSON 7

IMPERATIVE MOOD (IMPERATIVUS). CONJUNCTIVE MOOD (PRAESENS CONJUNCTIVI

ACTIVI ET PASSIVI, 3-RD PERSON OF SINGULAR ET PLURAL).

VERB FIERI IN PHARMACEUTICAL FORMULES

§ 52. Formation and usage of the Imperative (Imperatīvus)

The Imperative in Latin exists in singular and plural forms. These forms express

order or instruction addressed to the second person of singular (Imperatīvus singulāris)

or plural (Imperatīvus plurālis). Both Latin forms have in English only one form of

translation, compare:

Da! (Address to one person) — Give! Date! (Address to many persons) — Give!

Misce (Address to one person) — Mix! Miscēte! (Address to many persons) — Mix

Forms of the Imperative singular are formed by removing ending –re from the In-

finitive form in all the conjugations:

38

Conjugation Infinitive Imperative singular

I signāre Signa! — Write on the label!

II miscēre Misce! — Mix!

III dividĕre Divĭde! — Divide!

III diluĕre Dilue! — Dilute!

III recipĕre Recĭpe! — Take!

IV finīre Fini! — Finish!

Forms of the Imperatīve plural are formed by adding ending –te in all conjuga-

tions. Verbs of the 3rd conjugation a short conjunctive vowel –ĭ –before ending -te:

Conjugation Infinitive Stem Imperative plural

I signāre signā- Signāte! — Write on the label!

II miscēre miscē- Miscēte! — Mix!

III dividĕre divid- Dididĭte! — Divide!

III diluĕre dilu- Diluĭte! — Dilute!

III recipĕre recipi- Recipĭte! — Take!

IV finīre finī- Finīte! — Finish!

§ 53. Formation and usage of Conjunctive mood (Conjunctivus praesentis actīvi et passīvi)

Both in Conjunctive and Indicative Present tense of active and passive voice are

used the same endings i. e. ending –t/-tur for the 3rd person of singular and ending –nt /-

ntur for the 3rd person of plural. But these endings are adding to the changed stems:

verbs of the 1st conjugation change the stem vowel -a for the vowel -е, in verbs of other

three conjugations vowel –a is adding to the stem.

Conjunctivus praesentis actīvi

Conjugation Infinitive and stem Singular forms Plural forms

I signāre

signā-

signet — let him (her)

write on the label

signent — let them

write on the label

II miscēre

miscē-

misceat — let him (her)

mix

misceant — let them

mix

III dividĕre

divid-

divĭdat — let him (her)

divide

divĭdant — let them

divide

III diluĕre

dilu-

diluat — let him (her)

dilute

diluant — let them

dilute

III recipĕre

recipi-

recipiat — let him (her)

take

recipiant — let them

take

IV finīre-

finī-

finiat — let him (her)

finish

finiant– let them

finish

Conjunctivus praesentis passīvi

Conjugation Infinitive and

stem Singular forms Plural forms

I signāre

signā-

signētur — let it be

labelled

signēntur — let them be la-

belled

II miscēre

miscē-

misceātur — let it

be mixed

misceantur– let them be

mixed

39

III dividĕre

divid-

divĭdātur — let it

be divided

divĭdantur — let them be

divided

III diluĕre

dilu-

diluātur — let it be

diluted

diluantur — let them be

diluted

III recipĕre

recipi-

recipiātur — let it

be taken

recipiantur — let them be

taken

IV finīre

finī-

finiātur — let it be

finished

finiantur — let them be fin-

ished

Attention! It is important to remember that forms of Conjunctīvus praesentis

passīvi always 1) are put at the first place of a sentence 2) are used with the Nomina-

tive case of nouns:

Let tincture be diluted –Diluātur tinctūra

Let solution be sterilized — Sterilisētur solutio

Let tablets be given — Dentur tabulettae

§ 54. Verb fio, fiĕri in the Indicative and Conjunctive forms

Verb fio, fiĕri is not a regular one. The first word in the dictionary form looks to

be a verb of the 4th conjugation in active voice, but the Infinitive form fiěri is not

regular one.

In pharmaceutical texts the next forms of the Conjunctīvus praesentis passīvi

are used:

3rd person of singular — fiat — let it be made = to get

3rd person of plural — fiant — let them be made = to get

Both these forms are translated into English to get in the prescription formula-

tions which begin with Imperative form Misce and express an instruction of prepara-

tion any drug form:

Misce, fiat linimentum — Mix to get a liniment

Misce, fiat pasta — Mix to get a paste

Misce, fiat pulvis — Mix to get a powder

Misce, fiat unguentum — Mix to get an ointment

Misce, fiant species — Mix to get a species

In the last Latin formula the noun species is in the Nominative plural form that’s

why verb fiant is accordingly in the plural form.

In the Latin formulas given above the conjunction ut (to, in order to) may be

used, but the English translation isn’t changed, compare:

Misce, ut fiat linimentum — Mix to get a liniment

Misce, ut fiat pasta — Mix to get a paste

Misce, ut fiat pulvis — Mix to get a powder

Misce, ut fiat unguentum — Mix to get a liniment

Misce, ut fiant species – Mix to get a species

40

§ 55. Word building elements (part 4)

Word building elements

and their etymology

Pharmaceuti-

cal or thera-

peutic infor-

mation

Latin examples and

exceptions

English equiva-

lents with black

tipped word

building elements

aesthes-, aesth-, asthes-,

esthes- from the Greek aí-

sthesis feeling

local anesthet-

ics

Aesthocīnum, i n

Anaesthesīnum,i n

Bellasthesīnum, i n

aesthocin

anaesthesin

bellasthesin

alg- from the Greek álgos

pain

analgesics Analgīnum, i n

Baralgīnum, i n

analgin

baralgin

cain- from the name of south

American tree coca, leaves of

which are a source of co-

caine — one of the first local

anesthetics

local anesthet-

ics

Lidocaīnum, i n

Novocaīnum, i n

Ultracaīnum, i n

lidocaine

novocaine

ultracaine

dol- from the Latin dolor, ōris

m pain

analgesics Aldolōrum, i n

Panadōlum,i n

aldolor

panadol

sept- from the Greek septikós

putrid

antimicrobic

and antiseptic

means

Pantoseptum, i n

Septocīdum, i n

pantosept

septocide

§ 56. Exercises

1. Write down the dictionary form of each word, translate the sentences into

English:

1. Praesrībe aegrōto balsămum «Stella auraria». 2. Intradūce puĕro serum an-

titetanĭcum concentrātum. 3. Recĭpe suppositoria «Anaesthesōlum» et adhĭbe secun-

dum praescriptum. 4. Sterilisētur Oleum Olivārum et servētur in lagēnis obturātis.

5. Detur solutio Septocīdi in ampullis. 6. Addātur aqua in lagēnam cum infūso

Leonūri.

2. Write down the dictionary form of each word, translate the sentences into

Latin:

1. Give milfoil herb and peppermint leaves. 2. Prescribe the patient a tablet of

analgin. 3. Let be given antiasthmatic species in a little polyethylene bag. 4. Let be

mixed marsh-mallow infusion with licorice syrup. 5. Take bottles with sterilized peach

oil. 6. Mix to get a suppository.

3. Write down in dictionary form the Latin names of the following terms, taking

in consideration the correct spelling:

aldodor, anaesthesol, analgin, aesthocin, anesthesin, bellasthesin, lidocaine, no-

vocaine, panadol, pantosept, polyethylene, septocide, streptocide, ultracaine

41

Dictionaries to lesson 6 Latin–English vocabulary

addo, addĭdi, addĭtum, ěre 3 — to add introdūco, introduxi, introductum, ĕre 3 — to in-

duce

adhibeo, adhibui, adhibĭtum, ēre 2 –

to use

lagēna, ae f — bottle

Leonūrus, i m — motherwort

Anaesthesōlum, i n — anaesthesol obturātus, a, um — closed

antitetanĭcus, a, um — antitetanic, relax-

ing muscular contraction in tetanus

Olīva, ae f — olive

(Oleum Olivārum — olive oil)

aurarius, a, um — golden praescriptum, i n — instruction

balsămum, i n — balsam recipio, recēpi, receptum, ĕre 3 — to take

concentrātus, a, um — concentrated secundum (+Acc.) — according

do, dedi, datum, are 1 — to give serum, i n — serum

et — and stella, ae f — star

infūsum, i n — infusion sterilĭso, āvi, ātum, āre 1– to sterilize

English–Latin glossary

aesthocin — Aesthocīnum, i n milfoil — Millefolium, i n

aldodor — Aldodōrum, i n novocaine — Novocaīnum, i n

anesthesin — Anaesthesīnum, i n panadol — Panadōlum, i n

analgin — Analgīnum, i n pantosept — Pantoseptum, i n

antiasthmatic — antiasthmatĭcus, a, um polyethylene — polyaethylenĭcus, a, um

bag (a little one) — saccŭlus, i m to prescribe — praescrībo, praescripsi,

prascriptum, ěre 3

bellasthesin — Bellasthesīnum, i n septocide — Septocīdum, i n

to get — fio, fiĕri species — species, ērum f (only

plural!) — species to give — do, dedi, datum, are 1

lidocaine — Lidocaīnum, i n sterilized — sterilisātus, a, um

ultracaine — Ultracaīnum, i n marsh-mallow — Althaea, ae f

LESSON 8

3-RD DECLENSION OF THE NOUNS AND THEIR CONSONANT TYPE. SYSTEMATIZATION

OF THE ENDINGS OF MASCULINE GENDER NOUNS

§ 57. General description of nouns of the 3rd declension

Nouns of the 3rd declension are the most numerous among all other ones. Here are presented nouns of all genders with different endings in the Nominative singular. As pointed above (see § 20), the principal sign of the 3rd declension is the ending –is in the Genitive singular case (Genetīvus singulāris):

dosis, is f — dose pulvis, ĕris m — powder lac, lactis n — milk All these nouns are divided into two groups.

42

The first one includes nouns with equal quantity of syllables in Nominative and Genitive (so called parisyllaba):

canālis, canālis m (canalis, is m) — canal cutis, cutis f (cutis, is f) — skin The second and the most numerous part of the nouns of the 3-rd declension

have one more syllable in the Genitive compared to the Nominative (so called impari-syllaba):

cortex, cortĭcis m (the written dictionary form is cortex, ǐcis m) — bark tuberosǐtas, tuberositātis f (tuberosǐtas, ātis f) — tuberosity semen, semĭnis n (semen, ǐnis n) — seed If such a noun has only one syllable in the Nominative, then the complete form

of the Genitive is given as the second part of the dictionary form: dens, dentis m — tooth os, ossis n — bone pars, partis f — part

§ 58. Masculine gender endings and their systematization

It is very important to know typical endings of the 3rd declension, because these endings transmit information about noun gender. That’s why we should consider mi-nutely noun endings of every gender and systematize them. So, first let us consider noun endings of masculine gender in the Nominative singular and their way of transi-tion to the Genitive ending after the following table below. We can divide these end-ings into two groups. The first one unites three endings which include in Nominative

form vowel –e, the second unite three endings which include vowel –o:

Nom.sing.

ending

Gen. sing.

ending

Examples in the dic-

tionary form Exceptions

-er -ĕris aether, ĕris m ether gaster, tris f stomach Papāver, ĕris n poppy Piper, ĕris n pepper tuber, ĕris n tuber

-es -ĕdis -ētis -ĭtis

pes, pedis m foot herpes, ētis m herpes stipes, ĭtis m stem

-ex -ĭcis cortex, ĭcis m bark lex, legis f law

-o -ĭnis sapo, ōnis m soap

-or -ōris liquor, ōris m a liquid arbor, ŏris f tree cor, cordis n heart

-os -ōris flos, floris m flower os,oris n mouth os, ossis n bone

Attention! Signs of the length or brevity above the second vowel from the end of a polysyllabic word are always to be given in the dictionary form and missing them is considered as a mistake.

43

§ 59. Grammar types of the 3rd declension. The consonant type

Depending on both their gender as well as their Nominative and Genitive end-ings nouns of the 3-rd declension are divided into 3 grammar types: consonant, vowel and mixed. Let us consider first the consonant type. The consonant type is considered to be the basic one.

The consonant type includes imparisyllaba nouns of all three genders the stem of which finishes with only one consonant that’s why it has a provisional name «the conso-nant one». Nouns of the consonant type have the following characteristic case endings:

1) ending –e in the Ablative singular ; 2) ending –um in the Genitive plural; 3) ending –a in the Nominative and Accusative plural in nouns of neutral gender.

The other case endings excluding Nominative singular of all genders as well as

Nominative and Accusative singular in nouns of neutral gender are the standard ones.

It is also to be remembered that masculine and feminine nouns have in the Nominative

and Accusative plural the common ending -es, but neutral nouns have the ending -а.

Case endings of the consonant type are shown in the table below:

Case Singular Plural

m f n m f n

Nom. different -es -a

Gen. -is -um

Dat. -i -ĭbus

Acc. -em = Nom. sing. -es -a = Nom. plur.

Abl. -e -ĭbus

Examples of noun which are declined after consonant type (nouns flos, floris

m (flower), radix, īcis f (root), semen, ĭnis n (seed)

Case Singular Plural

m f n m f n

Nom. flos radix semen fores radīces semĭna

Gen. floris radīcis semĭnis florum radīcum semĭnum

Dat. flori radīci semĭni florĭbus radicĭbus seminĭbus

Acc. florem radīcem semen flores radīces semĭna

Abl. flore radīce semĭne florĭbus radicĭbus seminĭbus

§ 60. Meaning and usage of suffixes -or, -sor, -tor, -xor in pharmaceutical

terminology

The suffixes pointed above are added to the supine stem and so are formed nouns

indicating means of fulfilling an action:

Dictionary form of verbs Supine

stem Derivate nouns

inhibeo, inhibui, inhibĭtum,

ēre 2 to inhibit, to restrain

inhibĭt- inhibĭtor, ōris m inhibitor, any substance

which inhibits or ceases a chemic reaction or

a physiological function

protēgo, protexi, protectum,

ĕre 3 to protect

protect- protector, ōris m protector, any substance

which protects a catalyzer from inhibition or

poisoning

44

provideo, provīsi, provīsum,

ĕre 3 to provide

provīs- provīsor, ōris m pharmacist (originally, a

pharmacist of a druggist’s shop was responsi-

ble for drugs providing )

recipio, recēpi, receptum,

ĕre 3 to take, to receive

recept- receptor, ōris m receptor, a specialized senso-

ry nerve ending, by which stimuli are trans-

muted into nerve impulses

stimŭlo, āvi, ātum, āre 1

to stimulate

stimulāt- stimulātor, ōris m stimulator, any substance or

any factor stimulating physiological or chem-

ical activity

flecto, flexi, flexum, ĕre 3

to bend, to flex

flex- (muscŭlus) flexor, ōris m Flexor muscle

§ 61. Word building elements (part 5)

Word building elements

and their etymology

Pharmaceutical or

therapeutic in-

formation

Latin examples

and exceptions

English equiva-

lents with black

tipped word

building elements

card-, cardi- from the

Greek cardía heart

sedative means Cardiovalēnum. i n

Isocardum, i n

cardiovalen

isocard

digi-, digit- from the Lat-

in Digitālis, is f

foxglove

heart glycosides Cordigītum, i n

Digitoxīnum, i n

cordigit

digitoxin

os-, oss- from the Latin

os, ossis n bone

means regenerating

bone tissue

Fluossēnum, i n

Ossīnum, i n

fluossen

ossin

oste-, osteo- from the

Greek ostéon bone

means regenerating

bone tissue

Osteochīnum, i n

Osteogenōnum, i n

osteochin

osteogenon

val-, vale- from the Latin

valēre to be sound

sedative and cardi-

ovascular means

Cardiovalēnum i n

Valocormīdum, i n

cardiovalen

valocormid

§ 62. Exercises

1. Write down the dictionary form of each word, translate the sentences into English:

1. Virus immunodeficientiae homĭnis sanguine tradĭtur. 2. Recĭpe extractum sic-

cum ex foliis Digitālis pro tabulettis Cordigīti. 3. In Papavĕre somnifĕro alcaloīdum

Papaverīnum continētur. 4. Medĭci immunomodulatorĭbus et immunocorrectorĭbus ae-

grōtos curant. 5. Formatio et regeneratio textus ossium Osteogenōno stimulātur.

2. Write down the dictionary form of each word, translate the sentences into Latin:

1. Cordiamin solution is kept in syringe tubes and in bottles. 2. Activated coal is

produced as black tablets without odor and taste 3. Seed flax mucilage is administered

for treating stomach diseases. 4. Names of trees in the Latin language belong always to

feminine gender. 5. Leaves, seeds, flowers and roots of medical plants are used for

drugs preparation.

3. Write down in dictionary form the Latin names of the following terms taking

in consideration the correct spelling:

cardiovalen, cordiamin, cordigit, digitoxin, fluossen, isocard, ossin, osteochin,

osteogenon, papaverin, valocormid

45

Dictionaries to lesson 8

Latin–English vocabulary

activātus, a, um — activated homo, ĭnis m — a man

immunocorrector, ōris m — immunocorrector

alcaloīdum, i n — alkaloid immunodeficientia, ae f — immunodeficiency

arbor, ŏris f — tree immunomodulātor, ōris m — immunomodulator

carbo, ōnis m — coal os, ossis n — bone

color, ōris m — color Osteogenōnum, i n — osteogenon

contineo, continui, contentum, ēre

2 — to contain

Papaverīnum, i n — papaverin

regeneratio, ōnis f — regeneration

Cordigītum, i n — cordigit sanguis, ĭnis m — blood

curo, āvi, ātum, āre 1 — to treat siccus, a, um — dry

depurātus, a, um — purified stimŭlo, āvi, ātum, āre 1 — to stimulate

Digitālis, is f — foxglove textus, us m — tissue

formatio, ōnis f — formation trado, tradĭdi, tradĭtum, ĕre 3 — to transmit

English–Latin glossary

activated — activātus, a, um gender — genus, ĕris n

to administer = to prescribe –prascrībo,

praescripsi, praescriptum, ěre 3

language — lingua, ae f

Latin — Latīnus, a, um

always — semper mucilage — mucilāgo, ĭnis f

as — ut name — nomen, ĭnis n

to belong — pertineo, pertinui, -, ēre 2

(ad + Acc.)

odor — odor, ōris m

preparation — praeparatio, ōnis f

bottle — lagēna, ae f seed — semen, ĭnis n

coal — carbo, ōnis m stomach — gaster, tris f

cordiamin — Cordiamīnum, i n syringe — injector, ōris m

flax — Linum, i n taste — sapor, ōris m

flower — flos, floris m valocormid — Valocormīdum, i n

without — sine (+Abl.)

LESSON 9

SYSTEMATIZATION OF THE ENDINGS OF THE FEMININE GENDER NOUNS

IN THE 3-RD DECLENSION. THE MIXED TYPE OF THE 3-RD DECLENSION

§ 63. Systematization of the feminine gender nouns of the 3rd declension

The feminine gender demonstrates the most numerous varieties of Nominative

case endings. These endings and their way of changing in the Genitive singular are

showed in the table below:

Endings in

the Nomina-

tive case

Endings in

the Genitive

case

Examples Exceptions

do -ĭnis longitūdo, ĭnis f length

-go -ĭnis Plantāgo, ĭnis f plantain

-io -ōnis injectio, ōnis f injection turio, ōnis m bud (of a pine)

46

-as -ātis cavĭtas, ātis f cavity pancreas, ǎtis n pancreas; vas,

vasis n vessel; sulfas, ātis m sul-

phate (all the anion names with

ending -as)

-es -is sedes, is f location (of a dis-

ease)

Ribes, is n currant

-is -is

(parisyll.)

Digitālis, is f foxglove vermis, is m worm

-is -ĭdis

(imparisyll.)

Thermopsis, ĭdis f thermop-

sis

pulvis, ěris m powder; sanguis,

ĭnis m blood; sulfis, ītis m sul-

phite (all the anion names with

ending -is)

-us -ūtis salus, ūtis f health

-ys -ўdis Mays, ўdis f maize consonant

+ s conson. +

tis

Bidens, ntis f bur-marigold

helmins, inthis f helminth

pars, partis f part

adeps, ĭpis m fat;

dens, dentis m tooth

vowel+ x

(except -ex)

vowel + cis radix, īcis f root

nux, nucis f nut anthrax, ăcis m anthrax

Attention: The noun Adōnis (Adonis, pheasant’s eye) has two gender signs —

masculine and feminine ones: Adōnis, ĭdis m, f.

§ 64. The mixed type of the 3rd declension

A conventional grammar name «mixed» is used because nouns belonging to this

type use case endings of both consonant and vowel types. From the last one the mixed

type borrows the ending –ium in the Genitive plural. The other case endings are bor-

rowed from the consonant type.

After the mixed type are declined:

1) parisyllaba nouns with the endings –es or -is in the Nominative singular:

sedes, is f location; apis, is f bee;

2) nouns, stem of which finishes with two consonants: infans, ntis m,f child;

pars, partis f part; os, ossis n bone.

Examples of declining the nouns belonging to the mixed type

Case Singularis Pluralis

m f n m f n

Nom. infans apis os infantes apes ossa

Gen. infantis apis ossis Infantium apium ossium

Dat. infanti api ossi infantĭbus apĭbus ossĭbus

Acc. infantem apem os Infants apes ossa

Abl. infante ape osse infantĭbus apĭbus ossĭbus

§ 65. Declining peculiarities of the nouns with ending -sis and the nouns febris,

tussis, pertussis

Parisyllaba feminine nouns with the ending –sis (dosis, is f dose; diagnōsis, is f

diagnose etc.) are the Latinized nouns of the Greek origin. They are declined after the

mixed type, but they have two peculiar endings:

1) ending –im in the Accusative singular

47

2) ending –i in the Ablative singular:

Case Singular Plural

Nom. dosis doses

Gen. dosis dosium

Dat. dosi dosĭbus

Acc. dosim doses

Abl. dosi dosĭbus

The Latin nouns febris, is f fever; tussis, is f cough; pertussis, is f pertussis, whooping cough are declined like the noun dosis.

§ 66. The declining peculiarities of the noun vas, vasis n vessel

This noun is declined in the singular cases after the 3rd declension and in the plural cases after the 2nd one:

Case Singular Plural

Nom. vas vasa

Gen. vasis vasōrum

Dat. vasi vasis

Acc. vas vasa

Abl. vase vasis

§ 67. Word building elements (part 6)

Word building ele-

ments and their ety-

mology

Pharmaceutical or

therapeutic infor-

mation

Latin examples and

exceptions

English equiva-

lents with black

tipped word

building ele-

ments

angi- from the Greek angeíon vessel

means influencing the cardiovascular system (angiotensins)

Angioprīlum, i n Angisēmum, i n

angiopril angisem

febri- from the Latin febris, is f fever

analgesics-antipyretics Febricētum, i n Febrinīlum, i n

febricet febrinil

helm-, helmin-, hel-mint- from the Greek hélmins, hélminthos helminth

anthelmintic means Helmexum, i n Helmintoxum, i n

helmex helmintox

tuss- from the Latin tussis, is f cough

antitussive means Tussiglaucīnum, i n Tussamāgum, i n

tussiglaucin tussamag

vas- from the Latin vas, vasis n vessel

means influencing car-diovascular system or used in the diagnostic of the cardiovascular dis-eases

Vasoprēnum, i n Vasotrastum, i n

vasopren vasotrast

verm- from the Latin vermis, is m worm

anthelmintic means Vermolfīnum, i n Vermitoxum, i n

vermolfin vermitox

48

§ 68. Exercises

1. Write down the dictionary form of each word and translate the sentences into

English:

1. Medĭcus aegrōto dosim necessariam tabulettārum Vasoprēni praescrībit. 2.

Pharmacopōla mixtūram contra tussim cum sirūpis Althaeae et Glycyrrhizae praepărat.

3. Vitra et vasa vitrea сum sanguĭnis analўsi in loco frigĭdo continentur. 4. Decoctum

ex turiōnĭbus Pini ad bronchitĭdes chronĭcas parātur. 5. Sub osteoporōsi densĭtas ossi-

um valde minuĭtur.

2. Write down the dictionary form of each word and translate the sentences into

Latin:

1. Ether for narcosis is kept in hermetically closed phials of dark glass. 2. Codeine

or otherwise «tussamag with codeine» is administrated in powders, tablets and solutions.

3. An infusion from briquettes of bur-marigold herb is prepared for a curative bath. 4. In-

vasions of parasitical worms are treated by anthelmintic means. 5. Berries of blackcurrant

contain a great amount of vitamin C.

3. Write in the dictionary form names of the following terms:

angiopril, angisem, codeine, febricet, febrinil, helmex, helmintox, tussiglaucin,

tussamag, vasopren, vasotrast, vermolfin, vermitox

Dictionaries to lesson 9

English–Latin vocabulary

ad (+Acc.) — in obturātus, a, um — closed

Althaea, ae f — march-mallow, sweatweed os, ossis n — bone

analўsis, is f — analysis osteoporosis, is f — osteoporosis

bronchītis, itĭdis f — bronchitis, inflammation of

bronchi

pharmacopōla, ae m — pharmacist

Pinus, i f — pine

chronĭcus, a, um — chronic sub (+Abl.) — 1 during 2) in

densĭtas, ātis f — density turio, ōnis m — bud (of pine)

dosis, is f — dose tussis, is f — cough

frigīdus, a, um — cold valde — greatly

locus, i m — place vas,vasis n — vessel

minuo, minui, minūtum, ěre 3 — to decrease,

to diminish

Vasoprēnum, i n — vasopren

vitreus, a, um — glass

necessarius, a, um — necessary vitrum, i n — phial

English–Latin glossary

amount — quantĭtas, ātis f helmex — Helmēxum, i n

angiopril — Angioprīlum, i n helmintox — Helmntoxum, i n

angisem — Angisēmum, i n hermetically — hermetĭce

anthelminthic — antihelminthĭcus, a, um invasion — invasio, ōnis f

bath — balneum, i n to keep — contineo, continui, conten-

tum, ēre 2 blackcurrant — Ribes (is, n) nigrum (niger, gra,

grum) narcosis — narcōsis, is f

49

briquette — brikētum, in otherwise — alĭter

bur-marigold — Bidens, ntis f parasitical — parasitarius, a, um

closed — obturātus, a, um tussamag — Tussamāgum, i n

codeine — Codeīnum , i n vasopren — Vasoprēnum, i n

curative — curatīvus, a, um vasotrast — Vasotrastum, i n

febricet — Febricētum, i n vermitox — Vermitoxum, i n

febrinil — Febrinīlum, i n Vermolfin — Vermolfīnum, i n

great — magnus, a, um worm — vermis, is m

herb — herba, ae f

LESSON 10

SYSTEMATIZATION OF THE ENDINGS OF THE NEUTRAL GENDER NOUNS

IN THE 3-RD DECLENSION. THE VOWEL TYPE OF THE 3-RD DECLENSION

§ 69. Systematization of the neutral gender nouns of the 3rd declension

The neutral gender nouns and their way of changing in the Genitive case are

shown in the following table:

Endings in

the Nom.

sing. case

Endings in

the Gen. sing.

case

Examples Exceptions

-al -ālis anĭmal, ālis n animal

-ar -āris exemplar, āris n example

-e -is Secāle, is n rye

rete, is n network

-en -ĭnis semen, ĭnis n seed lichen, ēnis m lichen

ren, renis m kidney

-ma (of the

Greek origin)

-ǎtis stigma, ătis n stigma (of

maize)

trauma, ătis n trauma, injury

gemma, ae f bud stru-

ma, ae f goiter

forma, ae f form

norma, ae f norm

-ur ŭris sulfur, ǔris n sulphur

-us -ĕris

-ǒris

vulnus, ĕris n wound

corpus, ŏris n body

-с -tis laс, lactis n milk

-l -lis mel, mellis n honey sal, salis m,n salt

Attention! 1. Noun sal is of neutral gender in the Singular cases, but in the

Plural this noun belongs to the masculine gender, compare:

Sal marīnum — sea-salt, but:

Sales Acĭdi nitrĭci — salts of nitric acid.

2. Nouns of neutral gender with ending — ma in the Nominative singular have

in the Dative and Ablative plural ending –is instead of -ĭbus:

radīces cum rhizomătis — roots with rhizomes

decocta ex stigmătis Maўdis — decoctions from maize stigmata

50

§70. The vowel type of the 3rd declension

The name «vowel type» is due to vowel «i» which is used in several case end-

ings, namely in the following ones:

1) in the Ablative singular of all the genders ending –i

2) in the Genitive plural of all the genders ending –ium

3) in the Nominative and Accusative plural of neutral gender ending –ia.

In the other cases are used the endings which are common for the consonant,

vowel and mixed types.

After the vowel type are declined:

1) nouns of neutral gender with endings -al, -a r, -e in the Nominative singular

2) adjectives of the 3rd declension (except for adjectives in the comparative de-

gree)

3) participles of the present tense.

Examples of declining the nouns belonging to the mixed type Case Singulāris Pluralis

Nom. anĭmal exemplar rete animalia exemplaria retia

Gen. animālis exemplāris retis animalium exemplarium retium

Dat. animāli exemplāri reti animalĭbus exemplarĭbus retĭbus

Acc. anĭmal exemplar rete animalia exemplaria retia

Abl. animāli exemplāri reti animalĭbus exemplarĭbus retĭbus

§ 71. Word building elements (part 7)

Word building elements

and their etymology

Pharmaceuti-

cal

or therapeutic

information

Latin examples

and exceptions

English equiva-

lents with black

tipped word

building ele-

ments

dorm- from the Latin

dormīre to sleep

hypnotic means Dormĭcum, i n

Novidormum, i n

dormic

novidorm

hypn- from the Greek

hýpnos sleep

hypnotic means Hypnodormum, i n hypnodorm

nox-, noct- from the Latin

nox, noctis f night

hypnotic means Eunoctīnum, i n

Normanoxum, i n

eunoctin

normanox

somn- from the Latin som-

nus, i m sleep

hypnotic means Insomnium, i n

Somnibrōmum, i n

insomnium

somnibrom

sed- from the Latin sedāre

to quiet down

sedative means Sedonālum, i n

Valosedānum, i n

sedonal

valosedan

tranqui-, tranquil- , tran-

quill- from the Latin tran-

quillus, a, um quiet, calm

sedative means,

tranquilizers

Tranquisānum, i n

Tranquillīnum, i n

tranquisan

tranquillin

51

§ 72. Exercises

1. Write down the dictionary form of each word and translate the sentences into

English:

1. Oleum Jecŏris Aselli vitaminisātum detur in capsŭlis gelatinōsis 2. Remedia

hypnotĭca patientĭbus ad somnum laesum seu insomniam praescribuntur. 3. Animalia

domestĭca interdum translatōres morbōrum contagiosōrum sunt. 4. Sulfur depurātum

cum pulvĕre radīcis Glycyrrhizae mixtum est remedium laxatīvum. 5. Somnibrōmum

seu alĭter Bromisovālum infantĭbus ad insomniam aut pertussim praescribĭtur.

2. Write down the dictionary form of each word and translate the sentences into

the Latin:

1. Columns with maize stigmata are compressed in form of granules for decoctions. 2.

Sound persons fall asleep without hypnotic means. 3. Milk sugar isn’t dissolved in

ether. 4. Honey with warmed milk is good cure for sleepiness. 5. From the dried off

rhizomes of hollow stem infusions are prepared for digestive system stimulation.

3. Write down in the dictionary form names of the following terms:

bromisoval, dormic, eunoctin, hypnodorm, normanox, novidorm, sedonal, tran-

quillin, tranquisan, valosedan

Dictionaries to lesson 10

Latin–English vocabulary

anĭmal, ālis n — animal laesus, a, um — damaged, hurted

Asellus, i m — cod laxatīvus, a, um — laxative

Bromisovālum, i n — bromisoval mixtus, a, um mixed

contagiōsus, a, um — contagious pertussis, is f — pertussis, whooping cough

domestĭcus, a, um — domestic

gelatinōsus, a, um — gelatinous seu — or

hypnotĭcus, a, um — hypnotic, soporific Somnibrōmum, i n — somnibrom

insomnia, ae f — insomnia , sleeplessness somnum, i n — sleep

Sulfur, ŭris n — sulphur

interdum — sometimes translātor, ōris m — carrier

jecur, ŏris n — liver (of fishes) vitaminisātus, a, um — vitaminized

English–Latin glossary

column — stylus, i m milk sugar — Sacchărum lactis

to compress — compĭmo , compressi, compres-

sum, ĕre 3

novidorm — Novidormum, i n

normanox –Normanoxum, i n

cure — remedium, i n person — homo, ĭnis m

digestive — digestorius, a, um or — seu

to dissolve — dissolvo, dissolvi, dissolūtum, ěre

3; solvo, solvi, solūtum, ĕre 3

sedonal — Sedonālum, i n

dormic — Dormĭcum, i n to sleep — dormio, īvi, ītum, īre 4

dried off — exsiccātus, a, um sleeplessness — insomnia, ae f

ether — aether, ĕris m somnibrom — Somnibrōmum, i n

eunoctin — Eunoctīnum, i n sound — sanus, a, um

52

to fall asleep — dormĭto, āvi, ātum, āre 1 stigma — stigma, ătis n

good — bonus, a, um stimulation — stimulatio, ōnis f

hollow stem — Calămus, i m system — systēma, ătis n

honey– mel, mellis n tranquillin — Tranquillīnum, i n

maize — Mays, ўdis f tranquisan — Tranquisānum, i n

means — remedium, i n valosedan — Valosedānum, i n

milk — lac, lactis n warmed — tepefactus, a, um

LESSON 11

THE ADJECTIVES OF THE 3-RD DECLENSION AND VARIANTS OF THEIR DICTIONARY

FORM. PECULIARITIES IN DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES AND PRESENT TENSE

PARTICIPLES

§ 73. Adjectives of the 3rd declension

Adjectives of the 3rd declension are divided after their number of gender end-

ings in the Nominative case into 3 groups.

The first one includes adjectives with 3 gender endings:

1) -еr for masculine 2) –is for feminine 3) -е for neutral:

m f n

celer — fast, rapid, quick celĕris — fast, rapid, quick celĕre — fast, rapid, quick

salūber — curative salūbris — curative salūbre — curative

Dictionary form of these adjectives includes the masculine gender form in the

Nominative case and, after comma, endings of feminine and neutral gender forms with

a part of the stem:

celer, ĕris, ĕre — fast salūber, bris, bre — curative.

Such a mood of presenting feminine and neutral gender endings aims to demon-

strate which adjectives serve in these gender forms the vowel е before r (like adjective

celer) and which don’t serve it (like adjective salūber).

Adjectives of the 3rd declension, like nouns of the same declension, have the

ending –is in the Genitive singular. This case form coincides with feminine gender

form of the Nominative singular:

m f n

Nom. sing. celer salūber celĕris salūbris celĕre salūbre

Gen. sing. celĕris salubris stems: сeler-, salubr-

The second group includes adjectives with ending –is for masculine and femi-

nine gender forms and ending –e for neutral gender form:

m f n

brevis — brief, short breve — brief, short

rectālis — rectal rectāle — rectal

53

Dictionary form of these adjectives includes the masculine and feminine gender

form in the Nominative case with ending –is and, after comma, ending –e of the neu-

tral gender form:

rectālis, e — rectal solubĭlis, e — soluble

The Genitive case of these adjectives, the common one for all genders, coin-

cides in the form with the Nominative case of the masculine and feminine gender

forms:

m f n

Nom. sing. rectālis rectālis rectāle

Gen. sing. rectālis stem is rectal-

Adjectives of this group are the most numerous among adjectives of the 3rd de-

clension. Many of these adjectives were assimilated in the English language, compare:

bacteriālis, e — bacterial; sterĭlis, e — sterile; transdermālis, e — transdermal;

vaginālis, e — vaginal.

The 3rd group includes adjectives with a single ending in the Nominative sin-

gular which is common for all genders. There are 4 such endings: -ns, -s, -r , -x, for

example:

recens — fresh

teres — round

tricŏlor — three-colored

simplex — simple

The dictionary form of these adjectives includes the Nominative singular form

which is common for all three genders and the Genitive singular ending which is

common for all three genders too:

Nom. sing. (m, f, n) Gen. sing.(m, f, n) Dict. form Stem

recens — fresh recentis recens, ntis recent-

teres — round terĕtis teres, ĕtis terět-

tricŏlor — three-colored tricolōris tricŏlor, ōris tricolōr-

simplex — simple simplĭcis simplex, ĭcis simplĭc-

Besides given above sorts of adjectives, the Latinized adjectives of the Greek

origin especially in the botanic and bacteriological terms are used. They are parisyllaba

adjectives with ending -es in the Nom. sing. for all genders:

rhamnoīdes, is — belonging to Hippophaë rhamnoīdes (sea-buckthorn)

pyogĕnes, is — producing pus (Arcanobacterium pyogĕnes — Arcanobacterium

producing pus).

§ 74. Special features of case endings of the 3rd declension adjectives

Adjectives of the 3rd declension are declined in singular after the vowel

typei. e. they have in Abl. sing. ending –i. In the plural cases, Adjectives of the mascu-

line and feminine genders are declined after the mixed type but adjectives of neutral

gender are declined after the vowel one:

54

Case Singular

m f n

Nom. salūber brevis recens salūbris brevis recens salūbre breve recens

Gen. salūbris brevis recentis salūbris brevis recentis salūbris brevis recentis

Dat. salūbri brevi recenti salūbri brevi recenti salūbri brevi recenti

Acc. salūbrem brevem recentem salūbrem brevem recentem salūbre breve recens

Abl. salūbri brevi recenti salūbri brevi recenti salūbri brevi recenti

Plurāl

Nom. salūbres breves recentes salūbres breves recentes salubria brevia recentia

Gen. salubrium brevium recentium salubrium brevium recen-

tium

salubrium brevium re-

centium

Dat. salubrĭbus brevĭbus re-

centĭbus

salubrĭbus brevĭbus re-

centĭbus

salubrĭbus brevĭbus re-

centĭbus

Acc. salūbres breves recentes salūbres breves recentes salubria brevia recentia

Abl. salubrĭbus brevĭbus re-

centĭbus

salūbrĭbus brevĭbus re-

centĭbus

salubrĭbus brevĭbus re-

centĭbus

Adjectives with ending –es in the Nominative plural are declined after the con-

sonant type of the 3rd declension:

Case Singular

m f n

Nom. rhamnoīdes rhamnoīdes rhamnoīdes

Gen. rhamnoīdis rhamnoīdis rhamnoīdis

Dat. rhamnoīdi rhamnoīdi rhamnoīdi

Acc. rhamnoīdem rhamnoīdem rhamnoīdes

Abl. rhamnoīde rhamnoīde rhamnoīde

Plurāl

Case m f n

Nom. rhamnoīdes rhamnoīdes rhamnoīda

Gen. rhamnoīdum rhamnoīdum rhamnoīdum

Dat. rhamnoidĭbus rhamnoidĭbus rhamnoidĭbus

Acc. rhamnoīdes rhamnoīdes rhamnoīda

Abl. rhamnoidĭbus rhamnoidĭbus rhamnoidĭbus

§75. Grammar agreement of the 3rd declension adjectives with the nouns

Adjectives of the 3rd declension make grammar agreement with nouns after the

same rules as adjectives of the 1st and 2nd declensions: after the noun is placed the ad-

jective in the form which corresponds to the gender and case of the name:

Word combination in

English

Dictionary form of each

word

Word combination in Latin

green leaf leaf folium, i n

green virĭdis, e

folium (n) virĭde (n)

Nom. sing. Nom. sing.

forest berry berry bacca, ae f

forest silvester, tris, tre

bacca (f) silvestris (f)

Nom. sing. Nom. sing.

fresh flowers flower flos, floris m

fresh recens, ntis

flores (m) recentes (m)

Nom. plur. Nom. plur.

simple plasters plaster emplastrum, i n

simple simplex, ĭcis

emplastra (n) simplicia (n)

Nom. plur. Nom. plur.

55

§76. Specific features in declension of present tense participles

Present tense participles are declined like the 3rd declension adjectives with

ending –ns. As examples let’s use participles stimŭlans, ntis stimulating and repellens,

entis repelling:

Case Singular Plurar

m f n m f n m f n

Nom. stimŭlans repellens stimulantes stimulantia

repellentes repellentia

Gen. stimulantis repellentis stimulantium repellentium

Dat. stimulanti repellenti stimulantĭbus repellentĭbus

Acc. stimulantem (m f) stimŭlans (n) repel-

lentem (m,f) repellens (n)

stimulantes stimulantia

repelentes repellentia

Abl. stimulanti repellenti Stimulantĭbus repellentĭbus

§ 77. Lexical variety of adjectives in some botanical names

Some adjectives with the same meaning may be used in different lexical forms

depending on a noun which the adjective is joined to. So, adjective common may be

translated into Latin commūnis, e and vulgāris, e as well:

common juniper — Junipĕrus commūnis, but:

common thyme — Thymus vulgāris.

In most cases vulgāris, e in the meaning of common is used. It is useful to re-

member as exception some widely used terms in which the variant commūnis, e is

used:

Amygdălus commūnis — bitter almond

Junipĕrus commūnis — common juniper

Ricĭnus commūnis — castor bean.

§ 78. Word building elements (part 8)

Word building ele-

ments and their ety-

mology

Pharmaceutical

or therapeutical

information

Latin examples and

exceptions

English equivalents

with black tipped

word building ele-

ments

lax- from the Latin

laxāre to make lax

laxative means Laxigālum, i n

Regulaxum, i n

laxigal

regulax

neo- from the Greek

néos new

a new variant or

a remake

Neodōlum, i n Neo-

mycīnum, i n

neodol

neomycin

purg-, pur- from the

Latin purgāre

to purge

purgative means Purgĕnum, i n

Pursennīdum, i, n

purgen

pursennid

sen-, senn- from the Lat-

in Senna, ae f senna

laxative means Antrasennīnum, i n

Senadexīnum, i n

antrasennin

senadexin

§ 79. Exercises

1. Write down the Latin dictionary forms and make the Nominative and Genitive

singular and plural forms translating them into English:

anticoagulant drug; soluble powder; equal part; such a dose; sweet syrup

56

2. Write down the Latin dictionary forms and translate the sentences intoEng-

lish:

1. Succi recentium baccārum silvestrium sirūpis medicinalĭbus adduntur.

2. Pursennīdum producĭtur in tabulettis Sacchăro obductis 3. Hirudĭnes medicināles ad

hypertensiōnem arteriālem et ut remedium anticoagŭlans alhibentur. 4. Emulsa semi-

nalia et oleōsa distinguuntur. 5. Recĭpe massam pilulārum et divĭde in partes aequāles.

3. Write down the Latin dictionary forms and translate the sentences into Latin:

1. Castor oil is produced from castor bean and is used as a purgative means.

2. Green soap is included into content of Wilkinson ointment and other drugs. 3. Infusions

from swamp ledum are prepared as an expectorant means for bronchopulmonary diseases.

4. Medicines from Chinese magnolia vine stimulate the central nervous system. 5. Mix to

make rectal suppositories in the amount 10.

Dictionaries to lesson 11

Latin–English vocabulary

aequālis, e — equal medicinālis, e — medicinal

anticoagŭlans, ntis — anticoagulant obductus, a, um — coated

arteriālis, e — arterial oleōsus, a, um — oily

distinguo, distinxi, distinctum, ĕre 3

to distinguish

pilŭla, ae f — pill

Pursennīdum, i n — pursennid

divĭdo, divīsi, divīsum, ĕre 3 — to divide recens, ntis — fresh

hirudo, ĭnis f — leech Sacchărum, i n — sugar

hypertensio, ōnis f — hypertension seminālis, e — seminal

massa, ae f — mass silvester, tris, tre — forest

English–Latin glossary

amount (anything countable) — numĕrus, i m magnolia vine — Schizandra, ae f

nervous — nervōsus, a, um

as — ut other — alius, a, ud

bronchopulmonary — bronchopulmonālis, e purgative — purgatīvus, a, um

castor bean — Ricĭnus, i m

castor oil — Oleum Ricĭni

rectal –rectālis, e

soap — sapo, ōnis m

central — centrālis, e soluble — solubĭlis, e

Chinese — chinensis , e to stimulate — stimŭlo, āvi, ātum, āre 1

content — compositio, ōnis f such — talis, e

expectorant — expectŏrans, ntis swamp ledum — Ledum (Ledum, i n)

palustre (paluster, tris, tre) green — virĭdis, e

to include — inclūdo, incūsi, inclūsum, ĕre 3 sweet — dulcis, e

system — systēma, ătis n

57

LESSON 12

COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE GRADES OF COMPARISON AND SPECIAL

FEATURES OF THEIR FORMATION, DECLENSION AND USAGE

§ 80. Formation and declension of adjectives in the comparative grade

Qualitative adjectives in Latin like the English ones have three comparison

grades — positive, comparative and superlative.

The positive grade corresponds to the dictionary form of adjective and we have

already met all sorts of these adjectives.

The comparative grade if formed from the stem of the positive grade by adding

final suffix –ior for masculine and feminine genders and by adding final suffix –ius

for the neutral gender:

Positive grade Stem Comparative grade

m f n

albus, a, um white alb- albior whiter, more white albius whiter, more white

niger, gra, grum

black

nigr- nigrior blacker, more black nigrius blacker, more

black

brevis, e

short

brev- brevior shorter,

more short

brevius shorter,

more short

simplex, ĭcis

simple

simplĭc- simplicior simpler, more

simple

simplicius simpler, more

simple

The comparative grade forms are declined after the consonant type of the 3rd

declension:

Case

Singular Plural

m f n m f n

Nom. brevior brevius breviōres breviōra

Gen. breviōris breviōris breviōrum breviōrum

Dat. breviōri breviōri breviorĭbus breviorĭbus

Acc. breviōrem brevius breviōres breviōra

Abl. breviōre breviōre breviorĭbus breviorĭbus

The stem of the comparative grade forms is determined like the positive grade

that is by removing ending –is from the Genitive singular form. This stem is equal

with form of the Nominative case of masculine and feminine genders.

§ 81. Formation and declension of adjectives in the superlative grade

The most adjectives make the superlative grade by adding to the positive grade

stem the suffix –issĭm- and the gender endings–us, a, um:

Positive grade Stem Superlative grade

purus, a, um pure pur- purissĭmus, a, um the purest

brevis, e short brev- brevissĭmus, a, um the shortest

simplex, ĭcis simple simplĭc- simplicissĭmus, a, um the most simple

Adjectives with ending -er in the Nominative singular case of masculine gender

make the superlative grade by adding to this form the suffix -rĭm- and gender endings

-us, -a, -um:

58

Positive grade Masculine gender form Superlative grade

niger, gra, grum black nigеr nigerrĭmus, a, um the most black

acer, cris, cre sharp acer acerrĭmus, a, um the sharpest

The following six adjectives with ending -lis in the Nominative singular case

make the superlative grade by adding to the stem of the positive grade the suffix -lĭm-

and gender endings -us, -a, -um:

facĭlis, e easy facil- facillĭmus, a, um the easiest

difficĭlis, e difficult difficil- difficillĭmus, a, um the most difficult

simĭlis, e similar simil- simillĭmus, a, um the most similar

dissimĭlis, e dissimilar dissimil- dissimillĭmus, a, um the most dissimilar

gracĭlis, e slender gracil- gracillĭmus, a, um the most slender

humĭlis, e low humil- humillĭmus, a, um the lowest

Forms of the superlative grade are declined like forms of the positive grade with

endings –us, a, um that is after the 1st and 2nd declensions. Grammar agreement is

made after already knoun rules:

the finest powder — pulvis subtilissĭmus

the most sweet berry — bacca dulcissĭma

the purest Vaseline — Vaselīnum purissĭmum

§ 82. Special forms of making the comparative and superlative grades

Adjectives with vowels -e, -i, -u before gender endings –us, -a, -um make the

comparative grade consisting of the word combination magis (more) and the adjective in

the proper gender positive grade form. The superlative grade is made of the word combi-

nation maxĭme (the most) and the adjective in the proper gender positive grade form:

Positive grade Comparative grade Superlative grade

continuus, a, um continuous magis continuus, a, um

more continuous

maxĭme continuus, a, um

the most continuous

varius, a, um

various

magis varius a, um

more various

maxĭme varius, a, um

the most various

Adjectives bonus (good), malus (bad), magnus (great), parvus (little, small)

change someway their stem in the comparative and superlative grades:

Positive grade Comparative grade Superlative grade

bonus, a, um good melior, ius better optĭmus, a, um the best

malus, a, um bad peior, ius (pejor, pejus) worse pessĭmus, a, um the worst

magnus, a, um big, great maior, ius (major, majus) bigger,

greater

maxĭmus, a, um

the biggest, the greatest

parvus, a, um little minor, minus lesser minĭmus, a, um the least

Attention! Adjectives in comparative and superlative grades in some Latin botani-

cal names take on by translating into English a not expected grammar and lexical form:

Arctium majus — great burdock

Centaurium minus — common centaury

Cucurbĭta maxĭma –winter squash

Linum usitatissĭmum — fiber flax

Vinca minor — common perivinkle

59

§ 83. Word building elements (part 9)

Word building

elements and

their etymology

Pharmaceutical or

therapeutic infor-

mation

Examples and ex-

ceptions

English equivalents

with black tipped word

building elements

api- from the Latin

apis, is f bee

means produced from

life work of bees

Apilācum, i n

Apiphōrum, i n

apilāc

apiphor

myo- from the

Greek mys, myós

muscle

means which have an

effect both on muscles

of skeleton and inner

organs

Myolastānum, I n

Myo-Relaxīnum, I n

myolastan

myo-Relaxin

rifa- a provisional name

of a group of anti-

biotics

antibiotics of the ri-

famycine group

Rifamycīnum, i n

Rifampicīnum, i n

Rifathyroīnum, i n

rifamycin

rifampicin

rifathyroin

uro- from the

Greek úron

urine

means which have an

effect on the urinary

system

Urodipīnum, i n

Urolesānum, i n

Uromidīnum, i n

urodipin

urolesan

uromidin

§ 84. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form and translate the terms into English

low (lower, the lowest) tree; good (better, the best) drug; red (redder, the red-

dest) berry; dense (denser, the densest) solution; little (lesser, the least) dose; useful

(more useful, the most useful) juice; simple (more simple, the most simple) system

2. Give the dictionary form of each word and translate the sentences into English:

1. Semĭna exsiccāta et depurāta Cucurbĭtae majōris ut remedium effĭcax contra

varia Cestōda adhibentur. 2. Plantaglucīdum in granŭlis ex extracto aquōso foliōrum

Plantagĭnis majōris efficĭtur. 3. Exprĭme succum ex baccis Oxycocci recentissĭmis et

adde sirŭpum Sacchări. 4. Remedia amarissĭma sunt saepe remedia maxĭme necessaria

et utilissĭma. 5. Medicamenta naturalia sunt non tam celeria in curatione, ut remedia

synthetĭca.

3. Give the dictionary form of each word and translate the sentences into Latin:

1. Mix to get the finest powder. 2. Urolesan has spasmolytic activity and dimin-

ishes inflammatory phenomena in the urinary system. 3. Infusion of swallowwort is

administered before meal as diuretic, purgative and analgesic means. 4. Myorelaxin is

induced patients for full relaxation of respiratory muscles during the operation. 5. Ri-

famycine is produced as a solution for injections in ampoules or in bottles.

Dictionaries to lesson 12

Latin–English vocabulary

amārus, a, um — bitter Myorelaxīnum, i n — myorelaxin

analgesic — analgetĭcus, a, um naturālis, e — natural

aquōsus, a, um — aqueous necessarius, a, um — necessary

celer, ĕris, ĕre — fast, quick, rapid Oxycoccus, i m — cranberry

Cestōda, ōrum n — Cestoda, the typical tape-

worms, a subclass of the Cestoidea

Plantāgo, ĭnis f — plantain

Plantāgo major — common plantain

Cucurbĭta, ae f — pumpkin

Cucurbĭta major — winter squash

Plantaglucīdum, i n — plantaglucid

saepe — frequently, often

60

curatio, ōnis f — treatment synthetĭcus, a, um — synthetic

effĭcax, ācis — effective utĭlis, e — useful

exprĭmo, expressi, expressum, ĕre 3 –

to squeeze out

varius, a, um — various

English–Latin glossary

activity — activĭtas, ātis f meal — cibus, i m

before — ante (+Acc.) phenomenon — phenomĕnon, i n

dense — densus, a, um purgative — purgatīvus, a, um

to diminish — deminuo, deminui,

deminūtum, ĕre 3

simple — simplex, ĭcis

spasmolytic — spasmolytĭcus, a, um

diuretic — diuretĭcus, a, um swallowwort — Chelidonium, i, n majus

(major, majus) during — tempŏre (+Gen.)

fine — subtĭlis, e time — tempus, ŏris n

inflammatory — inflammatorius, a, um urinary — urinarius, a, um

little — parvus, a, um urolesan — Urolesānum, i n

low — humĭlis, e useful — utĭlis, e

LESSON 13

THE 4-TH AND 5 -TH NOUN DECLENSIONS. NOUNS USUS AND SPECIES IN

PROFESSIONAL PHARMACEUTICAL EXPRESSIONS

§ 85. The 4th declension and its case endings

As already shown above (§12), the ending –us in the Genitive singular case is

the characteristic feature of the 4th declension nouns. This declension unites mainly

masculine gender nouns:

fructus, us m fruit processus, us m process spirĭtus, us m spirit/alcohol

Nouns of neutral gender are not numerous, for example:

cornu, us n horn gelu, us n cold, frost

Case endings of the 4-th declension nouns are shown in the table below:

Case Singular Plural

Nom. fructus cornu fructus cornua

Gen. fructus cornus fructuum cornuum

Dat. fructui cornu fructĭbus cornĭbus

Acc. fructum cornu fructus cornua

Abl. fructu cornu fructĭbus cornĭbus

The 4th declension includes some nouns of the feminine gender, for example:

Quercus, us f oak; manus, us f hand. Such nouns are declined after the noun fructus.

§ 86.The name usus in expressing the drug rout administration

The formulas expressing the common route of drug administration consist usually

of the preposition ad or pro with the same meaning «for», the noun usus, us m usage and

an adjective, defining more precisely the drug administration:

ad usum externum (= pro usu externo) — for external use

ad usum internum (= pro usu interno) — for internal use

ad usum locālem (= pro usu locāli) — for the topical (local) use

ad usum parenterālem (= pro usu parenterāli) — for parenteral use

61

§ 87. The 5th declension and its case endings

The 5th declension includes nouns of the feminine gender with the characteris-

tic ending –ei in the Genitive singular case: facies, ēi f face, surface; res, rei f matter,

thing; scabies, ēi f scabies, itch.

The only noun of the masculine gender of the 5-th declension is meridies, ēi m

noon. The noun dies, ēi, m, f day belongs to the feminine gender when it is combined

with an ordinal numeral: dies prima — the first day. In other meaning word dies is of the

masculine gender: dies critĭcus — critical(crucial) day. That’s why the dictionary form

of this word includes two gender signs: dies, ēi m, f.

Case endings of the 5th declension are shown in the table below:

Case Endings in

the singular

Endings in

the plural

Full form in

the singular

Full form in the

plural

Nom. -es -es species species

Gen. -ēi -ērum speciēi speciērum

Dat. -ēi -ēbus speciēi speciēbus

Acc. -em -es speciem species

Abl. -e -ēbus specie speciēbus

The noun species used both in singular and plural forms has a biological mean-

ing species (of a plant, of an animal etc.), but used only in plural forms this noun has a

pure pharmaceutical meaning species. In English this term may be used both in singu-

lar and in plural as well.

It is useful to memorize the names of the pharmaceutical species. Pay attention

that the Latin variants are in the Nominative plural, and the English ones — in the

Nominative singular:

Species amarae — bitter species

Species antiasthmatĭcae — antiasthmatic species

Species antihaemorrhoidāles — antihaemorrhagical species

Species carminatīvae –carminative species

Species cholagōgae –cholagogue species

Species diaphoretĭcae — diaphoretic species

Species diuretĭcae seu urologĭcae — diuretic or urological species

Species laxantes — laxative species

Species pectorāles — pectoral species

Species sedatīvae — sedative species

Species stomachĭcae — stomachic species

Species (poly)vitaminōsae — (poly)vitaminous species

§ 88. Word building elements (part 10)

Word building

element and his

etymology

Pharmaceutical

or therapeutic

information

Examples and

exceptions

English equivalents

with black tipped word

building elements

erythr-, eryth-,

ery-, -ythr-, thr- from the Greek

erythrós red

1) means contain-

ing erythromycin

2) means produced

from erythrocytes

Clarythromycīnum, i n

Erycyclīnum, i n

clarythromycin

erycycline

62

haem- from the

Greek haíma blood

means stopping

blood circulation

or stimulating

blood cell for-

mation

Haemostimulīnum, i n

haemostatĭcus, a, um

haemostimulin

haemostatic

pyo- from the

Greek pýon pus

antiseptic means Pyocīdum, i n

Pyocillīnum, i n

pyocide

pyocilline

rythm- from the

Greek rhythmós

rhythm

antiarhythmic

means

Rythmodānum, i n

Rythmonormum, i n

rythmodan

rythmonorm

stat-, static- from

the Greek statikós

stopping

cessation of an

(obstructive) pro-

cess

haemostatĭcus, a, um

Lovostatinum, i n

haemostatic

lovostatin

thromb-, tromb-

from the Greek

thrómbos lump

means influencing

blood or thrombo-

cyte coagulating

Thromboliquīnum, i n

Trombostōpum, i n

thromboliquin

trombostop

§ 89. Exercises

1. Translate the following word combinations into Latin in the Nominative and

Genitive cases both in singular and plural as well:

diluted spirit, pectoral species, parenteral usage, third day, hard frost, chronic

caries, present state, bitter fruit, new species (in biology)

2. Write down the dictionary form of each word and translate the sentences into

English:

1. Recĭpe plantas officināles necessarias et praepăra species amaras pro in-

fantĭbus. 2. Res rudes plantārum in locis remotissĭmis saepe colliguntur.

3. Thromboliquīnum seu Heparīnum est anticoagulantum actiōnis directae. 4. Aegrōtus

vitrum cum infūso speciērum stomachĭcārum recĭpit et bibit.

5. Pyocīdum ad usum locālem in curatiōne stomatologĭca adhibētur.

3. Give the dictionary form of each word and translate the sentences into Latin:

1. Disopyramid or the other rhythmodan suppresses excitability of myocardium.

2. The preparation eryhaem is produced from human blood erythrocytes. 3. After bite

of an animal with symptoms of rabies the victim takes the antirabic vaccine. 4. There

are two species of almond: bitter or common almond and sweet almond. 5. Burns and

some other skin injuries are treated with aqueous oak decoction.

Dictionaries to lesson 13

Latin–English vocabulary

actio, ōnis f — effect Pyocīdum, i n — pyocide

amārus, a, um — bitter remōtus, a, um — remote

anticoagulantum, i n — anticoagulant res, rei f — matter, thing

res rudes — raw materials bibo, bibi, - , ĕre 3 — to drink

collĭgo, collēgi, collectum, ĕre 3 —

to collect, to gather

rudis, e — raw

saepe — frequently, often

directus, a, um — direct species, ēi f — species (in biology)

Heparīnum, i n — heparin species, ērum f — species (in pharmaceutics)

63

locālis, e — local stomachĭcus, a, um — stomachic

locus, i m — place Thromboliquīnum, i n — thromboliquin

officinālis, e — officinal usus, us m — use, usage

planta, ae f — plant

English–Latin glossary

after — post (+Acc.) oak — Quercus, us f

almond tree — Amygdălus, i f preparation — praeparātum, i n

antirabic — antirabĭcus, a, um rabies — rabies, ēi f

aqueous — aquōsus, a, um rhythmodan — Rhythmodānum, i n

bite — morsus, us m some — nonnullus, a, um

bitter — amārus, a, um sort, species — species, ēi f

burn — combustio, ōnis f to suppress — supprĭmo, supressi, supres-

sum, ĕre 3 common — commūnis, e

disopyramid — Disopyramīdum, i n symptom — symptōma, ătis n

eryhaem — Eryhaemum, i n sweet — dulcis, e

excitability — excitabilĭtas, ātis f the other — alĭter

a human — homo, ĭnis m two — duo (m), duae (f), duo (n)

injury — laesio, ōnis f vaccine — vaccīnum, i n

myocardium — myocardium, i n victim — victĭma, ae f

Summary table of noun declensions case endings

Declension I II III IV V

Gender f m n m f n m n f

Nom. sing. -a -us

-er

-um

-on different -us -u -es

Gen. sing. -ae -i -is -us -ēi

Dat. sing. -ae -o e (i) u -e

Acc. sing. -am -um =Nom.

sing.

-em

(-im)

=Nom.

sing. -um

=Nom.

sing. -em

Abl. sing. -ā -o -e (-i) -u -e

Nom. plur. -ae -i -a -es -a (-ia) -us -ua -es

Gen. plur. -ārum -ōrum -um (-ium) -uum -ērum

Dat. Plur. -is -is -ĭbus -ĭbus -ēbus

Acc. plur. -as -os =Nom.

plur. -es

=Nom.

plur. -us

=Nom.

plur. -es

Abl. plur. -is -is -ĭbus -ĭbus -ēbus

LESSON 14

SYSTEMATIZED INFORMATION ON PREPOSITIONS AND THEIR USE

IN THE PHARMACEUTICAL TERMINOLOGY

§ 90. Some general remarks on prepositions

64

Prepositions in the Latin terms are used mainly with Accusative or Ablative

and only few prepositions are used with both these cases dependently on the questions

«were?» or «where to?» Some prepositions in Latin don’t coincident in direct sense

with their English equivalents. For example, when we have to translate «a medicine

for some disease», in Latin the preposition «contra» i. e. «against» instead of preposi-

tion «pro» i. e. «for» is to be used.

You are already familiar with some prepositions. Now, let’s systemize all the

most used prepositions according their grammar rules of usage.

§ 91. Prepositions used with Accusative case

The following prepositions are used with Accusative:

Proposition Meaning Examples

ad 1) for 2) in (in designations

of pathologic states) ad usum internum for internal use

ad bronchitĭdem in bronchitis

ante before ante cibum before meal

apud in morbi allergĭci apud infantes

allergic diseases in children

contra (literally

«against»)

for contra tussim for cough

contra diarrhoeam for diarrhea

inter 1) between (two objects)

2) among (in the mass) inter labia between lips

inter aegrotos among patients

intra in, into intra musculos into muscles

per 1) during, per 2) through

3) by means of, via per diem during a day

per rectum through rectum

per injectiōnes via injections

post after post morbum after disease

retro behind retro buccam behind cheek

secundum according to secundum medĭci prescriptionem

according to doctor’s prescription

super, supra above supra cutem above skin

trans through trans vas through a vessel

§ 92. Prepositions used with Ablative case

Proposition Meaning Examples

cum with cum radicĭbus with roots

de about, of de vitamīnis about vitamins

e, ex (the second variant is

widely used)

from ex foliis from leaves

ex tempŏre in case of need

pro for pro inhalatiōne for inhalation

pro cursu for course of treatment

sine without sine cortĭce without bark

§ 93. Prepositions used with two cases (Accusative and Ablative as well)

Two prepositions — in (into, in, on) and sub (under) may be used both with Ac-

cusative and Ablative as well depending on the questions «were?» or «where to?». In

the first case Accusative is used, in the second one - Ablative:

65

in ampullam — into ampulle («where to?»)

in ampulla — in ampulle («where?»)

under plaster — sub emplastrum («where to?»)

under plaster — sub emplastro («where?»)

The same prepositions can be used in a temporal meaning:

in die — every day, per day

sub operatiōne — under operation, during peration

§ 94. Prepositions used with Genitive

Two prepositions can be used with Genitive: causa (because of), gratia (for the

sake of): complicatiōnis causa — because of complication

exempli gratia (e. g.) — for example (literally «for the sake of example»).

§ 95. Word building elements (part 11)

Word building elements

and their etymology

Pharmaceutical or

therapeutic infor-

mation

Examples and ex-

ceptions

English equiva-

lents with black

tipped word

building elements

emes-, emet- from the

Greek émesis vomiting;

emetikós emetic, vomitive

antiemetic means Emesētum, i n

Emetisānum, i n

emeset

emetisan

enter- from the Greek én-

teron intestine

means for treating

enteric diseases

Enterosalÿlum, i, n

Enterosorbentum, i n

enterosalyl

enterosorbent

gastr- from the Greek

gastér, gastrós stomach

means for treating

gastrointestinal dis-

eases

Alugastrīnum, i n

Gastrosōlum, i n

alugastrin

gastrosol

nause-, nausi- from the

Latin nausea, ae f nausea,

sickness from the Greek

náusia sea-sickness

antiemetic means Anausīnum, i n

Nauseālum, i n

Nauselīnum, i n

anausin

nauseal

nauselin

ulc, ulcer- from the Latin

ulcus, ĕris n ulcer

means for treating

ulcerous diseases of

gastrointestinal tract

Ulcerānum, i n

Ulcosānum, i n

ulceran

ulcosan

§ 96. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form and translate the terms into Latin:

1) aerosol for intranasal inhalation 2) solution for injections in ampoules 3) suspension

for internal use 4) powder for a solution for external use in little packets 5) ophthalmic

drops in phial-droppers 6) solutions in ampoule in disposable syringes 7) drug dose for

a day and for a course of treatment.

2. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into English

1. Post remotiōnem ex gastre materiārum irritantium ex tempore remedia ob-

volventia et constringentia adhibentur. 2. In solutionĭbus sterilĭbus pro injectionĭbus

adhibentur per se olea pinguia, exempli gratia oleum Olivārum et oleum Amyg-

dalārum. 3. Enterosorbentum seu Carbo activātus inter cibi assumptiōnes sumĭtur.

4. Pulvis Polysorbi MP ad usum localem in vulnus sub fasciam semel pro die im-

ponĭtur. 5. Tabulettae sumuntur sub linguam, retro buccam et per tractum gastrointesti-

nalem.

66

3. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into Latin:

1. Ulceran is produced in form of lyophilisated powder for solutions in ampoules

together with a solvent. 2. The ampoule content for intravenous injection is diluted in a

sterile glucose solution. 3. Preparations of flowers and grass of lily-of-the-valley are ad-

ministered for heart diseases. 4. Into composition of stomachic species powdery rhizome

from some medical herbs is included. 5. Gastrosol penetrates quickly into parietal cells of

stomach and takes cell protecting effect.

Dictionaries to lesson 14

Latin–English vocabulary

assumptio, ōnis f — reception, intake obvolvens, ntis — enveloping

bucca, ae f — cheek per — 1) during, per 2) through 3) by

by means of, via

per se — in natural state, non purified constringens, entis — constringent

cibus, i m — meal

enterosorbentum, i n — enter sorbent pinguis, e — fat

exemplum, i n — example

exempli gratia — for example

Polysorbum, i n — polysorb

retro (+ Acc.) — behind

fascia, ae f — bandage semel — once

gastrointestinālis, e — gastrointestinal sterĭlis, e — sterile

impōno, imposui, imposĭtum , ĕre 3 —

to applay

tempus, ŏris n — time

ex tempŏre — in case of need

English–Latin glossary

aerosol — aёrosōlum, i n intranasal — intranasālis, e

cell — cellŭla, ae f intravenous — intravenōsus, a, um

composition — contentus, us m lily-of-the-valley — Convallaria, ae f

content — contentus, us m little packet — fascicŭlus, i m

course — cursus, us m parietal — parietalis, e

disposable — uniusuālis, e

external — externus, a, um to penetrate — penĕtro, āvi, ātum āre 1

gastrosol — Gastrosōlum, i n phial-dropper — flaco-guttātor, flacōnis-

guttatōris m glucose — Glucōsum, i n

grass — herba, ae f powdery — pulverātus, a, um

heart — cor, cordis n protecting — protĕgens, entis

herb — herba, ae f quickly — cito

inhalation — inhalatio, ōnis f solvent — dissolūtor, ōris m

internal — internus, a, um sterile — sterīlis, e

into — in (+Acc.) together — una cum (+Abl.)

67

LESSON 15

NUMERALS IN PHARMACEUTICAL TERMINOLOGY

§ 97. Latin cardinal numerals

Latin cardinal numerals and their figure equivalents are shown at the table below:

Contemporary designations of

Latin cardinal numerals

Roman figures des-

ignating cardinal

numerals

Latin names of cardinal nu-

merals

1(one) I unus, a, um

2 (two) II duo, duae, duo

3 (three) III tres, tria

4 (four) IV quattuor

5 (five) V quinque

6 (six) VI sex

7 (seven) VII septem

8 (eight) VIII octo

9 (nine) IX novem

10 (ten) X decem

11 (eleven) XI undĕcim

12 (twelve) XII duodĕcim

13 (thirteen) XIII tredĕcim

14 (fourteen) XIV quattuordĕcim

15 (fifteen) XV quindĕcim

16 (sixteen) XVI sedĕcim

17 (seventeen) XVII septendĕcim

18 (eighteen) XVIII duodeviginti

19 (nineteen) XIX undeviginti

20 (twenty) XX viginti

21(twenty-one) XXI unus et viginti (= viginti unus)

30 (thirty) XXX triginta

40 (forty) XL quadraginta

50 (fifty) L quinquaginta

60 (sixty) LX sexaginta

70 (seventy) L XX septuaginta

80 (eighty) L XXX octoginta

90 (ninety) XC nonaginta

100 (a hundred) C centum

125 (one hundred and twenty five) CXXV centum viginti quinque

200 (two hundred) CC ducenti, ae, a

300 (three hundred) CCC trecenti, ae, a

400 (four hundred) CD quadringenti, ae, a

500 (five hundred) D quingenti, ae, a

600 (six hundred) DC sescenti, ae, a

700 (seven hundred) DCC septingenti, ae, a

800 (eight hundred) DCCC octingenti, ae, a

900 (nine hundred) CM nongenti, ae, a

1000 (one thousand) M mille

2000 (two thousand) MM duo milia

68

Some notes to the table: 1. As seen below, only 7 signs are used in the Roman

figure designations: I = 1; V = 5; X = 10; L = 50; C = 100; D = 500; M = 1000. On the

base of these signs all the figure designations are composed by joining them to the left

(by number increasing) or to the right (by number diminishing).

2. Numerals from 11 till 17 include the final element — dĕcim which is a deri-

vate from the numeral decem (10).

3. Numerals composing figures of dozens in combination with 8 or 9 (18, 19, 28,

29 etc) are designed by subtraction the ‘one’ or ‘two’ from the next dozen:

18 = 20-2 — duodeviginti (literally: two from twenty)

29 = 30-1 — undetriginta (literally: one from thirty)

4. Figures from 21 till 99 are designed by two ways:

a) the one-numeral is at the first place, and after conjunction et, the dozen des-

ignation is placed: 24 — quattuor et viginti;

б) the dozen designations are at the first place, and then without conjunction et

the one-numerals are placed: 24 — viginti quattuor.

5. In numerals above 100 names of the hundredth part (in the Nominative plu-

ral) are the first, then without conjunction dozen names and one-numeral names are

joined, for example, 225 — ducenti viginti quinque (for masculine gender), ducentae

viginti quinque (for feminine gender), ducenta viginti quinque (for neutral gender).

6. Historically and nowadays, the Roman figures are used especially in the West

Europe and the USA for designating chronologic dates, pages, and volumes of books

and time of their printing as well.

7. In the pharmaceutical terminology the Roman figures are used for determin-

ing amount of drops (see below) and for time determining in expressions with the

preposition per in the meaning during: per horas II — during two hours, per minūtas

V– during five minutes.

§ 98. Declension of cardinal numerals

From all the cardinal numerals are declined:

1) unus, a, um (in singular cases);

2) duo, duae, duo (in plural cases);

3) tres, tria (in plural cases);

4) dozen designations from 200 to 900 (in plural cases);

5) milia (in plural cases).

Declining the numeral unus, a, um one

Cases m f n

Nom. unus una unum

Gen. unīus unīus unīus

Dat. uni uni uni

Acc. unum unam unum

Abl. uno una uno

69

Declining the numeral duo, duae, duo two

Cases m f n

Nom. duo duae duo

Gen. duōrum duārum duōrum

Dat. duōbus duābus duōbus

Acc. duos duas duo

Abl. duōbus duābus duōbus

Declining the numeral tres, tria — three

Cases m f n

Nom. tres tria

Gen. trium trium

Dat. tribus tribus

Acc. tres tria

Abl. tribus tribus

Declining dozen designations (ducenti, ae, a) Cases m f n

Nom. ducenti ducentae ducenta

Gen. ducentōrum ducentārum ducentōrum

Dat. ducentis ducentis ducentis

Acc. ducentos ducentas ducenta

Abl. ducentis ducentis ducentis

Numeral milia is the Nominative plural form of the numeral mille and is declined only

in plural like neutral gender nouns of the vowel type :

Nom. milia

Gen. milium

Dat. milĭbus

Acc. milia

Abl. milĭbus

§ 99. Grammar agreement of numerals with nouns

Cardinal numerals which can be declined, except for the numeral milia, agree

with nouns in gender, number and case:

duo suppositoria — two suppositories

tres solutiōnes — three solutions

ducentae doses — two hundred doses

ducenta grammăta — two hundred grams

trecenta quinquaginta millilĭtra — three hundred milliliters.

Nouns used with numeral form mille are put in the Nominative plural:

mille homĭnes — thousand persons

mille ampullae — thousand ampoules.

But nouns used with numeral milia are put in the Genitive plural:

duo milia dosium — two thousand doses

tria milia ampullārum — three thousand ampoules.

70

§ 100. The ordinal numerals

English name Latine name

first primus, a, um

second secundus, a, um (= alter, ĕra, ĕrum)

third tertius, a, um

fourth quartus, a, um

fifth quintus, a, um

sixth sextus, a, um

seventh septĭmus, a, um

eighth octāvus, a, um

ninth nonus, a, um

tenth decĭmus, a, um

eleventh undecĭmus, a, um

twelfth duodecĭmus, a, um

thirteenth tertius decĭmus, a, um

fourteenth quartus decĭmus, a, um

fifteenth quintus decĭmus, a, um

sixteenth sextus decĭmus, a, um

seventeenth septĭmus decĭmus, a, um

eighteenth duodevicesĭmus, a, um

nineteenth undevicesĭmus, a, um

twentieth vicesĭmus, a, um

twenty-first unus et vicesĭmus (= vicesĭmus primus)

thirtieth trecesĭmus, a, um

fortieth quadragesĭmus, a, um

fiftieth quinquagesĭmus, a, um

sixtieth sexagesĭmus, a, um

seventieth septuagesĭmus, a, um

eightieth octogesĭmus, a, um

ninetieth nonagesĭmus, a, um

hundredth centesĭmus, a, um

two-hundredth ducentesĭmus, a, um

three-hundredth trecentesĭmus, a, um

thousandth millesĭmus, a, um

two-thousandth secundus, a, um millesĭmus, a, um

five-thousandth quintus, a, um millessĭmus, a, um

hundred- thousands centesĭmus, a, um millesĭmus, a, um

So, from point of view of grammar Latin ordinal numerals are adjectives of the

1st or 2end declensions. They are signed by the same symbols as the corresponding

cardinal numerals:

the hundred twenty-first tablet — tabuletta CXXI (centesĭma vicesĭma prima)

§ 101. Expression of percentage correlation

Integral numbers of percents are expressed by cardinal numerals grammatically

agreed with the names pars in the Nominative singular (if it is only one a percent) and

partes in the Nominative plural (if there are two or more percents) to which the pro

centum is added:

71

1% — una (pars) pro cemtum; 2% — duae (partes) pro centum; 10% — decem

(partes) pro centum; 100% — centum (partes) pro centum. The words pars/partes may

be omitted. Such constructions are also not changed after cases in a multiword term

expressing a percentage correlation:

Solutio Lidocaīni duae partes pro centum — 2% lidocain solution

Solutiōnis Lincomycīni hydrochlorĭdi triginta (partes) pro centum millilĭtrum un-

um — 1 milliliter of 30% solution of lincomycin hydrochloride

A percentage expressed by decimal fraction is arranged by the following way.

First proceeds an ordinal numeral decĭma (for dozens), centessĭma (for hundreds) or

millesĭma (for thousands) agreed with nouns «pars» or «partes» (as usual they are

omitted), to which the expression pro centum is added:

0.1% — decĭma pro centum; 0.02% — duae centesĭmae pro centum;

0.003 % — tres millessĭmae pro centum. Numeral 1 one (one tenth/ hundredth / thou-

sandth) in the Latin text is omitted as seen above. The expression «five tenths» is

translated as dimidia:

0.5% — dimidia pro centum; 3.5% — tres partes et dimidia pro centum. But:

3.05% — tres partes et quinque centesĭmae pro centum.

Like expressions with designation integral percent numbers, both names of drug

form and the drug name as well are not changed after cases in expressions designating

tenth/ hundredth / thousandth percent parts:

Solutiōnis Thiamīni bromĭdi duae decĭmae (partes) pro centum gramma un-

um — 1 gram of solution of thiamin bromide 0.2%

Solutiōnis Furacilīni duae centesĭmae (partes) pro centum grammăta viginti —

20 grams of 0.02% solution of furacilin

Medĭcus praescrībit Solutiōnem Novocaīni viginti quinque centesĭmae (partes)

pro centum in ampullis ana decem et viginti millilĭtra —

Doctor prescribes 0.25% solution of Novocain in ampoules on 10 and 20 ml

everyone

§ 102. Designation of matter amount in Latin pharmaceutical terms

The matter amount is designed in grams (gramma, ătis n — gram) or in tenth,

hundredth and thousandth portions of gram (decigramma, ătis n — decigram; centi-

gramma, ătis n — centigram; milligramma, ătis n — milligram).

If the matter amount is expressed by an integral number, then after this integral

number a comma is placed with a following zero:

1.0 — gramma unum (one gram)

2.0 — grammăta duo (two grams)

10.0 — grammăta decem (ten grams)

20.5 — grammăta viginti et dimidia — 20.5 (twenty point five) grams —

If the matter amount is expressed by a decimal portion of gram, then a word ex-

pressing this portion is at the first place following by a cardinal numeral:

0.1 — decigramma unum — 0.1 (nought point one gram)

0.2 — decigrammăta duo — 0.2 (nought point two grams)

0.01 — centigramma unum — 0.01(nought point nought one gram)

0.005 — milligrammăta quinque — 0.005 (nought point two oes five grams)

72

Attention! When translating into Latin figures designating tenth, hundredth or

thousandth portions of gram, the Latin nouns decigramma, centigramma or milli-

gramma in grammar agreement with corresponding numerals are used:

0.3 grams — decigrammăta tria

0.02 grams — centigrammăta duo

0.001 gram — milligramma unum

0.005 grams — milligrammăta quinque.

The fluid matter amount is usually designed in milliliters (millilĭtrum, i n). This

word is to be agreed with a numeral if necessary and is placed at the first place fol-

lowed by a cardinal numeral:

millilitrum unum (1 ml) — one milliliter

millilĭtra tria (3 ml ) — 3 milliliters

millilĭtra quinquaginta (50 ml) — 50 milliliters

The amount of a liquid to 1 milliliter is dosed out in drops (gutta, ae f). One

such drop is equal to 0.25 milliliters. The number of drops is designed in medical pre-

scriptions by a Roman figure and is written after noun form guttam in the Acc. sing., if

only one drop is designed, and after noun form guttas in Acc. plur., if number of drops

is more than one. Lines above and below a figure are not placed:

Take: Eucalyptus oil III drops

Recĭpe: Olei Eucalypti guttas III (guttas tres)

Attention! When indicating the drug content of equal weight of several drug

volumes we use in the Latin the adverb ana «of each», but in the English equivalent

we have another proposition construction:

Quinque tabulettae Amydopyrini ana 2,0 — five amydopyrin tablets on 2.0

grams everyone

But when indicating several prescription components in the equal amount we

use the formula «of each», compare:

Recipe: Amidopyrīni Take: Amidopyrin

Sulfadimezīni ana 2,0 Sulfadimezin of each 2.0

§ 103. Latin numerals as prefixes in pharmaceutical terms

Prefix Meaning Examples and English equivalents

un-, uni- one Unazīdum, i, n — unazid

Unithiōlum, i n — unithiol

unicŏlor, ōris — onecolour

bi-, duo- two Bicarmintum, i, n — bicarmint

Duogestrālum, i n — duogestral

tri - three Trimecaīnum, i n — trimecain

quadri-, quad-

ro-

four quadripetălus, a, um quadripetal, having four petals

Quadroprīlum, i n quadropril

quin-quinque- five Quinacrīnum, i n — quinacrin

quinquelobātus, a, um — five-lobar

septi- seven Septidrōnum, i n — septidron

octo- eight Octoestrōlum, i n — octoestrol

deci- ten Decilātum, i n — decilat

undeci-, unde- eleven Undecīnum, i n — undecin

Undevītum, i n — undevit

73

centi- hundred centigramma, ătis n — centigram

mille-, milli- thousand milligramma, ătis n — milligram

Millefolium, i n — milfoil

semi- half, semi- semilente — half slowly

semiannuālis, e — semi-annual

§ 104. Greek numerals as prefixes in pharmaceutical terms

Prefix Meaning Examples

mono- one-, mono-, Monomycīnum, i n — monomycin monobro-

mātus, a, um — monobromate

di- two-, di-, Dimedrōlum, i n — dimedrol

tri- three-, tri-, Trimecaīnum, i n — trimecain

tetra- four-, tetra-, tetrabōras, ātis m — tetraborate

penta-,

pento-

five-, penta-, pento-, Pentagastrīnum, i n — pentagastrin

Pentovītum,i n — pentovit

hexa-,

hexo-

hexa-, hexo-, Hexamidīnum, i n — hexamidin

Hexobarbitālum, i n — hexobarbital

hepta- six-, septa-, seven- Heptavītum, i n — heptavit

octa-, octi-

octo-,

eight-, octa-, octi-, Octadīnum, i n — octadin

Octidipīnum, i n — octidipin

Octocaīnum, i n — octocain

deca- ten-, deca-, Decamevītum, i n — decamevit

hendĕca eleven-, hendeca-, Hendecavītum, i n — hendecavit

dodĕca- twelve-, dodeca-, Dodecavītum, i n — dodecavit

hemi- half, hemi- hemispherium, i n — hemisphere

§ 105. Word building elements (part 12)

Word building ele-

ments and their

etymology

Pharmaceutical

or therapeutic

information

Examples and excep-

tions

English equivalents

with black tipped

word building ele-

ment

chon-, chondr- from

the Greek chóndros

cartilage

means promoting

cartilage tissue

regeneration

Chondrolōnum, i n

Chonsurīdum, i n

chondrolon chon-

surid

muc(o)- from the Lat-

in mucus, i m mucus

expectorant

means

Mucosānum, i n mucosan

neur(o)- from the

Greek neúron nerve

means making

effect on the CNS

Neurolaxum, i n

Neurotīnum, i n

neurolax

neurotin

norm(i)-, norm(o)-

from the Latin norma,

ae f norm

Means restoring

different func-

tions

Normitēnum, i n

Normodipīnum, i n

Normopressum, i n

normiten

normodipin

normopress

onco- from the Greek

óncos tumor

Antiplastic means Oncocristīnum, i n

Oncovīnum, i n

oncocristin

oncovin

§ 106. Exercises

1. Write down the dictionary form and translate the terms into Latin:

two ointments; three powders; one tablet; mixture of two solutions; liquid drug

in three glasses; hundred doses of drugs; two hundred and fifty granules; three hundred

74

and forty seven milliliters of solution; 40 grams of solution of furacilin 0. 02%; thou-

sands of new drugs, nought point three grams of ointment

2. Write down the dictionary form and translate the sentences into English:

1. In nonnullis morbis septĭma dies est dies critĭcus. 2. In ore homĭnis adulti

triginta duo dentes sunt. 3. Sume remedium ter per diem, semel vel bis per noctem.

4. Numeralia Latīna atque Graeca in nominĭbus vitaminōrum saepe adhibentur. 5. So-

lutio septuaginta quinque pro centum praeparāti Mucosāni seu alĭter Ambroxōli pro

inhalatiōnĭbus infantĭbus et adultis praescribĭtur. 6. Tabuletta Neurotīni (alĭter Pyridi-

tōli) contĭnet decigramma unum medicamenti et per os bis in die assumĭtur.

3. Write down the dictionary form and translate the sentences into Latin, in-

cluding all the figure designations:

1) The patient buys at the chemist’s elixir of bromhexin 0.08% in bottles on 60,

100 and 120 ml everyone. 2) 30 ml of licorice syrup are taken by one table-spoon three

times a day. 3) Pharmacist prepares 180 ml of infusion from six grams of pheasant’s

eye herb. 4) Mix 10 ml of riboflavin solution 0.2% and 5 drops of citral solution

0.01%. 5) Divide pill mass into three equal parts and prepare 15 pills.

Dictionaries to the lesson 15

Latin–English vocabulary

Ambroxōlum, i n — ambroxol Neurotīnum, i n — neurotin

bis — twice nonnullus, a, um — some

centum — hundred nox, noctis f — night

critĭcus, a, um — critical numerale, is n — numeral

decigramma, ătis n — decigram os, oris n — mouth

duo, duae, duo — two Pyriditōlum, i n — pyriditol

Graecus, a, um — Greek quinque — five

inhalatio, ōnis f — inhalation semel — once

Latīnus, a, um — Latin ter — three times, thrice

Mucosānum, i n — mucosan triginta — thirty

unus, a, um — one

English–Latin glossary

bromhexin — Bromhexīnum, i n of each — ana (+Acc.)

to buy — emo, empsi, emptum, ĕre 3 pill — pilŭla, ae f

citral — Citrālum, i n riboflavin — Riboflavīnum, i n

drop — gutta, ae f sixty — sexaginta

table-spoon — cochlear escāle

(cochlear, āris n — spoon

escālis, e — used for having dinner)

eight — octo

eighty — octoginta

elixir–elixir, īris n

fifteen — quindĕcim ten — decem

five — quinque three times — ter

gram — gramma, ătis n twenty — viginti

75

LESSON 16

PRONOUNS. ADVERBS. CONJUNCTIONS

§ 107. Pronouns in pharmaceutical terminology

In pharmaceutical texts some forms of the personal, demonstrative, relative and

reflexive pronouns are used. Let you be acquainted first with the personal pronouns

forms:

Cases Case forms and their translation into English

Nom. ego — I nos — we tu — you vos — you

Gen. mei — of me nostri — of us

nostrum — from us

tui — of you vestri — of you

vestrum — from you

Dat. mihi — to me nobis — to us tibi — to you vobis — to you

Acc. me –me nos — us te — you vos — you

Abl. me — by me nobis — by us te — by you vobis — by you

As one can see at the table, there are two special forms of the Genitive plural,

they are used in the spoken ore narrative texts.

It was already mentioned above (§ 44) that in the Latin personal pronouns con-

nected grammatically with their verbs are usually omitted. The second special feature

of the Latin is absence of the personal pronouns of the 3rd person, instead of them

demonstrative pronouns are used (see below).

The expression pro me (personally for me) is used in the prescription formulas.

Only one form of the reflexive pronoun is used — that of the Accusative singu-

lar form se in the expression per se — in natural state, non purified (literally «through

itself»).

In the Latin language several forms of demonstrative pronouns are used. We

have to consider only two forms: hic, haec, hoc and is, ea, id. The first form corre-

sponds to the English «this» and the second one — to the «that». The same pronouns

can carry out the function of personal pronouns of the 3-rd person. In Latin, there are

three gender forms of these two demonstrative pronouns: is/hic are of masculine gen-

der, ea/haec are of feminine gender, id/hoc are of neutral one. Gender forms have also

the relative pronoun qui, quae, quod («which»): qui is of masculine gender, quae of

feminine and quod of the neutral one.

Declension of gender forms is, ea, id

Gender

Cases

Singulār Plurāl

m f n m f n

Nom. is ea id ei (ii) eae ea

Gen. ejus eōrum eārum eōrum

Dat. ei eis (iis)

Acc. eum eam id eos eas ea

Abl. eo ea eo eis (iis)

It is to pay attention that all three gender forms have equal case forms in the

Genitive and Dative singular.

Declension of gender forms hic, haec, hoc

76

Gender

Cases

Singulār Plurāl

m f n m f n

Nom. hic haec hoc hi hae haec

Gen. hujus horum harum horum

Dat. huic his

Acc. hunc hanc hoc hos has haec

Abl. hoc hac hoc his

Like the previous pronoun, the pronoun hic, haec, hoc has the equal case forms

in the Genitive and Dative singular.

Declension of gender forms qui, quae, quod

Gender

Cases

Singulār Plurāl

m f n m f n

Nom. qui quae quod qui quae quae

Gen. cujus quorum quarum quorum

Dat. cui quibus

Acc. quem quam quod quos quas quae

Abl. quo qua quo quibus

And again we see that pronoun qui, quae, quod like the previous ones has

equal case forms in the Genitive and Dative singular.

§ 108. Adverbs

Adverbs in Latin are formed from adjectives, nouns, verbs or they exist primor-

dially as independent words.

Adverbs being formed from adjectives are the most numerous. They have usually

ending –e:

Adjective Derivative adverb

aseptĭcus, a, um — aseptic aseptĭce — aseptically

exactus, a, um — exact exacte — exactly

frigĭdus, a, um — cold frigĭde — coldly, without warming

Some derivative adverbs have ending -o:

Adjective Derivative adverb

citus, a, um — quick cito — quickly

creber, bra, brum — frequent crebro — frequently

rarus, a, um — rare raro — seldom

Adverbs can be formed from adjectives of the 3-rd declension by adding to the

adjective stem the suffix –ĭter, and from participles of present time by adding to parti-

ciple stem the suffix –er:

Adjective Derivative adverb

celer, ĕris, ĕre — quick celerĭter — quickly

simplex, ĭcis — simple simplicĭter — simply

sterĭlis, e — sterile sterilĭter — sterily

permănens, ntis — constant, permanent permanenter — constantly, permanently

77

Some adverbs are made from noun, adjective and verb stem with the aid of suf-

fix –tim:

Initial word Derivation stem Derivative adverb

pars, partis f — part part- partim — partly

paulus, a, um — little paul- paulātim — little by little

separāre — to separate separa- separātim — separately

Accusative singular forms of neutral gender can be used as adverbs, too:

Initial adjective form Acc. sing. form of neutral gender as adjective

difficĭlis, e — difficult difficĭle — difficult, hard

facĭlis, e — easy facĭle — easely

multus, a, um — many, numerous multum — many, much

Examples of primordially independent adverbs

diu — long, for a long time nunc — now

deinde — then saepe — often

interdum — sometimes semper — always

One should especially memorize the following adverbs widely used in pharma-

ceutical terminology:

statim — immediately, cito — quickly, citissĭme — most quickly

quantum satis — in sufficient amount.

§ 109. Conjunctions

Most used conjunctions in pharmaceutical terminology are the following:

1) et — and

2) aut, seu, vel — or. The difference in usage of these forms is the following.

Conjunctions aut is put between two objects (drug, drug form etc) if there is a

problem of choice: Mentha aut Eucalyptus — mint or eucalyptus.

Conjunction seu is put between two synonym objects:

Acĭdum ascorbinĭcum seu Vitamīnum C — ascorbic acid or vitamin C.

Conjunction vel is put between two drug names which are quite similar in their

medical effect: Tinctūra Valeriānae vel Tinctūra Convallariae — valerian tincture or

lily of the valley tincture.

§ 110. Word building elements (part 13)

Word building ele-

ments and their ety-

mology

Pharmaceutical or

therapeutic infor-

mation

Examples and ex-

ceptions

English equiva-

lents with black

tipped word

building element

cyst(o)- from the Greek

kýstis bladder

means making effect on

the urinary system

or regulating metabolic

processes

Cysteīnum, i n

Cystenālum, i n

cystein

cystenal

leuc(o)-, leuk(o)- from

the Greek leukós white

means regulating meta-

bolic processes con-

nected with leucocytes

Leucogĕnum, i n

Leukomycīnum, i n

leucogen

leukomycin

78

lys-, lysin- from the

Greek lýsis discharge,

liberation, disintegra-

tion

means 1) making anti-

septic effect 2) regulat-

ing metabolic processes

Balўsum, i n

Cerebrolysīnum, i n

Lysocīmum, i n

balys

cerebrolysin lyso-

cim

lyt-, lytin-, -lytĭc- —

from the Greek lytikós

deliberating, removing

deliberation from any

pathogenic or patholog-

ical factor

Broncholytīnum, i n

bacteriolytĭcus,

a, um

spasmolytĭcus, a, um

broncholytin

bacteriolytic

spasmolytic

ozo- from the Greek

ózo

to smell

medicine prepared of

ozokerite and used as

analgesic and anti-

inflammatory means

Ozokerafīnum, i n

Ozokeralīnum, i n

ozokerafin

ozokeralin

plat(o)- from the

French platine plati-

num from the Spain

plátina flat silver <

Greek platýs flat, wide

medicine prepared from

platinum

Cisplatīnum, i n

Carboplatīnum, i n

cisplatin

carboplatin

spasm(o)- from the

Greek spasmós spasm,

cramp

antispasmodic or anti-

convulsant means

Contraspasmīnum,

i n

Spasmalgōnum, i n

contraspasmin

spasmalgon

antispasmodic

spast-, spastic- from

the Greek spastikós

drawing in

antispasmodic or anti-

convulsant means

Spastīnum, i n

antispastĭcus, a, um

antispasmatĭcus, a,

um

spastin

antispastic

§ 111. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form and translate the terms into Latin:

these finest powders, this diluted solution, two phials of this decoction, drugs

with these components, the form of these tablets, without this color, tinctures of these

herbs, medicine for this child, in these ointments

2. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into English:

1. Cysteinum est aminoacĭdum, quod juvat permutatiōnem materiārum in organ-

ismo. 2. Hic pulvis albus crystallisātus cum odōre specifĭco est Leucogĕnum, qui ut

stimulātor leucopoësis adhibētur. 3. Ozokerītum medicināle est massa ceriformis, quae

Paraffīnum, olea mineralia, pices et alias substantias contĭnet. 4. Aegrōtus antepōnit

emĕre medicamenta, nomĭna quorum ei nota sunt. 5. Recĭpe hanc mixtūram and adde

guttas V olei Anīsi.

3. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into Latin:

1. Ozokerafin is used as an anti-flammatory and an analgesic medicine for epi-

dermal applications. 2. Lysocim destroys polysaccharides of microbial envelopment.

3. Broncholytin is administered as an antitussive means and as a bronchodilator. 4. At

that pharmacy all necessary drugs are always proposed. 5. A part of skin is first lubri-

cated with an antiseptic and then an injection is given into this area.

79

Dictionaries to the lesson 16 Latin–English vocabulary

aminoacĭdum, i n — amino acid minerālis, e — mineral

Anīsum, i n — anise notus, a, um — known

ceriformis, e — cereous organismus, i m — organism

crystallisātus, a, um — crystalline Ozokerītum, i n — ozokerite

Cysteinum, i n — cystein Paraffīnum, i n — paraffin

hic, haec, hoc — this permutatio, ōnis f — exchange

is, ea, id — that pix, picis f — resin

juvo, juvi, jutum, āre 1 (+Acc.) –

to promote

qui, quae, quod –which

skin — cutis, is f

Leucogĕnum, i n — leucogen specifĭcus, a, um — specific

leucopoësis, is f — leucocytopoesis, for-

mation of leucocytes

stimulātor, ōris m — stimulator

English–Latin glossary

all — omnis, e epidermal — epidermālis, e

always — semper first — prius

analgesic — analgetĭcus, a, um to lubricate — lino, livi, litum, ĕre 3

anti-flammatory — antiphlogistĭcus, a, um lysocim — Lysocīmum, i n

antitussive — antitussīvus, a, um microbial — microbĭcus, a, um

application — applicatio, ōnis f pharmacy — officīna, ae f

bronchodilatator — bronchodilatātor, ōris m polysaccharide — polysaccharīdum, i n

broncholytin — Broncholytīnum, i n to propose — propōno, proposui,

proposĭtum, ĕre 3 component — componentum, i n

to destroy — destruo, destruxi, destructum,

ĕre 3

that — is, ea, id

then — deinde

envelopment — involucrum, i n this — hic, haec, hoc

LESSON 17

LATIN CHEMICAL TERMINOLOGY. NAMES OF CHEMICAL ELEMENTS,

ACIDS AND OXIDES.

§ 112. Names of chemical elements

Latin names of chemical elements are, as a rule, nouns of the second declension

and of the neutral gender beginning always with a capital letter:

Aluminium, i n — aluminium; Ferrum, i n — iron; Zincum, i n — zinc.

Nouns of two chemical elements are exception to this rule:

Phosphŏrus, i m — phosphorus

Sulfur, ŭris n — sulphur (in American English the spelling is sulfur).

Some elements have double names:

fluorine — Fluōrum, i n = Phthorum, i n

magnesium — Magnium, i n = Magnesium, i n.

See the chemical element names of most common usage in the table below:

80

Latin chemical

symbols Latin names English names

Al Aluminium aluminium

Ag Argentum silver

As Arsenĭcum arsenic

Au Aurum gold

Ba Barium barium

Bi Bismŭthum bismuth

Br Bromum bromine

Ca Calcium calcium

C Carboneum carbon

Cl Chlorum chlorine

Cu Cuprum copper

Fe Ferrum iron

F Fluōrum seu Phthorum fluorine

Hg Hydrargўrum mercury

H Hydrogenium hydrogen

I Iōdum iodine

K Kalium potassium

Li Lithium lithium

Mg Magnium seu Magnesium magnesium

Mn Mangănum manganese

Na Natrium sodium

N Nitrogenium nitrogen

O Oxygenium oxygen

Pb Plumbum lead

P Phosphŏrus phosphorus

Si Silicium silicon

S Sulfur sulphur (sulfur)

Zn Zincum zinc

§ 113. Latin names of acids

Every Latin acid name consists of the noun «acĭdum» (acid) and an adjective of

the first group with the ending –um in accordance with the rules of grammar agree-

ment. One should, hereby, pay attention, that in the dictionary form, both noun and ad-

jective are written with a small letter, but in the combination with adjectives the noun

acĭdum is written with a capital letter: acĭdum, i n — acid borĭcus, a, um — boric, but:

Acĭdum borĭcum

There are three variants of Latin acid names. The first two variants concern the

names of acids which include oxygen, the last one — the names of acids without oxy-

gen.

In the first variant, when the acid contains the greatest amount of oxygen, the

suffix -ic- and the ending -um are added to the stem of a chemical element. English

equivalents of these Latin adjectives have the suffix –ic as a final element:

81

Latin noun of

chemical ele-

ment

The

stem

Latin adjective

indicating the acid

The full Latin name

of the acid

The full Eng-

lish name of

the acid

Sulfur, ŭris n

(sulphur)

sulfur- sulfurĭcus, a, um Acĭdum sulfurĭcum

(H2SO4)

sulphuric acid

The same way of acid names building is used, when names of organic acids are

formed:

Latin noun and its

meaning

The

stem

Latin adjective

indicating the acid

The full Latin name

of the acid

The full Eng-

lish name of

the acid

lac, lactis n (milk) lact- lactĭcus, a, um Acĭdum lactĭcum

(C3H4O3)

lactic acid

In the second variant, when an acid of the same element contains lesser amount of

oxygen, the suffix -os- is used. In this case English equivalents have the ending –ous:

Latin noun

and its mean-

ing

The

stem

Latin adjective

indicating the ac-

id

The full Latin

name of the acid

The full English

name of the acid

Sulfur, ŭris n

(sulphur)

sulfur- sulfurōsus, a, um Acĭdum sul-

furōsum (H2SO3)

sulphurous acid

In the third variant, when an acid doesn’t contain oxygen, the prefix hydro- and

the suffix –ic- are added to the stem:

Latin noun The

stem

Latin adjective

indicating the acid

The full Latin name

of the acid

The full English

name of the acid

Sulfur, ŭris n sulfur- hydrosulfurĭcus, a,

um

Acĭdum hydrosul-

furĭcum (H2S)

hydrosulphuric

acid

One should remember that in acid names (as well as in salt names) formed from

the noun Nitrogenium only a part of the stem is used — nitr:

Acĭdum nitrĭcum — nitric acid Acĭdum nitrōsum — nitrous acid

§ 114. Latin names of oxides, hydroxides, peroxides

Latin names of oxides, hydroxides, peroxides consist of two words. The first

one is always the Genitive form of a chemical element, and then the Nominative form

oxўdum (hydroxўdum, peroxўdum) follows:

Zinci oxўdum — zinc oxide

Aluminii hydroxўdum — aluminum hydroxide

Hydrogenii peroxўdum — hydrogen peroxide.

The names oxўdum, hydroxўdum, peroxўdum are nouns of the neutral gender of

the second declension:

oxўdum, i n; hydroxўdum, i n; peroxўdum, i n.

82

§ 115. Word building elements reflecting chemical information (Part 14)

Word building elements

and their etymology Meaning Latin examples

English equivalents

with black tipped

word building ele-

ment

-az-, -(a)zid-,

-(a)zin-, -(a)zol-,

-(a)zon- from the French

azote nitro- gen < Greek

prefix a-(absens, denying)

and zóon life

presence of nitro-

gen in the hetero-

cyclic compounds

Azaleptīnum, i n

Phthivazīdum, i n

Sulfapyridazīnum,

i n

Norsulfazōlum, i n

Sibazōnum, i n

azaleptin

phthivazid

sulphapyridazin

norsulphazol

sibazon

-benz- from the late Latin

benzoe < the shorted Arabi-

an (Iu)ban gavi incense of

Java

presence of ben-

zene ring

Benzohexonium, i

n

benzoĭcus, a, um

benzohexon

benzoic

-cyan- from the Greek

kýanos dark blue

cyanic acid, its an-

ions or a cyan

group

Cyanoco-

balamīnum, i n

cyanĭdum, i n

cyanocobalamine

cyanide

-hydr-, -hyd- from the

Greek hýdor water

presence of hydro-

gen, water or a hy-

droxyl group

Hydrogenium, i n

Formaldehўdum, i

n

hydrogen

formaldehyde

-naphth- from the Persian

through Greek naphtha pe-

troleum

products of petro-

leum

Naphthalānum, i n

Naphthyzīnum, i n

naphthalan

naphthyzin

-oxy- from the Greek oxýs

sharp

presence of oxygen

and its compounds

Chinoxydīnum, i n

Oxylidīnum, i n

chinoxydin

oxylidin

-phtha(l)- from the Persian

through Greek naphtha pe-

troleum

derivatives of

phthalic acid

Phthalazōlum, i n

Phthazōlum, i n

phthalazol

phthazol

-phthor- from the Greek

phthóros destruction, ruin

presence of fluo-

rine compounds

Phthorocortum, i n

Phthoracizīnum, i

n

phthorocort

phthoracizin

-sulf- from the Latin sulfur,

ŭris n sulphur

presence of sul-

phur or its deriva-

tives

Norsulfazōlum, i n

sulfas, ātis m

norsulphazol

sulphate

-thi(o)- from the Greek

theíon sulphur

presence of atom

sulphur in the

names of thiosalts

and thioacids

Thiopentālum, i n

thiosulfas, ātis m

thiopental

thiosulphate

-yl- from the Greek hýle

material, substance

presence of carbo-

hyd- rogenic radi-

cals

Benzylpeni-

cillīnum, i n

salicylĭcus, a, um

benzylpenicillin

salicylic

-zep- (-zepām-) — from

the name Diazepāmum,

where -az- signifies pres-

ence of nitrogen in the het-

ero- cyclic compounds

presence of deriva-

tives of diazepam

in the tranquilizer

names

Chlozepīdum, i n

Nozepāmum, i n

chlozepid

nozepam

83

§ 116. Exercises

1. Write down the dictionary form and translate the terms into Latin:

1) pure and radioactive phosphorus 2) yellow purified sulphur 3) simple and

compound lead plasters 5) anhydrous arsenous acid 6) suspension of aluminium hy-

droxide 7) white sedimentary mercury 8) concentrated hydrochloric acid 9) powder of

citric acid 10) concentrated solution of hydrogen peroxide or perhydrol 11) crystal

carbolic acid

2. Write down the dictionary form and translate the sentences into English:

1. Paracetamōlum, CoffeInum et remedia antihistaminĭca augent pericŭlum ef-

fectuum adjunctōrum Acĭdi acetylsalicylĭci. 2. Acĭdum hydrochlorĭcum dilūtum par-

tem unam Acĭdi hydrochlorĭci puri et partes duas Aquae destillātae inclūdit. 3. In-

halatiōnes Oxygenii late adhibentur ad varios morbos, qui hypoxiā comitantur. 4. Alu-

minii hydroxўdum est componentum cardinale Almagēli, quod est unum e primis

praeparātis antacĭdis.

3. Write down the dictionary form and translate the sentences into Latin:

1. Maalox is a combined medicine which contains approximately equal parts of

aluminium hydroxide and magnium hydroxide. 2. Spirituous solution of iodine or tinc-

ture of iodine is administered for external use as an antiseptic, irritant and distractive

agent. 3. Phytin is a compound organic substance in form of a white powder from

which are produced tablets. 5. Phosphathiamin does not differ from other synthetic vit-

amin B1 preparations by its basic proprieties.

Dictionaries to the lesson 17 Latin–English vocabulary

acetylsalicylĭcus, a, um — acetylsalicylic hydrochlorĭcus, a, um — hydrochloric

acidum, i n — acid hydroxўdum, i n — hydroxide

adjunctus, a, um (effectus) — side (effect) hypoxia, ae f — hypoxia, an insufficient

supply of O2 to the tissues

Almagēlum, i n — almagel late — wide, widely

Aluminium, i n — aluminium Oxygenium, i n — oxygen

antacĭdus, a, um — antacid Paracetamōlum, i n — paracetamol

augeo, auxi, auctum, ēre 2 — to raise pericŭlum, i n — danger, risk

cardinalis, e — basic praeparātum, i n — preparation

Coffeinum, i n — caffeine primus, a, um — first

comĭto, āvi, ātum, āre 1 — to accompany purus, a, um — pure

unus, a, um — one

English–Latin glossary

agent — agens, ntis m magnium — Magnium, i n; Magnesium,

i n anhydrous — anhydrĭcus, a, um

approximately — circĭter mercury — Hydrargўrum, i n

arsenous — arsenicōsus, a, um organic — organĭcus, a, um

basic — cardinālis, e; principālis, e perhydrol — Perhydrōlum, i n

combined — combinātus, a, um peroxide — peroxўdum, i n

compound — composĭtus, a, um plaster — emplastrum, i n

concentrated — concentrātus, a, um phosphorus — Phosphŏrus, i m

84

crystal — crystallisātus, a, um phosphothiamine — Phosphothiamīnum,

i n to differ — distinguo, distinxi, distinctum, ĕre

3 (in Passive voice + Ablat.) phytin — Phytīnum, i n

distractive — distractīvus, a, um radioactive — radioactīvus, a, um

iodine — Iōdum, i n sedimentary — praecipitātus, a, um

irritant — irrĭtans, ntis spirituous — spirituōsus, a, um

its — ejus (is, ea, id) substance — substantia, ae f

lead — Plumbum, i n sulphur — Sulfur, ŭris n

maalox — Maaloxum, i n synthetic — synthetĭcus, a, um

LESSON 18

LATIN CHEMICAL TERMINOLOGY. SALT NAMES (PART 1)

§ 117. Names of anions including oxygen and those without oxygen

Latin names of salts consist of two parts. First goes the Genitive case of a cation

(a chemical element name or, more seldom, a drug name), at the second place is an an-

ion in the Nominative case. Anion names are always written with a small letter. If we

considerate anions derivative of acids which contain oxygen of different degrees, so

two variants of these anions are distinguished.

1. Names of anions containing the greatest amount of oxygen which are masculine

nouns of the third declension with the endings –as in the Nominative singular case and

ending –ātis in the Genitive singular case: Na2SO4 — Natrii sulfas → sulfas, ātis m:

Chemical

symbol

of the salt

Latin name

of the salt

The anion name

and its

dictionary form

English equiva-

lent of the anion

name

English equivalent

of the salt name

Na2SO4 Natrii sulfas sulfas, ātis m sulphate sodium sulphate

NaNO3 Natrii nitras nitras, ātis m nitrate sodium nitrate

So, one can very easy find out the correlation between English and Latin anion

names of the first group: English ending -ate corresponds to Latin ending -as.

In this way we may at once determine Latin equivalents of English anions without ana-

lyzing their chemical composition, including all anions of organic acids having the

ending -ate. too:

sodium salicylate — Natrii salicylas

testosterone propionate — Testosterōni propionas

2. Names of anions containing a lesser amount of oxygen are masculine nouns of

the third declension with the endings –is in the Nominative singular case and –ītis in the

Genitive singular case: Na2SO3 — Natrii sulfis → sulfis, ītis m:

Chemical

symbol

of the salt

Latin name

of the salt

The anion name

and its

dictionary form

English equiva-

lent

of the anion

name

English equiva-

lent

of the salt name

Na2SO3 Natrii sulfis sulfis, ītis m sulphite sodium sulphite

NaNO2 Natrii nitris nitris, ītis m nitrite sodium nitrite

85

As you can see, Latin anion ending -is corresponds to the English anion ending

–ite, and it permits, as below, to determine any necessary equivalent taking, however,

into consideration the spelling of each separate word.

§ 118. Latin names of salts, whose anions don’t contain oxygen

Names of anions which don’t contain oxygen are Neutral nouns of the second

declension with the suffix –id- and the ending –um:

Chemical

symbol

of the

salt

Latin name

of the salt

The anion

name and its

dictionary

form

English

equivalent

of the anion

name

English equiva-

lent

of the salt name

Na2S Natrii sulfĭdum sulfĭdum, i n sulphide sodium sulphide

NaCl Natrii chlorĭdum chlorĭdum, i n chloride sodium chloride

So complex ending -ĭdum of Latin anions which don’t contain oxygen corre-

sponds to the English ending -ide in the anions of the similar chemical compound.

And to sum up: if you remember the endings of three seen above variants of

Latin anions and if you know which Latin anion ending corresponds to the English

one, you needn’t know the chemical compound of any salt to express correctly both

English and Latin salt name.

§ 119. Word building elements (Part 15)

Word building el-

ements and their

etymology

Meaning Latin examples

and exceptions

English equivalents

with black tipped

word building ele-

ment

-aeth- from the

Greek aithér

air, sky

presence of ethyl

group

aethylĭcus, a, um

Aethynālum, i n

But: etacrynĭcus, a, um

ethylic

ethynal

etacrynic

-meth- from the

Greek méthy wine

presence of methyl

group

Methylēnum, i n

Methylium, i n

methylen

methyl

-morph- from the

Greek morphé form,

shape

Analgesic means

derivative of mor-

phine

Apomorphīnum, i n

Morpholongum, i n

apomorphin

morpholong

-phen- from the

Greek pháinomai

to shine

presence of phenyl

group

Phenōlum,i n

Phenacetīnum, i n

phenol

phenacetin

§ 120. Exercises

1. Write down the dictionary form and translate the terms into Latin:

hydrocortisone acetate; calcium chloride; mercury cyanide; testosterone propio-

nate; ephedrine hydrochloride; potassium arsenite; ethacridine lactate; oleandomycin

phosphate; copper citrate; etacrynic acid, oxytetracyclin dihydrate

2. Write down the dictionary form and translate the sentences into English:

1. Ad deminutiōnem effectuum adjunctōrum Kanamycīni sulfātis praescriptio

Calcii pantothenātis commendatur. 2. Magnii carbōnas adhibētur ad usum externum ut

aspersio et ad usum internum pro deminutione aciditātis succi gastrĭci. 3. Suspensio

86

Phenoxymethylpenicillīni parātur in mixtiōne cum Acĭdo citrĭco, Natrii benzoāte, es-

sentiā Rubi idaei et Sacchăro. 4. Apomorphīni hydrochlorĭdum adhibētur ut remedium

vomĭcum pro evocatiōne celerrima e gastre materiārum toxicārum.

3. Write down the dictionary form and translate the sentences into Latin:

1. Hydrocortisone acetate is introduced by a dropper in case of acute allergic re-

actions. 2. Etacrynic acid is administered in edema for the patients with the insuffi-

ciency of the blood circulation. 3. Gentamycin sulphate is the most effective medicine

for grave purulent infections. 4. The preparation «Magnium plus» is produced in the

form of effervescent tablets which contain magnium carbonate 0.1g, magnium lactate

0.2 g and some vitamins.

Dictionaries to the lesson 18

Latin–English vocabulary

acidĭtas, ātis f — acidity evocatio, ōnis f (any food from the stom-

ach) — removal

Apomorphīnum, i n — apomorphin gastrĭcus, a, um — gastric

aspersio, ōnis f — aspersion hydrochlorĭdum, i n — hydrochloride

benzoas, ātis m — benzoate Kanamycīnum, i n — kanamycin

carbōnas, ātis m — carbonate pantothĕnas, ātis m — pantothenate

citrĭcus, a, um — citric Phenoxymethylpenicillīnum, i n —

phenoxymethylpenicillin commendo, āvi, ātum, āre 1 –

to recommend sulfas, ātis m — sulfate

deminutio, ōnis f — diminution toxĭcus, a, um — toxic

essentia, ae f — essence vomĭcus, a, um — vomitive

English–Latin glossary

acetate — acētas , ātis m circulation — circulatio, ōnis f

acute — acūtus, a, um etacrynic — etacrynĭcus, a, um

arsenite — arsēnis, ītis m ethacridine — Aethacridīnum, i n

by — ope (+ Genitive) gentamycin — Gentamycīnum, i n

carbonate — carbōnas, ātis m hydrocortisone — Hydrocortisōnum, i n

case — casus, us m infection — infectio, ōnis f

chloride — chlorĭdum, i n insufficiency — insufficientia, ae f

copper — Cuprum, i n lactate — lactas, ātis m

cyanide — cyanĭdum, i n oleandomycin — Oleandomycīnum, i n

dihydrate — dihўdras, ātis m oxytetracyclin — Oxytetracyclīnum, i n

dropper — guttātor, ōris m phosphate — phosphas, ātis m

edema — oedēma, ătis n propionate — propiōnas, ātis m

effervescent — effervescens, ntis purulent — purulentus, a, um

effective — effĭcax, ācis sulphate — sulfas, ātis m

ephedrine — Ephedrīnum, i n testosterone — Testosterōnum, i n

87

LESSON 19

LATIN SALT NAMES (PART 2)

§ 121. Latin anion names in basic and acid salts

Latin anion names in basic salts are formed with the aid of prefix sub-:

basic bismuth nitrate — Bismŭthi subnĭtras

basic aluminium acetate — Aluminii subacētas

Latin anion names in acid salts are formed with the aid of prefix hydro-:

sodium acid carbonate — Natrii hydrocarbōnas

ethylmorphin acid chloride — Aethylmorphīni hydrochlorĭdum

Attention! In the Latin equivalent of the name caffeine sodium benzoate two first

words make a two-component cation in which the first component Coffeīnum is com-

bined by a hyphen with its second cation part natrii and the anion benzoas follows this

cation like all salt names:

caffeine sodium benzoate — Coffeīnum-natrii benzоas (Gen. sing. — Coffeīni-

natrii benzoātis).

§ 122. Two-component names of potassium and sodium salts

Two-component Latin names of potassium and sodium neutral gender noun

salts are written with a hyphen. Each component of such a name is a neutral gender

noun of the second declension. The second component following after the hyphen is

written with the small letter. In the dictionary form, after the two-component Nomina-

tive cases the ending –i and the gender sign n follows. English equivalents of these

terms are written without hyphen:

Sulfacÿlum-natrium, i (Sulfacÿli-natrii) n — sulphacyl sodium

Benzylpenicillīnum-kalium, i (Benzylpenicillīni-kalii) n — benzylpenicillin po-

tassium

§ 123. Latin names of compound ethers

Names of compound ethers are composed like salt names: the first part with capital

letter is in the Genitive singular, the second one with small letter is in the Nominative:

amyl nitrite — Amylii nitris

benzyl benzoate — Benzylii benzoas

ethyl chloride — Aethylii chlorĭdum

methyl salicylate — Methylii salicÿlas

phenyl salicylate — Phenylii salicÿlas

First part of thise names is a neutral gender noun of the second declension with

suffix –yl- and with ending–ium:

Acetylium, i n — acethyl

Aethylium, i n — ethyl

Amylium, i n — amyl

Formylium, i n — formyl

Methylium, i n –metyl

Phenylium, i n — phenyl

After the form of these compound ethers the name Chlorāli hydras — chloral

hydrate is made up.

88

§ 124. Exercises

1. Write down the dictionary form and translate the terms into Latin:

amyl nitrite in ampoules; compound liniment of methyl salicylate; thiopental

sodium with sodium salicylate; basic bismuth nitrate with belladonna; ophthalmic

films with lidocaine hydrochloride; methyldopa solution with sodium bisulphate and a

conserving agent; tablets of ethylmorphin hydrochloride for adults; granules of ethazol

sodium for children; solution of basic aluminium acetate or Burow’s liquid; powder of

chloral hydrate for a solution

2. Write down the dictionary form and translate the sentences into English:

1. Methylii salicÿlas adhibētur in mixtiōne cum Chloroformio et oleis Tere-

binthĭnae et Hyoscyămi pro inunctiōne ad morbos articulatiōnum. 2. Benzylpeni-

cillīnum-natrium cito in sanguĭnem absorbētur post intraductiōnem intramusculārem.

3. In comparatiōne cum praeparātis antibacterialĭbus contemporaneis Phenylii salicÿlas

est non tam effĭcax, sed id est oligotoxĭcum et complicatiōnes non provŏcat.

4. Coffeīnum-natrii benzoas proprietatĭbus pharmacologĭcis analogĭcum est Coffeīno,

melius autem in aqua solvĭtur et citius ex organismo deducĭtur.

3. Write down the dictionary form and translate the sentences into Latin:

1. Grubs and adult individuals of scabies mite perish under the effect of medical

benzyl benzoate. 2. When taking bismuth salicylate the tongue of the patient takes a

dark coloration. 3. Oxacilline sodium keeps its activity in an acidic environment.

4. Sulphacyl sodium or sulphacyl soluble is used in ampoules for injections and in

form of ophthalmic drops.

Dictionaries to lesson 19

Latin–English vocabulary

absorbeo, absorpsi, absorptum, ēre

2 — to absorb

dedūco, deduxi, deductum, ĕre 3 — to take out

analogĭcus, a, um — analogous Hyoscyămus, i m — henbane

articulatio, ōnis f — joint inunctio, ōnis f — a medicine to be rubbed in

benzoas, ātis m — benzoate melius — better

Benzylpenicillīnum-natrium i n —

benzylpenicillin sodium

Methylium, i n — methyl

oligotoxĭcus, um — of low toxity

Chloroformium, i n — chloroform pharmacologĭcus, a, um — pharmacological

Coffeīni-natrium, Coffeīni-natrii n —

caffeine sodium

Phenylium , i n — phenyl

comparatio, ōnis f — comparison provŏco, āvi, ātum, āre 1 — to cause

complicatio, ōnis f — complication salicÿlas, ātis m — salicylate

contemporaneus, a, um — modern Terebinthĭna, ae f — turpentine

English–Latin glossary

acidic — acĭdus, a, um grub — larva, ae f

activitiy — activĭtas, ātis f hydrate — hydras, ātis m

amyl — Amylium, i n an individual — individuum, i n

benzoate — benzoas, ātis m lidocaine — Lidocaīnum, i n

benzyl — Benzylium, i n methyldopa — Methyldōpha, ae f

bismuth — Bismŭthum, i n mite — acărus, i m

89

bisulphate — bisulfas, ātis m nitrite — nitris, ītis m

Burow’s liquid — liquor (ōris m) Burōwi oxacilline — Oxacillīnum, i n

chloral — Chlorālum, i n to perish — pereo, perii, perĭtum, īre

coloration — coloratio, ōnis f scabies — scabies, ēi f

conserving — conservans, ntis soluble — solubĭlis, e

environment — circumjacentia, ium n (plur.) sulphacyl — Sulfacÿlum, i n

ethazol sodium — Aethazōlum-natrium, i n thiopental sodium — Thiopentālum-

natrium, i n ethylmorphin — Aethylmorphīnum, i n

tongue — lingua, ae f

LESSON 20

NAMES OF VITAMINS. NAMES OF HORMONE AND FERMENT PREPARATIONS.

DESIGNATION OF DURATION AND INTENSITY OF DRUG ACTION

§ 125. Names of vitamins

Term «vitamin » literally means «vital amine» (from the Latin vita, ae f life +

amīnum , i n amine , a derivative of the name ammonia). The Latin names of vitamins

consist of the word Vitamīnum (vitamīnum, i n) and a capital letter of the Latin alphabet

(A, B, C, D, E, K, P, U) which calls a group name of a vitamin:

Vitamīnum A — vitamin A; Vitamīnum С — vitamin С.

Names of some vitamins contain double capital letters:

Vitamīnum PP — vitamin PP.

Names of vitamins of a related chemically group contain a figure placed after

the letter symbol:

Vitamīnum B1– vitamin B1 Vitamīnum B2 — vitamin B2.

Each vitamin has also its one- word general name and one or two-word name

reflecting as usual the vitamin chemic structure. The table below contains the most

used names of vitamins:

Latin group and

general names of

vitamin

English group

and general

names of vitamin

Latin names reflecting

more detailed or syno-

nym vitamin name

English names re-

flecting more de-

tailed vitamin name

Vitamīnum A =

Retinōlum

vitamin A =

retinol

Retinōli acētas

Retinōli palmĭtas

retinol acetate

retinol palmate

Vitamīnum В1

=Thiamīnum

vitamin В1 =

thiamin

Thiamīni bromĭdum

Thiamīni chlorĭdum

Thiamīni nitras

Phosphothiamīnum

Benfothiaminum

thiamin bromide

thiamin chloride

thiamin nitrate

phosphothiamine

benfothiamine

Vitamīnum В2 =

Riboflavīnum

vitamin В2 = ri-

boflavin

Riboflavīnum-

mononucleatīdum

Flavinātum

riboflavin-

mononucleotide

flavinate

Vitamīnum B3

(=В5) =

Pantothenātes

vitamin B3 (=В5)

=

pantothenates

Calcii pantothĕnas calcium pantothenate

Vitamīnum В4 = vitamin В4 = cho- Cholīni chlorĭdum choline chloride

90

Cholīnum lin

Vitamīnum В6 =

Pyridoxīnum

vitamin В6 =

pyridoxin

Pyridoxīni hydro-

chlorĭdum

Pyridoxalphosphātum

pyridoxin acid chlo-

ride

pyridoxalphosphate

Vitamīnum В12 =

Cyanocobala-

minum

vitamin B 12 Cy-

anocobalamin

Oxycobalamīnum

Cobamamīdum

Vitohepātum

oxycobalamin

cobamamid

vitohepat

Vitamīnum В15 vitamin В15 Calcii pangămas calcium pangamate

Vitamīnum Вс vitamin Вс Acĭdum folĭcum

Calcium folinātum

folic acid

calcium folinate

Vitamīnum ВT =

Carnitīnum

vitamin ВT

= carnitine

Carnitīni chlorĭdum carnitine chloride

Vitamīnum С

vitamin С Acĭdum ascorbinĭcum

Galascorbīnum

ascorbic acid

galascorbin

Vitamīnum D2 vitamin D2 Ergocalciferōlum ergocalciferol

Vitamīnum D3

vitamin D3 Cholecalciferōlum

Vigantōlum

cholecalciferol

vigantol

Vitamīnum E

vitamin E

Alpha-Tocopherōli acētas alpha-Tocopherol ac-

etate

Vitamīnum K1 vitamin K1 Phytomenadiōnum phytomenadion

Vitamīnum K3 vitamin K3 Vikasōlum vikasol

Vitamīnum P =

flavonoīda

Vitamīnum P

=flavonoids

Rutīnum

Quercetīnum

rutin

quercetin

Vitamīnum PP

vitamin PP Acĭdum nicotinĭcum

Nicotinamīdum

nicotinic acid

nicotinamide

Vitamīnum U vitamin U Methylmethionin-sulfonii

chlorĭdum

methylmethionin-

sulphone chloride

As vitamin preparations fruit oils of some plants are used and mixtures of fruits

with berries as well, for example:

Oleum Rosae — dog rose oil

Species vitaminōsae №1 — vitamin species №1

Latin names of synthetic polyvitaminous preparations include usually the word

building element –vit-, Greek or Latin numerals and other words:

Heptavītum, i n — heptavit

Tetravītum, i n — tetravit

Undevītum, i n — undevit

Oligovitum, i n — oligovit

Сomplivītum, i n — complivit

Some names don’t include the word building element –vit-:

Accōlum, i n — accol

Vetorōnum, i n — vetoron

§ 126. Names of hormone preparations

91

Name hormone (hormōnum, i n) originates from the Greek verb hormáo (to set

in motion).

Hormone names are usually formed either from name of an organ elaborating

hormone or from name of organ to which the effect of hormone is directed:

Hydrocortisōnum, i n (hydrocortisone) — from cortex glandŭlae adrenālis –

cortex of adrenal gland

Thyreoidīnum, i n (thyreoidin) –from glandŭla thyreoidea — thyroid gland.

In formation of the female hormone names the word building elements –oestr-

(-estr) and –gest- are used.

In formation of the male hormone names the word building elements -andr-, -

ster-, -test-, -bol-, -prost- are used.

The information in details on these word building elements is presented in ta-

bles below.

§ 127. Names of ferment preparations

The term fermentum, i n ferment (literally an element of fermentation) origi-

nates from the Latin verb fermentāre to ferment which in its turn originates from the

Latin verb fervēre to boil. Another name of ferment is enzyme (enzÿmum, i n) originat-

ing from the Greek word zýme (a fermenting substance). From here the word building

elements -(en)zym- or — zy- are borrowed:

Solizÿmum, i n — solizyme, Enzystālum, i n — enzystal.

The most numerous Latin ferment name preparations include suffix –as- and

ending -um:

Collagenāsum, i n — collagenase

Cocarboxylāsum, i n — coxarboxylase

Ribonucleāsum, i n — ribonuclease.

Attention!

In the following names instead of suffix -as- the –az- is used:

Lydāzum, i n — lydaze

Nigedāzum, i n — nigedaze

Ronidāzum, i n — ronidaze.

In ferment preparation names the stems of main ferment name agent of diges-

tive tract are used, too:

peps- from pepsin (Pepsīnum, i n)

trips- from tripsin (Tripsīnum, i n)

pancreat- from pancreatin (Pancreatīnum, i n).

§ 128. Designation of the drug effect duration and intensity

In some contemporary drug names especially in the preparations of insulin, in

cardiovascular and gastrointestinal drug names special designations are used which

express information on drug duration or drug intensity effect.

Duration or slow-down of drug effect is expressed by the Latin adverb lente slow

(from the adjective lentus, a, um slow, slowed down), or by the Latin Participle of the past

completed tense prolongātum prolonged (from prolongātus, a, um prolonged):

Insulīnum lente MC — insulin lente MC

Kalipōzum prolongātum — kalipoz prolongatum.

92

It is to pay attention that words lente and prolongātum are not translated into

English and are considered as international pharmaceutical designations. As such des-

ignations which don’t need to be translated into Latin the following English words are

also used:

1) depot (from the Latin deposĭtus, a, um saved up): Andocor depot

2) long (from the Latin longus, a, um long): Adamon long

3) retard (from the Latin retardātus, a, um slowed down): Maycor retard

The middle duration of a drug effect is designed by the Latin adverb semilente

semi slow: Insulinum semilente — insulin semi slow.

The largest duration of a drug effect is designed by the Latin prefixes supra- or

ultra- with the meaning «extreme» and the adverb lente: Insulīnum supralente, In-

sulīnum ultralente.

In the English analogues prefixes suprа-, ultra jointed with the long and tard

are used: ultralong or ultratard (from the Latin longus, a, um long, and tardus, a, um

slow, slowed down): Insulīn Ultralong SMC, Insulin Ultratard HM.

The Latin adjectives forte strong and mite soft design stronger or softer phar-

maceutical effect because of the greater or lesser drug agent concentration:

Sustac-forte (a tablet contains 6, 4 mg of nitroglycerin)

Sustac-mite (a tablet contains 2, 6 mg of nitroglycerin).

Prefixes mini- (from the Latin minĭmus, a, um the least) and maxi (from the

Latin maxĭmus, a, um the greatest) are used for designation of the most rapid or the

most long drug effect:

Insulin minilente, Insulin maxirapid.

Designation rapid (from the Latin rapĭdus, a, um quick, rapid) is used as an

equivalent of the Latin forte: Insulīn rapid, Insulīn Maxirapid.

And once again: all the mentioned above Latin adjectives or adverbs (lente, semi-

lente, forte, mite, prolongātum) are not translated into English. English designations (long,

tard, ultralong, ultratard, rapid) are not translated into Latin as well. All these designations

are considered as international word building elements of drug names.

§ 129. Word building elements (Part 16)

Word building elements

and their etymology

Chemic or pharmaceu-

tical information Latin examples

English equiv-

alents with

black tipped

word building

element

-andr- from the Greek

anér, andrós man, male

male hormone prepara-

tions (androgens)

Methandros-

tenolōnum, i n

methandros-

tenolon

-as- a conventional letter

symbol for ferment prepa-

ration names

ferment preparations Ribonucleāsum, i n ribonuclease

-bol- from the Greek

anabolé throw upward

anabolics — synthetic

hor- mone prepara- tions

influencing intensive

protein building

Phenobolīnum, i n phenobolin

-cort-, -cortic- from the

Latin cortex, cortĭcis m

preparations of adrenal

gland cortex

Cortisōnum, i n cortison

93

cortex (of adrenal gland)

-gĕn- (in the Latin terms -

genus, a, um) from the

Greek genés

1) giving birth

2) happening because of

any reason

pointing out reasons or

results of an action

androgĕna, ōrum n

oestrogĕna, ōrum n

oncogĕnus, a, um

psychogĕnus, a, um

androgens

oestrogens

oncogenous,

producing tu-

mors, psycho-

genous, happen-

ing because of

mental reasons

-gest- from the Latin

gestāre to be pregnant

preparations produced

from corpora lutea

hormone

Progesterōnum, i n progesteron

-en(zym)-, -zyn-, -zy- from

the Greek zýme a ferment-

ing substance

preparations improving

digestion processes

Panzynormum, i n

Solizÿmum, i n

Enzystālum, i n

Emzÿmum, i n

panzynorm

solizyme

enzystal

enzyme

-oestr- (-estr) from the

Greek oístros gadfly

female hormone prepa-

rations

Synoestrōlum, i n synoestrol

-pancre-, -pan- from the

Latin pancreas, pancreătis

n pancreas (from the Greek

pas, pantós the hole + kré-

as flesh)

preparations improving

digestion processes

Pancreoflātum, i n

Pancurmenum, i n

pancreoflat

pancurmen

-peps-, -pept- (from the Greek pépsis

digestion or peptikós be-

longing to the digestion

preparations improving

digestion processes

Pepsidīlum, i n

Peptorānum, i n

pepsidil

peptoran

-prost- from the Latin

prostăta, ae f prostate

( from the Greek prostates

one standing before)

synthetic analogues of

prostaglandins, biolog-

ically active substances

which are numbered

among hormones

Prostaglandīnum,

i n

Prostandīnum, i n

prostaglandin

prostandin

-ster- from the Latin

steroīda steroids (from the

Greek stereós solid+ eidés

similar to

steroid hormone prepa-

rations

Testosterōnum, i n testosteron

-test- from the Latin testis

testicle

male hormone prepara-

tions

Testosterōnum, i n testosteron

-thyr(e)o- from the Latin

glandŭla thyr(e)oidea thy-

roid gland

preparations acting like

hormones of thyroid

gland

Thyroliberīnum, i n

Thyreocombum, i

n

Thyroliberin

thyreocomb

-tryps-, -psin- from the

Greek thrýpsis splitting

preparations splitting

products of protein dis-

integration

Chymopsīnum, i n

Trypsīnum, i n

chymopsin

trypsin

-vit- from the Latin vita, ae

f life

names of vitamin prep-

arations

Hendevītum, i n hendevit

94

§ 130. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form and translate the terms into Latin:

1) oily solution of retinol palmitate 2) folic acid in tablets 3) injections of calci-

um pantothenate 3) ophthalmic ointment of hydrocortisone acetate in tubes 4) powder

of ascorbic acid in little packets for internal use 5) tocopherol acetate in ampoules for

intramuscular introduction 6) 0.5 % spirituous solution of ergocalciferol 7) powder of

choline chloride in firmly corked phials 8) nicotinic acid tablets retard 9) preparation

thyreocomb or mixture of triiodthyronin, thyroxin and potassium iodide.

2. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into English:

1. Testoenātum, qui habet nomĭna analŏga Testosterōnum-depot et Testorōnum-

retard, est mixtio solutiōnum oleosārum Testosterōni oenanthātis et Testosterōni propi-

onātis. 2. Ergocalciferōlum accēdit in organismum homĭnis cum cibo, Cholecal-

ciferōlum sub cute producĭtur. 3. Cyanocobalamīnum continētur in varia quantitāte in

praeparātis medicinalĭbus acceptis ex hepăte animalium. 4. Oestradiōlum in forma ae-

thĕrum in textĭbus organismi practĭce non destruĭtur et cito et complēte absorbĭtur.

3. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into Latin:

1. Cortex of suprarenal glands elaborates a great amount of steroid hormones which

are named corticosteroids. 2. Conjugated estrogens are preparations containing a mix-

ture of estrogens of natural origin. 3. Methyltestosteron is a synthetic analogue of tes-

tosterone that has biological and medical proprieties of a natural hormone. 4. Lydaze

powder for injection is taken from a phial and after that it is dissolved in three millili-

ters of isotonic sodium chloride solution.

Dictionaries to the lesson 20

Latin–English vocabulary

accēdo, accessi, accessum, ĕre 3 — to come Pancreatīnum, i n — pancreatin

acceptus, a, um — received Pepsīnum, i n — pepsin

aether, ēris m — ether practĭce — practically

Cholecalciferōlum, i n — cholecalciferol prodūco, produxi, productun, ĕre

3 — to produce complēte — completely

Cyanocobalamīnum, i n — cyanocobalamin propiōnas, ătis m — propionate

destruo, destruxi, destructum, ĕre 3 –

to destroy

quantĭtas, ātis f — amount

Testoenatum, i n — testoenat

Ergocalciferōlum, i n — ergocalciferol Testosterōnum, i n — testosterone

habeo, habui, habĭtum, ēre 2 — to have Testosterōnum-depot, Testosterōni-

depot n — testosterone-depot nomen, ĭnis n — name

oenanthas, ātis m — oenanthate Testosterōnum-retard, Testosterōni-

retard n — testosterone-retard Oestradiōlum, i n — oestradiol

Trypsīnum, i n — trypsin

English–Latin glossary

choline — Cholīnum, i n lydaze — Lydāzum, i n

conjugated — conjugātus, a, um

to cork — obtūro, āvi, ātum, āre 1

methyltestosteron — Methyltestos-

terōnum, i n

95

corticosteroid — corticosteroīdum, i n to name — nomĭno, āvi, ātum, āre 1

to dissolve — dissolvo, dissolvi, dissolūtum,

ěre 3; solvo, solvi, solūtum, ĕre 3

origin — orīgo, ĭnis f

palmitate — palmĭtas, ātis m

to elaborate — elabŏro, āvi, ātum, āre 1 pantothenate — pantothĕnas, ātis m

ergocalciferol — Ergocalciferōlum, i n propriety — propriĕtas, ātis f

estrogen — oestrogĕnum, i n retinol — Retinōlum, i n

firmly — firmĭter steroid — steroīdum, i n

folic — folĭcus, a, um suprarenal — suprarenālis, e

gland — glandŭla, ae f thyreocomb — Thyreocombum, i n

hormone — hormōnum, i n thyroxin — Thyroxīnum, i n

hydrocortisone — Hydrocortisōnum, i n tocopherol — Tocopherōlum, i n

isotonic — isotonĭcus, a, um triiodthyronin — Triiodthyronīnum, i n

LESSON 21

LATIN BOTANICAL TERMINOLOGY. GENUS AND SPECIES NAMES IN BOTANIC. BOTANICAL NAMES IN PHARMACEUTICAL TERMS.

LATIN NAMES OF MEDICAL PLANT PARTS

§ 131. Common information on the Latin botanical terminology

The Latin botanical terminology includes names of plants and their parts. Scientific

names of plants are unified and are used according to rules of the Latin grammar and

spelling. Most names are borrowed from the Latin language, but there are numerous bor-

rowings from the Greek, sometimes from the Arabic or other languages, compare:

Althaea (from the Greek) — althea, marsh — mallow; Quercus (from the Lat-

in) — oak; Sophōra (from the Arabic) — Japanese pagoda tree; Camphŏra (from the

ancient Hindi) — camphor; Cassia (from the Hebrew) — cassia; Ipecacuānha (from a

local Brazilian name) — ipecacuanha; Belladonna (from the Italian) — belladonna.

§ 132. Botanical genus and species names of plants

Formation and usage of Latin plant names is regulated by the International Co-

dex of the Botanical Nomenclature, which is periodically revised. Plant names are pre-

sented here according the taxonomy (from the Greek táxis arrangement and nómos

law) created after the work of the Sweden scientist Carl Linne (1707–1778) «Species

plantarum» («The species of plants»). According taxonomy the binominal (from the

Latin binominālis consisting from two names) or binary (from the Latin binarius bina-

ry) principle of plants nominating is used. According this principle every plant names

consists from two parts.

Firs part is a genus name (nomen generĭcum). It is always expressed by one

word only that is by a name in the singular form or (rarely) by an adjective in the

Nominative case being in the role of a name:

Arnĭca, ae f — arnica Centaurea, ae f — bluebottle

Second part is a species name (nomen specifĭcum). This is so called generic

epithet or a generic definition. In this role mostly an adjective is acting, but also the

Genitive case of a name, a combination of the Nominative and Genitive cases an inde-

clinable noun may be used. In sum, five most used grammar models of botanical

names may be distinguished:

96

Model

type

Latin botanic

plant name

English equiva-

lent of the plant

Generic epithet form

I Atrŏpa belladonna Deadly nightshade A noun in form of the Nominative sin-

gular (Belladonna, ae f belladonna)

II Capsella bursa-

pastōris

Shepherd’s purse A combination of two names in the

Nominative and Genitive plural (bursa,

ae f purse; pastor, ōris (pastōris) m

shepherd)

III Theobrōma cacao Cocoa tree An indeclinable noun (Cacāo)

IV Primŭla veris Cowslip primrose A noun in form of Genitive singular

case (ver, veris n весна)

V Arnĭca montāna Mountain arnica Adjective (montāna from montānus, a,

um mountain) agreed with a noun

At the end of a botanical name usually the name of the person which first made

up the plant description (in a shorted form) is given. So, plant names have mostly the

letter L. that signifies name of Linne: Arnĭca montāna L.; Atrŏpa delladonna L.;

Primŭla veris L.

§ 133. Character features of botanic names usage in the pharmaceutical terms

There are five main models according which botanic names pass into the phar-

maceutical ones. If a botanic name belongs to models I, II, III, so a generic epithet as

pharmaceutical equivalent is used:

Model

type

Latin botanic name Pharmaceutical

equivalent

Example of a

pharmaceutical term

I Atrŏpa belladonna –

Deadly nightshade Belladonna Radīces Belladonnae –

Belladonna roots

II Capsella bursa-pastōris Bursa pastōris

Herba Bursae pastōris —

Shepherd’s purse herb

III Theobrōma cacāo — Co-

coa tree Cacāo Oleum Cacāo –

Cocoa oil

If a botanic name belongs to models IV и V, so its generic name as the phar-

maceutical equivalent is used:

Model

type

Latin botanical name Pharmaceutical

equivalent

Example of a

pharmaceutical term

IV Primŭla veris — Cowslip

primrose Primŭla Folia Primŭlae — Cow-

slip primrose leaves

V Arnĭca montāna — Moun-

tain arnica Arnĭca Flores Arnĭcae –

Flowers of arnica

The whole botanical name as a pharmaceutical equivalent is used if a plant is a

poisonous one:

Herba Adonĭdis vernalis — spring Adonis herb

Herba Ledi palustris — swamp ledum herb.

Sometimes, pharmaceutical names don’t coincident with their botanical equiva-

lents:

Botanic name Pharmaceutical name Examples

97

Brassĭca nigra — black

mustard

Sināpis, is f — mustard Oleum Sināpis aethereum — ether

mustard oil

Olea europaea — com-

mon olive

Olīva, ae f — olive Oleum Olivārum — olive oil

§ 134. Alkaloid and glycoside names

Medical plants are used as raw materials for producing specific chemical sub-

stances so called alkaloids and glycosides which are widely used in pharmaceutics.

The name alkaloids (alcaloīda) is formed by combining the late Latin word al-

kali (=alcali) alkali (from the Arabic al-qali ashes) and suffix -oīd-, originating from

the Greek noun eídоs appearance, likeness, similarity. Alkaloids are organic com-

pounds of mostly vegetable origin which influence vitally important systems of human

body.

The name glycosides (glycosīda) is formed by combining the stem of the name

glucōsum glucose (from the Greek glykýs sweet) and suffix -īd- originating from the

Greek noun eídоs appearance, likeness, similarity. Glycosides are organic compounds

of mostly vegetable origin molecules of which are formed by glycon (a sugar part) and

aglycon (non sugar part).

The Latin names of alkaloids and glycosides are formed from the stem of genus

name or generic epithet name by adding suffix -īn-:

Botanic name Stem of noun Name of alkaloid of glycoside

Ephĕdra equisetīna (horstail

ephedra)

Ephedr- Ephedrīnum, i n ephedrin

Strophanthus Kombe (stro-

phanthus Kombe)

Strophanth- Strophanthīnum, i n strophanthin

§ 135. Systematization of plant part names

Plant part is written in the dictionary form with small letter, but at the term be-

ginning — with capital one, compare: flos, floris m — flower, but: Flores Chamomil-

lae — chamomile flowers.

The most used plant part names are presented in the table below:

Latin name English equivalent Latin name English equivalent

bacca, ae f berry herba, ae f herb

caput, ĭtis n head radix, īcis f root

cormus, i m sprout, shoot rhizōma, ătis n rhizome

cortex, ĭcis m bark semen, ĭnis n seed

flos, floris m flower stigma, ătis n stigma

folium, i n 1) leaf 2) pine-needle strobĭlus, i m cone

fructus, us m fruit tuber, ĕris n tuber

gemma, ae f bud turio, ōnis m bud (of pine)

§ 136. Word building elements (part 17)

Word building element

and its etymology

Pharmaceutical or

therapeutic infor-

mation

Latin examples

English equiva-

lents with black

tipped word build-

ing element

98

camph- from the Latin

camphŏra originating

from the ancient Hindu

кarpuras resin

analeptics (from the

Greek analeptikós –

recovering, repair-

ing)

Camphŏra, ae f

Camphomēnum, i n

camphor cam-

phomen

ephedr-, eph-, phedr- from the Greek ephédra

ephedra

means stimulating

adrenoreceptors

Ephedrīnum, i n The-

ophedrīnum, i n

ephedrine

theophedrin

anth- from the Greek

ánthos flower

belonging to vegeta-

ble alkaloids and

glycosides with a

large spectrum of

influencing organism

Helianthus, i m sunflower

glyc(y)- from the Greek

glykýs sweet

Glycīnum, i n

Glycyrrhiza, ae f

glycin

licorice

phyll- from the Greek

phýllon leaf

Euphyllīnum, i n euphylline

phyt- from the Greek

phytón plant

Phytoferōlum, i n

Phytolysīnum, i n

phytoferol

phytolysin

stroph- from the Greek

strophé twist

Strophanthus, i m

Strophanthīnum, i n

strophanthus

strophanthin

the(o)- 1) from the

Greek theós god (in the

name Theobrōma)

2) from the latinized

Chinese thea tea

Theobromīnum, i n

Theophyllīnum, i n

Thepaphyllīnum, i n

theobromin

theophyllin

thepaphyllin

-trŏpus, a, um from the

Greek trópos direction

direction of any ac-

tion

myotrŏpus, a, um

nootrŏpus, a, um

myotropic

nootropic

thym- from the Latin

thymus, i m thymus orig-

inating from the Greek

thýmos thyme

preparations stimu-

lating immunity pro-

cesses

Thymalīnum, i n

Thymōlum, i n

Thymoptīnum, i n

thymalin

thymol

thymoptin

§ 137. Exercises

1. Determine the pharmaceutical equivalents of the given botanical names and

make up the following pharmaceutical terms:

1. Adonis vernālis (herb, infusion of herb, dry extract)

2. Acŏrus cаlămus (powdery rhizome, infusion of rhizomes)

3. Atrŏpa belladonna (leaves, dry extract, thick extract)

5. Brassĭca nigra (oil, seeds, mustard plasters)

6. Capsella bursa-pastōris (herb, liquid extract, infusion of herb)

7. Cassia acutifolia (leaves, tablets of dry extract)

8. Panax ginseng (root, infusion)

9. Primŭla veris (powdery leaves, rhizome with roots)

10. Theobrōma cacāo (butter for suppositories)

11. Vaccinium myrtillus (fruits, decoction of fruits)

2. Give the dictionary form of each word and translate the sentences into English:

1. Galanthamīnum est alcaloīdum ex tuberĭbus Galanthi Woronŏwi elicĭtum,

quod in aliis quoque speciēbus Galanthi continētur. 2. Atropīnum in forma Atropīni

sulfatis in variis regionĭbus medicīnae nostri tempōris adhibētur. 3. Pulvis antiasth-

matĭcus (alĭter species antiasthmatĭcae) inclūdit duae partes foliōrum Belladonnae, par-

99

tem unam Hyoscyămi, Stramonii partes sex, Natrii nitrātis partem unam. 4. Multa al-

caloīda venenāta sunt, sed in dosĭbus parvis therapeutĭcam actiōnem habent.

3. Give the dictionary form of each word and translate into Latin:

1. Strophantin-К is a mixture of cardiac glycosides extracted from seeds of sro-

phanthus-Kombe. 2. Thymalin belongs to preparations stimulating immunity process-

es. 3. Camphor bromide takes a sedative effect and improves cardiac activities. 4. Tab-

lets «Euphylline» are the prolonged drug forms of theophylline.

§ 138. List of botanical names and their pharmaceutical equivalents

used in this lesson

Botanical name Pharmaceutical equivalent

Acŏrus calămus — sedge cane Calămus, i m — sedge cane

Adōnis vernālis — spring adonis Adōnis (ĭdis m, f) vernālis (e) –

spring adonis

Atrŏpa belladonna — deadly nightshade Belladonna, ae f — belladonna

Arnĭca montāna — mountain arnica Arnĭca, ae f — arnica

Artemisia absinthium — common wormwood Absinthium, i n — absinth

Betŭla verrucōsa — warty birch Betŭla, ae f — birch

Brassĭca nigra — black mustard Sināpis, is f — mustard

Capsella bursa-pastōris — shepherd’s purse Bursa pastōris — shepherd’s purse

Cassia acutifolia — Alexandrine senna Senna, ae f — senna

Datura stramonium — thorn apple Stramonium, i n — thorn apple

Ephĕdra equisetīna — horsetail ephedre Ephĕdra, ae f — ephedre

Galanthus Woronŏwi — Woronow’s snowdrop Galanthus, i m — snowdrop

Hyoscyămus niger — black henbane Hyoscyămus, i m — henbane

Ledum palustre — swamp ledum Ledum (i, n) palustre (is, e) — swamp

ledum

Panax ginseng — Chinese ginseng Ginseng (indeclinable) — ginseng

Primŭla veris — cowslip primrose Primŭla, ae f — primrose

Strophanthus Kombe — strophanthus- Kombe Strophanthus, i m — strophanthus

Theobrōma cacāo — cocoa tree Cacāo (indeclinable) — cocoa

Vaccinium myrtillus — blueberry Myrtillus i m — blueberry

Dictionaries to the lesson 21 (except for plant names which are in the table above)

Latin–English vocabulary

alcaloīdum, i n — alkaloid regio, ōnis f — region

antiasthmatĭcus, a, um — antiasthmatic tempus, ŏris n — time

Atropīnum, i n — atropine therapeutĭcus, a, um — therapeutic

elicio, elicui, elicĭtum, ĕre 3 — to extract tuber, ĕris n — tuber

Galanthamīnum, i n — galanthamine venenātus, a, um — poisonous

nostrer, tra, trum — our

English–Latin glossary

activities — activĭtas, ātis f mustard — Sināpis, is f

butter (thick oil) — butÿrum, i n plaster — emplastrum, i n

camphor — Camphŏra, ae f powdery — pulverātus, a, um

euphylline — Euphyllīnum, i n prolonged — prolongātus, a, um

100

glycoside — glycosīdum, i n strophanthin — Strophanthīnum, i n

immunity — immunĭtas, ātis f theophylline — Theophyllīnum, i n

to improve — emendo, āvi, ātum, āre 1 thymalin — Thymalīnum, i n

LESSON 22

MEDICAL PRESCRIPTION AND THE RULES OF WRITING OUT THE LATIN PART

OF PRESCRIPTION

§ 139. Common information on prescriptions

The word prescription has the second name recipe which originates from the

Latin noun receptum, i n. This noun is derived from the Latin participle rеceptum

(literally: a thing that has been taken), derived in its turn from the verb recipio,

recēpi, receptum, ĕre 3 (to take). As commonly known a prescription is an official

paper given by a physician to a patient for receiving a drug in the chemist’s shop.

The whole prescription list includes 9 main sections as shown below:

I. Inscriptio (inscription) Information about the medicinal department

in which the physician writes out the pre-

scription

II. Datum (date ) May, 3, 2016

III. Nomen aegrōti (patient’s name) Richard Pirks

IV. Aetas aegrōti (patient’s age) 23 (years old)

V. Nomen medĭci (physician’s name) Gromov Ivan

VI. Praescriptio (prescription)

1. Invocatio (compellation)

2. Designatio materiārum (list of medicinal

substances)

Recipe: (Take:)

Erythromycini 0,25 (Erythromycin 0.25)

VII. Subscriptio (subscription) Da tales doses numero 10 (Give such a dose

in the amount 8)

VIII. Signatūra (Signature) Signa: 1 tablet 3 times a day

IX. Nomen personale et sigillum medĭci

(physician’s personal signature and seal)

Physician’s signature Place of seal

So, a prescription namely includes the VI–VIII parts of the recipe list. These

parts are a written compellation of a medical doctor to a pharmacist which contains

information about drug in a definite formulation and description of route of drug ad-

ministration. According to the centuries-old tradition this information is composed in

the Latin from the word Recĭpe till the word Signa.

§ 140. The Latin part of prescription

So, the Latin part of every prescription starts with the imperative form Recĭpe

(Take) which is followed by a colon. This is so called Invocatio — a compellation of a

physician to a pharmacist. After the colon the physician writes a list of medicinal sub-

stances of definite drugs and their amount. This part is called Designatio mate-

riārum — substances designation. The grammar correlations in this prescription line

are the following:

Accusative What? How much?

101

Recĭpe:

Take:

Name of a medicinal sub-

stance in the Genitive

Amount of a medicinal substance

or a dose in the Accusative

Genitive Of what?

For example when prescribing 15 ml of valerian tincture the prescription line

looks like that:

Recĭpe: Tinctūrae Valeriānae 15 ml

Genitive Accusative

If a drug name is presented in the first line only then such a prescription is con-

sidered as a simple and the prescribing mood as a shorted one. By such a way are writ-

ten out preparations which are produced in pharmaceutical plants and are delivered to

chemist’s shops ready-made.

If any drug is to be made up in a pharmacy then in the prescription all its com-

ponents are to be enumerated. Such a mood of prescribing is called a full scale one and

the prescription is called a complex one.

The drug amount of solid substances is designed in grams (gramma, ătis

n — gram) or in tenth, hundredth and thousandth portions of gram (decigramma, ătis

n — decigram; centigramma, ătis n — centigram; milligramma, ătis n — milligram).

But these word designations are indicated neither in full nor in shorted form: doses are

in the decimal numeration system indicated only.

If the matter amount is expressed by an integral number, then after this integral

number a comma is placed with a following zero:

1,0 — gramma unum (one gram)

2,0 — grammăta duo (two grams)

10,0 — grammăta decem (ten grams)

20,5 –grammăta viginti et dimidia — 20.5 (twenty point five) grams.

If the matter amount is expressed by a decimal portion of gram, then a word ex-

pressing this portion is at the first place following by a cardinal numeral:

0,1 — decigramma unum — 0.1 (nought point one) gram

0,005 — milligrammăta quinque — 0.005 (nought point two oes five) grams.

Liquids are designed in milliliters (10 ml; 25 ml) and drops. The figure desig-

nating quantity of milliliters is followed by abbreviation ml. In drops (gutta, ae f) liq-

uids in amount less than 1 milliliter are indicated. The drop amount is by a Roman fig-

ure indicated and is written after noun form guttam (if one drop is indicated) or guttas

(if more than one drop is indicated):

Recĭpe: Olei Menthae piperītae guttam I Take: Peppermint oil I drop

Recĭpe: Olei Eucalypti guttas V Take: Eucalyptus oil V drops

In units of activity or international units (IU) or in Latin unitātes internationāles

(UI) some antibiotics or insulin preparations are designated:

Recĭpe: Insulini 15 000 UI (quinděcim milia unitātum internationalium )

Take: Insulin 15 000 IU (fifteen thousand international units)

Recĭpe: Bicillini 150 000 UI (centum quinquaginta milia unitātum

internationalium )

102

Take: Bicilline 150000 IU (hundred fifty thousand international units)

If two or more components are taken in the equal amount, the dose is indicated

only after the latter one, and the adverb ana «of each» is written before this amount:

Recĭpe: Cortĭcis Frangŭlae Take: Cortex of buckthorn

Foliōrum Urtīcae ana 15,0 Leaves of nettle of each 15.0

In the second line of a simple prescription usually formulations «Da» or «Detur»

(«Give» or «Let it be given») are written. After that formulations «Signa» or

«Signētur»(«Write on the label» or «Let it be labelled») are written.

Given above one-word Imperative and Conjunctive formulations are of the

equal value and their choice depends on the composer of a prescription only.

By words «Signa» or «Signētur» the Latin part of a prescription is finished. Af-

ter these words an instruction to the patient in his native language is given how he

should take the drug. So, the Latin part of a simple prescription looks like that:

Recĭpe:

Unguenti Decamīni 30,0

Detur. Signetur:

Take:

Decamin ointment 30.0

Let it be given. Let it be labelled:

Recĭpe:

Tinctūrae Valeriānae 15 ml

Da. Signa:

Take:

Tincture of valerian 15 ml

Give. Write on the label:

For a more detailed definition of a drug form or drug dosage the following for-

mulas are used:

«Da (Dentur) tales doses numĕro… in tabulettis (ampullis, capsŭlis etc.)»– Give

(Let it be given) such a dose in the amount …in tablets (ampoules, capsules etc.):

Recĭ

pe:

Solutiōnis Lidocaīni 10% — 2 ml

Da tales doses numĕro 10 in

аmpullis

Signa:

Take:

Solution of lidocain 10% — 2 ml

Give such a dose in the amount

10 in ampoules

Write on the label:

Now let’s consider the structure of a complex prescription and order of writing

down its components.

Take: Sodium salicylate 6,0 Recĭpe: Natrii salicylātis 6.0

Sodium hydrocarbonate 3.0 Natrii hydrocarbonātis 3.0

Mint water 20 ml Aquae Menthae 20 ml

Rectified water up to 100 ml Aquae purificātae ad 100 ml

Let it be mixed. Misceātur.

Let it be given: Detur.

Let it be labelled: Signētur:

After the «Recĭpe»: always the cardinal medical substance is written (basis seu

remedium cardināle) mostly influencing the organism. Sodium salicylate (Natrii sa-

licylas) is such a component of our prescription.

In the next line an auxiliary medicine (remedium adjŭvans) is indicated that in-

creases or reduces activities of the first component. Sodium hydro carbonate is used in

this function.

To improve drug taste, smell and color or reduce its irritant action some correct-

ing substance (remedium corrĭgens) is used. In this function sugar, syrups, mint water

or other aromatic substances may be used. So in our prescription mint water is used.

103

At the last place a substance is indicated that gives a physical constitution to our

drug (remedium constituens) that is a solid, semisolid or liquid one (powder, oint-

ment, solution etc.) In this function purified water, Vaseline, cocoa butter etc. may be

used. In our prescription rectified water is used.

It should be taken into consideration that there may be different variants of this

common prescription outline.

After indicating all the drug components formulas «Misce» or «Misceātur» are

written, then formulas «Da» or «Detur». Formulas «Misce» and «Da» as usual are

written beside (Misce. Da.). In the same way formulas «Misceātur» and «Detur» (Mis-

ceātur. Detur.) are written.

If it is necessary to determine that mixing is used for making some drug form so

two verb forms are used: fiat for the nouns in the Singular and fiant for the nouns in

the Plural:

Misce, fiat pulvis — Mix to get a powder

Misce, fiant suppositoria vaginalia — Mix to get vaginal suppositories.

Recĭpe: Vikasōli 0,005 Take: Vikasol 0.005

Sacchări 0,2 Sugar 0. 2

Misce, fiat pulvis Mix to get a powder

Da tales doses numĕro 12 Give such a dose in the amount 12

Signa: Write on the label:

Sometimes, the physician indicates in which form and in what amount the drug

is to be prepared. In this case, he writes down these standard forms:

Da (Dentur) tales doses numĕro … in tabulettis (ampullis, capsŭlis etc) — Give

(Let it be given) such a dose in the amount … in tablets (ampoules, capsules etc.:

Recĭpe: Paracetamoli 0, 3 Take: Paracetamol 0. 3

Da tales doses numero 6 in

tabulettis

Give such a dose in the amount 6

Signa: Write on the label:

When making up the Latin part of a prescription the following rules are

to be kept:

1. Every new prescription line begins with a capital letter.

2. Every first letter of a new line word is written strong under the initial le t-

ter of the previous line letter first word.

3. No one word may be written under the word Recipe.

4. If a prescription formulation can not be placed within a line, a necessary

part of it is carried over to the next line moving back from the next line beginning

for three letters.

5. With a capital letter within a Latin prescription line are written:

a) Drug names (Aspirīnum, Corglycōnum etc.)

b) Chemical elements (Cuprum, Hydrogenium etc.)

c) Cation names (Natrii benzoas, Aethacridīni lactas etc.)

d) Medicinal plant names ( Arnĭca, Belladonna etc.)

With a small letter within a Latin prescription line are written:

104

a) Parts of medicinal plants (Decoctum corĭcis Quercus)_

b) Anion names (Natrii salicylas)

c) Adjectives (Mentha piperīta)

d) Prepositions and nouns determining rules of drug administration (ad

usum internum, tales doses, in vitro nigro, pro narcōsi, contra tussim, pro roent-

gēno etc.)

6. Verb formulas Misce/Misceātur and Signa/Signētur have the same mean-

ing, but they may not be used one instead another: their usage depends on the

English text form.

7. Spelling or grammar mistakes and any correction as well in any pre-

scription text are not admitted! 8. If necessary a physician writes at the top part of a prescription the fol-

lowing formulas:

8.1. Cito! (Quickly!) or Statim! (Immidiatelly!)

8.2. Repĕte! (Repeat!) or Repetātur! (Let it be repeated!)

8.3. Pro me (For me) or Pro auctōre (For the authori. e. for the prescription

composer).

§ 141. Methodical advices for prescription translating

Before translating a Latin or English prescription one should write down the

dictionary form of every word beginning with «Recipe» (Take) and finishing by

«Signa» (Write on the label) or «Signetur» (Let it be labelled). For example, you have

to translate a prescription from Latin into English:

Recĭpe: Extracti Crataegi fluĭdi 25 ml

Da. Signa:

So you write down the dictionary forms:

Recipe: recipio, recēpi, receptum, ĕre 3 — to take

Extracti: extractum, i n — extact

Crataegi: Crataegus, i f — hawthorn

fluĭdi: fluĭdus, a, um — liquid

millilitrum, i n — milliliter

Da: do, dedi, datum, dare 1 — to give

Signa: signo, āvi, ātum, āre 1 — to write on the label

Now the translation follows:

Take: Liquid extract of hawthorn 25 ml

Give. Write on the label:

The second prescription you have to translate from the English into Latin:

Take: Amidopyrin

Phenacetin of each 0. 25

Let it be given such a dose in the amount 12 in tablets

Let it be labelled:

Dictionary forms:

105

to take — recipio, recēpi, receptum, ĕre 3;

amidopyrin — Amydopyrīnum, i n;

of each — ana;

to give — do, dedi, datum, dare 1;

such — talis, e;

dose — dosis, is f ;

amount — numĕrus, i m;

in — in (+Abl.);

tablet — tabuletta, ae f;

to write on the label — signo, āvi, ātum, āre 1.

Now the translation follows:

Recipe: Amidopyrīni

Phenacetīni ana 0, 25

Dentur tales doses numĕro 12 in tabulettis

Signētur:

§ 142. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form and translate the prescriptions into English:

1. Recĭpe: Unguenti Xeroformii 3% — 10, 0 ml

Detur. Signētur:

2. Recĭpe: Euphyllīni

Dimedroli 0, 0, 0125

Sacchări 0, 2

Da tales doses numĕro 12 in capsŭlis

Signa:

3. Recĭpe: Chloroformii

Spirĭtus aethylĭci 95% ana 20 ml

Aethĕris aethylĭci 10 ml

Solutionis Ammonii caustĭci guttas V

Misce.Da.

Signa:

4. Recĭpe: Herbae Millefolii

Herbae Absinthii

Florum Chamomillae

Foliōrum Salviae

Foliōrum Menthae piperītae ana 10, 0

Misce, fiant species

Da. Signa:

5. Recĭpe: Speciērum antiasthmaticārum 100, 0

Detur. Signētur:

2. Give the dictionary form and translate the prescriptions into Latin:

1.Take: Powder of foxglove leaves 0.05

Sugar 0. 3

Mix to get a powder

Give. Write on the label:

2.Take: Bark of buckhorn 30. 0

106

Leaves of nettle 20. 0

Herb of milfoil 10.0

Mix to get a species

Let it be given. Let it be labelled:

3.Take: Theophylline 0. 2

Cocoa butter 2. 0

Mix to get a rectal suppository

Let it be given such a dose in the amount 10

Let it be labelled:

4.Take: Potassium chloride 3 ml

Insulin 8 IU

Glucose solution 10% — 250 ml

Let it be mixed. Let it be sterilized!

Let it be given. Let it be labelled:

5.Take: Laxative species 100. 0

Give. Write on the label:

6.Take: Emulsion of almond oil 100 ml

Benzoic acid 0. 15

Fennel oil VII drops

Mix. Give.

Write on the label:

3. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into English:

1. Radīces Rauwolfiae serpentīnae quantitātem magnam alcaloidōrum contĭnent, quae

proprietātes pharmacologĭcas pretiōsas habent. 2. Succus Kalanchoës adjŭvat purgatiōnem

vulnĕrum a textĭbus necrotisātis et sanatiōnem eōrum stimŭlat. 3. Herba Millefolii, quae

sub florescentia colligĭtur et exsiccātur, provĕnit passim in pratis siccis.

4. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into Latin:

1. Fruits of medicinal fennel are used in the pharmaceutical practice as expectorant and

carminative means. 2. Leaves of stinking nettle contain vitamin C, carotene, vitamin

K, mineral salts and other useful matters. 3. Resorcinol powder is diluted very lightly

in water and in spirit, relatively lightly in fatty oils and in glycerin.

Dictionaries to the lesson 22

Latin–English vocabulary

Absinthium, i n — wormwood Millefolium, i n — milfoil

Ammonium, i n — ammonium necrotisātus, a, um — necrotic

aethylĭcus, a, um — ethylic passim — everywhere

ana — of each pratum, i n — meadow

caustĭcus, a, um — caustic pretiōsus, a, um — valuable

Chamomilla, ae f — chamomile provenio, provēni, proventum, īre 4 — to meet

collĭgo, collēgi, collectum, ĕre

3 — to gather

purgatio, ōnis f — cleaning , purification

Rauwolfia, ae f — rauwolfia

Dimedrolum, i n — dimedrol Salvia, ae f — sage

dioĭcus,a, um — stinking (nettle) serpentīnus, a, um — serpent like

exsicco, āvi, ātum, āre 1 — to dry Solutio Ammonii caustĭci — spirit of ammonia

florescentia, ae f — flowering such — talis, e

107

gutta, ae f — drop Xeroformium, i n — xeroform

English–Latin glossary

amount (anything countable) — numĕrus, i m laxative — laxans, ntis

almond (fruit) — Amygdăla, ae f

almond oil — Oleum Amygdalārum

lightly — facĭle

very lightly — facillĭme

buckhorn — Frangŭla, ae f nettle — Urtīca, ae f

stinking nettle — Urtīca dioĭca

carminative — carminatīvus, a, um practice — praxis, is f

carotene — Carotīnum, i n rectal — rectālis, e

fatty — pinguis, e relatively — relatīve

fennel — Foenicŭlum, i n resorcin — Resorcīnum, i n

insulin — Insulīnum, i n stinking (nettle) — dioĭcus, a, um

LESSON 23

THE USE OF THE ACCUSATUVE IN SOME PHARMACEUTICAL FORMS

IN THE FIRST LINE OF A MEDICAL PRESCRIPTION

§ 143. General information on the use of the Accusative in the pharmaceutical

forms in a medical prescription

The Accusative of some pharmaceutical forms in the first prescription line is used

only in a simple medical prescription. In this way tablets, drops, capsules, suppositories,

ointments, liniments, creams, ophthalmic films, sponges of different medical destination,

aerosols are prescribed. The name of these pharmaceutical forms is used in the Accusative

Singular or Plural. The Latin drug name in the Nominative form is sometimes enclosed in

inverted commas which are omitted in the English text, where in this case the common

constructions with preposition «of» or without it are used. The Accusative construction is

used too, if the Latin drug name isn’t enclosed in inverted commas. The amount of the

prescribed drug is hereby not indicated either in grams or in milliliters, but is expressed by

the word numerus (number) in the Ablative form (numĕro) and a common figure. In the

second line the standard verb forms are written:

Recĭpe: Tabulettas «Antistrumīnum»

numĕro 50

Take: Antistrumin tablets

number 50

Detur. Let it be given

Signetur: Let it be labelled:

Recĭpe: Tabulettas Aloёs obductas 0,05

numĕro 20

Take: Coated tablets of aloe 0.05 num-

ber 20

Da. Signa: Give. Write on a label:

As in the English drug names inverted commas are not so widely used, it is not

possible when translating to find out which Latin equivalent drug name with these

specific signs is to be written. That’s why when translating from English into Latin we

have to consult the dictionary and to find out if the drug name in the inverted commas

is enclosed or not. So, if we see in the dictionary: psoriasin (ointment) — Unguentum

«Psoriasīnum»; antistrumin (tablets) — Tabulettae «Antistrumīnum»; Benspar (cap-

sules) — Capsulae «Benspārum», then we know, how the Latin drug name is to be

written correctly, for example:

108

Take: Capsules of benspar number 100 Recĭpe: Capsŭlas «Bensparum» numĕro 100

Give. Write on the label: Da. Signa:

Now let’s examine in detail the use of different pharmaceutical forms in the Ac-

cusative. First of all let’s consider prescribing drug form in the Accusative singular. In

this case form balsams, gels, creams, liniments, ointments and aerosols are prescribed.

§ 144. The prescription of balsams, gels, creams, liniments, ointments

and aerosols in the Accusative

Aerosols, balsams, gels, creams, liniments and ointments are prescribed in the

Accusative singular if not the weight but an amount of drug forms is specified. By

such a prescribing way after «Recĭpe» a drug form in the Accusative singular is writ-

ten, then the drug name itself in the Nominative singular, then «numĕro» and the

amount of drug forms. In the second line follow the standard verb formulas «Da.

Signa:» or «Detur. Signētur:»):

Take:

Gold Star balsam number 2

Give.Write on the label:

Recĭpe:

Balsămum «Stella auraria» numĕro 2

Da. Siga:

Take:

Fusidin gel 2% number 1

Give.Write on the label:

Recĭpe:

Gelum «Fusidinum» 2% numĕro 1

Da. Signa:

Take:

Nicoflex cream number 2

Let it be given

Let it be labelled:

Recĭpe:

Cremōrem «Nicoflexum» numĕro 2

Detur. Signētur:

Take:

Psoriasin ointment number 2

Give.Write on the label :

Recĭpe:

Unguentum «Psoriasīnum» numĕro 2

Da. Signa:

Take:

Sanitas liniment number 1

Let it be given

Let it be labelled:

Recĭpe:

Linimentum «Sanĭtas» numĕro 1

Detur.

Signētur:

Take:

Aerosol of proposol number 2

Give.Write on the label:

Recĭpe:

Aërosōlum «Proposōlum» numĕro 2

Da. Siga:

But if the weight of the drug is to be indicated then all the enumerated drug

forms are prescribed in the Genitive singular. The amount of drug forms is introduced

by the formula «Da (Dentur) tales doses numĕro …»:

Take:

Gold Star balsam 4. 0

Let it be given of such dose in the

amount 2

Let it be labelled:

Recĭpe:

Balsămi «Stella auraria» 4,0

Dentur tales doses numĕro 2

Signētur:

Take:

Fusidin gel 2% — 15.0

Give. Write on the label:

Recĭpe:

Geli «Fusidīnum» 2% — 15,0

Da. Signa:

Take:

Nicoflex cream 50.0

Give. Write on the label:

Recĭpe:

Cremōris «Nicoflexum» 50,0

Detur. Signētur:

Take:

Psoriasin ointment 25.0

Give. Write on the label:

Recĭpe:

Unguenti «Psoriasīnum» 25,0

Da. Signa:

Take:

Sanitas liniment 50.0

Let it be given

Let it be labelled:

Recĭpe:

Linimenti «Sanĭtas» 50,0

Detur. Signētur:

Take:

Aerosol of proposol 50.0

Give such a dose in the amount 2

Recĭpe:

Aërosoli «Proposōlum» 50,0

Da tales doses numĕro 2

109

Write on the label: Signa:

§ 145. The prescription of tablets in the Accusative singular and plural form

The drug prescription in the tablets may take place in three forms.

In the first case after the «Recĭpe» the Accusative singular form «Tabulettam» is

written, then follows the drug name in the Genitive form and the dose. In the second

line of the prescription the instruction «Da (Dentur) tales doses numĕro… in tabulett-

is» is written and after that the standard verb form Signa («Signetur»):

Recĭpe: Tabulettam Paracetamoli 0,3 Take: Tablet of paracetamol 0.3

Da tales doses numero 6 in

tabulettis

Give such a dose in the amount 6

Signa: Write on the label:

In the second case after the «Recĭpe» the Accusative plural form «Tabulettas» is

written, then follows the drug name in the Genitive form and figures indicating the

amount of active medical substance of a tablet and, finally, the dosage expressed by

the «numero» and a figure:

Recĭpe: Tabulettas Paracetamōli 0,3

numero 6

Take: Tablets of paracetamol 0.3

number 6

Da. Signa: Give. Write on a label:

But the same drug can be prescribed in the traditional form indicating the drug

quantity, and that is the third way of drug prescribing in the tablets form. In this case

after the «Recipe» the drug name and its dose follow. In the second line the instruction

«Da (Dentur) tales doses numĕro 6 in tabulettis» and, finally, the standard form

«Signa» («Signetur») are written:

Recĭpe: Paracetamoli 0,3 Take: Paracetamol 0.3

Da tales doses numero 6 in

tabulettis

Give such a dose in the

amount 6 in tablets

Signa: Write on the label:

It goes without saying that every physician has to know all ways of writing out

the medical prescriptions. Thus, the choice of a prescription way is up to him.

§ 146. The prescription of drops in the Accusative form

Drops (as the equivalent in Latin pharmaceutical terminology the French word

«dragees» is used) are lately prescribed mainly in the Plural form that formally, from

the grammar point of view, is as the Accusative considered depending on the word

«Recipe» although the French word «dragees» has neither cases nor dictionary form.

The prescription regulations for drops are the following. After the «Recipe» fol-

lows the form «Dragees», the drug name in inverted commas or in the Genitive form

and the Ablative case «numěro» with a figure indicating the dose:

Recipe: Dragees «Undevitum» numero 30 Take: Drops of undevit number 30

Detur Let it be given

Signetur: Let it be labelled:

It’s necessary to note, that sometimes, the other order of drops prescription is

used. In this case, after the «Recipe» the Singular form «Dragee» is written with the

110

drug name in the Genitive and a figure indicating the dose. In the second line follows

the phrase «Da (Dentur tales doses) numero…»:

Recĭpe: Dragee Diazolini 0,05 Take: Dragee of diazolin 0.05

Da tales doses numero 20 Give such a dose in the amount 20

Signa: Write on a label:

§ 147. The prescription of ophthalmic films and medical sponges

Ophthalmic films are absorbable gelatin films containing drug substances. They

are used instead of ophthalmic drops when keeping such a film behind the eyelid at

night.

The ophthalmic films are usually prescribed in the Accusative plural form with

the preposition «cum». The prescription regulations for the ophthalmic films are the

following.

After the «Recipe» follow the Accusative plural forms Lamellas (or Membranu-

las) ophthalmicas, the drug name in Genitive, the preposition «cum» with the acting

pharmaceutical component and the form «numěro» with a figure. In the second and

third lines the standard phrases «Da» («Dentur») and «Signa» («Signetur») are written:

Recĭpe: Lamellas ophthalmicas cum

Novocaino numero 8

Take: Ophthalmic films with novocain

number 8

Da Give

Signa: Write on the label:

Films for another administration may be prescribed in the Accusative singular, too: Take:

Fibrin isogenic film

Give such a dose in the amount 3 in

vitreous phial

Write on the label:

Recĭpe:

Membranŭlam fibrinōsam

isogĕnam

Da tales doses numĕro 3 in

vitro vitreo

Signa:

A pharmaceutical sponge is a porous substance saturated with a drug. It is ap-

plied to the necessary site and has antiseptic, haemostatic and other pharmaceutical

effects. Pharmaceutical sponges may be prescribed both in the singular and plural

forms:

Take:

Collagen haemostatic sponge

Give such a dose in the amount

3 in polyethylene packets

Write on the label:

Recĭpe:

Spongiam haemostatĭcam

collagenĭcam

Da tales doses numĕro 4 in fascĭbus

polyaethylenĭcis

Signa:

Recĭpe: Spongias «Methuracōlum»

numero 10

Take: Sponges of methuracol number 10

Da. Give

Signa: Write on the label:

Recĭpe: Spongias antiseptĭcas cum Kana-

mycino numero 5

Take: Antiseptic sponges with kanamy-

cin number 5

Detur. Let it be given

Signetur: Let it be labelled:

111

§ 148. The prescription of suppositories in the Accusative case

A pharmaceutical suppository is a drug in the form of a round or conical tablet

which is solid at room temperature and semisolid at body temperature. We distinguish

rectal suppositories and the vaginal ones. Suppositories are prescribed in the Accusa-

tive plural case form:

1. After the «Recipe» follow: the Accusative plural form «Suppositoria» with

the adjective vaginalia (rectalia) or without these adjectives, then the drug name in in-

verted commas and the «numěro» with a figure. The second and the third lines contain

the standard phrases «Da» («Dentur») and «Signa» («Signetur»):

Recĭpe: Suppositoria vaginalia

«Osarbonum» numĕro 10

Take: Vaginal suppositories of osarbon

number 10

Da Give

Signa: Write on the label:

2. After the «Recipe» follow the Accusative plural form «Suppositoria», the

proposition «cum» and the acting pharmaceutical component in the Ablative, a figure

indicating the amount of this component, the form «numěro» with a figure. After that

the standard forms «Da» («Detur») and «Signa» («Signētur») follow in the next lines:

Recĭpe: Suppositoria cum

Diprophyllīno 0,5 numĕro 30

Take: Suppositories with diprophyllin

0.5 number 30

Detur. Let it be given

Signetur: Let it be labelled:

§ 149. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form of each word and translate the prescriptions into the Latin: 1.Take: Beviplex drops number 30

Give

Write on the label:

2. Take: Tablets of sustac-forte number 25

Let it be given

Let it be written on the label:

3. Take: Vaginal suppositories with synthomycine 0.25 number 10

Let it be given

Let it be written on the label:

4. Take: Aerosol of orciprenaline sulphate 15% — 20 ml

Give

Write on the label:

5. Take: Cream of dolgit

Give such a dose in the amount 3

Write on the label:

6. Take: Ophthalmic films with neomycin number 8

Let it be given

Let it be written on the label:

7. Take: Coated tablets of oleandomycin sulphate 0.125 number 30

Give

Write on the label:

112

8.Take:

Collagen haemostatic sponge

Give such a dose in the amount 3 in polyethylene packet

Write on the label:

9.Take Naphthalgin liniment

Let be given such a dose in the amount 2 in a small bottle

Let it be written on the label:

2. Give the dictionary form of each word and translate the sentences into English:

1. Feracrÿlum est Ferri sal in forma lamellae vitrei fragĭlis, quod concretiōnes

cum sanguĭnis proteīnis formāre potest. 2. Nomen «bacillus» in microbiologia genus

microorganismōrum bacilliformium signifĭcat, qui endospŏras formant. 3. Alcaloīda,

glycosīda et alia remedia origĭnis vegetabĭlis nomen accipiunt a nomĭne plantārum, e

quibus haec remedia conficiuntur.

3. Give the dictionary form of each word and translate the sentences into the Lain:

1. The composition of the naphthalgin liniment includes methyl salicylate, analgin,

naphthalan petroleum, mixtures of fatty spirits and other components. 2. Prolonged injec-

tion drug forms (oily solutions, suspensions and the others) are introduced as a rule into

muscles. 3. A film with cytisin that contains 0.015 grams of the drug is daily glued on the

gum or on the mucosa of retrogingival region.

Dictionaries to the lesson 23 Latin–English vocabulary

bacillus, i m — bacillus microbiologia, ae f — microbiology

bacilliformis, e — bacilliform microorganismus, i m — microorganism

concretio, ōnis f — concretion orīgo, ĭnis f — origin

endospŏra, ae f — endospore potest — can , is able

Feracrÿlum, i n — feracryl proteīnum, i n — protein

fragĭlis, e — brittle signifĭco, āvi, ātum, āre1 — to signify

genus, ĕris n — genus vegetabĭlis, e — vegetable

English–Latin glossary

beviplex — Beviplexum, i n mucosa — mucōsa, ae f

collagen — Collagēnum, i n naphthalan petroleum — Naphthalānum, i n

cream — cremor, ōris m naphthalgin — Naphthalgīnum, i n

cytisin — Cytisīnum, i n neomycin — Neomycīnum, i n

daily — quotidie orciprenaline — Orciprenalīnum, i n

dolgit — Dolgītum, i n polyethylene — polyaethylenĭcus, a, um

film — lamella, ae f; membranŭla, ae f retrogingival — retrogingivālis, e

to glue — inglutĭno, āvi, ātum, āre1(+Dat.) sponge — spongia, ae f

sustac-forte — Sustācum-forte, Sustāci-forte n gum — gingīva, ae f

113

LESSON 24

SYSTEMATISAZION OF THE SOLID DRUG FORM NAMES AND THEIR PRESCRIPTION

(PART 1)

§ 150. Drug form which are divided after their substance state and their rout of

administration

All medicinal preparations are divided after their substance state in 4 main groups:

solid (formae medicamentōrum durae), soft (formae medicamentōrum molles), liquid

(formae medicamentōrum fluĭdae), and volatile (formae medicamentōrum volatiles).

Depending on route of introduction into the organism all the drug forms are di-

vided in two main groups: 1) enteric forms (from the Greek énteron intestine) which

are introduced through gastrointestinal tract — formae enterāles 2) parenteral forms

(from the Greek pará- near, besides + enteral), which are introduced passing gastroin-

testinal tract — formae parenterāles.

§151. Pharmaceutical proprieties of solid drug forms

To the most used solid drug forms belong powders, tablets, granules, granu-

lates, briquettes, concentrates, lyophilisates, drops (dragees), caramels, pastilles,

pills, capsules, sponges, films, ampoules, poultices, medicinal species, (lyophilis-

ate) microspheres.

1. Powders — Pulvĕres (pulvis, ĕris m) — are a solid drug forms which may

be poured.

After their composition powders are divided in:

1) Simple powders — pulvĕres simplĭces: Acĭdum borĭcum (boric acid), Kalii

permangănas (potassium permanganate);

2) Complex powders — pulvĕres composĭti: Pulvis Glycyrrhizae composĭtum

(complex powder of licorice)

Sal carolīnum factitium (Carlsbad artificial salt).

After their reduction grad powders are divided in:

1) The finest powders — pulvĕres subtilissĭmi;

2) Fine powders– pulvĕres subtĭles;

3) Coarse powders — pulvĕres grossi

After their rout of administration powders are divided in:

1) Powders for internal use — pulvĕres ad usum internum;

2) Powders for external use — pulvĕres ad usum externum.

After their dosage powders are divided in:

1) Powders divided in doses– pulvēres divīsi;

2) Powders not divided in doses– pulvĕres indivīsi.

Powders are introduced:

1) Orally, by mouth– per os;

2) Via aspersion — per aspersiōnem;

3) Via insufflations — per insufflatiōnem;

4) Via injections — per injectiōnes;

5) Rectally, per rectum — per rectum;

6) Via gargling — per gargarisma.

114

2. Tablets — Tabulettae (tabuletta, ae f) are solid divided in doses drug forms

which are produced in pharmaceutical plants via pressing powdered substances in the

form of the plate, round, oval and convexo-convex discs or platelets.

Tablets are coated (tabulettae obductae) and tablets without a cover (tabulettae

inobductae). For coating sugar, milk sugar, dextrin, starch etc. are used.

After administration rout tablets are divided in the following groups:

1) Tablets for sublingual resolving or glossettes — tabulettae sublinguāles seu

glossēttae;

2) Tablets for retrobuccal resolving — tabulettae retrobuccāles;

3) Masticatory tablets — tabulettae masticatoriae;

4) Tablets soluble in the stomach — tabulettae gastrosolubĭles;

5) Enteric soluble tablets — tabulettae enterosolubiles;

5) Tablets soluble in any liquid — tabulettae solubiles seu solvellae;

6) Spumant tablets (by dissolving in water) — tabulettae effervescentes seu

spumantes.

Tablets are prescribed in the detailed or shortened ways. In a detailed way pre-

scribing after all the drug components formulas «Da (Dentur) tales doses numero….in

tabulettis» and Signa («Signetur») are written.

In a shortened way prescribing the form «tablet» in the first prescription line is

written in the Accusative plural and after «numero « the dose amount is designed (see

the orevious lesson). There is another mood of a shortened tablets prescription, too:

tablet name and the dosage are written in the first prescription line and in the second

line formulas «Da (Dentur) tales doses numero….in tabulettis» and «Signa»

(«Signetur») are written.

3. Granules — Granŭla (granŭlum, i n) are grains of different dimention

containing medicinal and auxilary substances. Granules are prescribed in a shorted way.

4. Briquettes — Brikēta (brikētum, i n) are vegetable raw material pressed in

the briquettes. Briquettes are prescribed in a shortened way.

5. Concentrates — Concentrāta (concentrātum, i n) are concentrated forms

of the solid medicinal or auxiliar substances. Concentrates are prescribed in a

shortened way.

6. Lyophlisates — Lyophilisātа (lyophilisātum, i n) are the lyophilisated

powders obtained via lyophilisation that is a rapid freezing with following rapid

dehydration in a high vacuum. Lyophlisates are prescribed in a shortened way.

7. Dragées , singular form dragée (a not Latinizated French name) , drops are

little sugar coated pills. They have more than one active compound, and to prevent un-

wanted pharmacological interaction we divide them by a layer of inert compound (sugar

etc.). Dragées usually are prescribed in a shortened way.

8. Caramels — Caramella (caramel, ellis n) are solid drug forms which are

similar to confectionary caramels after their form and taste and are resolved in the

mouth cavity. Thay are usually prescribed for children in a shortened way.

9. Pastilles — Pastilli (pastillus, i m) are semisolid forms obtained as a result

of a special processing mixture of a medicinal substance with sugare, flour and some

other components. Pastilles are prescribed in a shortened way.

115

10. Medicated pencils — Styli medicināles (stylus, i m) are shaped rod with

a pointed ending and are designed for external use. The dosage form of such pencils

includes substances with astringent or cauterizing action.

§ 152. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form of each word and translate into the English: 1. Take: Theobromine sodium with sodium salicylate 0. 3

Phenobarbital 0. 02

Mix to get a powder

Give such a dose in the amount 6 in the waxed paper

Write on the label:

2. Take: Ampicillin powder for suspension 5. 0

Let it be given

Let it be labeled:

3. Take: Ascorbic acid 0.2

Nicotinic acid

Dimedrol of each 0. 01

Riboflavin 0. 03

Thiamin bromide

Pyridoxine hydrochloride

Rutin of each 0. 02

Mix to get a powder

Give such a dose in the amount 30

Write on the label:

4. Take: Acetylsalicylic acid

Phenacetin of each 0. 02

Phenobarbital 0. 025

Caffeine 0. 05

Codeine phosphate 0. 01

Let it be given such a dose in the amount 10 in tablets

Let it be labelled:

5. Take: Coated tablets of reduced iron 0. 2 number 20

Give

Write on the label:

6. Take: Caramels with dicain 0. 0015 number 20

Give

Write on the label:

7. Take: Antistrumin tablets number 50

Let it be given

Let it be labelled:

8. Take: Strychnine nitrate

Anhydric arsenous acid of each 0. 03

Camphor bromide 3. 0

Calcium glycerophosphate 6. 0

Licorice extract and powder in sufficient amount

Mix to get pills number 60

Give

Write on the label:

116

9. Take: Aminazin dragee 0. 025 number 12

Let it be given

Let it be labelled:

2. Give the dictionary form of each word and translate into the English:

briquettes of eucalyptus leaves; enteric soluble solizyme tablets; bephenium hy-

dronaphthoate or naphthammon in coated tablets; lyophilisated lysoamidaze powder

divided in doses; ethazol sodium granules for children; human leucocytic interferon;

soluble laevomycetin succinate; stomachic tablets with belladonna extract; lithium ox-

ybutyrate and testosterone oenanthate in tablets; rhizomes with elfwort roots; tablets of

ethacrynic acid; lyophilisate of thrombin powder for solutions; powder for inhalation

in rotadiscs; 25% esmolol concentrate for infusion solutions in ampoules on 10 ml

everyone; montelucast masticatory tablets number 7 on 0. 005 grams everyone; oraze

granules for solution in packets on 10 grams everyone and in cupping glasses on 65

grams everyone; powder of adrenocorticotropic hormone in packing 10 and 100 grams

of each; a briquette of cowberry leaves for infusion.

Dictionary to the lesson 24

adrenocorticotropic — adrenocortico-

tropĭcus, a. um

lithium — Lithium, i n

aminazin — Aminazīnum, i n lyophilisate — lyophilisātum, i n

antistrumin — «Antistrumīnum», i n lyophilisated — lyophilisātus, a, um

arsenous — arsenicōsus, a, um lysoamidaze — Lysoamidāzum, i n

bephenium — Bephenium, i n masticatory — masticatorius, a, um

briquette — brikētum, i n montelucast — Montelucastum, i n

caramel — carămel, ellis n naphthammon — Naphthammōnum, i n

codeine — Codeīnum, i n oenanthate — oenanthas, ātis m

concentrate — concentrātum, i n oraze — Orāzum, i n

cowberry — Vitis(is f) idaea (us, a, um) packet — fascis, is m

cupping glass — olla, ae f packing — devincŭlum, i n

elfwort — Inŭla, ae f rutin — Rutīnum, i n

enteric soluble — enterosolubĭlis, e paper — charta, ae f

esmolol — Esmolōlum, i n pill — pilŭla, ae f

glycerophosphate — glycerophosphas,

ātis m

pyridoxine — Pyridoxīnum, i n

granule — granŭlum, i n reduced — reductus, a, um

human — humānus, a, um rotadisc — rotadiscus, i m

hydronaphthoate — hydronaphtoas, ātis m solizyme –Solizÿmum, i n

interferon — Interferōnum, i n stomachic — stomachĭcus, a, um

in sufficient amount — quantum satis strychnine — Strychnīnum, i n

iron — Ferrum, i n succinate — succĭnas, ātis m

laevomycetin — Laevomycetīnum, i n thrombin — Thrombīnum, i n

leucocytic — leucocytĭcus, a, um waxed — cerātus, a, um

117

LESSON 25

SYSTEMATISAZION OF THE SOLID DRUG FORM NAMES AND THEIR PRESCRIPTION

(PART 2)

§ 153. Solid and semisolid drug forms (continuation)

1. Sponges — spongiae (spongia, ae f) are dry porous matters of soft consist-

ence in form of plates or peaces which contain medicinal substances and take haemo-

static, antiseptic and gluing effect. Sponges are prescribed in the Accusative case in a

shortened way.

2. Films and platelets — lamellae et membranŭlae (lamella, ae f; mem-

branŭla, ae f) are made on a polymer base with medicinal substances and are put to a

diseased place. Mostly ophthalmic films (lamellae/membranŭlae ophthalmĭcae) and

stomatological platelets (lamellae) are used which are prescribed in the Accusative

case in a shortened way.

3. Poultices — cataplasmata (cataplasma, ătis n) are soft substances which

are put on the skin. They cause rush of blood, improve microcirculation, take anti-

inflammatory and antiseptic effect. Poultices are prescribed in a shortened way.

4. Napkins — mappŭlae (mappŭla, ae f) are semisolid matters in napkin form

which are saturated with an active medicinal agent and are meant for the hemorrhage

stopping or liquids adsorption.

5. Capsules — capsŭlae (capsŭla, ae f) are gelatin or starch cover of divided

medicines with different consistence. Into capsules the substances are comprised with

unpleasant taste or irritating effect. Two main types of capsules are distinguished:

1) Hard-shelled capsules– capsŭlae gelatinōsae durae

2) Soft- shelled capsules– capsŭlae gelatinōsae molles

Capsules with drugs are prescribed in a shorted way in the Accusative plural or

the drug is in the first line designed and in the second line the formula «Da (Dentur)

tales doses numero… in capsŭlis» is given.

6. Medicinal species — species (species, ērum f) are mixtures of cut or re-

duced vegetable row material. Species are prescribed both in a shortened and in de-

tailed way.

§ 154. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form of each word and translate the sentences into English:

1. Praeparātum Oblecolum producĭtur in forma lamellārum collagenicārum cum

additiōne olei Hippophaës. 2. Ad combustiōnes profundas ut aspersio Terrilytīnum ad-

hibētur et deinde mappŭla imponĭtur 0,25 % solutiōne Novocaīni umectāta. 3. Species

antihaemorrhoidāles contĭnent ana 20 grammata foliōrum Sennae, cortĭcis Frangŭlae,

herbae Millefolii, fructuum Coriandri, radīcis Glycyrrhizae.

2. Give the dictionary form of each word and translate the sentences into Latin:

1. Poultices cause rush of blood, improve microcirculation, take anti-

inflammatory and antiseptic effect. 2. The preparation «Methuracol» is produced from

dry collagen in the form of small-porous plates of white color in a gram of which 0.05

grams of Methyluracyl are contained. 3. The preparation «Biostim» is produced in

capsules on 0.001 gram everyone and is used for prophylaxis chronic recidivate infec-

tions of respiratory organs.

118

3. Give the dictionary form of each word and translate the prescriptions into

Latin: 1. Take: Pine buds

Leaves of colt’s foot of each 30.0

Mix to get a species

Give in a box

Write on the label:

2. Take: Buckthorn bark

Chamomile flowers

Linden flowers

Dry berries of guelder-rose of each 15.0

Mix to get a species

Write on the label:

3. Take: Films with pilocarpin hydrochloride number 30

Let it be given

Let it be labelled:

4. Take: Polyvitaminous species 100.0

Let it be given

Let it be labelled:

5. Take: Poultices of white clay

Give

Write on the label:

6. Take: Antiseptic sponge with gentamycin

Let it be given of such a dose in the amount 4 in vitreous phial

Let it be labelled:

7. Take: Oletetrin capsules 0.25 number 8

Give.

Write on the label:

8. Take: Oxacilline sodium 0.25

Give such a dose in the amount 40 in gelatinous capsules

Write on the label:

9. Take: Diuretic species 50.0

Give.

Write on the label:

Dictionaries to the lesson 25

Latin–English vocabulary

additio, ōnis f — addition Frangŭla, ae f — buckhorn

aspersio, ōnis f — aspersion impōno, imposui, imposĭtum, ĕre 3(+Dat.) —

to apply, to put on

collagenĭcus a, um — collagenic mappŭla, ae f — napkin

combustio, ōnis f — combustion Oblecōlum, i n — oblecol

Coriandrum, i n — coriander profundus, a, um — deep

deinde — then umectātus, a, um — wetted

119

English–Latin glossary

biostim — Biostīmum, i n organ — orgănum, i n

to cause — provŏco, āvi, ātum, āre 1 oxacilline sodium — Oxacillīnum-

natrium, i n

clay– bolus, i f pilocarpin — Pilocarpīnum, i n

colt’s foot — Farfăra, ae f pine — Pinus, i f

diuretic — diuretĭcus, a, um polyvitaminous — polyvitaminōsus, a, um

gelatinous — gelatinōsus, a, um

guelder-rose — Viburnum, i n poultice — cataplasma, ătis n

linden — Tilia, ae f prophylaxis — prophylaxis, is f

methuracol — Methuracōlum, i n recidivate — recidīvus, a, um

methyluracyl — Methyluracÿlum, i n rush — affluxus, us m

microcirculation — microcirculatio, ōnis f small-porous — microporōsus, a, um

oletetrin — Oletetrīnum, i n sponge — spongia, ae f

LESSON 26

SYSTEMATIZATION OF LIQUID DRUG FORM NAMES AND THEIR PRESCRIPTION (PART 1)

§ 155. Common information on the liquid drug forms

Liquid drug forms are the most numerous and the most ancient among the med-

ical means. Such medicines were widely used by Hippocrates (460–377 BC) and

Claudius Galen (130–200 AD).

To the most used liquid drug forms belong solutions, suspensions, emulsions, lini-

ments, decoctions, infusions, tinctures, drops, extracts, mucilages, mixtures, syrups, aro-

matic waters. They are administered orally through the digestive tract or in a parenteral

way (via injections, putting into eyes or nose, gargling, lotions, compresses etc.).

§ 156. Pharmaceutical description of the liquid drug forms

1. Solutions — solutiōnes (solutio, ōnis f) — homogenous mixtures of medici-

nal substances and liquid dissolving agents.

Depending on a dissolving agent solutions are divided in:

1) Aqueous solutions — solutiōnes aquōsae

2) Spirituous solutions — solutiōnes spirituōsae

3) Oily solutions — solutiōnes oleōsae

4) Glyceric solutions — solutiōnes glycerinōsae.

Depending on their administration solutions are divided in:

1) Solutions for injections — solutiōnes pro injectionĭbus

2) Solutions for external use — solutiōnes ad usum externum:

– Gargles — gargarismăta (gargarisma, ătis n)

– Lotions (liquid means for the skin) — lotiōnes (lotio, ōnis f)

– Mouth-wash (bathing for mouth) — collutoria (collutorium, i n)

– Enemata or clysters — enemăta seu clysmăta (enĕma, ătis n; clysma,ătis n)

– Syringing — perfontiōnes (perfontio, ōnis f)

– Triturations — trituratiōnes (trituratio, ōnis f).

3) Solutions for enternal use — solutiōnes ad usum internum

4) Solutions for anesthesia — solutiōnes ad anaesthesiam

5) Plasma-substituting solutions — solutiōnes plasmosubstituentes

120

2. Suspensions — suspensiōnes (suspensio, ōnis f) are liquids containing in-

soluble powdered matters. There are dry suspensions (suspensiōnes siccae), from

which ex tempŏre liquid ones are prepared.

3. Emulsions — emulsa (emulsum, i n) are mixtures of water and insoluble

matters (ethereal and fatty oils, resins, balsams). Emulsions may be oily or not true

(emulsa oleōsa seu non vera) and seed or true emulsions (emulsa seminalia seu vera).

4. Liniments — linimenta (linimentum, i n) are thick liquids or liquid oint-

ments for rubbing into the skin vegetable oils (sunflower oil, almond oil, castor oil,

etc.). The base of liniments is composed from vegetable oils (sunflower oil, almond

oil, castor oil, etc).

5. Infusions — infūsa (infūsum, i n) are aqueous extractions from soft parts of

vegetable row material (leaves, flowers, petals, herbs etc.), which are obtained by

means of heating in a boiling water bath.

6. Decoctions — decocta (decoctum, i n) are aqueous extractions from the sol-

id parts of medicinal plants (bark, roots, rhizomes etc.).

7. Tinctures — tinctūrae (tinctūra, ae f) are spirituous, spirituous-aqueous or

spirituous-ethereal extractions from the vegetable or animal row materials received

without heating and meant for internal and external use.

§ 157. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into English:

1. Solutiōnes Methylēni coerulei aquōsae seu glycerinōsae in venam intra-

ducuntur sub intoxicationĭbus cyanĭdis, Carbonei monoxўdo et Hydrogenii sulfĭdo.

2. Tinctūra foliōrum Berberĭdis vulgāris sumĭtur in quantitāte ab quindĕcim ad viginti

guttas bis seu ter in die. 3. Emulsa sunt mixtiōnes aquae cum materiis isolubilĭbus

(oleis aethereis et pinguĭbus, picĭbus, balsămis). 4. Ad morbos cavitātis oris saepe gar-

garismăta infūsi Chamomillae seu Salviae praescribuntur.

2. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into Latin:

1. For treatment purulent wounds sterile gauze bandages are saturated with 30%

aqueous polyethylenoxid-400 solution. 2. Liniments are thick liquids obtained on the

base of vegetable oils which are rubbed into the skin. 3. In the intravenous introduction

of nitroglycerin its solution in ampoules is diluted with isotonic solution of sodium

chloride. 4. On the labels with emulsions the inscription «Before usage it is to be shak-

en! » is usually indicated.

3. Give the dictionary form and translate the prescriptions into English: 1.Take Wormwood tincture

Rhubarb tincture of each 15 ml

Mix

Give

Write on the label:

2.Take: Castor oil emulsion 150.0

Basic bismuth nitrate 0.1

Sugar syrup 10 ml

Mix

Give

Write on the label:

121

3.Take: Chloral hydrate 1.0

Starch mucilage 3.0

Purified water 200 ml

Mix

Give

Write on the label:

4.Take: Cyanocobalamin 0.01% solution for injections — 1 ml

Let it be given of such a dose in the amount 10 in ampoules

Let it be labelled:

5.Take: Decoction of milkwort root from 20.0 — 200 ml

Ammoniac and anise fluid 2 ml

Simple syrup 20 ml

Mix. Give

Write on the label:

6.Take: Suspension of amorphous zinc-insulin 5 ml

Let it be given. Let it be labeled:

7.Take: Microcid

Cod-liver oil of each 100.0

Mix to get an emulsion

Give. Write on the label:

8.Take: Glucose solution 20 % for injections 10 ml

Add aseptically strophanthin solution 0.05 % for injections 0.5 ml

Let it be mixed. Let it be given.

Let it be labelled:

9.Take: Spirituous iodine solution 5% - 2 ml

Tannin 3.0

Glycerin 10 ml

Mix

Give such a dose in the amount 2

Write on the label:

Dictionaries to the lesson 26

Latin–English vocabulary

aquōsus, a, um — aqueous insolubĭlis, e — insoluble

Berbĕris, ĭdis f — barberry intoxicatio, ōnis f — intoxication

Carboneum, i n — carbon monoxўdum, i n — monoxide

coeruleus, a, um — blue pix, picis f — resin

cyanĭdum, i n — cyanide quindĕcim — fifteen

gargarisma, ătis n — gargle ter — trice, three times

glycerinōsus, a, um — glyceric viginti — twenty

in die — daily vulgāris, e — common

English–Latin glossary

to add — addo, addĭdi, addĭtum, ĕre 3 isotonic — isotonĭcus, a, um

ammoniac and anise fluid — Liquor

Ammonii anisātus

(ammoniac — Ammonium, i n

microcide — Microcīdum, i n

milkwort — Polygăla, ae f

mucilage — mucilāgo, ĭnis f

122

anise — anisātus, a, um

fluid — liquor, ōris m)

to obtaine — elicio, elicui, elicĭtum, ĕre 3

polyethylenoxid — Polyaethylenoxīdum, i n

amorphous — amorphus, a, um purulent — purulentus, a, um

aseptically — aseptĭce rhubarb — Rheum, i n

bandage — fascia, ae f to saturate — satŭro, āvi, ātum āre 1

chloral — Chlorālum, i n to shake — agĭto, āvi, ātum, āre 1

cod-liver oil — Oleum jecŏris aselli

cod — asellus, i m

liver (of fishes) — jecur, ŏris n

spirituous — spirituōsus, a, um

starch — Amўlum, i n

suspension — suspensio, ōnis f

gauze — tela, ae f tannin — Tannīnum, i n

hydrate — hydras, ātis m thick — spissus, a, um

to indicate — indĭco, āvi, ātum, āre 1 usually — plerumque

wormwood — Absinthium, i n

LESSON 27

SYSTEMATIZATION OF LIQUID DRUG FORM NAMES AND THEIR PRESCRIPTION

(PART 2)

§ 158. Pharmaceutical information on the liquid drug forms

1. Drops — guttae (gutta, ae f) are the aqueous or oily solutions of medicinal

substances with a strong therapeutic action. These substances are dosed in the amount

less than 1 milliliter, and an average weight of a drop is 0.05 ml. Drops for eyes are

named oculoguttae (oculogutta, ae f), drops for nose — nasoguttae (nasogutta, ae f)

seu naristillae (naristilla, ae f), drops for ears — otoguttae (otogutta, ae f) or auristil-

lae (auristilla, ae f).

2. Extracts — extracta (extractum, i n) are the concentrated drawing out from

a vegetable row material. After their consistence extracts are divided in:

1) liquid extracts — extracta fluĭda;

2) thick extracts — extracta spissa;

3) dry extracts — extracta sicca.

3. Mucilages — mucilagĭnes (mucilāgo, ĭnis f) are the liquid forms which are ob-

tained by dissolving in water gums, starch or treated plant material comprising mucous

substances (Gummi arabĭcum — arabic gum, Amўlum — starch, Semĭna Lini — flax

seeds, Radīces Althaeae — march-mallow roots etc.).

4. Mixtures — mixtūrae (mixtura, ae f) are mixtures of two or more medici-

nal substances being in a weighted or dissolved state in a liquid. Dry mixtures (mix-

tūrae siccae) are used, too.

5. Injections — injectiōnes (injectio, ōnis f) are ready-made sterile solutions

of medicinal substances which are prepared for subcutaneous, intramuscular, intrave-

nous and another introductions. They are produced in the plants in ampoules, but may

be prepared after a medical prescription with the necessary indication «Steri-

lisētur!»(Let it be sterilized!) or «Sterilĭsа!» (Sterilize!).

6. Oils — olea (oleum, i n) are oily drawing out from a vegetable or animal

row material.

123

7. Lemonades — limonāta (limonātum, i n) — sweet and acidulated liquids

including medicinal substances, syrups and acids (citric, lactic, tartaric etc.). Lemon-

ades usually are prepared for children.

8. Syrups — sirūpi (sirūpus, i m) are mixtures of medicinal plants extracts

with sugar syrup.

9. Juices - succi (succus, i m) are mixtures including 85% fresh vegetable juice

and 15% ethylic alcohol.

10. Aromatic waters — aquae aromatĭcae (aqua, ae f; aromatĭcus, a, um) are solutions of distilled water with vegetable extracts and oils having a stable pleasant

smell, for example, mint water (Aqua Menthae), fennel water (Aqua Foenicŭli).

§ 159. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into the English:

1. Methyldōpha producĭtur in forma injectabĭli ut 5% solutio in ampullis seu in

flaconĭbus cum additiōne Natrii bisulfītis et conservantōrum. 2. Mixtūra sicca contra tus-

sim pro adultis contĭnet extracti Thermopsĭdis sicci 0,6, extracti radīcis Glycyrrhizae sicci,

Natrii hydrocarbonātis et Ammonii chlorĭdi ana 2, 0, olei Anīsi 0.05, Sacchări 10.0.

3. Duae seu tres guttae Amylii nitrītis offae gossypii imposĭtae pro inhalatiōne ut anti-

dŏtum adhibentur sub intoxicatiōne Acĭdo hydrocyanĭco et salĭbus ejus. 4. Oculoguttae

Norfloxacīni adhibentur ad usum locālem ana 1 seu 2 guttas quarter in die, ut otoguttae

autem ana 4 guttas ter in die.

2. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into the Latin:

1. 0. 2% hydroxyzin syrup is produced in little bottles on 200 ml everyone and

is used as sedative, anxiolytic and antiemetic means. 2. Cordiamin or 25% solution of

diethylamide of nicotinic acid is taken orally 15 drops for one intake 2 or 3 times a day

or is induced subcutaneously, intramuscularly and intravenously 1–2 ml 3 times a day.

3. Bromhexin is the basic component of a combined prepa- ration «Bronchosan»

which is taken in drop form by mouth in the acute and chro- nic bronchitis of different

etiology. 4. Wheat starch, Maize starch, rice starch and potato tuber starch make in the

hot water a colloidal solution named «starched mucilage".

3. Give the dictionary form and translate the prescriptions into the Latin: 1.Take: Chloral hydrate

Starch mucilage

Distilled water of each 25.0

Mix

Give

Write on the label:

2. Take: Ipecacuanha roots infusion from 0.4 — 180 ml

Ammoniac and anise liquid 2.0

March-mallow syrup 15.0

Mix

Give

Write on the label:

3. Take: Thick extract of male fern 6.0

Divide into 6 equal parts

Give in gelatinous capsules

Write on the label:

124

4. Take: Diluted pure hydrochloric acid 4.0

Pepsin 2.0

Simple syrup 50.0

Distilled water 150 ml

Mix to get a mixture

Give

Write on the label:

5. Take: Novocain 0.5

Isotonic sodium chloride solution 200 ml

Let it be mixed

Let it be sterilized!

Let it be given

Let it be labelled:

6. Take: Oily testosterone oenanthate solution 2% 1.0

Let be given such a dose in the amount 6 in ampoules

Let it be labelled:

7. Take: Antiasthmatic mixture 200 ml

Give

Write on the label:

8. Take: Flax seeds mucilage 150.0

Give for a certain time

Write on the label:

9. Take: Seeds of sweet almond 5.0

Castor oil 3.0

Distilled water up to 50 ml

Mix to get an emulsion

Give

Write on the label:

Dictionaries to the lesson 27

Latin–English vocabulary

Amylium, i n — amyl Methyldōpha, ae f — methyldopa

antidŏtum, i n — antidote nitrīs, ītis m — nitrite

conservantum, i n — preservative Norfloxacīnum, i n — norfoxacin

gossypium, i n — cotton wool oculogutta, ae f — drop for eyes

hydrocyanĭcus, a, um — hydrocyanic offa, ae f — piece

imposĭtus, a, um — put on otogutta, ae f — drop for ears

injectabĭlis, e — for injections quarter — four times

Thermopsis, ĭdis f — thermopsis

English–Latin glossary

anxiolytic — anxiolytĭcus, a, um intramuscularly — intra musculos

basic — cardinālis, e; principālis, e intravenously — intra venas

bromhexin — Bromhexīnum, i n ipecacuanha — Ipecacuanha, ae f

bronchitis — bronchītis, itĭdis f maize — Mays, ўdis f

bronchosan — Bronchosānum, i n male — mas, maris

chronic — chronĭcus, a, um marsh-mallow — Althaea, ae f

125

diethylamide — Diaethylamīdum, i n ipecacuanha — Ipecacuanha, ae f

etiology — aetiologia, ae f named — nomĭne

fern — Filis, ĭcis f oenanthate — oenanthas , ātis m

flax — Linum, i n potato — Solānum (i, n) tuberōsum

(us, a, um) for a certain time — ex tempŏre

hot — calĭdus, a, um rice — Orÿza, ae f

hydroxyzin — Hydroxyzīnum, i n starched — amylaceus, a, um

to induce — indūco, induxi, inductum, ĕre 3 to sterilize — sterilĭso, āvi, ātum, āre 1

intake (a drug dose to be taken

for one intake) — dosis pro dosi

subcutaneously — sub cutem

testosterone — Testosterōnum, i n

wheat — Tritĭcum, i n

LESSON 28

SYSTEMATIZATION OF THE SOFT DRUG FORM NAMES AND THEIR PRESCRIPTION

§ 160. Pharmaceutical information on the soft drug forms

1. Balsams — balsăma (balsămum, i n) are ointments which contain etheric

oils or resins and are administered for external use. Balsams have antiseptic, heating

up and deodorizing properties. Besides soft balsam forms, the liquid ones exist as well.

2. Ointments — unguenta (unguentum, i n) are drug forms of a sticky con-

sistence containing powdery substances no less than 25%. Depending on the usage

ointments are divided into auricular, nasal, rectal, vaginal and ophthalmic.

Depending on their content ointments are divided into simple and compound ones.

Ointments may be produced in the plants or be prepared at a pharmacy after a doctors

prescription.

3. Liniments or liquid ointments — linimenta (linimentum, i n). Depending

on their viscidity or thickness grad the liniments belong to soft or liquid drug forms.

Like ointments they can be simple and compound, can be produced at factories or be

prepared at a pharmacy after a doctors prescription.

4. Pastes — pastae (pasta, ae f) are thick ointments containing more than 25%

powdery substances. Like ointments and liniments they can be produced at factories or

be prepared in drugstores after a doctor’s prescription.

5. Gels — gela (gelum, i n) — are jelly-like forms being disperse systems with

a liquid disperse surroundings. Gels are produced at factories only and are prescribed

in a shortened way.

6. Creams — cremōres (cremor, ōris m) are ready-made drug forms being less

stickly by their consistence than ointments. Like gels they are produced at factories

only and are prescribed in a shortened way.

7. Suppositories — suppositoria (suppositorium, i n) are drug forms which

are solid by the room temperature and melting by the body temperature. One may dis-

tinguish rectal suppositories (suppositoria rectalia), vaginal suppositories (suppositoria

vaginalia) and small stick-bougies (bacilli) which are induced into fistulas, urethra and

nasal cavity.

Suppositories may be produced at factories or be prepared in drugstores after a

doctor’s prescription.

126

8. Plasters — emplastra (emplastrum, i n) are plastic masses which get soft

by the body temperature and stick to the skin. Plasters are produced at factories only

and are prescribed in a shortened way.

§ 161. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into the English:

1. Ad morbos cutis aetiologiae non microbĭcae 0,5% unguentum Prednisolōni

cuti imponĭtur strato tenui ter in die. 2. Sub curatiōne colitĭdis ulcerōsae non specifĭcae

oleum Rosae inducĭtur per clysma ana 50 ml quotidie aut alternis diēbus. 3. Unguen-

tum contra congelatiōnem inclūdit Tinctūrae Capsĭci 7,4; Acĭdi formicĭci 0,3; 10% So-

lutiōnis Camphorae oleōsae ad usum externum 6,2; Olei Ricĭni 1,0; Solutiōnis Ammo-

nii caustĭci 1,4; Sapōnis virĭdis 1,9; Lanolīni anhydrĭci 1,3; Adĭpis suilli 9,4; Vaselīni

medicinālis 71,0. 4. Benzylii benzoas medicinālis adhibētur ad curatiōnem scabiēi in

forma 20% emulsi or 20% geli seu unguenti.

2. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into the Latin:

1. Aloe juice is prepared in bottles from the dark glass and is administered for

external use in the form of eye-washes or irrigations. 2. The preparation

«Bisacodil» in the form of rectal suppositories is administered in chronic constipations

and for bowel content removal before a diagnostic exploration. 3. 5% ointment «Diae-

thon» has radioprotective proprieties and is used for protection of skin integuments of

the patients in the ray therapy. 4. The preparation «Pimafucort» is produced in the

form of ointments, creams and lotions, one gram or milliliter of which contains 0. 01

gram both of natamycin and hydrocortisone and 0.5 grams of neomycin as well.

3. Give the dictionary form and translate the prescriptions into the Latin: 1.Take: Menthol 1.0

Anestesin 3.0

Folliculin 300000 IU

White streptocid 4,0

Vaseline oil 40.0

Mix to get an ointment

Give

Write on the label:

2.Take: Belladonna extract 0.015

Novocain 0.01

Streptocid 0.1

Collargol 0.01

Adrenalin hydrotartrate 0.18% - IV drops

Cocoa oil 3,0

Mix to get a rectal suppository

Give such a dose in the amount 10

Write on the label:

3.Take: Rectified oil of turpentine

Xeroform of each 15. 0

Methyl salicylate 10 ml

Mix to get a liniment

Give

Write on the label:

127

4.Take: Hydrocortisone suspension 2.5% 0.01

Tetracycline hydrochloride 0.1

White clay 0.5

Pitch oil as much as suffices

Mix to get a paste

Give

Write on the label:

5.Take: Capsicum plaster number 3

Give. Write on the label:

6.Take: Vaginal suppositories with synthomycine 0.25 number 10

Let it be given. Let it be labelled:

7.Take: Ammonium chloride

Rectified licorice juice 5 ml

Distilled water up to 200 ml

Mix. Give.

Write on the label:

8.Take Salicylic acid 1.0

Zinc oxide

Wheat starch of each 12.5

Vaseline up to 50.0

Mix to get an ointment

Give

Write on the label:

Dictionaries to the lesson 28

Latin–English vocabulary

adeps (ĭpis m) suillus (a, um) — lard Lanolīnum, i n — lanolin

alternis diēbus — each second day , every

other day

microbĭcus, a, um — microbic

Prednisolōnum, i n — prednisolon

anhydrĭcus, a, um — anhydrous quotidie — every day, daily

Capsĭcum, i n — pepper sapo, ōnis m — soap

caustĭcus, a, um — caustic scabies, ēi f — scabies, itch

clysma, ătis n — enema, clyster specifĭcus, a, um — specific

colītis, itĭdis f — colitis, inflammation of

colon

stratum, a, um — layer

suillus, a, um — of pork

congelatio, ōnis f — freezing, frost-bite tenuis, e — thin

gelum, i n — gel ulcerōsus, a, um — ulcerous

impōno, imposui, imposĭtum, ěre 3 (+Dat.) —

to put on, to apply

virĭdis, e — green

English–Latin glossary

adrenalin — Adrenalīnum, i n to have — habeo, habui, habĭtum, ēre 2

anesthesin — Anaesthesīnum, i n integument — integumentum, i n

as much as suffices — quantum satis irrigation — irrigatio, ōnis f

bisacodil — Bisacodīlum, i n natamycin — Natamycīnum, i n

bowel — intestīnum, i n neomycin — Neomycīnum, i n

128

collargol — Collargōlum, i n pimafucort — Pimafucortum, i n

constipation — constipatio, ōnis f pitch — pix, picis f

cream — cremor, ōris m protection — munimentum, i n

diaethon — Diaethōnum, i n radioprotective — radioprotectīvus, a, um

eye-wash — collyrium, i n ray therapy — radiotherapia, ae f

exploration — exploratio, ōnis, f removal (some food substances from the

stomach) — evacuatio, ōnis f folliculin — Folliculīnum, i n

turpentine — Terebinthĭna, ae f

LESSON 29

SYSTEMATIZATION OF NON STANDARO DRUG FORMS AND THEIR PRESCRIPTION

§ 162. The drug forms which differ from traditional solid, liquid

and soft ones

1. Aerosols — aërosōla (aërosōlum, i n) are dispersion systems in which a

drug is contained within a special cylinder and is extracted by spraying. Aerosols are

administrated for a local action or for an inhalation. They are prescribed in a shortened

way.

2. Sprays — («spray» is not translated into the Latin) are dispersion systems

like aerosols. The term «spray» is used as a rule in the singular form and conditionally

is considered to be a neutral gender noun when using with adjectives: spray nasāle —

nasal spray, spray cutaneum — skin spray. Sprays are usually identified with aerosols,

compare such a prescription:

Take: Aerosol of Beclomethazon dipropionate 10 ml

Give. Write on the label: Nasal spray–aerosol (a dosed one)

3. Shampoos — lavatoria spumantia (lavatorium, i n washing means; spu-

mans, ntis foaming) are foaming washing means with addition of disinfecting, insec-

ticide and another components).

4. Lacquers or varnishes — lacca (laccum, i n) are liquids with a medicinal

component, after applying of which on any part of body a semisolid film appears.

5. Implants — implantāta (implantātum, i n) are special grafts or microcap-

sules with medicinal components which are introduced under the skin.

6. Intrauterine polymer carriers — gestatōres intrauterāles polymĕri

(gestātor, ōris m; intrauterālis, e; polymĕrus, a, um) are intrauterine systems for

contraception.

7. Transdermal therapeutical systems — systemăta transdermalia thera-

peutĭca (systēma, ătis n; transdermālis, e; therapeutĭcus, a, um) are devices

providing drug administration through the skin with the help of special plasters.

These entire enumerated above drug forms are produced at factories and are

prescribed in a shortened way.

§ 163. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into the Latin:

1) Six levonorgestrel capsules are implanted under the skin into the inner shoul-

der region. 2) The preparation «Amorolfin» is administered for external use in a var-

nish form for treating and prophylaxis mucous skin diseases caused by dermatiphytes

129

and actinomycetes. 3) Varnish «Ciclopirox» is applied with a thin layer on the affected

nail with the help of a special brush during the first month every other day. 4) Sham-

poo «Phenothrin» is administered in pediculosis of head hairs in children and adults.

5) The dosed aerosol inhacort in cylinders on 6 ml everyone contains 120 doses and is

administered for treatment bronchial asthma. 6) Intrauterine polymer carriers on 50

micrograms with the controlled deliberation of drug component are used for contra-

ception. 7) The polymer layer of the transdermal therapeutical system «Nitropercuten»

contains 0.08 grams of nitroglycerin which gradually gets free from a polymer layer

and comes into organism.

Dictionary to the lesson 29

actinomycetes — actinomўces, ētis m inhacort — Inhacortum, i n

amorolfin — Amorolfīnum, i n to implant — implanto, āvi, ātum, āre 1

asthma — asthma, ătis n intrauterine — intrauterīnus, a, um

bronchial — bronchiālis, e layer — stratum, i n

brush — penicillus, i m levonorgestrel — Levonorgestrēlum, i n

carrier — gestātor, ōris m microgram — microgramma, ătis n

ciclopirox — Ciclopirōxum, i n month — mensis, is m

to come into — intro, āvi, ātum, āre 1

(+Acc.)

mucous disease, mycosis — mycōsis, is f

nail — unguis, is m

contraception — contraceptio, ōnis f phenothrin — Phenothrīnum, i n

controlled — recensibĭlis, e pediculosis — pediculōsis, is f

cylinder — cylindrus, i m polymer — polymĕrus, a, um

deliberation — deliberatio, ōnis f shampoo — lavatorium spumans; (lavatori-

um, i n — washing means;

spumans, ntis — foaming) dermatiphytes — dermatophўton, i n

every other day — diēbus alternis

(alternus, a, um — acting in turn) shoulder — brachium, i n

to get free — libĕro, āvi, ātum, āre 1(use

in passive voice)

treatment — curatio, ōnis f

transdermal — transdermālis, e

dosed — divīsus, a, um varnish — laccum, i n

gradually — paulātim with the help — ope (+ Gen.)

hair — pilus, i m

LESSON 30

SHORTENED LATIN DESIGNATIONS IN PRESCRIPTIONS

§ 164. Rules of shortening designation

Shortened designations are used in the Latin part of prescription. First is short-

ened the word «Recipe» and then drug form names, plant parts, standard prescription

formulas with verbs, names and adjectives. Such shortened designations include usual-

ly one, two-four, seldom five or six initial letters:

h., hb. — herba (herb); liq. — liquor (liquid); past. — pasta (paste); con-

centr. — concentrātus (concentrated).

If a word is shortened in a syllable which includes several consonants, then all of

them are retained: cort. — cortex (bark); empl. — emplastrum (plaster).

Never medical plant names, chemical elements names and drug names are

shortened. In full form always is written the verb formula «Sterilisētur!»

130

§ 165. Table of the shortened Latin designations

Abbreviation Full form Meaning

āā ana of each, equally

adult. adultus adult

ас., acid. acĭdum acid

ad us. ext. ad usum externum for external use

ad us. int. ad usum internum for internal use

aёros. aёrosōlum aerosol

amp. ampulla ampoule

antiasthm. antiasthmatĭcus, a, um antiasthmatic

aq. aqua water

aq. destill. Aqua destillāta distilled water

aq. purif. Aqua purificāta purified water

but. butÿrum oil (solid)

cm centimĕtrum centimeter

соmр., cps., cpt. composĭtus, a, um compound

concentr. concentrātus, a, um concentrated

cort. cortex bark

crem. cremor cream

D. Da. Detur. Dentur Give. Let it be given.

D. t. d. Da (Dentur) tales doses Give (Let be given) of such doses

dec., dсt. decoctum decoction

dep. depurātus, a, um purified (of solid substances)

dil. dilūtus, a, um diluted

empl. emplastrum plaster

emuls. emulsum emulsion

extr. extractum extract

f. fiat, fiant to get

fl. flos flower

fluid. fluĭdus, a, um liquid

fol. folium leaf

fr. fructus fruit

gran. granŭlum granule

gtt., gtts. guttam, guttas drop, drops

h., hb. herba herb

in amp. in ampullis in ampoules

in caps. gel. in capsŭlis gelatinōsis in gelatinous capsules

in ch. cer. in charta cerāta in waxed paper

inf. infūsum infusion

infant. infantes children

in flac. in flaconĭbus in bottles

in tab. in tabulettis in tablets

in vitr. nigr. in vitro nigro in dark phial

lin., linim. linimentum liniment

liq. liquor liquid, fluid

liquid. liquĭdus, a, um liquid

131

M. Misce. Misceātur. Mix. Let it be mixed.

M. D. S. Misce. Da. Signa.

Misceātur. Detur. Signētur.

Mix. Give. Write on the label:

Let it be mixed. Let it be given,

Let it be written on the label:

ml millilĭtrum milliliter

mg milligramma milligram

mixt. mixtūra mixture

mucil. mucilāgo mucilage

N. numĕro number

obd. obductus, a, um coated

ol. oleum oil (liquid)

past. pasta paste

pil. pilŭla pill

piper. piperītus, a, um pepper

praec., pсt., ppt. praecipitātus, a, um precipitated

pro inject. pro injectionĭbus for injections

pulv. pulvis powder

q. s. quantum satis the amount needed

r., rad. radix root

Rp. Recĭpe Take

rectif. rectificātus, a, um rectified (of liquids)

Rep. Repĕte. Repetātur. Repeat. Let it be repeated.

rhiz. rhizōma rhizome

sem. semen seed

sicc. siccus, a, um dry

simpl. simplex simple

sir. sirūpus syrup

sol. solutio solution

sp., spec. species species

spir. spirĭtus spirit, alcohol

Steril. Sterilĭsa! Sterilisētur! Sterilize!

Let it be sterilized!

steril. sterĭlis sterile

supp. suppositorium, suppositoria suppository, suppositories

supp. rect. suppositorium rectāle rectal suppository

supp. vagin. suppositorium vagināle vaginal suppository

susp. suspensio suspension

tab. tabuletta, tabulettae

tabulettam, tabulettas

tablet, tablets

tr. tritus, a, um grinded

t-ra, tinct. tinctūra tincture

ung. unguentum ointment

§ 166. Exercises

1 .Give the dictionary forms of each word and translate the prescriptions into

the English in the full form:

1) Rp.: Hb. Millefolii

132

Hb. Absinthii

Fl. Chamomillae

Fol. Salviae

Fol. Menthae piper. āā 10, 0

M.f.sp.

D.S.:

2) Rp.: Aethĕris pro narcōsi 35, 0

Chinīni hydrochlorĭdi 0, 5

Spir. aethylĭci 95% 3 ml

Ol. Persicōrum ad 60, 0

M.D.S.:

3) Rp.: Tab. Natrii phthorĭdi pro infant. 0, 0011 N.12

D.S.:

4) Rp.: Sol. Glucōsi 5% - 250 ml

Sol. Novocaīni 0,5% - 100 ml

M. Sterilisētur!

D.S.:

5) Rp.: Sarcolysīni 0, 01

D.t.d. N. 25 in tab.

S.:

6) Rp.: Extr. Belladonnae 0,015

Novocaīni 0,1

Streptocīdi 0,1

Collargōli 0,1

Sol. Adrenalīni hydrochlorīdi 0, 18% — gtts. IV

Ol. Cacáo 3,0

M.f. supp.rect.

D.t.d. N.12

S.:

7) Rp.: Aёros. «Сamphomēnum» 30, 0

D. S.:

8) Rp.: Сrem. «Acyclovir» 5% - 2, 0

D.S.:

9) Rp.: Mixt. antiasthm. Trascōvi 200 ml

D. S.:

10) Rp.: Ac. ascorbinĭci 0, 2

Ac. nicotinĭci

Riboflavīni āā 0, 25

Aq. dest. 100 ml

M.D.S.:

11) Rp.: Tab. «Mezymum-forte» N. 20

D.S.:

12) Rp.: Barii sulfātis pro roentgēno 30, 0

Aq. pro inject. 170 ml

M. Sterilisētur!

D.S.:

133

13) Rp.: Spasmolytīni 0, 05

Suprastīni 0, 025

Thiamīni bromĭdi 0, 01

Sacchări 0,3

Coffeĭni-natrii benzoātis 0, 01

M. f. pulv.

D .t. d. N. 30

S.:

14) Rp.: Insulīni 10 IU

Methyluracīli 0, 001

Riboflavīni 0, 001

Sol. Natrii adenosintriphosphātis 0,1% — 10 ml

M.D.S.:

2. Write down the dictionary form and translate the prescriptions into the Latin in

the full and shortened forms:

1.Take: Fennel fruits

Valerian rhizome with roots of each 30. 0

Mix to get a species

Give. Write on the label:

2.Take: Glucose solution 40% - 20 ml

Ascorbic acid solution 5% - 5 ml

Cocarboxylase 0,1

Calcium gluconate solution 10% - 10 ml

Let it be mixed. Let it be given.

Let it be written on the label:

3.Take: Benzylpenicilline sodium 300000 IU

Laevomycetin 5. 0

Peach oil

Pyridoxine hydrochloride

Riboflavin of each 0. 01

Thiamine bromide 0. 05

Cortisone emulsion 2. 5

Lanolin

Vaseline of each 50. 0

Mix to get an ointment

Give. Write on the label:

4.Take: Caffeine sodium benzoate 1. 0

Sodium bromide 3. 0

Chinese magnolia vine tincture 6 ml

Distilled water 200 ml

Let it be mixed. Let it be given.

Let it be written on the label:

5.Take: Dog rose fruits

Elder fruits and leaves

Marigold flowers

Hop cones

134

Rhizomes with valerian roots of each 15.0

Mix to get a species

Give in paper sack

Write on the label:

6.Take: Cholenzyme tablets number 50

Give. Write on the label:

7. Take: Bilberry fruits 100.0

Give. Write on the label:

8. Take: Pilocarpin hydrochloride 0.1

Physostigmine salicylate 0.03

Distilled water 10 ml

Let it be mixed. Let it be given in a dark phial.

Let it be written on the label:

9. Take: Juniper berries infusion from 10.0 — 200 ml

Give. Write on the label:

10. Take: Almond oil emulsion 100 ml

Benzoic acid 0.15

Fennel oil VII drops

Mix. Give.

Write on the label:

11. Take: Red bilberry leaves decoction from 20.0 — 200 ml

Give. Write on the label:

12. Take: Novocain solution 0.25 % - 100 ml

Euphylline solution 2.4 % - 5 ml

Hydrocortisone 0.025

Monomycin 0.75

Let it be mixed. Let it be sterilized!

Let it be given. Let it be written on the label:

13. Take: Thermopsis herb infusion from 0.6 — 130 ml

Pertussin 50 ml

Sodium bromide

Sodium benzoate of each 3.0

Elixir pectoral 6.0

Mix. Give.

Write on the label:

14. Take: Cowslip primrose bark from 5.0 — 100 ml

Garden violet herb infusion from 6.0 — 100 ml

Licorice root syrup 20.0

Give. Write on the label:

Dictionaries to the lesson 30

Latin–English vocabulary

Acyclovirum, i n — acyclovir Mezymum-forte, Mezymi-forte n —

mezym-forte

adenosintriphosphas, ātis m —

adenosintriphosphate

Millefolium, i n — milfoil

Mixtūra Trascōvi — Trascov mixture

135

Chinīnum, i n — quinine phthorĭdum, i n — phthoride

Coffeĭnum-natrii benzos, Coffeini-natrii

benzoātis m — caffeine sodium benzoate

Sarcolysīnum, i n — sarcolysin

Spasmolytīnum, i n — spasmolytin

Methyluracīlum, i n — methyluracil Suprastīnum, i n — suprastin

English–Latin glossary

Benzylpenicilline sodium –

Benzylpenicillīnum-natrium, i n

garden violet — Viŏla (ae f) tricŏlor (ōris)

hop — Humŭlus, i m

bilberry — Myrtillus, i m juniper — Junipĕrus, i f

Chinese magnolia vine — Schizandra

(ae f) chinensis (is, e)

laevomycetin — Laevomycetīnum, i n

marigold — Calendŭla, ae f

cholenzyme — Cholenzÿmum, i n monomycin — Monomycīnum, i n

cone — strobĭlus, i m pectoral — pectorālis, e

cowslip primrose — Primŭla, ae f pertussin — Pertussīnum, i n

dog rose — Rosa, ae f physostigmine — Physostigmīnum, i n

elder — Sambūcus, i f pilocarpin — Pilocarpīnum, i n

elixir — elixir, īris n red bilberry — Vitis (is f) idaea (us, a, um)

fennel — Foenicŭlum, i n

LESSON 31

SYSTEMATIZATION OF THE WORD BUILDING ELEMENTS AND THEIR ORTHOGRAPHY

(PART 1)

§ 167. The alphabet list of learnt word building elements, part 1

The following two lessons aim to give the students a possibility to repeat the

word building elements to get ready better to the resulting test in the learnt matter. To

master it, students are recommended to make on their own the alphabet table of the

learnt word building elements including all the exceptions and then to compare their

table with that of the textbook one. Examples and exceptions are given in the Latin for

the best orthography memorizing.

Word building

elements Example Exceptions

-aesth-,

-aesthes-,

-asthes-,

-esthes-,

Aesthocīnum i n

Anaesthesīnum, i n

Bellasthesīnum i n Pavesthesīnum, i n

Aestifānum, i n

-aeth- Aethazōlum, i n

aether, ĕris m

etacrynĭcus, a, um

-alg- Analgīnum, i n

Baralgīnum, i n

-andr- Methylandrostendiōlum, i n

-angi- Angioprīlum, i n

-anth- Helianthus,i m

Strophanthīnum i n

Remantadīnum, i n

-api- Apilācum, i n

136

-as- Ribonucleāsum, i n

-az- Azaleptīnum i n

-(a)zid- Dichlothiazīdum, i n

Saluzīdum i n

Adonisīdum, i n

-(a)zin- Phthoracizīnum, i n Sulfadimezīnum i n adenosintriphos-

phorĭcus, a, um;

Troxevasīnum, i n

-(a)zol- Aethazōlum, i n

Norsulfazōlum i n

aёrosōlum, i n (and all

the aerosol names with

ending -sol in English

variant: Chinosōlum, i

n; Mycosolōnum, i, n;

Oxycyclosōlum, i n;

Prednisolōnum, i n

-(a)zon- Oxyzōnum i n

Sibazōnum i n

Cortisōnum, i n

Hydrocortisōnum, i n

Dexamethasōnum, i n

-benz- benzoas, ātis m Benzylpenicillīnum, i n

-bil-, -bili- Bilimīnum, i n

-bol- Phenobolīnum, i n

-cain- Benzocaīnum, i n Novocaīnum, i n

-camph- Bromcamphŏra, ae f Camphonium, i n

-card- Cardiamīnum, i n

-chol-,

-chole-

Allochōlum, i n

Cholenzÿmum, i n

-chon-,

-chondr-

Chonsurīnum, i n Chondrolōnum, i n

-cid- Streptocīdum, i n

-cillin- Ampicillīnum, i n Benzylpenicillīnum, i n Furacilīnum, i n

-cor-, cord- Corvalōlum, i n Cordānum, i n

-cort-

-cortic-

Cortisōnum, i n

Corticotropīnum, i n

-cyan- cyanĭdum, i n; Cyanocobalamīnum, i n

-cycl(o)- Cyclobarbitālum, i n Cyclopentālum, i n

-cyclin- Tetracyclīnum, i n Oxytetracyclīnum, i n

-cyst- Cystamīnum, i n

-cyt- Сytarabīnum, i n Cytochrōmum, i n

-digi-,

digit-

Digitōnum, i n

Digitoxīnum, i n

-dol- Panadōlum, i n

-dorm- Novidormum, i n

-emes-,

-emet-

Emesēnum, i n

Emetisānum, i n

-enter- Enterosorbentum, i n

-en(zym)-

-en(zyn)-,

-en(zy)-

Solizÿmum, i n

Panzynormum, i n

Enzystālum, i n

137

-eph-,

-ephedr-,

-phedr-

Ephatīnum, i n

Ephedrīnum, i n

Theophedrīnum i n

-ery-

-erythr-

-eryth-,

-rythr-

Erycyclīnum, i n

Erythrānum, i n Erythrocyclīnum, i n

Clarythromycīnum, i n

-febr- Febrinīlum, i n

-form- Formalīnum, i n

Iodoformium, i n

-fung-,

-fungi-,

-fungin-

Myfungārum, i n

Fungilīnum, i n

Nitrafungīnum, I n

-fura- Furagīnum, i n

-gastr- Alugastrīnum, i n

-gĕnus, a, um Haematogĕnum, i n

oestrogĕna, ōrum n

-gest- Progesterōnum, i n

-glyc(y)- Glycerīnum, i n

Glycīnum, i n

Glycyrrhīza, ae f

-gnost- Bilignostum, i n

-haem- Haemodĕsum, i n haemostatĭcus, a, um

-helm-,

-helmin(t)-,

Helmexum, i n

Helmintoxum, i n

-hist(o)-,

-hista-,

-histi-

Histodīlum, i n

Histamīnum, i n

Histimēnum, i n

-hydr-,

-hyd-

Hydrogenium, i n Formaldehўdum, i n

-hypn- Hypnodormum, i n

-ichthy- Ichthyōlum, i n Ichthyosulfōlum, i n

-lax- Regulaxum, i n

-leuc-,

-leuk-

Leucogĕnum, i n

Leukerīnum, i n

-lys-, -lysin- Lysoformium, i n Cerebrolysīnum, i n

-lyt-, -lytin-,

-lytĭcus, a, um

Bronсholytīnum, i n Spasmolytīnum, i n

broncholytĭcus, a, um

-menth- Boromenthōlum, i n

-meth- Methacyclīnum, i n Methylēnum, i n

-morph- Aethylmorphīnum, i n

-muco- Mucosānum, i n

-my(o)- Myolastānum, i n

-myc(o)- Mycoseptīnum, i n Mycosolōnum, i n Gramicidīnum, i n

-mycin- Erythromycīnum, i n Synthomycīnum, i

-naphth- Naphthalānum, i n

-nause-,

-nausi-

Nauseālum, i n

Anausīnum, i n

138

-neo- Neomycīnum, i n

-neuro- Neurolaxum, i n

-noct-,

-nox-

Eunoctīnum, i n

Normanoxum, i n

-normo- Normodipīnum, i n

§ 168. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into the English:

1. Preparatum «Aesthocinum» habet analgetĭcam et antitussĭcam activitātem, effĭcit

moderātam myotrŏpam, spasmolytĭcam et cholinolyticam actiōnem. 2. Remantadīnum,

quod adhibētur pro curatiōne praecŏci et prophylaxi grippi in periŏdo epidemiae,

producĭtur in forma tabulettārum pro adultis et infantĭbus. 3. Aërosōlum «Oxycycloso-

lum», in 70 millilitris cujus continētur 0,35 Oxytetracyclīni hydrochlorĭdi et 0,1 Pred-

nisolōni, conjungit actiōnem antibacteriālem Oxytetracyclīni cum effectĭbus antiphlo-

gistĭcis et antiallergĭcis Prednisolōni.

2. Give the dictionary form and translate the terms into the Latin:

1) 0.025% strophanthin solutions for injections in ampoules on 1 ml 2) 10% ichthy-

osulfol ointment in jars on 25 g 3) sodium adenosintriphosphate solution 1% for injec-

tions 4) amorphous powder of dry adoniside for tablets preparation 5) lyophilisated

cyclophosphan powder for injection solutions in phials 6) rectal suppositories and mi-

croenemata with platyphyllin hydrotartrate 7) mixture of 36 parts of ethylic spirit with

64 parts of water 8) methocamphon methylsulphate injections under skin and into

muscles 9) mycoheptin tablets on 100 000 IU 10) synthomycine liniment 1% with no-

vocain 0.5% 11) sodium para-aminosalicylate granules for injection for internal use in

packets on 100 grams 12) ophthalmic films with fibrolysine on 400 000 IU 13) ben-

zofucain diluted with 5% glucose solution 14) 4% methylprednisolon suspension for

injections in ampoules on 2 ml.

Dictionaries to the lesson 31

Latin–English vocabulary

Aesthocinum, i n — aesthocin moderātus, a, um — moderate

antiallergĭcus, a, um — antiallergic myotrŏpus, a, um — myotropic

antiphlogistĭcus, a, um — antiphlogistic Oxycyclosōlum, i n — oxycyclosol

cholinolytĭcus, a, um — cholinolitic periŏdus, i f — period

conjungo, conjunxi, conjunctum, ěre 3 —

to join

praecox, ŏcis — early

Prednisolōnum, i n — prednisolon

effectus, us m — effect Remantadīnum, i n — remantadin

grippus, i m — influenza

139

English–Latin glossary

adenosintriphosphate —

adenosintriphosphas, ātis m

methylprednisolon —

Methylprednisolōnum, i n

adoniside — Adonisīdum, i n methylsulphate — methylsulfas, ātis m

benzofucain — Benzofucaīnum, i n microenema — microënēma, ătis n

cyclophosphan — Cyclophosphānum, i n mycoheptin — Mycoheptīnum, i n

ichthyosulfol — Ichthyosulfōlum, i n para-aminosalicylate —

para-aminosalicÿlas, ātis m jar — olla, ae f

methocamphon — Methocamphonium, i n platyphylline — Platyphyllīnum, i n

LESSON 32

SYSTEMATIZATION OF THE WORD BUILDING ELEMENTS AND THEIR ORTHOGRAPHY

(PART 2)

§ 169. The alphabet list of learnt word building elements, part 2

-oestr- Octoestrōlum, i n

-onco- Oncocristīnum, i n

–oss- Fluossēnum, i n

-oste- Osteogenōnum, i n

-oxy- Oxygenium, i n

peroxўdum, i n Benzoylperoxīdum, i n

Digitoxīnum, i n

Pyridoxīnum, i n

Polyaethylenoxīdum, i n

Sulfadimethoxīnum, i n

-ozo- Ozokerafīnum, i n

-pan-

-pancre-

-pancreat-

Panhexavītum, i n

Pancreoflātum, i n

Pancreatīnum, i n

-peps-

-pept-

Pepsidīlum, i n

Peptorānum, i n

-phen- Phenobarbitālum, i n

-phosph- phosphas, ātis m

-phtha(l)- Phthazōlum, i n Phthalazōlum, i

n

-phthor- Phthoracizīnum, i n

-phyll- Euphyllīnum, i n

-phyt- Phytoferōlum, i n

-platin- Carboplatīnum, i n

-poly- Polyamīnum, i n

-prosta- Prostaglandīnum, i n

-pur-

-purg-

Pursennīdum, i n

Purgěnum, i n

-py(o)- Pyocīdum, i n

-pyr- Amidopyrīnum, i n Py-

romecaīnum, i n Aspirīnum, i n

140

-rheo- Rheoglumānum, i n Rheopoly-

glucīnum, i n Remantadīnum, i n Resorcīnum,

i n Revītum, i n

-rhythm-

-rhythm-

Rhythmiodarōnum,i n

Rythmodānum, i n

-rifa- Rifamycīnum, i n

-sed- Sedonālum, i n

-sen-,

-senn-

Senadexīnum, i n

Antrasennīnum, i n

-sept- Pantoseptum, i n

-somn- Isomnium, i n

-spasm- Spasmalgōnum, i n

-spast-,

-spastic-

Spastīnum, i n

antispastĭcus, a, um

-stat-,

-statĭc-

Lovostatīnum, i n haemostatĭcus,

a, um

-ster- Testosterōnum, i n

-strept- Streptocīdum, i n

-stroph- Strophanthīnum, i n

-sulf(a)- Norsulfazōlum, i n

-test- Testoenātum, i n

-the(o)- Theobromīnum, i n

Theophyllīnum, i n Terebinthĭna, ae f

Terrilytīnum, i n

-thi(o)-

Thiopentālum-natrium, i n

Thiamīnum, i n

Tritĭcum, i n; words with the

stressed second syllable -ti- from

the word end (Rutīnum); words

with the Latin root

–сorti(c) - (Cortisōnum, i n ;

Hydrocortisōnum, i n; Desoxy-

corticosterōnum, i n)

-thromb- Thrombīnum, i n

-thym- Thymalīnum, i n

-thyr(e)o- Rifathyroīnum, i n Thyreoidīnum,

i n

-tranqui-,

-tranquil-,

-tranquill-

Tranquisānum, i n Tranquīlum, i n

Tranquillīnum, i n

-trips(īn)-,

-ps(īn)-

Tripsīnum, i n

Chimopsīnum, i n

-trŏpus, a, um myotrŏpus, a, um

-tuss- Tussiglaucīnum, i n

-ulc-,

-ulcer-

Ulcosānum, i n

Ulcerānum, i n

-uro- Urolesānum, i n

-val-,

-vale-

Valocormīdum, i n

Cardiovalēnum, i n

-vas- Vasoprēnum, i n

-verm- Vermitoxum, i n

141

-vir- Acyclovīrum, i n

-vit- Hendevītum, i n

-yl- Aethylmorphīnum, i n

Feracrÿlum, i n Paphencÿlum, i n

Sulfacÿlum, i n Thrombotÿlum, i,

n

Words with ending — uracilum

(Methyluracīlum, i n

Phthoruracīlum, i n) ;

Pepsidīlum, i n

-zep-,

zepam-

Chlozepīdum,i n

Nozepāmum, i n

§ 170. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form and translate the sentences into the Latin:

1. As for chemical structure synoestrol differs from steroid estrogen prepara-

tions, but by the biological and curative properties it is similar to them. 2. Rythmodan

or the other disopyramid has a negative inotropic effect and dimensions going potassi-

um ions through cellular membranes. 3. Thrombotyl or the other phenylin is taken

orally in view of prothrombin grad concentration in the blood and other coagulation

agents. 4. Sulphadimethoxin belongs to sulphanilamide preparations of prolong action

and relatively slowly is adsorbed into the gastrointestinal tract. 5. Phthazin (its syno-

nym is phthalyl- sulphapyridazin) is efficacious in treatment of hard forms of intestine

infections with a complete intoxication of organism.

2. Give the dictionary form and translate the terms into the Latin:

1) erythromycin phosphate in 5% solution of glucose 2) recently prepared poly-

aethylenoxid solution 3) powder of crystal tripsin in hermetic corked up ampoules and

phials 4) 10% oily phytomenadion solution in capsules 5) pyridoxalphosphate tablets

on 0.01 and 0.02 grams 6) 0.025% ointment and liniment of synaflan 7) 0,1% naph-

thyzin solutions in tube-droppers on 1.5 ml 8) acelysin powder in little packets for so-

lution for internal use on 0.2 gram 9) 10% sulphocamphocain solution for subcutane-

ous administration in cardiac and respiratory insufficiency 10) polyglucine solution

with glucose for infusions 11) 15% polyvinylpyrrolidon solution for intraarticular in-

duction 12) erythrophosphatide emulsion for intramuscular induction in ampoules on

5 ml 13) echinacea purple drops containing 80 ml of echinacea juice in 20% ethanol

solution 14) phenoxymethylpenicillin granules in phials for suspension

Dictionary to the lesson 32

to absorb — absorbeo, absorpsi, absorp-

tum, ēre 2

packet — fascis, is m

phenoxymethylpenicillin —

Phenoxymethylpenicillīnum, i n acelysin — Acelysīnum, i n

as for — quoad (+Acc.) phenylin — Phenylīnum. i n

biological — biologĭcus, a, um phthalylsulphapyridazin —

Phthalylsulfapyridazīnum, i n coagulation — coagulatio, ōnis f

complete — totus, a, um phthazin — Phthazīnum, i n

concentration — concentratio, ōnis f phytomenadion –

Phytomenadōnum, i n curative — medicālis, e

to dimension — deminuo,

deminui, deminūtum, ĕre 3

polyaethylenoxid —

Polyaethylenoxīdum, i n

142

disopyramid — Dysopyramīdum, i n polyglucine — Polyglucinum, i n

echinacea — Echinacea, ae f polyvinylpyrrolidon —

Polyvinylpyrrolidōnum, i n efficacious — effĭcax, ācis

erythrophosphatide —

Erythrophosphatīdum, i n

prothrombin — Prothrombīnum, i n

purple — purpureus, a, um

ethanol — Aethanōlum, i n pyridoxalphosphate —

Pyridoxalphosphātum, i n grade — gradus, us m

hard — difficĭlis, e relatively — relatīve

inotropic — inotropĭcus, a, um subcutaneous — subcutaneus, a, um

insufficiency — isufficientia, ae f sulphadimethoxin —

Sulfadimethoxīnum, i n intraaricular — intraarticulāris, e

in view of — ex ratiōne (ratio, ōnis f —

view)

sulphanilamide -– Sulfanilamīdum, i n

sulphocamphocain —

Sulfocamphocaīnum i n ion — iŏnum, i n

intramuscular — intramusculāris, e synaflan — Synaflānum, i n

naphthyzyn — Naphthyzīnum, i n the other — alĭter

negative — negatīvus, a, um thrombotyl — Thrombotÿlum, i n

orally — per os tube-dropper — tubŭlus-guttātor, tubŭli-

guttatōris m

LESSON 33

SYSTEMATIZATION OF SPECIAL SPELLING CASES IN THE PHARMACEUTICAL NOUNS

§ 171. Peculiarities of using letters «s», «z», «k»

There exists the problem of choosing letters «s» or «z» in the Latin variant of a

term, because the letter «s» between vowels is pronounced similar to «z».

That is why every student is suggested to make the whole list of terms which

include elements sal/zal, san/ zan, sid/zid, sil/zil, sin/zin, sim/ zym, sol/zol, son/zon

with the aim to determine some regularities in using «s» or«z» :

Oxyzōnum — but: Cortisōnum

Phthivazīdum — but: Adonisīdum

Orāzum — but: Penicillināsum etc.

One should also know all the words in which the Latin letter «к» is used instead

the letter «с»:

brikētum, Kalanchoё, Кalium, Kanamycīnum, Ozokerafīnum, Ozokeralīnum,

Vikasōlum.

§ 172. Vowel and consonant combinations which are not considered to belong to

the word building elements

It is very useful to fix in mind words in which a difficult orthographically letter

combination is met once only:

laev — Laevomycetīnum

platy — Platyphyllīnum

phthi — Phthivazīdum

143

-ae-: adhaesīvus, Aestifānum, Althaea, Crataegus, idaeus, praecipitātus, prae-

parātum, Praegoestrōlum, Praegnīnum

-oe-: coeruleus, Foenicŭlum, oenanthas, Testoenātum

-y-: Amygdăla, сylindrĭcus, etacrynĭcus, Eucalyptus, Hydrargўrum, Hyoscīnum,

Hyoscyămus, Lydāsum, lyophilisātus, Naphthyzīnum, Nystatīnum, Physostigmīnum,

stylus

-ph-:, lyophilisātus, Phthivazīdum, Physostigmīnum, Tocopherōlum

-rh-: antihaemorrhoidālis, Glycyrrhīza, Rheum, rhizōma

-th-: Absinthium, Althaea, Bismŭthum, pantothĕnas, Phthorothānum, Syntho-

mycīnum, Terebinthĭna, therapeutĭcus, Thermopsis.

It is useful to remember words with a double consonant: Coffeīnum, Naph-

thammōnum, raffinātus, Tannīnum.

It is also useful to remember that from the all words with ending — ferōlum

(Ergocalciferōlum, Phytoferōlum etc.) the only noun Tocopherōlum differs with its

ending -pherōlum.

If the word building element -oxy- meets in the second syllable from the end of

a word suffixes -īn- and -īd-, then its vowel «y» is transformed into «ī»: Benzo-

ylperoxīdum, Digitoxīnum. The ending «at» in drug names is to be differ from this ending in anion names,

compare:

nitras, ātis m nitrate sulfas, ātis m - sulphate, but:

Сerebrolysātum, i n cerebrolysat

Pyridoxalphosphātum, i n pyridoxalphosphate

Testoenātum, i n testoenat

The element -at- occurs also in common names indicating some medicinal sub-

stances originating from the Latin participles of past tense:

granulātum, i n < graulātus, a, um granulated

concentrātum, i n < concentrātus, a, um concentrated

lyophilisātum, i n < lyophilisātus, a, um lyophilisated

§ 173. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form and translate the terms into the Latin:

1. Along with 0.25 % aqueous scopolamine solution the prolong preparation

0.25% scopolamine hydrobromide solution with methylcellulose is used which is pro-

duced in phials on 5 and 10 ml. 2. Phthivazid is a yellow small-crystal powder with a

slight smell of vanillin and without taste which is diluted in water very hard, very

slightly in spirit, and lightly in the non organic acids and alkalis. 3. Phthorothan is a

colorless, transparent, mobile and volatile liquid with chloroform smell, sweet and

burning taste, which is used for narcosis in a mixture with oxygen and air.

4. Platyphyllin is administered in form of platyphyllin hydrotartrate for internal, sub-

cutaneous and rectal use in form of tablets on 0.005 gram, 0.2 % solution in ampoules

on 1ml and rectal suppositories on 0.01gram.

2. Give the dictionary form and translate the terms into the Latin:

1) compound turpentine oil liniment for triturating 2) solutions of caffeine sodium

benzoate in syringe-tubes on 1 ml 3) methuracyl ointment in tubes on 80 grams

4) granulated powder of the mixture of dry immortelle extract with milk sugar 5) oily

144

and spirituous ergocalciferol solutions 6) bephenium hydroxynaphthoate or naph-

thammon in coated tablets 7) tablets of lithium oxyburate and testosterone oenanthate

8) ophthalmic laevomycetin drops in phials on 5 and 10 ml 9) carminative (bitter, pec-

toral, stomachic, cholagogue, diuretic, polyvitaminous, antihaemorrhoidal, laxative)

species 10) pyridoxalphosphate lyophilisated powder for injection solutions in am-

poules on 0.005 or 0.01 grams 11) ointment with physostigmine salicylate for keratitis

treatment

Dictionary to the lesson 33

along with juxta (+Dat.) naphthammon Naphthammōnum, i n

bitter amārus, a, um phthivazid Phthivazīdum, i n

bephenium Bephenium, i n phthorothan Phthorothānum, i n

burning urens, ntis physostigmine Physostigmīnum, i n

colorless decŏlor, ōris pyridoxalphosphate Pyridoxalphosphātum, i n

ergocalciferol Ergocalciferōlum, i n

granulated granulātus, a, um polyvitaminous polyvitaminōsus, a, um

hydrobromide hydrobromĭdum, i n scopolamine Scopolamīnum, i n

hydroxynaphthoate

hydroxynaphthoas, ātis m

small - crystal microcrystallīnus, a, um

immortelle Helichrÿsum, i n smell odor, ōris m

keratitis, inflammation of cornea

keratītis, itĭdis f

syringe-tube spritz-tubŭlus, i m

transparent perspicuus, a, um

lightly facĭle triturating trituratio, ōnis f

turpentine Terebinthĭna, ae f

methylcellulose

Methylcellulōsum, i n

vanillin Vanilīnum, i n

very hard difficillĭme

methyluracyl Methuluracÿlum, i n very slightly levissĭme

mobile mobĭlis, e volatile volatĭlis, e

145

A

Absinthium, i n wormwood

absorbeo, absorpsi, absorptum,

ēre 2 to absorb

accēdo, accessi, accessum, ĕre 3 to come (in)

acceptus, a, um received

accipio, accēpi, acceptum, ēre 3

to get

acetylsalicylĭcus, a, um acetylsalicylic

acidĭtas, ātis f acidity

acĭdum, i n acid

actio, ōnis f effect

activātus, a, um activated

Acyclovīrum, i n acyclovir

ad (+Acc.) in

additio, ōnis f addition

addo, addĭdi, addĭtum ĕre 3 to add

adenosintriphosphas, ātis m adenosintriphosphate

adeps (ĭpis m) suillus (a, um) lard

adhibeo, adhibui, adhibĭtum, ēre 2 to use

adjunctus, a, um (effectus) side (effect)

adjŭvo, adjūvi, adjūtum, āre 1

to promote

Adonis, ĭdis m, f adonis, pheasant's eye

Adonis (ĭdis m, f) vernālis (e) spring adonis

aegrōtus, i m patient

aequālis equal

Aesthocīnum, i n aesthocin

aether, ěris m ether

aethereus, a, um etheric

aethylĭcus a, um ethylic

albus, a, um white

alcaloīdum, i n alkaloid

alius, a, ud other

Almagēlum, i n almagel

Aloё, ёs f aloe

alternis diēbus each second day, every other day

alternus, a, um acting in turn

Althaea, ae f march-mallow, sweatweed

Aluminium, i n aluminium

amārus, a, um bitter

Ambroxōlum, i n ambroxol

aminoacĭdum, i n amino acid

Ammonium, i n ammonium

ampulla, ae f ampoule

Amygdăla, ae f almond (fruit)

Amylium, i n amyl

ana of each

Anaesthesōlum, i n anaesthesol

analgesic analgetĭcus, a, um

analgetĭcus, a, um analgesic

Analgīnum, i, n analgin

analogĭcus, a, um analogous

analўsis, is f analysis

anhydrĭcus, a, um anhydrous

anĭmal, ālis n animal

Anīsum, i n anise

antacĭdum, i n antacid

antacĭdus, a, um antacid

antepōno, anteposui, anteposĭtum,

ĕre 3 to prefer

antiallergĭcus, a, um aniallergic

antiasthmatĭcus, a, um antiasthmatic

antibacteriālis, e antibacterial

anticoagŭlans, ntis anticoagulant

anticoagulantum, i n anticoagulant

antidŏtum, i n antidote

antihaemorrhoidālis, e

antihaemorrhoidal

antihistaminĭcus, a, um antihista-

minic

antiphlogistĭcus, a, um antiphlogistic

antitetanĭcus, a, um antitetanic,

relaxing muscular contraction

in tetanus

antitussĭcus, a, um antitussive

Apomorphīnum, i n apomorphin

aquōsus, a, um aqueous

arbor, ŏris f tree

arteriālis, e arterial

articulatio, ōnis f joint

Asellus, i m cod

aspersio, ōnis f aspersion

Aspirīnum, i n aspirin

Latin – English vocaulary

146

assūmo, assumpsi, assumptum,

ěre 3 to take in

assumptio, ōnis f reception, intake

Atropīnum, i n atropine

augeo, auxi, auctum, ēre 2 to raise

aurarius, a, um golden

B

bacca, ae f berry

bacilliformis, e bacilliform

bacillus, i m bacillus

balsamĭcus, a, um balsamic

balsămum, i n balsam

Belladonna, ae f belladonna

benzoas, ātis m benzoate

Benzylium, i n benzyl

Benzylpenicillīnum-natrium i n benzylpenicillin sodium

Berbĕris, ĭdis f barberry

Betŭla, ae f birch

bibo, bibi, - , ĕre 3 to drink

bis twice

bisulfas, ātis m bisulphate

bolus, i f 1) bolus, a large pill by

weight of 0,5 g 2) clay

Bromisovālum, i n bromisoval

bronchītis, itĭdis f bronchitis, inflam-

mation of bronchi

bucca, ae f cheek

Bursa (ae f) pastōris (ōris m) shepherd's purse

C

Cacāo (indecl.) cocoa

Capsĭcum, i n pepper

capsŭla, ae f ae f capsule

carbo, ōnis m coal

carbōnas, ātis m carbonate

Carboneum, i n carbon

cardinālis, e basic

caustĭcus, a, um caustic

celer, ĕris, ĕre fast, quick, rapid

centum hundred

ceriformis, e cereous

Cestōda, ōrum n Cestoda,

the typical tapeworms, a subclass

of the Cestoidea

Chamomilla, ae f chamomile

Chinīnum, i n quinine

Chloroformium, i n chloroform

Cholecalciferōlum, i n cholecalciferol

cholinolytĭcus, a, um cholinolitic

chronĭcus, a, um chronic

cibus, i m meal

cito quickly

citrĭcus, a, um citric

clysma, ătis n enema, clyster

coeruleus, a, um blue

Coffeinum, i n caffeine

Coffeīnum-natrii, Coffeīni-natrii n caffeine sodium

Coffeĭnum-natrii benzos, Coffeini- natrii benzoātis m – caffeine

sodium benzoate

colītis, itĭdis f colitis, inflammation

of colon

collagenĭcus a, um collagenic

Collargōlum, i n collargol

collĭgo, collēgi, collectum, ĕre 3 to collect, to gather

color, ōris m color

combustio, ōnis f combustion

comĭto, āvi, ātum, āre 1 to accompany

commendo, āvi, ātum, āre 1 to recommend

comparatio, ōnis f comparison

complēte completely

complicatio, ōnis f complication

composĭtus, a, um compound

concentrātus, a, um concentrated

concretio, ōnis f concretion

conficio, confēci, confectum,

ĕre 3 to produce

congelatio, ōnis f freezing, frost-bite

conjungo, conjunxi, conjunctum ĕre 3

to join

conservantum, i n preservative

constringens, entis constringent

contagiōsus, a, um contagious

contemporaneus, a, um modern

147

contineo, continui, contentum,

ēre 2 to contain

contra (+ Acc.) 1) against 2) for (a disease)

Convallaria, ae f lily of the valley

Cordigītum, i n cordigit

Coriandrum, i n coriander

cortex, ĭcis m bark

critĭcus, a, um critical

crystallisātus, a, um crystaline

Cucurbĭta, ae f pumpkin

Cucurbĭta major winter squash

cum (+Abl.) with

curatio, ōnis f treatment

curo, āvi, ātum, āre 1 to treat

cutis, is f skin

cyanĭdum, i n cyanide

Cyanocobalamīnum, i n cyanocobalamin

Cysteīnum, i n cystein

Cytisīnum, i n cytisin

D

decigramma, ătis n decigram

decoctum, i n decoction

dedūco, deduxi, deductum, ĕre 3 to take out

deinde then

deminutio, ōnis f diminution

dens, dentis m tooth

densĭtas, ātis f density

depurātus, a, um purified

destillātus, a, um distilled

destruo, destruxi, destructum, ĕre 3 to destroy

dies, ēi m, f day

Digitālis, is f foxglove

Dimedrōlum, i n dimedrol

dimidium, i n half

dioĭcus, a, um stinking (nettle)

directus, a, um direct

distinguo, distinxi, distinctum, ĕre 3

to distinguish

do, dedi, datum, are 1 to give

domestĭcus, a, um domestic

dosis, is f dose

duo, duae, duo two

E

effectus, us m effect

effĭcax, ācis effective

efficĕre actiōnem to take effect

elicio, elicui, elicĭtum, ĕre 3 to extract

emo, empsi, emptum, ĕre 3 to buy

emulsum, i n emulsion

endospŏra, ae f endospore

enterosorbentum, i n enterosorbent

epidemia, ae f epidemy

Ergocalciferōlum, i n ergocalciferol

essentia, ae f essence

et and

Eucalyptus, i f eucalyptus

Euphyllīnum, i n euphylline

evocatio, ōnis f (any food from the

stomach) removal

ex (+Abl.) from

ex tempŏre in case of need

exemplum, i n example

exempli gratia (e.g.) for example

exprĭmo, expressi, expressum, ĕre 3 to squeeze out

exsiccātus, a, um dried

exsicco, āvi, ātum, āre 1 to dry

extractum, i n extraction

F

fascia, ae f bandage

Feracrÿlum, i n feracryl

Ferrum, i n iron

fio, fiĕri to get

florescentia, ae f flowering

fluĭdus, a, um liquid

Foenicŭlum, i n (medicinal) fennel

folium, i n leaf

forma, ae f form

Formaldehўdum, i n formaldehyde

Formalīnum, i n formalin

formatio, ōnis f formation

formo, āvi, ātum, āre 1 to form

fragĭlis, e brittle

Frangŭla, ae f buckhorn

frigīdus, a, um cold

fructus, us m fruit

148

fungicīdum, i n fungicide

Fungilīnum, i n fungilin

fungus, i m fungus

Furacilīnum, i n furacilin

G

Galanthamīnum, i n galanthamine

Galanthus, i m snowdrop

Galanthus Woronŏwi, Woronow’s snowdrop

gargarisma, ătis n gargle

gaster, tris f stomac

gastrĭcus, a, um gastric

gastrointestinālis, e gastrointestinal

gelatinōsus, a, um gelatinous

gelum, i n gel

genus, ĕris n genus

Ginseng (indecl.) ginseng

glycerinōsus, a, um glyceric

glycosīdum, i n glycoside

Glycyrrhiza, ae f licorice

gossypium, i n cotton wool

Graecus, a, um Greek

grippus, i m influenza

gutta, ae f drop

H

habeo, habui, habĭtum, ēre 2 to have

hepar, ătis n liver

Heparīnum, i n heparin

herba, ae f herb

hic, haec, hoc this

Hippophaё, ёs f sea buckhorn

hirudo, ĭnis f leech

homo, ĭnis m a men

hydrochlorĭcus, a, um hydrochloric

hydrochlorĭdum, i n hydrochloride

hydrocyanĭcus, a, um hydrocyanic

Hydrogenium, i n hydrogen

hydroxўdum , i n hydroxide

Hyoscyămus, i m henbane

hypertensio, ōnis f hypertension

hypnotĭcus, a, um hypnotic, soporific

hypoxia, ae f hypoxia, an insufficient

supply of O2 to the tissues

I

idaeus, a, um belonging to mountain

Ida in west-north of the Turkey

immunocorrector, ōris m immuno-

corrector

immunodeficientia, ae f immunodefici-

ency

immunomodulātor, ōris m immunomo-

dulator

impōno, imposui, imposĭtum, ĕre 3

(+ Dat.) to applay, to put on

imposĭtus, a, um put on

in (+ Abl.) in

in die daily

inclūdo, inclūsi, inclusum, ĕre 3

to include

infans, ntis m, f child

infūsum, i n infusion

inhalatio, ōnis f inhalation

injectabĭlis, e for injections

insolubĭlis, e insoluble

insomnia, ae f insomnia

inter (+Acc.) among, between

interdum sometimes

intoxicatio, ōnis f intoxication

intramusculāris, e intramuscular

introdūco, introduxi, introductum,

ĕre 3 to induce into

inunctio, ōnis f a medicine to

be rubbed in

irrĭtans, ntis irritant

is, ea, id that

insolubĭlis, e insoluble

intoxicatio, ōnis f intoxication

J

jecur, ŏris n liver (of fishes)

juvo, juvi, jutum, āre 1 (+Acc.)

to promote

K

Kalanchoё, ёs f kalanchoe

Kanamycīnum, i n kanamycin

L

laesus, a, um damaged, hurted

lagēna, ae f bottle

149

Lanolīnum, i n lanolin

late wide, widely

Latīnus, a, um Latin

laxatīvus, a um laxative

Leonūrus, i m motherwort

Leucogĕnum, i n leucogen

leucopoësis, is f leucocytopoesis,

formation of leucocytes

lingua, ae f tongue

linimentum, i n liniment

Linimentum Wischnevsky

Wischnevsky liniment

liquidus, a, um liquid (tar)

localis, e local

locus, i m place

M

major, majus greater, major

mappŭla, ae f napkin

massa, ae f mass

materia, ae f matter, substance

medicamentum, i n drug

medicinālis, e medical

medicus, i m doctor

melius better

membranŭla, ae f film

Methyldōpha, ae f methyldopa

Methylēnum, i n methylen

Methylium, i n methyl

Methyluracīlum, i, n methyluracil

Mezÿmum-forte, Mezÿmi-forte n mezym-forte

microbĭcus, a, um microbic

microbiologia, ae f microbiology

microorganismus, i m microorganism

Millefolium, i n milfoil

minerālis, e mineral

minuo, minui, minūtum, ěre 3 to decrease , to diminish

mixtio, ōnis f mixture

mixtūra, ae f mixture

Mixtūra Trascōvi Trascov’s mixture

mixtus, a, um mixed

moderātus, a, um moderate

monoxўdum, i n monoxide

Mucosānum, i n mucosan

multus, a, um many, numerous

Myorelaxīnum, i n myorelaxin

myotrŏpus, a, um myotropic

Myrtillus, i m blueberry

N

Natrium, i n sodium

naturālis, e natural

necessarius, a, um necessary

necrotisātus, a, um necrotic

nitras, ātis m nitrate

nitris, ītis m nitrite

nomen, ĭnis n name

nonnullus, a, um some

Norfloxacīnum, i n norfoxacin

noster, tra, trum our

notus, a, um known

nox, noctis f night

numerāle, is n numeral

numĕrus, i m number

O

obductus, a, um coated

Oblecōlum, i n oblecol

obturātus, a, um closed

obvolvens, ntis enveloping

oculogutta, ae f drop for eyes

odor, ōris m odor, smell

oenanthas, ātis m oenanthate

Oestradiōlum, i n oestradiol

offa, ae f piece

officīna, ae f a chemist’s; drugstore

officinālis, e officinal

oleōsus, a, um oily

oleum, i n oil

Oleum Amygdalārum almond oil

Oleum Persicōrum peach oil

Oleum Ricĭni castor oil

Oleum Olivārum olive oil

oligotoxĭcus, um of low toxity

Olīva, ae f olive

organismus, i m organism

orīgo, ĭnis f origin

os, oris n mouth

os, ossis n bone

150

Osteogenōnum, i n osteogenon

osteoporōsis, is f osteoporosis

otogutta, ae f drop for ears

Oxycoccus, i m cranberry

Oxycyclosōlum, i n oxycyclosol

Oxygenium, i n oxygen

Oxytetracyclīnum, i n oxytetracyclin

Ozokerītum, i n ozokerite

P

Pancreatīnum, i n pancreatin

pantothĕnas, ātis m pantothenate

Papāver, ěris n poppy

Papaverīnum, i n papaverin

Paracetamōlum, i n paracetamol

Paraffīnum, i n paraffin

parasitĭcus, a, um parasitical

paro, āvi, ātum, āre 1 to prepare

passim everywhere

Pepsīnum, i n pepsin

per 1) during, per 2) through

3) by means of, via

per se in natural state, non purified

pericŭlum, i n danger, risk

periŏdus, i f period

permutatio, ōnis f exchange

Persĭcum, i n peach (fruit)

pertussis, is f pertussis

pharmacologĭcus, a, um pharmacologic

pharmacopōla, ae m pharmacist

Phenoxymethylpenicillīnum, i n phenoxymethylpenicillin

Phenylium , i n phenyl

phthorĭdum, i n phthoride

pilŭla, ae f pill

pinguis, e fat

Pinus, i f pine

pix, picis f resin

pix, picis f (liquĭda) pitch

Pix liquĭda tar

planta, ae f plant

Plantaglucīdum, i n plantaglucid

Plantāgo, ĭnis f plantain

Plantāgo major common plantain

Polysorbum, i n polysorb

potest can , is able

practĭce practically

praecox, ŏcis early

praeparātum, in preparation

praeparātus, a, um prepared

praepăro, āvi, ātum, āre 1 to prepare

praescrībo, praescripsi, praescrip-

tum, ĕre 3 to prescribe

praescriptum, i n instruction

pratum, i n meadow

Prednisolōnum, i n prednisolon

pretiōsus, a, um valuable

Primŭla, ae f primrose

primus, a, um first

pro (+ Abl.) for

prodūco, produxi, productun, ĕre 3

to produce

profundus, a, um deep

prophylaxis, is f prophylaxis

propiōnas, ātis m propionate

proteīnum, i n protein

provenio, provēni, proventum, īre 4

to meet

provŏco, āvi, ātum, āre 1 to cause

puer, ěri m boy

pulvis, ĕris m powder

purgatio, ōnis f cleaning, purification

Pursennīdum, i n pursennid

purus, a, um pure

Pyocīdum, i n pyocid

Pyriditōlum, i n pyriditol

Q

quantĭtas, ātis f amount, quantity

quantum satis the amount needed

(= in sufficient amount =

as much as suffices)

quarter four times

Quercus, us f oak

qui, quae, quod which

quindĕcim fifteen

quinque five

quotidie every day

151

R

Rauwolfia, ae rauwolfia

recens, ntis fresh

recipio, recēpi, receptum, ĕre 3 to take

regeneratio, ōnis f regeneration

regio, ōnis f region

Remantadīnum, i n remantadin

remedium, i n medecine

remōtio, ōnis f removal

remotus, a, um remote

res, rei f matter, thing

res rudes raw materials

retro (+ Acc.) behind

Rheopyrīnum, i n rheopyrin

Ricĭnus, i m castor oil plant

Oleum Ricĭni castor oil

Rubus, i m blackberry

S

Sacchărum, i n sugar

saepe frequently, often

salicÿlas, ātis m salicylate

Salvia, ae f sage

sanatio, ōnis f healing

sanguis, ĭnis m blood

sapo, ōnis m soap

Sarcolysīnum, i n sarcolysin

scabies, ēi f scabies, itch

secundum (+Acc.) according

semel once

semen, ĭnis n seed

seminālis, e seminal

Senna, ae f senna

septĭmus, a, um seventh

Septocīdum, i n septocide

serpentīnus, a, um serpent like

serum, i n serum

servo, āvi, ātum, āre 1 to keep

seu or

siccus, a, um dry

signifĭco, āvi, ātum, āre1 to signify

signo, āvi, ātum, āre 1 to label,

to write on the label

silvester, tris, tre forest

sirūpus, i m syrup

solutio, ōnis f solution

Solutio Ammonii caustĭci

spirit of ammonia

Somnibrōmum, i n somnibrom

somnĭter, ěra, ěrum soporific

somnum, i n sleep

Spasmolytīnum, i n spasmolytin

spasmolytĭcus, a, um spasmolytic

species, ēi f species (in biology)

species, ērum f species

(in pharmaceutics)

specifĭcus, a, um specific

stella, ae f star

sterĭlis, e sterile

sterilisātus, a, um sterilized

sterilĭso, āvi, ātum, āre 1 to sterilize

stimulātor, ōris m stimulator

stimŭlo, āvi, ātum, āre 1 to stimulate

stomachĭcus, a, um stomachic

stomatologĭcus, a, um stomatologic

Stramonium i n thorn apple

stratum, a, um layer

Streptocīdum, i n streptocid

sub (+Abl.) 1. during 2. under

succus, i m juice

such talis, e

suillus, a, um of pork

sulfas, ātis m sulphate

sulfĭdum i n sulphide

Sulfur, ŭris n sulphur

sum, fui, esse to be

sumo, sumpsi, sumptum, ěre 3 to take in

Suprastīnum, i n suprastin

synthetĭcus, a, um synthetic

Synthomycīum, i n synthomycin

T

tabuletta, ae f tablet

tempus, ŏris n time (ex tempore in

case of need)

tenuis, e thin

ter three times, thrice

152

Terebinthĭna, ae f turpentine

Terrilytīnum, i n terrilytin

Testoenatum, i n testoenat

Testosterōnum, i n testosterone

Testosterōnum-depot,

Testosterōni-depo n testosterone-depot

Testosterōnum-retard,

Testosterōni-retard n

testosterone-retard

Tetracyclīnum, i n tetracycline

textus, us m tissue

therapeutĭcus, a, um therapeutic

Thermopsis, ĭdis f thermopsis

Thromboliquīnum, i n thromboliquin

tinctūra, ae f tincture

toxĭcus, a, um toxic

tractus, us m tract

trado, tradĭdi, tradĭtum, ĕre 3

to communicate (a disease)

translator, ōris m carrier

triginta thirty

Trypsīnum, i n trypsin

tuber, ĕris n tuber

tubŭla, ae f tube

turio, ōnis m bud (of pine)

tussis, is f cough

U

Ulcerānum, i n ulceran

ulcerōsus, a, um ulcerous

umectātus, a, um weted

unguentum, i n ointment

unus, a, um one

usus, us m usage, use

utilis, e useful

V

valde greatly

Validōlum, i n validol

varius, a, um various

vas, vasis n vessel

Vaselīnum, i n vaseline

Vasoprēnum, i n vasopren

vipěra, ae f viper

virĭdis, e green

vegetabĭlis, e vegetable

vena, ae f vein

venenātus, a, um poisonous

vitrum, i n phial

vomĭcus, a, um vomitive

vulgāris, e common

vulnus, ěris n wound

X

Xeroformium, i n xeroform

153

A

to absorb absorbeo, absorpsi, absorptum,

ēre 2

acelysin Acelysīnum, i n

acetate acētas , ātis m

acetylsalicylic acetylsalicylĭcus, a, um

acid acĭdum, i n

acidic acĭdus, a, um

actinomyces actinomўces, ētis m

to act ago, egi, actum, ĕre 3

activated activātus, a, um

activities activĭtas, ātis f

activity activĭtas, ātis f

acute acūtus, a, um

acyclovir Acyclovīrum, i n

to add addo, addĭdi, addĭtum, ĕre 3

adenosintriphosphate adenosintriphosphas, ātis m

to administer assūmo, assumpsi, assump-

tum, ĕre 3

adoniside Adonisīdum, i n

adrenalin Adrenalīnum, i n

adrenocorticotropic adrenocortico-

tropĭcus, a. um

adult adultus, i m

aerosol aёrosōlum, i n

aesthocin Aesthocīnum, i n

affected laesus, a, um

after post (+Acc.)

agent agens, ntis m

all omnis, e

allergic allergĭcus, a, um

allergy, heightened reactivity to an

allergen allergia, ae f

allochol Allochōlum, i n

almond (fruit) Amygdăla, ae f

alodor Alodōrum, i n

aloe Aloë, ës f

always semper

aminazin Aminazīnum, i n

ammoniac and anise fluid Liquor Am-

monii anisātus (ammoniac Ammoni-

um, i n anise anisātus, a, um; fluid liq-

uor, ōris m)

amorolfin Amorolfīnum, i n

amorphous amorphus, a, um

amount (anything countable) numĕrus, i

m

amount quantĭtas, ātis f

(in sufficient amount quantum satis)

ampicillin Ampicillīnum, i n

ampoule ampulla, ae f

amyl Amylium, i n

analgesic analgetĭcus, a, um

analgin Analgīnum, i n

analogue analŏgus, i m

and et

anesthesin Anaesthesīnum, i n

anesthesol Anaesthesōlum, i n

angiopril Angioprīlum, i n

angisem Angisēmum, i n

anhydrous anhydrĭcus, a, um

animal anĭmal, ālis n

anthelminthic antihelminthĭcus, a, um

antiasthmatic antiasthmatĭcus, a, um

antibiotic antibiotĭcum, i n

anticoahulant anticoahŭlans, ntis

antiemetic antivomĭcus, a, um

anti-flammatory antiphlogistĭcus, a, um

antihistaminic antihistaminĭcus, a, um

antipyrin Antipyrīnum, i n

antirabic antirabĭcus, a, um

antiseptic antisepticum, i n

antistrumin Antistrumīnum, i n

antitussive antitussīvus, a, um

anxiolytic anxiolytĭcus, a, um

application applicatio, ōnis f

to apply impōno, imposui, impositum, ěre

3(+Dat.)

approximately circĭter

apressin Apressīnum, i n

aqueous aquōsus, a, um

arsenite arsēnis, ītis m

arsenous arsenicōsus, a, um

as ut

English – Latin vocabulary

154

aseptically aseptĭce

as for quoad (+Acc.)

as much as suffices quantum satis

ascorbic ascorbinĭcus, a, um

aspirin Aspirīnum, i n

asthma asthma, ătis n

B

bag (a little one) saccŭlus, i m

bandage fascia, ae f

bark cortex, ĭcis m

basic cardinālis, e , principālis, e

basic acetate subacētas, ātis m

basic nitrate subnĭtras, ātis m

bath balneum, i n

before ante (+Acc.)

belladonna Belladonna, ae f

bellasthesin Bellasthesīnum, i n

to belong – pertineo, pertinui, -, ēre 2

(ad + Acc.)

benzoate benzoas, ātis m

benzofucain Benzofucaīnum, i n

benzoic benzoĭcus, a, um

benzyl Benzylium, i n

benzylpenicilline sodium Benzylpeni-

cillīnum-natrium, i n

bephenium Bephenium, i n

berry bacca, ae f

beviplex Beviplexum, i n

bicillin Bicillīnum, i n

big magnus, a, um

bilberry Myrtillus, i m

bile bilis, is f; fel, fellis n

bilignost Bilignostum, i n

bilimin Bilimīnum, i n

biological biologĭcus, a, um

biostim Biostīmum, i n

bisacodil Bisacodīlum, i n

bismuth Bismŭthum, i n

bisulphate bisulfas, ātis m

bite morsus, us m

bitter amārus, a, um

black niger, gra, grum

blackcurrant Ribes (i, n) nigrum (niger,

gra, grum)

bladder vesīca, ae f

blood sanguis, ĭnis m

boromentol Borobenthōlum, i n

bottle lagēna, aef

bowel intestīnum, i n

box scatŭla ae f

briquette brikētum, i n

bromhexin Bromhexīnum , i n

bromide bromĭdum, i n

bromisoval Bromisovālum, i n

bronchial bronchiālis, e

bronchitis bronchītis, itĭdis f

bronchodilator bronchodilatātor, ōris m

broncholytin Broncholytīnum, i n

bronchopulmonary bronchopulmonālis, e

bronchosan Bronchosānum, i n

brush penicillus, i m

buckhorn Frangŭla, ae f

bud gemma, ae f

bud (of Pine) turio, ōnis m

bur-marigold Bidens, ntis f

burn combustio, ŏnis f

burning urens, ntis

Burow’s liquid liquor (ōris m) Burōwi

butter (thick oil) butÿrum, i n

to buy emo, empsi, emptum, ĕre 3

by ope (+ Gen.)

C

caffeine Coffeīnum, i n

chamomile Chamomilla, ae f

calcium Calcium, i n

camphor Camphŏra, ae f

capsule capsŭla, ae f

caramel carǎmel, ellis n

carbolic carbolĭcus, a, um

carbonate carbōnas, ātis m

cardiovalen Cardiovalēnum, in

caries, ēi f caries

carminative carminatīvus, a, um

carotene Carotīnum, i n

carrier gestātor, ōris m

case casus, us m

castor bean Ricĭnus, i m

castor oil Oleum Ricĭni

155

to cause provŏco, āvi, ātum, āre 1

cell cellŭla, ae f

central centrālis, e

the chemist's officīna, ae f

child infans, ntis m, f

Chinese chinensis, e

Chinese magnolia vine Schizandra

(ae f) chinensis (is, e)

chloral Chlorālum, i n

chloride chlorĭdum, i n

chloroform Chloroformium, i n

chlortetracycline Chlotetracyclīnum, i n

cholagog Cholagōgum, i n

cholenzyme Cholenzÿmum, i n

choline Cholīnum, i n

chronic chronĭcus, a, um

ciclopirox Ciclopirōxum, i n

circulation circulatio, ōnis f

citidon Citidōnum, i n

citral Citralum, i n

citrate citras, ātis m

citric citrĭcus, a, um

clay bolus, i f

closed obturātus, a, um

coagulation coagulatio, ōnis f

coal carbo, ōnis m

coated obductus, a, um

cocoa Cacāo (indecl.)

cod asellus, i m

codeine Codeīnum, in

cod-liver oil Oleum jecŏris āselli

liver (of fishes) jecur, ŏris n

colargol Collargōlum, i n

collagen Collagēnum, i n

collagenic collagenĭcus, a,um

colloidal colloidālis, e

color color, ōris m

coloration coloratio, ōnis f

colorless decŏlor, ōris

colt’s foot Farfăra, ae f

combined combinātus, a, um

to come in accēdo, accessi, accessum, ěre 3

common commūnis, e

complete totus, a, um

component componentum, i n

composition contentus, us m

compound composĭtus, a, um

to compress comprĭmo, compressi, com-

pressum, ěre 3

concentrate concentrātum, i n

concentrated concentrātus, a, um

concentration concentratio, ōnis f

cone strobĭlus, i m

conjugated conjugātus, a, um

conserving conservans, ntis

constipation constipatio, ōnis f

content compositio, ōnis f

content contentus, us m

contraception contraceptio, ōnis f

controlled recensibĭlis, e

copper Cuprum, i n

cordiamin Cordiamīnum, i n

cordigit Cordigītum, i n

to cork obtūro, āvi, ātum, āre 1

corked obturātus, a, um

cortex (in anatomical sense) cortex, ĭcis

m; bark (as a part of a medicine)

corticosteroid corticosteroīdum, i n

cortisone Cortisōnum, i n

course cursus, us m

cowberry Vitis(is f) idaea (us, a, um)

cowslip primrose Primŭla, ae f

cream cremor, ōris m

crystal crystallus, i f

crystaline crystallisātus, a, um

cupping glass olla, ae f

curative curatīvus, a, um, medicālis, e

cure remedium, i n

cyanide cyanĭdum, i n

cyclophosphan Cyclophosphānum, i n

cycloserin Cycloserīnum, i n

cylinder (a device for drug containing)

cylindrus, i m

cystein Cysteīnum, i n

cytisin Cytisīnum, i n

cytiton Cytitōnum, i n

156

D

daily quotidie

dark fuscus, a, um

decoction decoctum, i n

deficiency deficientia, ae f

dehydrate dihўdras, ātis m

deliberation deliberatio, ōnis f

deminui, deminūtum, ĕre 3

dense densus, a, um

dermatiphytes dermatophўton, i n

dermatitis, inflammation of the skin

dermatītis, itĭdis f

diaethon Diaethōnum, i n

diсaine Dicaīnum, i n

diethylamide Diaethylamīdum, i n

different varius, a, um

diffuse diffūsus, a, um

digestive digestorius, a, um

digitoxin Digitoxīnum, i n

dihydrate dihўdras, ātis m

diluted dilūtus, a, um

dimedrol Dimedrōlum, i n

direct directus, a, um

disease morbus, i m

disopyramid Disopyramīdum, i n

disposable uniusuālis, e

distractive distractīvus, a, um

diuretic diuretĭcus, a, um

dog rose Rosa, ae f

dolgit Dolgītum, i n

dormic Dormĭcum, i n

dose dosis, is f

dosed divīsus, a, um

dried off exsiccātus, a, um

drop 1) gutta, ae f 2) dragee

dropper guttātor, ōris m

drug medicamentum, i n

during tempŏre (+Gen.)

to destroy destruo, destruxi, destructum,

ĕre 3

to differ distinguo, distinxi, distinctum,

ĕre 3 (+ Abl.)

to dimension deminuo,

to diminish deminuo, deminui,

deminūtum, ĕre 3

to dissolve disolvo, dissolvi, dissolūtum,

ĕre 3, solvo, solvi, solūtum, ĕre 3

E

each quisque, quaeque, quodque

(of each) ana (+Acc.)

echinacea Echinacea, ae f

edema oedēma, ătis n

effect effectus, us m

effective effĭcax, ācis

effervescent effervescens, ntis

efficacious effĭcax , ācis

eight octo

eighty octoginta

to elaborate elabōro, āvi, ātum, āre 1

elder Sambūcus, i f

elfwort Inŭla, ae f

elixir elixir, īris n

enteric soluble enterosolubĭlis, e

envelopment involucrum, i n

environment circumjacentia, ium n (plur.)

ephedrine Ephedrīnum, i n

epidermal epidermālis, e

equal aequālis, e

ergocalciferol Ergocalciferōlum, i n

eryhaem Eryhaemum, i n

erythrocytes erythrocўtus, i m

erythromycin Erythromycīnum, i n

erythrophosphatide Erythrophosphatīdum, i n

esmolol Esmolōlum, i n

estrogen oestrogĕnum, i n

etacrynic etacrynĭcus, a, um

ethacridine Aethacridīnum, i n

ethanol Aethanōlum, i n

ethazol sodium Aethazōlum-natrium, i n

ether aether, ĕris m

ethylmorphin Aethylmorphīnum, i n

etiology aetiologia, ae f

eucalyptus Eucalyptus, i f

eunoctin Eunoctīnum, i n

euphylline Euphyllīnum, i n

157

every other day diēbus alternis

elixir elixir, īris n

everyone quisque (m), quaeque (f)

quodque (n)

excitability excitabilĭtas, ātis f

expectorant expectŏrans, ntis

exploration exploratio, ōnis f

external externus, a, um

extract extractum, i n

eye ocŭlus, i m

eye-wash collyrium, i n

to elaborate elabŏro, āvi, ātum, āre 1

F

to fall asleep dormĭto, āvi, ātum, āre 1

fatty pinguis, e

febricet Febricētum, i n

febrinil Febrinīlum, i n

feminine feminīnus, a, um

fennel Foenicŭlum, i n

fern Filis, ĭcis f

fibrolysin Fibrolysīnum, i n

fifteen quindĕcim

film lamella, ae f ; membranŭla, ae f

fine subtĭlis, e

firmly firmĭter

first primus

five quinque

flax Linum, i n

flow secretio, ōnis f

flower flos, floris m

fluid liquor, ōris m

fluossen Fluossēnum, i n

folic folĭcus, a, um

folliculin Folliculīnum, i n

for pro (+Abl.)

for a certain time ex tempŏre

formaldehyde Formaldehўdum, i n

formalin Formalīnum, i n

foxglove Digitālis, is f

from ex (+Abl.)

full complētus, a, um

fungicide fungicīdum, i n

fungilin Fungilīnum, i n

furacilin Furacilīnum, i n

furazolidon Furazolidōnum, i n

furoplast Furoplastum, i n

G

gall bladder vesīca fellea (bilīaris)

garden violet Viŏla (ae f) tricŏlor (ōris)

gastrosol Gastrosōlum, i n

gauze tela, ae f

gelatinous gelatinōsus, a, um

gender genus, ĕris n

gentamycin Gentamycīnum, i n

to get fio, fiĕri

to get free libĕro, āvi, ātum, āre 1(use in

passive voice)

to give do, dedi, datum, are 1

gland glandŭla, ae f

glucose Glucosum, i n

to glue inglutĭno, āvi, ātum, āre1 (+Dat.)

glyceric glycerinōsus, a, um

glycerophosphate glycerophosphas,

ātis m

glycoside glycosīdum, i n

good bonus, a, um

grade gradus, us m

gradually paulātim

gram gramma, ătis n

gramicidin Gramicidīnum, i n

granulated granulātus, a, um

granule granŭlum, i n

grass herba, ae f

great magnus, a, um

green virĭdis, e

grub larva, ae f

guelder-rose Viburnum, i n

gum gingīva, ae f

H

hair pilus, i m

half dimidium, i n

hard difficĭlis, e

to have habeo, habui, habĭtum, ēre 2

heart cor, cordis n

helmex Helmexum, i n

helmitox Helmitoxum, i n

herb herba, ae f

158

hermetĭce hermetically

hollow stem Calămus, i m

honey mel, mellis n

hop Humŭlus, i m

hormone hormōnum, i n

hot calĭdus, a, um

human humānus, a, um

a human homo, ĭnis m

hydrate hydras, ātis m

hydrobromide hydrobromĭdun, i n

hydrocortisone Hydrocortisōnum, i n

hydronaphthoate hydronaphthoas, ātis m

hydrotartrate hydrotartras, ātis m

hydroxide hydroxўdum , i n

hydroxyzin Hydroxyzīnum, i n

hypnodorm Hypnodormum, i n

hypnotic, soporific hypnotĭcus, a, um

I

ichthyosulfol Ichthyosulfōlum, i n

idaeus, a, um belonging to mountain Ida

in west-north of the Turkey

immortelle Helichrÿsum, i n

immunity immunĭtas, ātis f

to implant implanto, āvi, ātum, āre 1

to improve emendo, āvi, ātum, āre 1

to include inclūdo, incūsi, inclūsum, ĕre 3

to indicate indĭco, āvi, ātum, āre 1

an individual individuum, i n

to induce indūco, induxi, inductum, ĕre 3

infection infectio, ōnis f

inflammatory inflammatorius, a, um

infusion infusio, ōnis f

inhacort Inhacortum, i n

inhalation inhalatio, ōnis f

injection injectio, ōnis f

injury laesio, ōnis f

inotropic inotropĭcus, a, um

insufficiency insufficientia, ae f

insulin Insulīnum, i n

intake, a drug dose to be taken

for one intake dosis pro dosi

integument integumentum, i n

interferon Interferōnum, i n

internal internus, a, um

international internationālis, e

into in (+Acc.)

intraaricular intraarticulāris, e

intramuscular intramusculāris, e

intramuscularly intra musculos

intranasal intranasālis, e

intrauterine intrauterīnus, a, um

intravenous intravenōsus, a, um

intravenously intra venas

invasion invasio, ōnis f

in view of ex ratiōne (ratio, ōnis f – view)

iodine Iōdum, i n

iodoform Iodoformium, i n

ion iŏnum, i n

ipecacuanha Ipecacuanha, ae f

iron Ferrum, i n

irrigation irrigatio, ōnis f

irritant irrĭtans, ntis

isocard Isocardum i n

isotonic isotinĭcus, a, um

its ejus (is, ea, id)

J

jar olla, ae f

juice succus, i m

juniper Junipĕrus, i f

K

kanamycin Kamycīnum, i n

to keep contineo, continui, contentum,

ēre 2

keratitis, inflammation of cornea keratītis, itĭdis f

L

to label signo, āvi, ātum, āre 1

lactate lactas, ātis m

laevomycetin Laevomycetīnum, i n

language lingua, ae f

lanolin Lanolīnum, i n

Latin Latīnus, a, um

laxative laxans, ntis

layer stratum, i n

lead Plumbum, i n

leaf folium, i n

leucocytic leucocytĭcus, a, um

levonorgestrel Levonorgestrēlum, i n

159

licorice Glycyrrhiza, ae f

lidocaine Lidocaīnum, i n

lightly facĭle

lily-of-the-valley Convallaria, ae f

lincomycin Lincomycīnum, i n

linden Tilia, ae f

a liquid liquor, ōris m

lithium Lithium, i n

little parvus, a, um

a little packet fascicŭlus, i m

lotion lotio, ōnis f

low humĭlis, e

to lubricate lino, livi, litum, ĕre 3

lydaze Lydāzum, i n

lyophilisate lyophilisātum, i n

lyophilisated lyophilisātus, a, um

lysoamidaze Lysoamidāzum, i n

lysocim Lysocīmum, i n

M

maalox Maaloxum, i n

magnium Magnium, i n; Magnesium, i n

magnolia vine Schizandra, ae f

maize Mays, ўdis f

to make (to be maid) fio, fiĕri

male mas, maris

marigold Calendŭla, ae f

marsh-mallow Althaea, ae f

masticatory masticatorius, a, um

meal cibus, i m

means remedium, i n

medical medicātus, a, um

membrane membrāna, ae f

mercury Hydrargўrum, i n

methocamphon Methocamphōnum, i n

methuracol Methuracōlum, i n

methyl Methylium, i n

methylcellulose Methylcellulōsum, i n

methyldopa Methyldōpha, ae f

methylprednisolon Methylpredni-

solōnum, i n

methylsulphate methylsulfas, ātis m

methyltestosteron Methyltestosterōnum, i n

methyluracil Methyluracÿlum, i n

mucilage mucilāgo, ĭnis f

microbical microbĭcus, a, um

microcide Microcīdum, i n

microcirculation microcirculatio, ōnis f

microcrystalline microcristallīnus, a, um

microenema microënēma, ătis n

microgram microgramma, ătis n

milfoil Millefolium, i n

milk lac, lactis n

milk sugar Sacchărum lactis

milkwort Polygăla, ae f

milliliter millilitrum, i n

mineral minerālis, e

mint Mentha, ae f

mite acărus, i m

to mix misceo, miscui, mixtum, ēre 2

mixture mixtūra, ae f

mobile mobĭlis, e

monomycin Monomycīnum, i n

montelucast Montelucastum, i n

month mensis, is m

motherwort Leonūrus, i m

mucilage mucilāgo, ĭnis f

mucosa mucōsa, ae f

muscle muscŭlus, i m

mustard Synāpis, is f

mycoheptin Mycoheptīnum, i n

mycous disease, mycosis mycōsis, is f

myocardium myocardium, i n

myorelaxin Myorelaxīnum, i n

N

nail unguis, is m

name nomen, ĭnis n

to name nomĭno, āvi, ātum, āre 1

named nomĭne

naphthalan petroleum Naphthalānum, i n

naphthalgin Naphthalgīnum, i n

naphthammon Naphthammōnum, i n

naphthyzin Naphthyzīnum, i n

narcosis narcōsis, is f

natamycin Natamycīnum, i n

negative negatīvus, a, um

neomycin Neomycīnum, i n

nervous nervōsus, a, um

nettle Urtīca, ae f

160

(stinking nettle Urtīca dioĭca)

neviramin Neviramīnum, i n

nevizapin Nevizapīnum, i n

new novus, a, um

nicotinic nicotinĭcus, a, um

nitrite nitris, ītis m

nitroglycerin Nitroglycerīnum, i n

nitropercuten Nitropercutēnum, i n

normanox Normatoxum, i n

novidorm Novidormum, i n

novocaine Novocaīnum, i n

O

oak Quercus, us f

oblecol Oblecōlum, i n

to obtaine elicio, elicui, elicĭtum, ĕre 3

odor odor, ōris m

oenanthate oenanthas, ātis m

of each ana (+Acc.)

oil oleum, i n

oily oleōsus, a, um

ointment unguentum, i n

oleandomycin Oleandomycīnum, i n

oletetrin Oletetrīnum, i n

on 3ml everyone ana 3 ml

operation operatio, ōnis f

ophthalmic ophthalmĭcus, a, um

orally by mouth

oraze Orāzum, i n

orciprenaline Orciprenalīnum, i n

organ orgănum, i n

organic organĭcus, a, um

origin orīgo, ĭnis f

ossin Ossīnum, i n

osteochin Osteochīnum, i n

osteogenon Osteogenōnum, i n

other alius, a, ud

otherwise alĭter

oxacilline Oxacillīnum, i n

oxacilline sodium Oxacillīnum-

natrium, i n

oxybutyrate oxybutÿras, ātis m

oxygen Oxygenium, i n

oxytetracyclin Oxytetracyclīnum, i n

ozokeratin Ozokeratīnum, i n

P

packet fascis, is m

packing devincŭlum, i n

palmitate palmĭtas, ātis m

panadol Panadōlum, i n

pantosept Pantoseptum, i n

pantothenate pantothĕnas, ātis m

papaverin Papaverīnum, i n

paper charta, ae f

paper sack fascis (is m) chartaceus

(us, a, um)

para-aminosalicylate para-aminosalicylas, ātis m

parasitical parasitarius, a, um

parenteral parenterālis, e

parietal parietālis, e

part pars, partis f

paste pasta, ae f

patient aegrōtus, i m

peach (fruit) Persĭcum, i n

peach oil Oleum Persicōrum

pectoral pectorālis, e

pediculosis pediculōsis, is f

to penetrate penĕtro, āvi, ātum āre 1

pepper piperītus, a, um

peppermint Mentha piperīta

perhydrol Perhydrōlum, i n

to perish pereo, perii, perĭtum, īre

peroxide peroxўdum, i n

a person homo, ĭnis m

pertussin Pertussīnum, i n

pharmacy officīna, ae f

phenacetin Phenacetīnum, i n

phenobarbital Phenobarbitālum, i n

phenomenon phenomĕnon, i n

phenothrin Phenothrīnum, i n

phenoxymethylpenicillin Phenoxymethylpenicillīnum, i n

phenylin Phenylīnum, i n

phial vitrum, i n

phial-dropper flaco- guttātor, fllacōnis -

guttatōris m

phosphate phosphas, ātis m

phosphorus Phsphŏrus, i m

161

phosphothiamine Phosphotiamīnum, i n

phthalylsulphapyridazin Phthalylsulfapyridazīnum, i n

phthazin Phthazīnum, i n

phthivazid Phthivazīdum, i n

phthorothan Phthorothānum, i n

physostigmine Physostigmīnum, i n

phytin Phytīnum, i n

phytomenadion Phytomenadiōnum, i n

pill pilŭla, ae f

pilocarpin Pilocarpīnum, i n

pimafucort Pimafucortum, i n

pine Pinus, i f

pitch pix, picis f

plaster emplastrum, i n

plate lamĭna, ae f

platyphyllin Platyphyllīnum, i n

polyaethylenoxid Polyaethylenoxīdum, i n

polybiolin Polybiolīnum, i n

polyethylene polyaethylenĭcus, a, um

polyethylenoxid Polyaethylenoxīdum, i n

polyglucine Polyglucinum, i n

polymer polymĕrus, a, um

polysaccharide polysaccharīdum, i n

polyvinylpyrrolidon Polyvinylpyrrolidōnum, i n

polyvitamin polyvitamīnum , i n

polyvitaminous polyvitaminōsus, a, um

poppy Papāver, ĕris n

potato Solānum ( i, n) tuberōsum

(us, a, um)

poultice cataplasma, ătis n

powder pulvis, ěris m

powdery pulverātus, a, um

practice praxis, is f

preparation praeparatio, ōnis f

prepared praeparātus, a, um

present praesens, ntis

process processus, us m

to produce prodūco, produxi, productum

ěre 3

prolonged prolongātus, a, um

to promote promoveo, promōvi,

promōtum, ēre 2

prophylaxis prophylaxis, is f

propionate propiōnas, ātis m

to propose propōno, proposui, proposĭtum

ěre 3

propriety propriĕtas, ātis f

protecting protĕgens, entis

protection munimentum, i n

prothrombin Prothrombīnum, i n

pure purus, a, um

purgative purgatīvus, a, um

purified purificātus, a, um

purple purpureus, a, um

purulent purulentus, a, um

pyridoxalphosphate Pyridoxalphosphā-

tum, i n

pyridoxin Pyridoxīnum, i n

Q

quickly cito

quinine Chinīnum, i n

R

rabies rabies, ēi f

radioactive radioactīvus, a, um

radioprotective radioprotectīvus, a, um

raspberry Rubus (i, m) idaeus

(us, a, um)

ray therapy radiotherapia, ae f

reaction reactio, ōnis f

recently recenter

recidivate recidīvus, a, um

rectal rectālis, e

rectified rectificātus, a, um

red ruber, bra, rum

red bilberry Vitis (is f) idaea (us, a, um)

reduced reductus, a, um

region regio, ōnis f

relatively relaiīve

relaxation relaxatio, ōnis f

removal (some food substances

from the stomach) evacuatio, ōnis f

resorcin Resorcīnum, i n

resorcinol Resorcinōlum i n

respiratory respiratorius, a, um

retinol Retinōlum, i n

retrogingival retrogingivālis, e

162

rheopolyglucine Rheopolyglucīnum, i n

rheopyrin Rheopyrīnum, i n

rhizome rhizōma, ătis n

rhubarb Rheum, i n

rhythmodan Rhythmodānum, i n

riboflavin Riboflavīnum, i n

rice Orÿza, ae f

rifamycin Rifamycīnum, i n

root radix, īcis f

rotadisc rotadiscus, i m

rush affluxus, us m

rutin Rutīnum, i n

S

salicylate salicÿlas, ātis m

salt sal, salis m, n

to saturate satŭro, āvi, ātum āre 1

scabies scabies, ēi f

scopolamine Scopolamīnum, i n

sea buckthorn Hippophaё, ёs f

sedative sedatīvus, a, um

sedimentary praecipitātus, a, um

sedonal Sedonālum, i n

seed semen, ĭnis n

septocide Septocīdum, i n

severe gravis, e

to shake agĭto, āvi, ātum, āre 1

shampoo lavatorium spumans

(lavatorium, i n washing means;

spumans, ntis fouming)

shoulder brachium, i n

similar simĭlis, e (+Dat.)

simple simplex, ĭcis

sixty sexaginta

skin cutis, is f

to sleep dormio, īvi, ītum, īre 4

sleeplessness insomnia, ae f

slight levis, e

slightly facĭle

small-crystal microcrystallīnus, a, um

small-porous microporōsus, a, um

smell odor, ōris m

soap sapo, ōnis m

sodium Natrium, i n

solizyme Solizÿmum, i n

soluble solubĭlis, e

solution solutio, ōnis f

solvent dissolūtor, ōris m

some nonnullus, a, um

somnibrom Somnibrōmum, i n

soporific somnĭfer, ĕra, ĕrum

sort, species species, ēi f

sound sanus, a, um

spasmolytic spasmolytĭcus, a, um

species species, ei f (in biology)

species species, ērum f (as a drug form on-

ly plural!)

spirituous spirituōsus, a, um

sponge spongia, ae f

starch Amўlum, i n

starched amylaceus , a, um

state status, us m

steptocide Streptocīdum, i n

sterile sterīlis, e

to sterilize sterilĭso, āvi, ātum, āre 1

sterilized sterilisātus, a, um

steroid steroīdum, i n

stigma stigma ătis n

to stimulate stimŭlo, āvi, ātum, āre 1

stimulation stimulatio, ōnis f

stinking (nettle) dioĭcus, a, um

stinking nettle Urtīca dioĭca

stomach gaster, tris f

stomachic stomachĭcus, a, um

streptocide Streptocīdum, i n

streptodecase Streptodecāsum, i n

strophanthin Strophanthīnum, i n

strophanthus Straphanthus, i m

structure structūra, ae f

strychnine Strychnīnum, i n

subcutaneous subcutaneus, a, um

subcutaneously sub cutem

substance substantia, ae f

succinate succĭnas, ātis m

such talis, e

sugar Sacchărum, i n

sulphacyl Sulfacÿlum, i n

sulphadimethoxin Sulfadimethoxīnum, i n

sulphanilamide Sulfanilamidum, i n

163

sulphate sulfas, ātis m

sulphocamphocain Sulfocamphocaīnum i n

sulphur Sulfur, ŭris n

sulphuric sulfurĭcus, a, um

sum, fui, esse to be

sumo, sumpsi, sumptum, ěre 3

to take in

suppository suppositorium, i n

to suppress supprĭmo, supressi, supres-

sum, ĕre 3

suprarenal suprarenālis, e

suspension suspensio, ōnis f

sustac-forte Sustācum-forte, Sustāci-

forte n

swallowwort Chelidonium (i, n) majus

(major, jus)

swamp ledum Ledum (Ledum, i n)

palustre (paluster, tris, tre)

swamp palus, ūdis f

sweet dulcis, e

symptom symptōma, ătis n

synaflan Synaflānum, i n

synoestrol Synoestrolum, i n

synonym synonĭnum, i n

synthetic synthetĭcus, a, um

synthomycine Synthomycīnum, i n

syringe injector, ōris m

syringe-tube spritz-tubŭlus, i m

syrup sirūpus, i m

system systēma, ătis n

T

table-spoon cochlear escāle

(cochlear, āris n spoon;

escālis, e used for having dinner)

tablet tabuletta, ae f

to take recipio, recēpi, receptum, ĕre 3

to treat curo, āvi, ātum, are 1

tannin Tannīnum, i n

taste sapor, ōris m

ten decem

testosterone Testosterōnum, i n

tetracycline Tertracyclīnum, i n

that is, ea, id

the other alĭter

then deinde

theobromine Theobromīnum, i n

theophylline Theophyllīnum, i n

therapeutical therapeutĭcus, a, um

thiamin Thiamīnum, i n

thick spissus, a, um

thiopental sodium Thiopentālum-

natrium, i n

third tertius, a, um

this hic, haec, hoc

three times ter

thrombin Thrombīnum, i n

thrombotyl Thrombotÿlum, i n

thymalin Thymalīnum, i n

thyreocomb Thyreocombum, i n

thyroxin Thyroxīnum, i n

time tempus, ŏris n

tincture tinctūra, ae f

to take effect efficio effēci,

effectum, ĕre 3

tocopherol Tocopherōlum, i n

together una cum (+Abl.)

tongue lingua, ae f

tranquillin Tranquillīnum, i n

tranquisan Tranquisānum, i n

transdermal transdermālis, e

transparent perspicuus, a, um

treatment curatio, ōnis f

to treat curo, āvi, ātum, āre 1

tree arbor, ŏris f

triiodthyronin Triiodthyronīnum, i n

tripsin Trypsīnum, i n

triturating trituratio, ōnis f

tube tubŭla, ae f

tube-dropper tubŭlus-guttator, tubŭli-

guttatōris m

turpentine Terebinthĭna, ae f

tussamag Tussamāgum, i n

tussiglaucin Tussiglaucīnum, i n

twenty viginti

two duo, duae , duo

164

U

ulceran Ulcerānum, i n

ultracaine Ultracaīnum, i n

under sub (+Abl.)

unit unĭtas, ātis f

useful utĭlis, e

usually plerumque

urinary urinarius, a, um

urolesan Urolesānum, i n

usage usus, us m

to use adhibeo, adhibui, adhibĭtum, ēre 2

V

vaccine vaccīnum, i n

vaginal vaginālis, e

valerian Valeriāna, ae f

valocardin Valocardīnum, i n

valocormid Valocormīdum, i n

valosedan Valosedānum, i n

vanillin Vanilīnum, i n

varnish laccum, i n

vaseline Vaselīnum, i n

vasopren Vasoprēnum, i n

very lightly facillĭme

varnish laccum, i n

vasotrast Vasotrastum, i n

vermitox Vermitoxum, i n

vermolfin Vermolfīnum, i n

very lightly facillĭme

victim victĭma, ae f

virus virus, i n

vitamin vitamīnum, i n

vitreous vitreus, a, um

volatile volatĭlis, e

W

warmed tepefactus, a, um

water aqua, ae f

waxed cerātus, a, um

wheat Tritĭcum, i n

white albus, a, um

Wilkinson ointment Ungentum Wil-

kinsoni

with cum (+Abl.)

with the help ope (+ Gen.)

without sine (+Abl.)

worm vermis, is m

wormed tepefactus, a, um

wormwood Absinthium, i n

X

xeroform Xeroformium, i n

Y

yellow flavus, a, um

165

CLINICAL TERMINOLOGY

LESSON 34

INTRODUCTION INTO THE LATIN CLINICAL TERMINOLOGY.

ONE - WORD TERMS AND THEIR MORPHOLOGICAL STRUCTURE. INITIAL AND FINAL

MORPHOLOGICAL ELEMENTS USED FOR WORD BUILDING. NAMES OF MEDICAL

BRANCHES AND SPECIALISTS. NAMES OF MEDICAL EXAMINATIONS

§ 174. General remarks on Latin clinical terminology

Clinical names are the most numerous among all medical terms, as these names

signify a huge amount of different diseases, pathological conditions and abnormalities,

medical examinations and operations. This terminology also includes a great amount

of paramedical vocabulary. It is estimated that about 50% of English medical terms are

of Greek origin, but this relation is particularly evident in clinical terms.

The word clinical itself is of Greek origin (klinike means bed) and it is the

acknowledgement of the important role of Greek physicians in both theoretical and

practical medicine. Thanks to Greek physicians many diseases got their names and via

Latin became a part of European medical languages. New clinical names coming into

use were built, as a rule, on the basis of Greek vocabulary and Greek morphological

elements. The grammar form of new clinical terms corresponds to the norms of Latin

or some European languages. This historical tradition, in particular, is followed in

English. For example:

Latin English Meaning

adenītis adenitis inflammation of a gland

cardiopathia cardiopathy disease of the heart

osteōma osteoma tumor made up of bone tissue

It is indisputable that clinical terms composed on the basis of Greek morpholog-

ical elements have a very important advantage: they are short, but may stand for a

large clinical definition. That is why they are the priority choice of the physicians all

over the world, and both doctor and pharmacist must know the rules of word building

of medical terms and learn lexical and morphological word building elements.

§ 175. The morphological structure of one-word clinical terms

The most numerous among the clinical terms are the one-word ones. From the

point of view of their morphological structure, one-word clinical terms can be 1) sim-

ple, containing only one stem and 2) compound, consisting of two or more morpholog-

ical elements.

About 15% clinical names belong to the first group, e. g. asthma, ătis n —

asthma; cancer, cri m — cancer; herpes, ētis m — herpes; ulcus, ĕris n — ulcer . The-

se noun-terms are mostly used in combination with adjectives or nouns: asthma bron-

chiāle — bronchial asthma; ulcus gastris — ulcer of the stomach.

The majority of one-word clinical terms consist of two or more morphological

elements. These elements can be expressed by:

I. Greek affixes (prefixes, suffixes) and roots of nouns or adjectives. In this

case, the name can contain:

166

I.1. A prefix, a root, a suffix and an ending (mostly - ia, -ēma, -ismus, -ītis, -

ōma, -ōsis):

parametrītis, ĭdis f — parametritis (tissue inflammation near uterus). The name

includes: a) the prefix para- (near) b) the root metr- (uterus) c) the suffix -ītis (combina-

tion of suffix -it- and ending -is) with the constant meaning of «inflammation»;

I.2. A prefix, one or more roots and an ending:

atrichia, ae f — atrichia (lack of hair). The name includes: a) the prefix a- (ab-

sence, lack, cessation of a function) b) the root trich- (hair) c) the ending -ia;

hypermetropia, ae f — hypermetropia (long-sightedness). The name includes:

a) the prefix hyper- (excessive function) b) the root - metr- (measurement) c) the final

root -opia (sight);

I.3. A root and a suffix (suffixed ending): chondrōma, ătis n — chondroma

(tumour of cartilaginous tissue). The name includes: a) the root chondr- (cartilage)

b) the suffix -ōma with the meaning «tumour»(= tumor).

2. The initial and final word building roots in combination with the term end-

ings -ia, -ēma, -ismus, -ītis, -ōma, -ōsis, -us. If the initial word building root hereby

ends up with a consonant and the final one begins with a consonant too, these roots are

joined via a connecting vowel -o-:

rhinopathia, ae f — rhinopathy (disease of the nose). The name includes:

1) the root rhin- (nose) 2) the connecting vowel -o- 3) the root path- (disease);

otorhinolaryngolŏgus, i m — otorhinolaryngologist (the doctor for treating

ear, nose and larynx diseases). The name includes: a) the root ot- (ear) b) the root

rhin- (nose) c) the root laryng- (larynx) d) the final root -logus (a medical specialist).

If the first root ends with a vowel, the connecting -o- is usually omitted:

pelvimetria, ae f — pelvimetry (pelvis measurement);

tachycardia, ae f — tachycardia (abnormally fast heart rate).

If the second root begins with a vowel, the connecting -o- as a rule is omitted

too:

haemat + uria → haematuria, ae f — hematuria (blood in the urine);

odont + algia → odontalgia, ae f — odontalgia (toothache, feeling of pain in

the tooth).

Though there are some exceptions from this rule: e. g. the roots broncho- and

bronchi- never loses their final vowels: bronchiectasia, ae f (=bronchoectasia) —

bronchiectasis (expansion of the bronchi); bronchoadenitis, itĭdis f — bronchoadeni-

tis (inflammation of lymphatic glands).The root bi- is always used with the connecting

-o-: biocycle, biology, microbiology, biopharmaceutics.

§ 176. Some notes on the word stressing in clinical names

In the compound nouns with the ending -ia the last but one vowel «i» is, as a

rule, stressed contrary to the rule «vowel before vowel is short»: atrichía, bronchiecta-

sía, haematuría, hypermetropía, odontalgía, rhinopathía. The noun anatómia (anato-

my) and nouns with the final element -logia keep the third syllable from the end

stressed: cardiologia (cardiology), neurologia (neurology), physiologia (physiology).

167

§ 177. Initial and final root elements

Initial root elements are combined in a one-word term, as you could see above,

with the final roots via the connecting vowel -o- or with the final suffixes. These roots

are presented in the table of each lesson in the following consequence: 1) the Greek

root 2) its Latin equivalent in the dictionary form 3) English meaning 4) English clini-

cal word element:

ger-, geront- senex, is m 1) old man 2) old age ger-, geront-

Initial roots can have two or more variants: ger-, geront- (old man or old age);

haem-, haemat- (blood). All these variants are to be learnt by heart.

Final root elements are not as numerous as initial ones, but their word building

capacity is very high. One should also remember that the final root or suffixed word

building element comes first in the literal translation of the term, for example:

The term nephrographia, ae f consists of the initial root nephr- (kidney) and

the final root -graphia (X-ray examination), so the literal translation is «X-ray exami-

nation of the kidneys», nephrography.

The term myōma, ătis n consists of the initial root my- (muscle) and the final

root -oma (tumour), so the literal translation is «tumor of muscular tissue», myoma.

Final root elements can be part of an adjective too, e. g.: -gĕnus, a, um in the

term biogĕnus, a, um — biogenic (caused by a living organism).

The final roots are presented at each lesson in the table like that:

-logus — a specialist in a branch of science or medicine

-iāter — a doctor, specialist in a brunch of clinical medicine

Some roots may be both initial and final. Final roots have common endings,

mostly the ending -ia. For example: the initial root ophthalm- and the final root -

ophthlmia have the same meaning «eye». In these cases, both roots are placed in the

same cell of the table.

§ 178. Names of the main branches of clinical medicine

Names of the main branches of clinical medicine are usually formed by means

of the final root element -logia and the appropriate initial one, which determines the

cardinal sense of the term. It should be mentioned that the most numerous names of

medico-biological sciences are built according to this rule:

ophthalm- (eye) + logia → ophthalmologia, ae f — ophthalmology, a branch of

clinical medicine treating eye diseases;

proct- ( rectum) + logia → proctologia, ae f — proctology, a branch of clinical

medicine treating rectum diseases. Compare as well:

immunologia, ae f — immunology, a science about immunity;

pharmacologia, ae f — pharmacology, a science about drugs and their usage;

physiologia, ae f — physiology, a science about normal vital processes in hu-

man organism.

Names of some branches of clinical medicine are built by adding the root -

patho- (disease) and the final root -logia to the initial root:

neur- (nerve) + -patho- + logia → neuropathologia, ae f — neuropathology,

clinical neurology, a branch of clinical medicine treating nerve diseases;

168

sex- (sex) + -patho- + logia → sexopathologia, ae f — sexopathology, a branch

of medicine dealing with sexual disorders.

Some names of medical branches are formed by means of the final root element

-iatria, which means some definite branches of clinical medicine:

geriatria, ae f — geriatrics, a particular branch of medicine treating diseases of

older age;

paediatria, ae f — pediatrics, a branch of medicine treating children’s diseases;

phoniatria, ae f — phoniatrics, a branch of medicine treating disorders of voice

production ;

phthisiatria, ae f — phthisiology, a branch of medicine treating tuberculosis;

psychiatria, ae f — psychiatrics (psychiatry), a branch of medicine treating

mental diseases.

§ 179. Names of medical specialists

Most names of medical specialists are composed of the final root element

-logus and the appropriate initial root building element which specifies the cardinal

sense of the term. In this way the names of most biological and medical specialists are

formed:

anthropolŏgus, i m — anthropologist, a specialist studying the man in the pro-

cess of his evolution;

biolŏgus, i m — biologist, a specialist studying forms of life and living organ-

isms;

diaetolŏgus, i m — dietarian, a specialist in the dietary nutrition;

haematolŏgus, i m — hematologist, a specialist in blood diseases.

If the name of a branch of medicine has the ending -pathologia, then the name

of a specialist has the ending –patholŏgus:

neuropathologia → neuropatholŏgus, i m — neuropathologist, a specialist in

nerve diseases;

sexopathologia → sexopatholŏgus, i m — sexopathologist, a specialist treating

sexual disorders.

If the name of a branch of medicine has the ending -iatria, then the name of a

specialist has the ending -iāter:

paediatria → paediāter, tri m — pediatrician (= pediatrist), a specialist in chil-

dren’s diseases.

Finally, many Latin names of medical specialists are built by means of the suf-

fix -ista and the initial root element:

oculista, ae m — oculist, a specialist treating eye diseases;

therapeutista, ae m — physician, therapeutist, a specialist treating inner or-

gans.

§ 180. Some notes on the names of medical specialists in Latin and English

Names of medical specialists in Latin don’t fully coincide with the English

equivalents, as seen above. The difference lies not only on the morphological level

(pthisiāter, tri m — phthisiologist), — sometimes the lexical units don’t correspond to

each other. For example, the name otorhinolaryngologist is not quite common for Eng-

lish or American medical vocabulary; instead three separate terms are used: otologist,

169

rhinologist and laryngologist. But, the term otolaryngologist is used as well. That is

why it is more convenient to use this slightly artificial, but formally correct term oto-

rhinolaryngologist, than to bring three English terms as equivalents. And otherwise, we

tend to use the terms presented both in modern English and Latin medical language.

§ 181. Names of medical examinations and methods of treatment

The names of medical examinations are usually formed by means of the final

root elements -graphia, -metria, -scopia, -diagnostĭca:

cystographia, ae f — cystography, X-ray examination of the urinary bladder;

pelvimetria, ae f — pelvimetry, measuring of pelvis size in women;

proctoscopia, ae f — proctoscopy, internal examination of the rectum;

thermodiagnostĭca, ae f — thermodiagnostics, a diagnosis via infrared radia-

tion.

Names which signify methods of medical treatment usually contain the final

root element -therapia and the initial root element indicating a method of treatment:

physiotherapia, ae f — physiatrics, treatment by means of natural or artificial

physical factors;

phytotherapia, ae f — phytotherapy, treatment by means of medicinal herbs.

Results of X-ray, electric or other methods of medical examination are ex-

pressed by the final root -gramma:

haemogramma, ătis n — hemogram, results of quantitative and qualitative ex-

amination of blood;

mammogramma, ătis n — mammogram, an X-ray film of breast.

§ 182. Table of initial root elements

Greek initial

roots and

its variants

Latin equivalents

in dictionary form English meaning

English word

building equivalents

anthrop- homo, ĭnis m man anthrop-

bi- vita, ae f life bi-

cardi- cor, cordis n heart cardi-

ger-, geront- senex, senis m old man or old age ger-, geront-

gynaec- femĭna, ae f woman gynaec-

haem-,

haemat-

sanguis, ĭnis m blood hem-, hemat-

mast-, mamm- mamma, ae f breast mast-, mamm-

neur- nervus, i m nerve neur-

ophthalm-,

-ophthalmia

ocŭlus, i m eye ophthalm-,

-ophhalmia

ot- auris, is f ear ot-

paed- infans, ntis m, f child ped-

path- morbus, i m disease path-

pharmac- medicamentum, i n drug pharmac-

phthisi- tuberculōsis, is f tuberculosis phthisi-

physi- natūra, ae f nature physi-

phyt- planta, ae f plant, herb phyt-

proct- rectum, i n rectum proct-

170

psych- anĭmus, i m psyche psych-

rhin- nasus, i m nose rhin-

somat- corpus,ŏris n body somat-

stom-, stomat- os, oris n mouth stom-, stomat-

§ 183. Table of final root elements

Final root el-

ements English meaning

-diagnostĭca examination of functional state of organs in order to reveal some disorders

-gĕnus, a, um caused by any factor

-graphia 1) X-ray examination 2) examination by means of electricity

3) recording of the result of some examination

-gramma result of some medical examination seen on a film or presented graphical-

ly

-iāter medical specialist treating certain inner diseases

-iatria any definite branch of clinical medicine

-logia name of some science or branch of clinical medicine

-lŏgus a specialist in a branch of science or medicine

-metria measurement of physical characteristics of human body

-scopia visual or instrumental visual examination

-therapia method of treatment

So, your task is to memorize the word building elements of this and the follow-

ing lessons and combine these elements in terms. If you are not quite sure of your ver-

sion of translation, consult the dictionary.

§ 184. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form of the Latin equivalents corresponding to the follow-

ing Greek roots:

cardi-, neur-, ot-, paed-, path-, pharmac-, physi-, phyt-, proct-, psych-

2. Give the Greek morphological elements corresponding to the following Latin

nouns:

anĭmus, i m; auris, is f; corpus, ŏris n; femĭna, ae f; homo, ĭnis m;

medicamentum, i n; morbus, i m; ocŭlus, i m; sanguis, ĭnis m; senex, senis m;

tuberculōsis, is f; vita, ae f

3. Determine orally the full dictionary form of each term and the meaning of the

initial and final roots, write down the full definition:

anthropologia; anthropogĕnus; biolŏgia; cardiolŏgus; cardiogĕnus; craniome-

tria; geriāter; gynaecolŏgus; haematologia; iatrogĕnus; mastogramma; neuropa-

tholŏgus; ophthalmoscopia; otorhinolaryngologia; physiologia; phthisiāter; phytother-

apia; proctolŏgus; psychiatria; rhinogramma; somatologia; stomatoscopia

4. Make up the Latin dictionary form of one-word terms with the following

meaning:

branch of clinical medicine treating rectum diseases; branch of medicine treat-

ing diseases of children; giving diagnosis via examination of iris; medical specialist

treating blood diseases; medical specialist treating inner organs; measurement of pelvis

in women; results of quantitative and qualitative examination of blood; science study-

171

ing drugs and their usage; treatment by means of natural or artificial physical factors;

specialist studying forms of life and living organisms; specialist studying the man in

the process of his evolution; treatment by means of medical herbs; the X-ray examina-

tion of mamma

5. Give the Latin dictionary form and the full definition in English of the terms:

anthropologist; biopharmaceutics; cardiogram; cardiography; gerontology; hematolo-

gy; hemogram; iatrogenic; iridodiagnostics; mammogram; neurogenic; ophthalmosco-

py; otogenic; otolaryngologist; pediatrician; pharmacotherapy; phthisiologist; phyto-

therapy; proctodiagnostics; proctoscopy; psychiatrist; psychogenic; psychologist; rhi-

noscopy; somatology; stomatology; therapeutist; thoracometry

Dictionaries to lesson 34

Latin-English vocabulary

anthropologia, ae f

anthropology, science studying the man in the process of his

evolution

anthropogěnus, a, um – anthropogenic, caused by human activities

anthropolŏgus, i m – anthropologist, specialist studying the man in the process of

his evolution

biologia, ae f – biology, science studying forms of life and vital organisms

cardiolŏgus, i m – cardiologist, medical specialist treating heart diseases

cardiogĕnus, a, um – cardiogenic, happening because of the heart

craniometria, ae f – craniometry, measurement size of the skull

geriāter, tri m – geriatrician, medical specialist treating diseases of the aged

gynaecolŏgus, i m

– gynecologist, medical specialist treaing genital diseases in

women

haematologia, ae f

– hematology, branch of medicine studying blood and its dis-

eases

iatrogĕnus, a, um

– iatrogenic, happening because of the physician’s manner or

injudicious remarks

mastogramma, ătis n – mastogram, result of breast X-ray examination

neuropatholŏgus, i m

– neuropathologist, specialist treating diseases of the nervous

system

ophthalmoscopia, ae f – ophthalmoscopy, instrumental-visual examination of the eye

otorhinolaryngologia, ae f – otorhinolaryngology, branch of medicine treating diseases of

ear, nose and larynx

physiologia, ae f – physiology, science studying normal vital processes in hu-

man body

phthisiāter, tri m – phthisiologist, specialist treating tuberculosis

phytotherapia, ae f

– phytotherapy, method of treatment by means of medicinal

herb

proctolŏgus, i m – proctologist, specialist treating diseases of rectum

psychiatria, ae f – psychiatry, branch of medicine treating mental diseases

rhinogramma, ătis n — rhinogram, X-ray film of the nose

somatologia, ae f

– somatology, branch of anthropology, studying structure of

the human body

stomatoscopia, ae f – stomatoscopy, visual examination of the oral cavity

English-Latin glossary

172

anthropologist, specialist studying the man in the process of his evolution

– anthropolŏgus, i m

biopharmaceutics, study of physical and chemical properties of medicinal substances

– biopharmaceutĭca, ae f

branch of clinical medicine treating rectum diseases, proctology – proctologia, ae f

branch of medicine treating diseases of children, pediatrics – paediatria, ae f

cardiogram 1) result of X-ray examination of the heart 2) graphical picture of heart action

– cardiogramma, ătis n

cardiography 1) X-ray examination of the heart 2) graphical re-cording of heart action

– cardiographia, ae f

gerontology, science studying living processes in the aged – gerontologia,ae f

giving diagnosis via examination of iris, iridodiagnostics – iridodiagnostĭca, ae f

hemogram, results of quantitative and qualitative examination of blood

– haemogramma, ătis n

iatrogenic, happening because of the physician’s manner or inju-dicious remarks

– iatrogĕnus, a, um

iridodiagnostics, giving diagnosis via examination of iris – iridodiagnostĭca, ae f

measurement of pelvis in women, pelvimetry – pelvimetria, ae f

medical specialist treating blood diseases, hematologist – haematolŏgus, i m

neurogenic, happening because of the nervous system disorders – neurogĕnus, a, um

ophthalmoscopy, instrumental-visual examination of the eye – ophthalmoscopia, ae f

otogenic, happening because of the ear – otogĕnus, a, um

otolaryngologist, specialist treating ear and larynx diseases – otolaryngolŏgus, i

pediatrician, specialist treating children’s diseases – paediāter, tri m

pharmacotherapy, the treatement of disease with drugs – pharmacotherapia, ae f

phthisiologist, specialist treating tuberculosis – phthisiāter, tri m

phytotherapy, method of treatment by means of medical herbs – phytotherapia, aef

proctodiagnostics, examination of the functional state of the rectum – proctodiagnostica, ae f

proctoscopy, instrumental-visual examination of the rectum – proctoscopia, ae f

psychiatrist, specialist treating mental diseases – psychiāter, tri m

psychogenic, developing or originating of mental causes – psychogěnus, a, um

psychologist, specialist studying mental activities of a human per-sonality

– psycholŏgus, i m

results of quantitative and qualitative examination of blood, hemogram

– haemogramma, ătis n

rhinoscopy, instrumental-visual examination of the nose – rhinoscopia, ae f

science studying drugs and their usage, pharmacology – pharmacologia, ae f

stomatology, branch of anthropology, studying structure of human body

– somatologia, ae f

specialist studying forms of life and living organisms, biologist – biolŏgus, i m

specialist studying the man in the process of his evolution, anthro-pologist

– anthropolŏgus, i m

specialist treating diseases of inner organs, therapeutist (therapist) – therapeutista, ae m

stomatology, branch of clinical medicine treating diseases of the oral cavity

– stomatologia, ae f

therapeutist, medical specialist treating diseases of inner organs – therapeutista, ae m

thoracometry, measurement of the size of the thorax – thoracometria, ae f

treatment by means of natural or artificial physical factors, physio- –physiotherapia, ae f

173

therapy

treatment by means of medicinal plants, phytotherapy – phytotherapia, ae f

the X-ray examination of mamma, mammography – mammographia, ae f

LESSON 35

ONE-WORD NAMES OF FUNCTION DISORDERS, PATHOLOGICAL PROCESSES AND ABNORMAL CONDITIONS

§ 185. One-word names of functional disorders

Usually, one-word names of functional disorders are composed of Greek prefix-es and roots. There are the following prefixes:

1. The prefix a- (before a consonant) or an- (before a vowel). This prefix signi-fies cessation or loss of a function as well as lack of property:

adentia, ae f — lack of teeth, adentia; anuria, ae f — complete cessation of the secretion and excretion of urine, anuria; aphagia, ae f — a condition in which the ability of swallowing is lacking,

aphagia; In the same way the Latin prefix in- (im- before consonants b or m) combined

with Latin roots is used both in nouns and adjectives: incontinentia, ae f — lack of voluntary control over the discharge of faeces or

urine, incontinence; insufficientia, ae f — state of being inadequate to perform normal functions,

insufficiency; immobilĭtas, ātis f — lack of mobility, immobility; insensibĭlis, e — lack of sensibility or intelligence, insensible. 2. The prefix dys- signifies functional disorders: dysgeusia, ae f — impairment or perversion of the sense of taste, dysgeusia; dysthyreōsis, is f — imperfect functioning of the thyroid gland, dysthyreōsis; dysuria, ae f — condition in which the passage of urine is difficult, dysuria. 3. The prefix en- (em- before consonants b, m, p) indicates the inner location of

any morbid condition: empyēma, ătis n — accumulation of pus in a cavity; enophthalmus, i m — recession of the eyeball into the cavity of the orbit As prefixed elements some Greek adjectives, pronouns and numerals are used:

Prefix Meaning Latin example English translation

auto- self-, result-

ing of one’s

own action

autopepsia, ae f

(autolўsis, is f)

the process of spontaneous disintegration of cells

and tissues resulting from the action of intracellular

enzymes, autopepsia (autolysis)

mono- one (part) monoplegia, ae f a pathological condition in which only one muscle,

one group of muscles or one part of the body is af-

fected, monoplegia

di- two (parts) diplegia, ae f paralysis of similar parts on both sides of the body,

diplegia

hemi- half hemialgia, ae f neuralgic pain affecting the right or the left side of

the body or the right or the left side of any part of

the body, hemialgia

174

§ 186. One-word names of pathological processes and abnormal conditions

The majority of one-word names of pathological processes and abnormal condi-

tions are composed of Greek roots, suffixes and endings which are adapted to Latin

grammar system. One group of terms consists of a root, a suffix and an ending. Two

suffixes of this group compose a morphological unity with their endings:

Latin suffix Meaning Latin exam-

ple

English

equivalent

Full English

explanation

-ismus

(suffix -ism- + -us,

en- ding of the 2nd

de-clension)

abnormality or

pathological pro- cess,

the mea- ning of which

is determined by the root

element

botulismus, i

m

botulism a form of food

poiso- ning due

to the botuli-

num toxin

-ōsis

(suffix -os- +

-is, ending of the

3rd declension)

pathological

condition or process

dermatōsis, is

f

dermatosis any skin dis-

ease

Attention! The final suffix -ōsis may be used as the morphological part of a

noun term not denoting a disease:

diagnōsis, is f — diagnosis, the scientific recognition of the disease from which

a person suffers;

symbiōsis, is f — symbiosis, the intimate association of two organisms.

The next two suffixes are considered as final suffixed elements of the nouns of

the 3-rd declension:

Latin

suffix

Meaning Latin

example

English

equivalent

Full English

explanation

-ēma different

pathological

conditions

enanthēma, ătis

n

enanthema the rash or eruption on the mu-

cous tissue

-iăsis different

pathological

conditions

psoriăsis,

is f

psoriasis a chronic disease of the skin

characterized by the appear-

ance of laminated scales

But the majority of terms composed of morphological elements present with

initial and final roots. First of all, the root path- combined with the ending -ia is used:

arthropathia, ae f — any disease affecting a joint, arthropathy;

nephropathia, ae f — a disease of the kidney, nephropathy;

rhinopathia, ae f — any morbid condition of the nose, rhinopathy.

Other roots are also used as final elements which define more precisely the

character of pathological condition, e. g.:

angiorrhagia, ae f — a hemorrhage from a vessel, angiorrhagia;

arthralgia, ae f — any kind of pain affecting a joint, arthralgia;

cancerophobia, ae f — unfounded or unreasonable fear that there is a predis-

position to carcinoma, cancerophobia (= carcinomatophobia).

Nevertheless, about 20% of one-word terms signifying pathological processes

and abnormal conditions are nouns comprised of one root:

175

coma, ătis n — the state of complete loss of consciousness with a disorder of

vitally important functions, coma;

infarctus, us m — an area of dead tissue produced by the obstruction of an end

artery, infarction;

insultus, us m — cerebral thrombosis, stroke;

sepsis, is f — infection with pyogenic microorganisms, sepsis.

§ 187. Initial Greek roots and their Latin equivalents

Initial Greek roots and

their variants

Latin equivalents in

dictionary form

English

meaning

English word build-

ing equivalents

angi- vas, vasis n vessel angi-

arthr- articulatio, ōnis f joint arthr-

brady- lentus, a, um slow brady-

cephal- caput, ĭtis n head cephal-

chondr- cartilāgo, ĭnis f cartilage chondr-

dactyl-, -dactylia digĭtus, i m finger or toe dactyl-

derm-, dermat-,

-dermia

cutis, is f skin derm-, dermat-,

-dermia

encephal- cerĕbrum, i n brain encephal-

my- muscŭlus, i m muscle my-

nephr- ren, renis m kidney nephr-

oste- os, ossis n bone oste-

phon-, -phonia vox, vocis f voice phon-, -phonia

phot- lux, lucis f light phot-

phleb- vena, ae f vein phleb-

pseud- falsus, a, um false pseud-

spasm-, -spasmus spasmus, i m spasm spasm-,-spasm

tox-, toxic- venēnum, i n poison tox-, toxic-

tachy- celer, ĕris, ĕre fast, quick tachy-

trich-, -trichia capillus, i m; pilus, i

m

hair trich-

xer- siccus, a, um dry xer-

§ 188. Table of final root elements

Final root elements English meaning

-algia pain in any part of the body

-geusia different pathological conditions of taste

-kinesia different pathological conditions of voluntary motion

-malacia pathological softening of an organ or tissue

-mania any form of mental disorder accompanied by some degree of

excitation

-mycōsis a morbid condition caused by a pathogenic fungus

-opia, -opsia any condition of vision

-pathia a general name of a disease of any organ due to various causes

-pepsia any condition of digestion

-phagia any pathological condition in the act of swallowing

-philia predisposition to any morbid condition

-phobia a pathological fear

176

Final root elements English meaning

-plegia paralysis (palsy) of the muscles of any organ

-pnoё a pathological condition of breathing

-trophia nutrition

§ 189. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form of the Latin equivalents corresponding to the follow-

ing Greek roots:

angi-, arthr-, chondr-, nephr-, phon-, phot-, phleb-, pseud-, tachy-, trich-

2. Give the Greek roots corresponding to the following Latin nouns or adjec-

tives:

caput, ĭtis n; cutis, is f; digĭtus, i m; lentus, a, um; os, ossis n; siccus, a, um; ve-

na, ae f; venēnum, i n.

3. Complete (orally) the dictionary form of each noun. Determine the meaning

of each initial and final morphological element; write down the full definition of each

term and its English equivalent:

angiopathia; arthromalacia; autohaemotherapia; autopepsia; bradyphagia; brad-

ypnoё; chondropathia; dactylospasmus; dermatōsis; dermatomycōsis; dysgeusia; en-

cephalogramma; gastrospasmus; hemicrania; hemianopsia; hemiplegia; monodactyl-

ismus; myoplegia; osteomalacia; osteopathia; phlebocarcinōma; photophobia; pseudo-

arthrōsis; spasmophilia; stomatomycōsis; tachycardia; toxicomania; xerophthalmia

4. Make up the Latin dictionary form of one-word terms with the following meaning:

abnormal quickness in eating; a chronic disease of the skin, characterized by the

appearance of laminated scales; a condition in which the ability to swallow is lacking;

any disease affecting a joint; any disease of the skin; any morbid condition or abnor-

mal growth of the hair; any morbid condition of the nose; a pathological condition in

which only one muscle, one group of muscles or one part of the body is affected; im-

pairment of the voice; any kind of pain affecting a joint; paralysis of similar parts on

both sides of the body; the rash or eruption on the mucous tissue; the X-ray examina-

tion of the great vessels and the chambers of the heart; unfounded or unreasonable fear

that there is a predisposition to carcinoma

5. Give the full definition in English and the Latin dictionary form of the terms:

angiology; apnoea; arthralgia; atrichia; atrophy; autolaryngoscopy; autopsy; biop-

sy; bradycardia; cephalalgia; didactylism; dystrophy; encephalomalacia; enophthal-

mus; hemiatrophy; hemophilia; mastopathy; monopathophobia; myopia; nephrogenic;

nephropathy; ophthalmoplegia; osteochondrosis; osteodystrophy; pharmacophobia;

phoniatrics; phlebography; phonocardiogram; photophobia; proctospasm; rhinopathy;

tachyphagia; toxicosis; xerostomia

Dictionaries to lesson 35 Latin — English vocabulary

angiopathia, ae f – any disease of blood vessels, angiopathy

arthromalacia, ae f – softening of joints, arthromalacia

autohaemotherapia, ae f – a method of treatment in which the patient’s own blood is ad-

ministered to him, autohaemotherapy

177

autopepsia, ae f – the process of a spontaneous disintegration of cells and tissues

resulting from the action of intracellular enzymes, autopepsia

bradyphagia, ae f – slowing of swallowing, bradyphagia

bradypnoё, es f –an abnormally slow rate of breathing, bradypnoea

chondropathia, ae f – any disease affecting a cartilage, chondropathy

dysgeusia, ae f

dermatomycōsis, is f

– impairment or perversion of the sense of taste, dysgeusia

– a generic term for all cutaneous infections due to fun-

gi,dermatomycosis

encephalogramma, ătis

n

– any X-ray film obtained in the radiological examination of the

ventricles and subarachnoid space of the brain, encephalogram

gastrospasmus, i m – an involuntary contraction of the stomach muscle, gastrospasm

hemicrania, ae f – a periodic morbid condition with localized headaches, hemicra-

nia

hemianopsia, ae f

(=hemianopia, ae f)

– loss of half the vision in each eye, hemianopsia (hemianopia)

hemiplegia, ae f – paralysis of one side of the body, hemiplegia

monodactylismus, i m – a congenital condition in which only one finger or toe is present

on the hand or the foot, monodactylism

myoplegia, ae f – paralysis of muscle or a condition in which muscular force is

decreased, myoplegia

osteomalacia, ae f – softening of bones, osteomalacia

osteopathia, ae f – disease of bones, osteopathy

phlebocarcinōma, ătis n – a malignant epithelial tumor affecting a vein, phlebocarcinoma

photophobia, ae f – abnormal intolerance to light, photophobia

pseudoarthrōsis, is f

– a false joint formed between the fragments of a fractured bone

which have failed to unite, pseudoarthrosis

spasmophilia, ae f

– a morbid state in which there is a tendency to convulsions and a

spasm, spasmophilia

stomatomycōsis, is f

– any morbid condition caused by a microscopic fungus, stoma-

tomycosis

tachycardia, ae f – a rapid action of the heart, tachycardia

toxicomania, ae f – an insane desire for poison, toxicomania

xerophthalmia, ae f

– a morbid condition of eyes, characterized by a shrunken appear-

ance of the conjunctiva, xerophthalmia (= xeroma)

English–Latin glossary

abnormal quickness in eating, tachyphagia – tachyphagia, ae f

angiology, the science of blood vessels – angiologia, ae f

a chronic disease of the skin, characterized by the appearance

of laminated scales, psoriasis

– psoriăsis, is f

a condition in which the ability to swallow is lacking, aphagia – aphagia, ae f

any disease affecting a joint, arthropathy – arthropathia, ae f

any disease of the skin, dermatosis – dermatōsis,is f

any kind of pain, affecting a joint, arthralgia – arthralgia, ae f

any morbid condition of the nose, rhinopathy – rhinopathia, ae f

any morbid condition or abnormal growth of the

hair, trichopathy

– trichopathia,ae f

178

a pathological condition in which only one muscle, one group

of muscles or one part of the body is affected, monoplegia

– monoplegia, ae f

apnoea, the cessation of breathing – apnoё, ёs f

arthralgia, any kind of pain affecting a joint – arthralgia, ae f

atrophy, a condition of general malnutrition from whatever

cause

– atrophia, ae f

atrichia, not having hair – atrichia, ae f

autolaryngoscopy, the examination of one’s own

larynx with a laryngoscope

– autolaryngoscopia, ae f

autopsy, post-mortem examination of a body in

order to establish the cause of death

– autopsia, ae f

biopsy, examination for purposes of diagnosis of

tissue cut from the living body

– biopsia, ae f

bradycardia, slowing of the heart rate – bradycardia, ae f

cephalalgia, pain in the head – cephalalgia,ae f

didactylism, the congenital condition of having

only two fingers on a hand or two toes on a foot

– didactylismus, i m

dystrophy, a disorder of the structure and functions of an organ

or tissue due to perverted nutrition

– dystrophia, ae f

encephalomalacia, softening of the brain – encephalomalacia, ae f

impairment of the voice, dysphonia – dysphonia, ae f

hemiatrophy, atrophy affecting only one side of

the body, or one half of an organ

– hemiatrophia, ae f

hemophilia, a severe hereditary bleeding disease affecting

males and transmitted by females

– haemophilia, ae f

enophthalmus, recession of the eyeball into the cavity of the

orbit

– enophthalmus, i m

mastopathy, any diseased condition of the mammary gland – mastopathia, ae f

monopathophobia, fear of a particular disease – – monopathophobia, ae f

myopia, short sight – myopia, ae f

nephrogenic, produced by or originating in the kidney – nephrogĕnus, a um

nephropathy, a disease of the kidney – nephropathia, ae f

ophthalmoplegia, palsy (paralysis) of ocular muscles – ophthalmoplegia, ae f

osteochondrosis, a degenerative change in bony and cartilage

tissues

– osteochondrōsis, is f

osteodystrophy, a disorder of bone nutrition – osteodystrophia, ae f

paralysis of similar parts on both sides of the body, diplegia – diplegia, ae f

pharmacophobia, a morbid fear of taking drugs or medicines – pharmacophobia, ae f

phoniatrics (= phoniatry), the treatment of disorders of speech – phoniatria, ae f

phlebography 1) a radiographic visualization of veins 2) the

tracing of the venous pulse by means of a phlebograph

– phlebographia, ae f

phonocardiogram, the record produced by an

instrument for recording heart sounds

– phonocardiogramma, ătis n

photophobia, abnormal intolerance to light – photophobia, ae f

proctospasm, a spasmodic contraction of the rectum – proctospasmus, i m

rhinopathy, any morbid condition of the nose – rhinopathia, ae f

tachyphagia, abnormal quickness in eating, – tachyphagia,ae f

179

the rash or eruption on the mucous tissue, enanthema – enanthēma, ătis n

the X-ray examination of the great vessels and

the chambers of the heart, angiocardiography

– angiocardiographia, ae f

toxicosis, a pathological condition caused by

the absorption of poisons

– toxicōsis, is f

unfounded or unreasonable fear that there is a

predisposition to carcinoma

– cancerophobia, ae f

xerostomia, dryness of the mouth due to failure

of the salivary gland

– xerostomia, ae f

LESSON 36 NAMES OF QUALITATIVE AND QUANTITATIVE ABNORMALITIES IN MORPHOLOGICAL

STRUCTURES AND PHYSIOLOGICAL PROCESSES

§ 190. Increase and decrease in different quantitative conditions

Increase and decrease of different quantitative conditions may, as a rule, be ex-

pressed by means of the prefixes hyper- and hypo- which are joined by final root ele-

ments:

hyperaesthesia, ae f — excessive sensitiveness of the skin, hyperesthesia;

hyperkinesia, ae f — a condition in which there is abnormally great strength of

movement, hyperkinesia;

hyperplasia, ae f — any condition in which there is an increase in the number

of cells in any body’s part, hyperplasia;

hypodynamia, ae f — diminished muscular or nervous energy, hypodynamia;

hypogalactia, ae f — the secretion of a too small quantity of milk, hypogalac-

tia;

hypopepsia, ae f — abnormal slowness and weakness of the process of diges-

tion, hypopepsia.

Increase and decrease in the functional activity is sometimes expressed by

means of the initial roots tachy- and brady-:

tachypnoё, ёs f — abnormally rapid breathing, tachypnea

bradykinesia, ae f — abnormal sluggishness of physical movements, brady-

kinesis.

§ 191. Increase or decrease in dimension of anatomical and histological structures

Increase in size of anatomical or histological structures is expressed by means

of the following initial and final roots: dolich-, macr-, mega-, megal-, -megalia:

dolichocōlon, i n — an abnormally long colon of normal diameter, dolichocolon

macrocўtus, i m — a red blood cell that is larger than normal, macrocyte

megaduodēnum, i n — duodenum of abnormally large size, megadoduenum

(megaloduodenum)

megalosplenia, ae f — enlargement of the spleen, megalosplenia

hepatomegalia, ae f — a condition of enlargement of the liver, hepatomegalia

Decrease in size of anatomical and histological structures is expressed by means

of the initial roots brachy- and micr-:

180

brachydactylia ae f — a condition in which there are abnormally short fingers

or toes, brachydactylia

microcephălus, i m — a person with an unusually small size of head, micro-

cephalus.

Dilatation or narrowing in volume of a hollow organ, cavity or tube is epressed

by means of the following roots: -ectasia, -ectăsis, -dilatatio, sten-, -stenōsis:

bronchiectăsis, is f — a condition of dilatation of a bronchus or bronchi, bron-

chiectasis

gastrectasia, ae f — dilatation of the stomach, gastrectasia

vasodilatatio, ōnis f — dilatation of a blood vessel, vasodilatation

stenostomia, ae f — abnormal narrowness of the mouth, stenostomy

oesophagostenōsis, is f — narrowing of the esophagus, oesophagostenosis.

§ 192. Increase and decrease in the quantity of anatomical and histological

structures

Increase and decrease in the quantity of anatomical and histological structures is

expressed by means of the roots olig-, poly-, -penia:

oligodontia (=oligodentia), ae f — a state in which most of the teeth are lack-

ing, oligodontia

polyarthropathia, ae f — a pathological condition involving many joints, pol-

yarthropathy

erythropenia, ae f — a state in which there are too few erythrocytes in the

blood, erythropenia.

Increase in the quantity of any anatomical or histological structure may also be

expressed by the final prefix -ōsis:

leucocytōsis, is f — an increase in the total number of leucocytes in the blood,

leucocytosis

papillomatōsis, is f — the condition of diffuse formation of papillomata, papil-

lomatosis.

§ 193. Table of initial root elements

Greek root and its

variants

Latin equivalents in

dictionary form

English

meaning

English word -building

equivalents

aesthes-,

-aesthesia

sensus, us m sensibility, sensi-

tiveness

aesthes-,

-aesthesia

brachy- brevis, e short brachy-

cheil-, -cheilia labium, i n lip cheil-, -cheilia

cyt-, -cўtus cellŭla, ae f cell cyt-, -cyte

dolich- longus, a, um long dolich-

erythr- ruber, bra, brum red erythr-

gloss-, -glossia lingua, ae f tongue gloss-, -glossia

glyc- dulcis, e sugar glyc-

gnath-, -gnathia maxilla, ae f maxilla, upper jaw gnath-, -gnathia

leuc- albus, a, um white leuc-

macr-, mega-,

megal-, -megalia

magnus, a, um large macr-, mega-, megal-, -

megalia

melan- niger, gra, grum black melan-

181

Greek root and its

variants

Latin equivalents in

dictionary form

English

meaning

English word -building

equivalents

micr- parvus, a, um small micr-

myel, -myelia 1) medulla ossium

2) medulla spinālis

1) bone marrow

2) spinal cord

myel, -myelia

odont-, -odontia,

-dentia

dens, dentis, m

tooth odont-, -odonia

-dentia

olig- parvus, a, um few olig-

pod-, -podia pes, pedis m foot pod-, -podia

poly- multus, a, um many poly-

splen-, -splenia lien, ēnis m spleen splen-, -splenia

sphygm-

-sphygmia

pulsus, us m pulse sphygm- ,

-sphygmia

therm-,

- thermia

1) calor, ōris m

2) temperatūra, ae f

1) heat

2) temperature

therm-,

- thermia

thyre- glandŭla thyr(e)oidea thyroid (gland) thyro-

Attention! 1. The initial roots macr- and megal- may be used in many (but not in

all!) cases as synonyms: macrocephalia = megalocephalia, macropodia = megalopodia.

When choosing the necessary variant of the initial root one should consult the dictionary.

2. The root -cyt- can be omitted if the term begins with erythrocyt- or leuco-

cyt- and ends with –penia:

erythrocytopenia = erythropenia; leucocytopenia = leucopenia, but: monocyto-

penia, thrombocytopenia.

§ 194. Table of final roots

Final root ele-

ments

English meaning

-aemia any condition of the blood

-genĕsis the origin and (formative) development

-genia any condition of mandible

-mnesia any condition of the memory

-penia a diminution in the number of any kind of cells present in the blood

-phrenia a condition associated with a serious mental disorder

-plasia the development of tissues

-poёsis the formation 1) of cells present in the blood 2) of lymph 3) of urine

-sthenia any condition of strength, vigor or forcefulness

-tensio a condition of arterial blood pressure

-tonia a condition of muscular tension in the walls of vessels and bowels

Attension! In the English term cythaemia and different compositions with this

term the spelling -haemia is remained: myelocythaemia, oligocythaemia.

182

§195. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form of the Latin equivalents corresponding to the follow-

ing Greek roots:

brachy-, dolich-, erythr-, glyc-, leuc-, melan-, micr-, olig-, poly-, thyre-

2. Write the dictionary form of the Latin equivalents and then give:

1) Greek equivalents corresponding to every Latin equivalent 2) English mean-

ing of every pair of equivalents:

calor; cellŭla; dens; labium; lingua; lien; magnus; maxilla; medulla ossium; pes;

pulsus; sensus

3. Complete (orally) the dictionary form of each noun. Determine the meaning

of each initial and final morphological element; write down the full definition of each

term as well as its English equivalent:

amnesia; anaesthesiolŏgus; apodia; asthenia; brachycephălus; brachydactylia;

dolichocephalia; dysthyreōsis; erythropenia; glossoplegia; glycaemia; hyperaemia; hy-

perthermia; hypotonia; leucocytōsis; melanoderma; microgenia; micromyelia; odonto-

genĕsis; oligocytaemia; oligophrenia; polymastia; prognathia; sphygmogramma; sple-

nomegalia; thermotherapia; thrombocytopoёsis; thyreotoxicōsis

4. Make up the Latin dictionary form of one-word terms with the following

meaning:

abnormal narrowing of the mouth; abnormal slowness and weakness of the pro-

cess of digestion; abnormal sluggishness of physical movements; a condition in which

there are abnormally short fingers or toes; a condition of enlargement of the liver; an

abnormally long colon of normal diameter; an increase in the total number of leuco-

cytes; a pathological condition involving many joints; a person with an unusually

small size of head; a red blood cell that is larger than normal; a state in which most of

the teeth are lacking; a state in which there are too few erythrocytes; dilatation of the

stomach; excessive sensitiveness of any organ or part of the body; the origin and de-

velopment of bone marrow; the origin and development of morbid condition; extreme-

ly rapid breathing

5. Give the full definition and the Latin dictionary form of the terms:

aglossia; anemia; brachyoesophagus; cytology; dolichocolon; dystonia; erythema;

gnathalgia; haematomyelia; hepatomegalia; hyperesthesia; hyperglycemia; hypertension;

hypomnesia; hypophrenia; hypoplasia; hypothermia; macrocyte; megaloduodenum; meg-

alomania; melanocarcinoma; micromastia; microsphygmy; monocytopoesis; myelo-

cythaemia; oligodactylia; podagra; podalgia; polyavitaminosis; splenohepatomegaly

Dictionaries to lesson 36 Latin–English vocabulary

amnesia, ae f – loss of memory of varying degree, amnesia

anaesthesiolŏgus, i m – a specialist in the administration of anesthetics, anesthesiologist

apodia, ae f – congenital absence of feet, apodia

asthenia, ae f – loss of vital forces, asthenia

brachycephălus, i m – an individual with disproportionately short head, brachycephalic

brachydactylia, ae f – a condition in which there are abnormally short fingers or toes,

brachydactylia

dolichocephalia, ae f – the state of having a relatively long skull, dolichocephalia

183

dysthyreōsis, is f – imperfect functioning of the thyroid gland, dysthyreosis

erythropenia, ae f – a state in which there are too few erythrocytes, erythropenia

glossoplegia, ae f – paralysis of the tongue, glossoplegia

glycaemia, ae f – a condition in which the circulating blood contains a quantity of

sugar above normal amounts, glycaemia

hyperaemia, ae f – an excess of blood in any part of the body, hyperemia

hyperthermia, ae f – very high body temperature, hyperthermia

hypotonia, ae f – lessened tension in any body structure, hypotonia

leucocytōsis, is f – an increase in the total number of leucocytes in the blood, leu-

cocytosis

melanoderma, ătis n – a condition in which there is an unusually large accumulation of

melanin in the skin, melanoderma

microgenia, ae f – a condition in which the chin is of unusually small size, micro-

genia

micromyelia, ae f – general reduction in size of the spinal cord, micromyelia

odontogenĕsis, is f – the origin and formative development of teeth, odontogenesis

oligocytaemia, ae f – a condition in the blood in which there is cell deficiency, oligo-

cythaemia

oligophrenia, ae f – congenital lack of the mentality, oligophrenia

polymastia, ae f – a state in which in human beings there are more than two dis-

tinct mammary glands, polymastia

prognathia, ae f – a condition in which there is abnormal projection of one or both

jaws, prognatism

sphygmoramma, ătis n – a record of the arterial pulse waves, sphygmogram

splenomegalia, ae f – enlargement of the spleen, splenomegalia

thermotherapia, ae f – the use of heat in the treatment of disease, thermotherapy

thrombocytopoёsis, is f – the formation of blood platelets, thrombocytopoiesis

thyreotoxicōsis, is f – any toxic condition attributable to hyperactivity of the thyroid

gland, thyrotoxicosis

English–Latin glossary

abnormal narrowing of the month, stenostomy – stenostomia, ae f

abnormally rapid breathing, tachypnea – taccypnoë, ës f

abnormal slowness and weakness of the process of digestion,

hypopepsia

– hypopepsia, ae f

abnormal sluggishness of physical movements, bradykinesis – bradykinesia, ae f

an abnormally long colon of normal diameter, dolichocolon – dolichocōlon, i n

aglossia, a congenital condition of being devoid of a tongue – aglossia, ae f

anemia, a condition of the blood in which there are quantitative

and qualitative changes in the red cells resulting in a reduction in

the total amount of blood

– anaemia, ae f

brachyoesophagus, a congenitally short esophagus – brachyoesophăgus, i m

a condition in which there are abnormally short

fingers or toes, brachydactylia

– brachydactylia, ae f

cytology, the science of the form and functions of cells –cytologia, ae f

dilatation of the stomach, gastrectasia – gastrectasia, ae f

dolichocolon, an abnormally long colon of normal diameter – dolichocōlon, i n

184

dystonia, a state of disordered tonicity – dystonia, ae f

excessive sensitiveness of any organ or part of the body, hyper-

esthesia

– hyperaesthesia, ae f

extremely rapid breathing, tachypnea – tachypnoё, ёs f

gnathalgia, pain in one or both jaws – gnathalgia, ae f

haematomyelia, bleeding within the substance of the spinal cord – haematomyelia, ae f

hepatomegalia, a condition of enlargement of the liver –hepatomegalia, ae f

hyperesthesia, excessive sensitiveness of any organ or part of the

body

– hyperaesthesia, ae f

hyperglycemia, an excessive amount of sugar in the blood – hyperglycaemia, ae f

hypertension, high arterial blood pressure – hypertensio, ōnis f

hypomnesia, a weak or defective state of the memory – hypomnesia, ae f

hypophrenia, feebleness of mind – hypophrenia, ae f

hypoplasia, underdevelopment of a tissue or part – hypoplasia, ae f

hypothermia, deficiency of body heat – leucocytōsis, is f

an increase in the total number of leucocytes, leucocytosis – leucocytōsis, is f

macrocyte, a red blood cell that is larger than normal – macrocўtus, i m

megaduodenum, duodenum of abnormally large size – megaduodēnum, i n

megalomania, a mental condition in which a person has grandi-

ose delusions about himself and his own intellect, power, im-

portance and so on

– megalomania, ae f

melanocarcinoma, a darkly pigmented malignant epithelial tu-

mor

– melanocarcinōma, ătis

n

micromastia, abnormal smallness of the mammary glands – micromastia, ae f

microsphygmy, diminished strength of pulse – microsphygmia, ae f

monocytopoiesis, the production of monocytes in the bone mar-

row

– monocytopoёsis, is f

myelocytaemia, the presence of myelocytes in the blood – myelocetaemia, ae f

oligodactylia, a congenital deficiency of fingers – oligodactylia, ae f

the origin and development of a morbid condition, pathogenesis – pathogenĕsis, is f

the origin and development of the bone marrow, myelogenesis – myelogenĕsis, is f

pathological condition involving many joints, polyarthropathy – erythēma, ătis n

a person with an unusually small size of head, microcephalus – microcephălus, i m

podagra, gout, a disease of the purine metabolism characterized

by attacks of arthritis with an associated raised serum uric acid

– podăgra, ae f

podalgia, sensation of pain in the foot or toes – podalgia, ae f

polyavitaminosis, a morbid condition caused by

deficiency of several vitamins

– polyavitaminōsis, is f

a red blood cell that is larger than normal, macrocyte – macrocўtus, i m

splenohepatomegaly, enlargement of the spleen – splenohepatomegalia

ae f

a state in which most of the teeth are lacking, oligodentia – oligodentia, ae f

a state in which there are too few erythrocytes, erythropenia – erythropenia, ae f

185

LESSON 37

NAMES OF INFLAMMATORY PROCESSES WHICH OCCUR IN ORGANS AND TISSUES.

NAMES OF ABNORMALITIES IN THE STATES OF PHYSIOLOGICAL FLUIDS

§ 196. Names of inflammatory conditions

The state of inflammation in any organ or tissue, as a rule, is usually expressed

by means of the final suffixed element -ītis which is transformed into –itĭdis in the

Genitive form. The suffix –ītis is added to the initial root of the noun which defines the

place of a morbid state. All the terms with the suffix –ītis are nouns of the 3rd declen-

sion:

arthr- (joint) + ītis → arthrītis, itĭdis f — inflammation of a joint, arthritis

hepat- (liver) + ītis → hepatītis, itĭdis f — inflammation of the liver, hepatitis

The suffix -ītis may be added both to the Greek and Latin roots:

nephr- (Greek nephros kidney) + ītis → nephrītis, itĭdis f — an inflammatory

disease of the kidneys, nephritis.

tonsill- (Latin tonsilla, ae f tonsil) + ītis → tonsillītis, itĭdis f — an inflamma-

tion of the tonsil, tonsillitis.

The site of the inflammatory process can be defined more precisely by means of

the following prefixes of the Greek origin:

1) endo- (inner, mostly a mucous part of an organ):

endo + metr- (utĕrus, i m) + ītis → endometrītis, itĭdis f — an inflammation of

the inner mucous membrane of the uterus, endometritis

2) para- (cellular, connective and other tissues near an organ):

para- + cyst (urinary bladder) + ītis → paracystītis, itĭdis f — a condition of in-

flammation affecting the connective and other tissues lying close to the bladder,

paracystitis

3) peri- (tissues enclosing an organ):

peri- + card- (heart) + ītis → pericardītis, itĭdis f — an inflammation of the

membrane enveloping the heart, pericarditis.

Names of some inflammatory morbid conditions are formed without suffix -

ītis, e. g.:

panaritium, i n — an inflammation in the nail fold, panaris (= panaritium);

pneumonia, ae f — an inflammation of the spongy tissue of the lung,

pneumonia

§ 197. Names of morbid conditions of physiological fluids

Due to inflammatory processes some specific fluids may accumulate or be pro-

duced in cavities and tissues:

exsudātum, i n — a fluid extravasated into a cavity, exudate;

transsudātum, i n — any fluid that has passed through a membrane or the skin,

transudate.

The abnormal accumulation of fluid in a tissue or cavity space is generally

called hydrops, ōpis m — hydrops, dropsy. This noun is used with adjectives and any

other noun:

hydrops vesicae felleae — fluid swelling in the gall bladder.

186

The presence of excessive fluid in the cavity of a definite part of the body is ex-

pressed by the prefix hydro- and a final root with the ending of the 1st, 2nd or 3rd de-

clension:

hydromeētra, ae f — an accumulation of watery fluid in the cavity of the uter-

us, hydrometra;

hydropericardium, i n — excessive accumulation of serous fluid in the peri-

cardium, hydropericardium;

hydrarthrōsis, is f — a watery effusion into the cavity of a joint, hydrarthrosis.

Pus also refers to the fluids accumulated due to the inflammatory processes.

The presence of pus is expressed in one-word terms by the initial root py- (Greek pus)

and the final roots together with the grammar ending:

pyopericardium, i n — an accumulation of pus in the pericardium, pyoperi-

cardium;

pyuria, ae f — a condition in which pus is present in the urine, pyuria.

The meaning «lymph» is denoted by the initial roots chyl- and lymph-.

The root chyl- is used if lymph is present in a cavity, in the blood or urine:

chylothōrax, ācis m — a condition in which there is an effusion of lymph into

the thoracic cavity, chylothorax;

chyluria, ae f — a condition in which the urine contains lymph, chyluria.

The root lymph- is used if lymph is considered as a part of lymphatic cells,

glands and vessels:

lymphocytōsis, is f — an increase in the number of lymphocytes present in the

blood, lymphocytosis;

lymphadenopahia, ae f — any morbid condition of the lymph gland, lymphad-

enopathy;

lymphangiītis, itĭdis f — an inflammation of lymphatic vessels, lymphangiitis.

Abnormal presence of blood in a cavity is expressed by the initial root haem- or

haemat- which is added to a root and the final suffix -ōsis as well as any grammar

ending of the 1st, 2nd or 3rd declension:

haemarthrōsis, is f — an extravasation of blood into a joint, haemarthrosis;

haematomētra, ae f — an accumulation of blood or menstrual fluid in the cavi-

ty of uterus, haematometra;

haemotympănum, i n — the presence of blood in the tympanic cavity,

haemotympanum.

An abnormal state of blood circulation is mostly caused by embolaemia — a

condition in which emboli are present in the blood. As a result, there occurs a sudden

blocking of a blood vessel, usually an artery, by the emboli — fragments of a blood

clot, clumps of bacteria or other foreign bodies introduced into the circulation. Such

a condition is named thromboembolism (thromboëmbolismus, i m or thromboëmbo-

lia, ae f).

An abnormal cessation of the flow of blood, lymph or other physiological fluid

is marked by the final root –stăsis:

galactostăsis, is f — an arrest or stagnation in the secretion of milk, galactostasis;

lymphostăsis, is f — cessation of the flow of lymph, lymphostasis.

187

§ 198. Table of initial roots

Greek roots

and their

variants

Latin equivalents in dic-

tionary form

English meaning English word

building ele-

ments

aden- 1) glandŭla, ae f

2) adenoĭdes, um f

3) nodus lymphatĭcus

1) gland

2) adenoids

3) lymphatic node

aden-

aёr-, pneum-

,

pneumat-

aёr, is m air or a gas aёr-, pneum-,

pneumat-

chole- bilis, is f; fel, fellis n bile chole-

cholecyst- vesīca biliāris (fellea) gall bladder cholecyst-

1) chyl-,

2) lymph-

lympha, ae f chyle or lymph chyl-, lymph-

col-, -colon 1) intestīnum crassum

2) colon

1) large intestine

2) colon

col-.

-colon

cyst- 1) saccus, i m

2) vesīca, ae f

3) vesīca urinaria

1) sac

2) bladder

3) urinary bladder

cyst-

dacry- lacrĭma, ae f tear dacry-

dacryocyst- saccus lacrimālis lacrimal sac dacryocyst-

enter- 1) intestīnum tenue

2) intestīnum

1) small intestine

2) intestine

enter-

galact-,

-galactia

lac, lactis n milk galact-,

-galactia

hidr- sudor, ōris m sweat hidr-

hydr- 1) aqua, ae f

2) liquor cerebrospinālis

3) exsudātum, i n

4) transsudātum, i n

1) water

2) cerebrospinal fluid

3) exudate

4) transudate

hydr-

lip-, seb- 1) adeps, ĭpis m

2) sebum, i n

1) fatty tissue of the body

2) the fatty secretion of the

sebaceous glands

lip-, seb-

men- mensis, is m menses, the monthly dis-

charge of blood from the

uterus

men-

pan-, pant- omnis, e all pan-, pant-

poli- griseus, a, um grey poli-

py- pus, puris n pus py-

sial-, -sialia 1) salīva, ae f

2) ductus salivarii

1) saliva

2) salivary ducts

sial-, -sialia

ur-, -uria 1) urea, ae f

2) urīna, ae f

1) urea, the chief nitroge-

nous constituent of urine 2)

urine

ur-, -uria

xanth- flavus, a, um yellow xanth-

188

§ 199. Table of final roots

Final root elements English meaning

-chlorhydria any state of free hydrochloric acid in the gastric juice

-chylia secretion of the gastric juice

-menorrhoea any condition of menses

-metra any condition of the uterus

-rrhagia hemorrhage (bleeding) in any part of the body

-rrhoea profuse discharge of mucus or other fluid substance

-salivatio secretion of saliva

-salpinx any condition of the uterine tube

-stăsis cessation of the flow of any physiological fluid

-thōrax any condition of the thorax

-uria any condition of the urine

§ 200. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form of Latin equivalents corresponding to the following

Greek roots:

aden-, chole-, col-, cyst-, dacry-, enter-, hidr-, lip-, men-, poli-, py-, xanth-.

2. Give the dictionary form of Latin words and Greek equivalents to the Latin

ones:

adeps, aёr, aqua, flavus, griseus, lac, lacrĭma, liquor cerebrospinālis, salīva, su-

dor, vesīca urinaria

3. Complete (orally) the dictionary form of each Latin noun and define the

meaning of each word building element. Write down in English a full definition of each

term and its English one-word equivalent:

achlorhydria; adenalgia; adenasthenia; aerobion; amenorrhoea; anaerobion; chy-

lothōrax; cholecystītis; cystorrhagia; dacryostenōsis; empyēma; enterocolītis; galactor-

rhoea; haemarthrōsis; hidradenītis; hydromētra; hypochylia; hyposalivatio; lipuria;

lymphostăsis; menalgia; megacōlon; pantalgia; poliomyelītis; pyogĕnus; pyopneumo-

thōrax; pyosalpinx; uraemia; xanthopsia; xanthōsis

4. Make up the Latin dictionary form of one-word terms with the following

meaning:

a condition in which the amount of gastric juice is lessened; acute inflammation

of the gray matter of the brain; an accumulation of pus in the pericardium; a discharge

of pus; a disturbance of color vision when everything appears yellow; an excessive

flow of milk; any fluid that has passed through the membrane of the skin; a watery ef-

fusion into the cavity of a joint; inflammation in the nail fold; inflammation of the in-

ner mucous membrane of the uterus; inflammation of the liver; narrowing or stricture

of the duct of the lachrymal gland; profuse discharge of mucous fluid from the nose;

the presence of air or gas within a thorax; the presence of blood in the tympanic cavity;

a sudden blocking of a blood vessel, usually an artery, by the emboli; the presence of

blood in the urine

5. Give the Latin dictionary form and the full definition of each term in English:

achylia; aerobic; anaerobic; chyluria; colonorrhagia; cystitis; dacryorrhoea;

dysmenorrhoea; dropsy; embolaemia; endometritis; enteromegalia; enterogastritis;

189

galactostasis; haematosalpinx; hydrarthrosis; hidrosis; hydrometra; hypersalivation;

hypogalactia; lymphangiitis; lymphocytosis; menalgia; panaris; paranephritis; pericys-

titis; pneumonia; pneumohemothorax; polioencephalopathy; pyuria; thromboembo-

lism; tonsillitis

Dictionaries to lesson 38 Latin–English vocabulary

achlorhydria, ae f

– a complete lack of free hydrochloric acid in the gastric

juice, achlorhydria

adenalgia, ae f – a painful condition of a gland, adenalgia

adenasthenia, ae f – functional deficiency in a gland, adenasthenia

aёrobion, i n

– a microorganism which utilizes and assimilates atmospher-

ic oxygen, aerobe (aerobion)

amenorrhoea, ae f

– the pathological absence or stoppage of the menstrual dis-

charge from the uterus, amenorrhea

anaёrobion, i n

– a microorganism which is able to exist and multiply alt-

hough deprived of either free oxygen or air, anaerobe

chylothōrax, ācis m

– the condition in which there is an effusion of the lymph

into the thoracic cavity, chylothorax

cystorrhagia, ae f – hemorrhage from the urinary bladder, cystorrhagia

cholecystītis, itĭdis f – inflammation of the gallbladder, cholecystitis

dacryostenōsis, is f –narrowing or stricture of the duct of the lacrimal gland,

dacryostenosis

empyēma, ătis n – an accumulation of pus in a cavity, empyema

enterocolītis, itĭdis f – an inflamed condition of the small intestine and the colon,

enterocolitis

galactorrhoea, ae f – an excessive flow of milk, galactorrhoea

haemarthrōsis, ōsis f – extravasation of blood into a joint, haemarthrosis

hidradenitis, itĭdis f – inflammation of the sweat glands, hidradenitis

hydrometra, ae f – an accumulation of watery fluid in the cavity of the uterus,

hydrometra

hypochylia, ae f – a condition in which the amount of gastric juice is less-

ened, hypochylia

hyposalivatio, ōnis f – a condition in which there is an abnormal decrease in the

secretion of saliva, hyposalivation

lipuria, ae f – the presence of an oily emulsion or fat in the urine, lipuria

lymphostăsis, is f – cessation of the flow of lymph, lymphostasis

megacōlon, i n – a condition in which there is a great dilatation of the large

intestine, megacolon

menalgia, ae f – painful menstruation, menalgia

pantalgia, ae f – pain affecting all parts of the body, pantalgia

poliomyelītis, itĭdis f

– an acute inflammation of anterior horn cells of the spinal

cord due to polioviruses, poliomyelitis

pyogĕnus, a, um – forming or producing pus, pyogenic

pyopneumothōrax, ācis m

– an inflammatory condition characterized by the presence of

purulent fluid and gas in a pleural cavity, pyopneumothorax

190

pyosalpinx, ngis f

– inflammation of the uterine tube which has progressed to pus

formation, pyosalpinx

uraemia, ae f

– the condition which is associated with the retention of meta-

bolic products in the blood and disturbance of acid-base ratio of

the latter, uremia

xanthopsia, ae f

– a disturbance of color vision, when everything appears yellow,

xanthopsia

xanthōsis, is f – yellowish discoloration, especially of the skin, xanthosis

English–Latin glossary

an accumulation of pus in the pericardium, pyopericardium – pyopericardium, i n

achylia, absence of acid and pepsin from the gastric juice – achylia, ae f

a condition in which the amount of gastric juice is lessened,

hypochylia

– hypochylia, ae f

acute inflammation of the gray matter of the brain, polioen-

cephalitis

– polioencephalitis, itĭdis f

a discharge of pus, pyorrhea – pyorrhoea, ae f

a disturbance of color vision when everything appears yellow,

xanthopsia

– xanthopsia, ae f

aerobe, a microorganism which utilizes and assimilates at-

mospheric oxygen

– aёrobion, i n

aerobic, requiring gaseous oxygen in order to live – aёrobĭcus, a, um

anaerobe, a microorganism which is able to exist and multiply

although deprived of either free oxygen or air

– anaёrobion, i n

anaerobic, able to sustain life without free oxygen – anaёrobĭcus, a, um

any fluid that has passed through the membrane of the skin,

transudate

– transsudātum, i n

chyluria, the condition in which the urine contains lymph – chyluria, ae f

colonorrhagia, hemorrhage from the colon – colonorrhagia, ae f

cystitis, inflammation of the urinary bladder – cystītis, itĭdis f

dacryorrhoea, an excessive flow of tears – dacryorrhoea, ae f

dropsy, an abnormal collection of fluid in tissue or cavity

space

– hydrops, ōpis m

dysmenorrhoea, pain occurring in the back and lower abdo-

men at or about the time of menses

– dysmenorrhoea, ae f

embolaemia, a condition in which emboli are present in the

blood

– embolaemia, ae f

endometritis, an inflammation of the inner mucous membrane

of the uterus

– endometrītis, itĭdis f

enterogastritis, an inflammation of the small

intestine and the stomach

– enterogastrītis, itĭdis f

enteromegalia, an unusually large size of the intestine – enteromegalia, ae f

an excessive flow of milk, galactorrhoea – galactorrhoea, ae f

galactostasis, an arrest or stagnation in the secretion of milk – galactostăsis, is f

hematosalpinx, a collection and retention of blood in an uter-

ine tube

– haematosalalpinx, ngis f

hidrosis 1) a process of secreting sweat

2) abnormally profuse sweating

– hidrōsis, is f

191

hydrarthrosis, a watery effusion into the cavity of a joint – hydrarthrōsis, is f

hydrometra, an accumulation of watery fluid

in the cavity of the uterus

– hydromētra , ae f

hypersalivation, excessive secretion of saliva – hypersalivatio, ōnis f

hypogalactia, secretion of too small a quantity of milk – hypogalactia, ae f

inflammation in the nail fold, panaris – dacryostenōsis, is f

inflammation of the inner mucous membrane of the uterus,

endometritis

– endometrītis, itĭdis f

inflammation of the liver, hepatitis – hepatītis, itĭdis f

lymphangiitis, inflammation of lymphatic vessels – lymphangītis, itĭdis f

lymphocytosis, an increase in the number of lymphocytes – lymphocytōsis, is f

menalgia, painful menstruation – menalgia, ae f

a narrowing or stricture of the duct of the lacrimal gland,

dacryostenosis

– dacryostenōsis, is f

panaris, an inflammation in the nail fold – panaritium, i n

paranephritis, an inflammatory condition involving the con-

nective tissue adjacent to the kidney

– paranephrītis, itĭdis f

pericystitis, an inflammation in which the structures around

the urinary bladder are affected

– pericystītis, itĭdis f

pneumonia, an inflammation of the spongy tissue of the lung – pneumonia, ae f

pneumohemothorax, an accumulation of gas or air and blood

in the cavity of the thorax

– pneumohaemothōrax, ācis

m

polioencephalopathy, any pathological condition of the gray

matter of the brain

– polioencephalopathia, ae f

the presence of air or gas within a thorax, pneumothorax – pneumothōrax, ācis m

the presence of blood in the tympanic cavity, haemotympanum – haemotympănum, i n

the presence of blood in the urine, haematuria – haematuria, ae f

profuse discharge of mucous fluid from the nose, rhinorrhea – rhinorrhoea, ae f

pyuria, a condition in which pus is present in the urine – pyuria, ae f

a sudden blocking of a blood vessel, usually an artery, by em-

boli, thromboembolia (thromboembolism)

– thromboёmbolia, ae f

(thromboёmbolismus, i m)

thromboembolism, a sudden blocking of a blood vessel, usu-

ally an artery, by emboli

– thromboembolismus, i m

tonsillitis, inflammation of the tonsil – tonsillītis, itĭdis f

a watery effusion into the cavity of a joint, hydrarthrosis – hydrarthrōsis, is f

LESSON 38

NAMES OF ENDOGENOUS PATHOLOGICAL CHANGES AND MALFORMATIONS

§ 201. Names of abnormal adhesions and fissures

Conditions of abnormal adhesions of tissues are signified by means of the prefix

sym- or syn- (before the consonants d, p, t or vowels) and the final roots defining the

place of malformation:

symblephăron, i n — an adhesion of eyelid to the eyeball, symblepharon

syndactylia, ae f — a condition in which two or more fingers or toes are fused,

syndactylia.

192

One-word names of fissures are formed by means of the final root –schĭsis:

cystoschĭsis, is f — a congenital fissure of the urinary bladder, cystoschisis

gnathoschĭsis, is f — a congenital fissure in the maxilla, gnathoschisis.

§ 202. Names of pathological cavities

Abscesses, cysts and hernias usually belong to pathological cavities.

Abscess (abscessus, us m) is an accumulation of pus circumscribed in a cavity

produced by tissue disintegration. This Latin noun is used mainly with adjectives:

abscessus apicalis — apical abscess, an abscess at the apex of the root of a tooth

abscessus tonsillāris — tonsillar abscess, a suppurative condition of the paren-

chyma of a tonsil.

Cyst (cysta, ae f) is a cavity lined by a well-defined epithelium, fibrous or de-

generating tissue. This noun both in Latin and English is mainly used in two-word

terms with adjectives and nouns:

cysta choledŏchi — choledochus cyst, cystic dilatation in the common bile duct

cysta pancreatĭca — pancreatic cyst, a cyst arising within or in close proximity

to the pancreas.

Hernia (hernia, ae f) is the protrusion of an internal organ through a defect in

the wall of the anatomical cavity in which it lies. The noun is used like the previous

one with adjectives and nouns:

hernia cerĕbri — hernia of the brain, protrusion of the brain through a defect

in the skull

hernia inguinālis — inguinal hernia, hernia in the inguinal canal.

In one-word terms, the idea of hernia is expressed by the final root -cele:

gastrocēle, es f — hernia of the stomach, gasrocele

myocēle, es f — hernia of a muscle, myocele.

§ 203. Names of tumors

Names of tumors of a definite organ or tissues are formed by means of final suf-

fix -ōma added to the initial root which indicates the localization of abnormal growth.

All these names are nouns of the 3rd declension:

angiōma, ătis n — angioma, a tumor composed of blood vessels or of lymphat-

ic vessels

nephrōma, ătis n — nephroma, a tumor derived from renal substance

osteōma, ătis n — osteoma, a tumor of bone.

Some names of innocent tumors are formed without the suffix -oma:

polўpus, i m polypus, a tumor with a stalk arising from mucous membranes or

the body surface

verrūca, ae f — a wart, a small circumscribed epidermal tumor.

Both nouns are used in multiword terms:

polўpus laryngis — a polypus of larynx

verrūca plana — a plane wart.

A malignant tumor or any malignant growth is named cancer — cancer, cri m.

This name is used with the nouns and adjectives which define localization of the tumor:

cancer cutis — cancer of the skin

cancer gastris — cancer of the stomach

193

cancer osteolytĭcus — osteolytic cancer, a cancer which destroys the bone that

it has invaded.

A malignant epithelial tumor is called carcinoma — carcinōma, ătis n. This

noun is used with adjectives mostly:

carcinōma bronchogenĭcum — a bronchogenic carcinoma, carcinoma origi-

nating from a bronchus

carcinōma cutaneum — carcinoma cutaneum, a squamous-celled carcinoma of

the skin.

The name carcinoma can also be used as a final root of one-word terms:

adenocarcinōma, ătis n — a carcinomatous tumor of glandular epithelium and

connective tissue, adenocarcinoma

chondrocarcinōma, ătis n — a carcinoma the fragment of which contains car-

tilaginous elements, chondrocarcinoma.

§ 204. Names of concrements

A concrement is a pathological concretion — mostly a small mass which has

become calcified in a cavity or in the tissue of a hollow anatomical structure. Such a

concretion is denoted in Latin by the nouns concrementum, i n or calcŭlus, i m and

an adjective defining the localization of the concretion:

concrementum nasāle — nasal calculus

calcŭlus dentālis — dental calculus

The names of these concretions may also be expressed by one-word terms by

means of the final root -lithus (Greek lithos stone) added to initial roots: rhinolĭthus, i

m = concrementum nasāle

odontolĭthus, i m = calcŭlus dentālis.

The condition in which a number of calculi are present in any part of the body is

called calculosis — calculōsis, is f. The formation of concretions is named lithiasis —

lithiăsis, is f. The same word is used as a final root of several one-word terms:

broncholithiăsis, is f — a condition in which calculi occur in the lumina of

bronchial tubes, broncholithiasis

cholecystolithiăsis, is f — a condition in which there are gall-stones in the gall

bladder or bile duct, cholelithiasis

nephrolithăsis, is f — a condition characterized by the presence of gravel or of

renal calculi, nephrolithiasis

urolithiăsis, is f — a morbid state due to the presence of calculi in the urinary

system, urolithiasis

§ 205. Names of abnormal hardening and softening of tissues

Abnormal hardening (induration) of a tissue is expressed by the initial root

scler- (Greek skleros hard) or the final element -sclerosis:

sclerodesmia, ae f — abnormal induration of ligaments, sclerodesmia

osteosclerōsis, is f — hardening of bony spaces, osteosclerosis

Abnormal softening of a tissue is expressed by the final root -malacia (Greek

malakia softness):

chondromalacia, ae f — a pathological softening of a cartilage, chondromalacia

194

§ 206. Table of initial roots

Greek roots

and their var-

iants

Latin equivalents in dic-

tionary form

English meaning English

word

building el-

ements

carcin- cancer, cri m cancer carcin-

hist- textus, us m tissue hist-

lith- calcŭlus, i m

concrementum, i n

stone

concretion

lith-

mening- pia mater, arachnoidea ma-

ter, dura mater — the mem-

branes which form the cov-

ering or sheaths of the spinal

cord and brain

pia mater, arachnoidea

mater, dura mater

mening-

morph- forma, ae f form morph-

necr- mortuus, a, um dead, lifeless necr-

ne(o)- novus, a, um new ne(o)-

onc- tumor, ōris m tumor, swelling onc-

onych- unguis, is m nail onych-

pachy- crassus, a, um thick pachy-

pyel- pelvis renālis pelvis of the kidney pyel-

sarc- caro, carnis f flesh sarc-

scler- durus, a, um hard, hardening scler-

splanchn- viscus, ĕris n; viscĕra, um n a viscus; the viscera splanchn-

spondyl- vertĕbra, ae f vertebra spondyl-

sten- strictus, a, um narrow, narrowing sten-

typhl- caecum, i n caecum typhl-

uran- palātum, i n palate palat-, uran-

Attention! Instead of the initial Greek root uran- the Latin root palat- can be

used:

palatoplegia, ae f (palatoplegia, paralysis affecting the soft palate) = uranople-

gia, ae f (uranoplegia)

palatoschĭsis, is f (palatoschisis, cleft palate, a congenital fissure in the midline

of the hard palate) = uranoschĭsis, is f (uranoschisis).

§ 207. Table of final roots

Final root ele-

ments

English meaning

-carcinōma a malignant epithelial tumor

-cēle hernia

-lithiăsis the formation of concretions

- lĭthus a concretion

-malacia pathological softening of an organ or tissue

-morphōsis any state of the body form

195

-necrōsis death of a portion of a tissue

-onychia any abnormal condition of the nail

-porōsis abnormal rarefaction of a bone by thinning of its trabeculae

-schĭsis congenial fissure of a tissue

-sclerōsis hardening of a tissue

-stenōsis the constriction or narrowing of an orifice or the lumen of a hollow or tubu-

lar organ

§ 208. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form of Latin equivalents corresponding to the following

Greek roots:

carcin-, hist-, lith-, mening-, morph-, necr-, ne(o)-, onc-, onych-, pachy-, scler-,

typhl-.

2. Give the dictionary form of Latin words and Greek equivalents to the Latin

ones:

caecum, calcŭlus, cancer, crassus, durus, mortuus, palātum, pelvis renālis, stric-

tus, textus, viscĕra.

3. Complete (orally) the dictionary form of each Latin noun and define the

meaning of each word building element. Write down in English a full definition of each

term and its English one-word equivalent:

adenocarcinōma; broncholithiăsis; carcinomatōsis; cystoschĭsis; dacry- os-

tenōsis; gastrocēle; histolўsis; meningiōma; metamorphōsis; micronychia; myocele;

necropneumonia; nephrolithiăsis; neoplasma; odontolĭthus; oncolŏgus; onychomy-

cōsis; osteonecrōsis; osteoporōsis; pachydactylia; palatoplegia; pyelītis; sarcōma;

sclerōma; splanchnosclerōsis; spondylītis; stenothōrax; typhlectasia; uranoschĭsis

4. Make up the Latin dictionary form of one-word terms with the following

meaning:

abnormal narrowing of the internal diameter of a vessel; a carcinoma the frag-

ment of which contains cartilaginous elements; any diseased condition of the viscera;

calculus on the teeth; causing the growth of tumors; congenital cleft of a vertebral arch

or arches; congenital fissure of the urinary bladder; hardening of bony spaces; herni-

ation of the uterus; inflammation affecting the pelvis of the kidney and the urinary

bladder; inflammation of the membranes of the brain or spinal cord; paralysis affecting

the soft palate; pathological softening of a cartilage; separation of a tissue as a result of

its death; spasm of the caecum; the formation of concretions; the origin, formation and

development of body tissue; the production and evolution of a form; the production of

urinary calculi and the morbid state due to the presence of calculi in the urinary system

5. Give the Latin dictionary form and the full definition of each term in English:

adiponecrosis; angioma; calculosis; cancerogenic (= carcinogenic); carcinoma;

cholecystolithiasis; chondroporosis; enterolithiasis; gnathoschisis; macronychia; me-

ningoencephalitis; necraemia; neoarthrosis; oesophagostenosis; oncologist; oncothera-

py; onychodystrophy; osteomalacia; pachycheilia; polyposis; rhinolith; sarcomatosis;

sclerodermatitis; sialolith; spondylopathy; symblepharon; synphalangism; typhlocele

Dictionaries to lesson 38 Latin–English vocabulary

196

adenocarcinōma, ătis n

– a carcinomatous tumor of glandular epithelium and connective

tissue, adenocarcinoma

broncholithiăsis, is f

– a condition in which calculi occur in the lumina of bronchial

tubes, broncholithiasis

carcinomatōsis, is f – a condition in which carcinoma is widely distributed throughout

the body, carcinomatosis

cystoschĭsis, is f – a congenital fissure of the urinary bladder, cystoschisis

dacryostenōsis, is f

– a narrowing or stricture of the duct of the lacrimal gland, dacry-

ostenosis

gastrocēle, es f

– a hernia of the stomach or of a portion which has become

pouched, gastrocele

histolўsis, is f – a spontaneous dissolution of living organic tissue, histolysis

meningiōma, ătis n

– a meningeal tumor, thought to arise from the arachnoidal villi,

meningioma

metamorphōsis, is f – a change of a form or structure, metamorphosis

micronychia, ae f – a small nail or small nails, micronychia

myocēle, es f – hernia of a muscle, myocele

necropneumonia, ae f — gangrene of the lung, necropneumonia

nephrolithiăsis, is f – a condition characterized by the presence of gravel or renal cal-

culi, nephrolithiasis

neoplasma, ătis n – any new and morbid formation of tissue, neoplasm

odonthlĭthus, i m – a calculus on the teeth, odontolith

oncolŏgus, i m – a specialist treating tumors, oncologist

onychomycōsis, is f – an infection of nails caused by a fungus, onychomycosis

osteonecrōsis, is f – death of bony tissue, osteonecrosis

osteoporōsis, is f – a rarefaction of bone, osteoporosis

pachydactylia, ae f – abnormal thickening of a finger or toe, pachydactyly

palatoplegia, ae f – paralysis affecting the soft palate, palatoplegia

pyelītis, itĭdis f – an inflammation of the pelvis of the kidney, pyelitis

sarcōma, ătis n – a malignant tumor of connective tissue or its derivatives, sar-

coma

sclerōma, ătis n – an area of indurated tissue, particularly in the mucous membrane

of the nose or larynx, scleroma

splanchnosclerōsis, is f – hardening of any viscus, splanchnosclerosis

spondylītis, itĭdis f – an inflammation of the spine, spondilitis

stenothōrax, ācis m – a short, narrow thorax or chest, stenothorax

typhlectasia, ae f – a dilatation of the caecum, typhlectasia

uranoschĭsis, is f

– cleft palate, a congenital fissure in the midline of the hard palate,

uranoschisis

English–Latin glossary

an abnormal thickening of a finger or toe, pachydactyly – pachydactylia, ae f

angioma, a tumor composed of blood vessels or lymphatic ves-

sels

– angiōma, ătis, n

calculosis, a condition in which a number of calculi are present

in any part of the body

– calculōsis, is f

a calculus on the teeth, odontolith – odontolĭthus, i m

197

cancerogenic (= carcinogenic), producing carcinoma – cancerogĕnus, a, um

carcinoma, a malignant epithelial tumor – carcinōma, ătis n

a carcinoma the fragment of which contains cartilaginous ele-

ments, chondroma

– chondrōma, ătis n

a carcinomatous tumor of glandular epithelium and connective

tissue, adenocarcinoma

– adenocarcinōma, ătis n

cholecystolithiasis, a condition in which there are gall-stones in

the gall bladder or bile duct

– cholecystolithiăsis, is f

chondroporosis, a porous condition of cartilage shown in thin-

ning of the cartilage and formation of spaces and sinuses

– chondroporōsis, is f

causing the growth of tumors, oncogenous – oncogĕnus, a, um

a condition characterized by the presence of

gravel or of renal calculi, nephrolithiasis

– nephrolithiăsis, is f

a congenital cleft of a vertebral arch, spondyloschisis – spondyloschĭsis, is f

a congenital fissure of the urinary bladder, cystoschisis – cystoschĭsis, is f

any diseased condition of the viscera, splanchnopathy – splanchnopathia, ae f

enterolithiasis, formation of calculi or concretions in the intes-

tine

– entherolithiăsis, is f

the formation of concretions, lithiasis – lithiasis, is f

gnathoschisis, a congenital fissure in the maxilla – gnathoschĭsis, is f

hardening of bony spaces, osteosclerosis – osteosclerōsis, is f

a hernia involving the caecum, typhlocele – typhlocēle,es f

herniation of the uterus, metrocele – metrocēle, es f

inflammation affecting the pelvis of the kidney and the urinary

bladder, pyelocystitis

– pyelocystītis, itĭdis f

inflammation of the membranes of the brain or spinal cord, men-

ingitis

– meningītis, itĭdis f

macronychia, excessive length or size of the nails – macronychia, ae f

a malignant tumor of connective tissue or its derivatives, sar-

coma

– sarcōma, ătis n

a meningeal tumor thought to arise from the arachnoidal villi,

meningioma

– meningioma, ătis n

meningoencephalitis, an inflammatory

condition of the brain and its meninges

– meningoencephalītis,

itĭdis f

necraemia, a condition in which the blood loses its vitality – necraemia, ae f

neoarthrosis, an artificial joint implanted by the surgical opera-

tion

– neoarthrōsis, is f

oesophagostenosis, a narrowing of the esophagus – oesophagostenōsis, is f

oncologist, a specialist treating tumorous diseases – oncolŏgus. i m

oncotherapy, the treatment of tumours – oncotherapia, ae f

onychodystrophy, malformation of the nails due to impaired nu-

trition

– onychodystrophia, ae f

the origin, formation and development of body tissue, histogenesis – histogeněsis, is f

osteomalacia, softening of the bones – osteomalacia, ae f

pachycheilia, abnormal thickness or swelling of the lips – pachycheilia, ae f

198

paralysis affecting the soft palate, palatoplegia – palatoplegia, ae f

pathological softening of cartilage, chondromalacia – chondromalacia, ae f

polyposis, a condition in which the colon is studded with polypi

growing from the mucous membrane

– polypōsis,is f

the production and evolution of a form, morphogenesis – morphogeněsis, is f

production of urinary calculi and a morbid state due to the pres-

ence of calculi in the urinary system, urolithiasis

– urolithiăsis, is f

rhinolith, a concretion in the cavity of the nose – rhinolĭthus, i m

sarcomatosis, a condition in which a number of sarcomata de-

velop here and there on the body surface

– sarcomatōsis, is f

sclerodermatitis, an inflammation and induration of the skin – sclerodermatītis, itĭdis f

a separation of a tissue as a result of its death, necrolysis – necrolўsis, is f

sialolith, a salivary calculus – sialolĭthus, i m

spasm of the caecum, typhlospasm – typhlospasmus, i m

spondylopathy, any disease of the vertebrae – spondylopathia, ae f

symblepharon, adhesion of the eyelid to the eyeball –symblephăron, i n

synphalangism, a condition in which the joints

of certain fingers or toes are fused

– synphalangismus, i m

typhlocele, a hernia involving the caecum – typhlocēle, es f

LESSON 39

NAMES OF TISSUE DEFORMATIONS CAUSED BY EXOGENOUS FACTORS. NAMES OF

SURGICAL OPERATIONS

§ 209. General names of tissue deformations caused by different exogenous

factors

The most known general names of tissue deformations are the following one-

word terms:

deformatio, ōnis f — a destruction of the form, deformation

laesio, ōnis f — an injury, damage suffered by the body

trauma, ătis n — a trauma, injury

vulnus, ĕris n — a wound, any interruption by violence or by surgery, in the

continuity of the external surface of the body or of the surface of any internal organ.

More definite names are the following one-word terms:

avulsio, ōnis f — avulsion, a forcible removal of a portion from a hollow struc-

ture

combustio, ōnis f — burn, an injury caused by heat or by chemical or physical

agents having an effect similar to heat

congelatio, ōnis f — congelation, frostbite, a local morbid condition, caused by

freezing

commotio, ōnis f — a concussion or a violent shaking of a soft structure

compressio, ōnis f — compression, the process of decreasing the volume and

increasing the density of the body by means of force applied externally

dislocatio, ōnis f — a dislocation, an abnormal displacement of one bone upon

another in a joint

199

ectopia, ae f — ectopia, a morbid congenital malposition or traumatic dis-

placement of an organ or its part

fractūra, ae f — a fracture, a break in the continuity of a bone

luxatio, ōnis f — a luxation, a dislocation of a bone

ruptūra, ae f — a rupture, the breaking or forcible disruption of continuity of

the bone or anther anatomical structure. With the same meaning, but only in one-word

terms, the final root –rrhexis (Greek rrhexis a break) is used:

metrorrhexis, is f — metrorrhexis, rupture of the uterus

ophthalmorrhexis, is f — ophthalmorrhexis, rupture of the eyeball

prolapsus, us m — prolapse, a sinking down or protrusion of a viscus or its

part. With the same meaning the final root -ptōsis is used:

gastroptōsis, is f — gasroptosis, a downward displacement of the stomach

splenoptōsis, is f — splenoptosis, a prolapse of the spleen.

§ 210. Names of surgical operations

The most common names of surgical operations are the following:

operatio, ōnis f — an operation, surgical intervention upon a part of the body

amputatio, ōnis f — an amputation, the surgical removal of a limb or a portion

of a limb or of any other appendage

extirpatio, ōnis f — an extirpation, a removal of the entire pathological struc-

ture, organ or part

extractio, ōnis f — an extraction, the act or process of drawing out a part of

body or a foreign body

implantatio, ōnis f — an implantation, the introduction of one tissue or struc-

ture into another with the aim of improving the function of any part of the body

punctūra, ae f (punctio, ōnis f) — a puncture, the operation of piercing a vis-

cus or a swelling either to establish the nature of its content or to empty it. In one-word

terms, the final root -centēsis corresponds to the two-word terms which include the

noun puncture and the second noun signifying the site of this operation, e. g.:

punctūra thorācis = thoracocentēsis; punctūra pulmōnis = pneumocentēsis

replantatio, ōnis f — replantation, the replacement a separated by accident part

of some anatomical structure back to its natural place

transplantatio, ōnis f — a transplantation, the operation of transference of a

tissue or an organ from one place to an other with the aim of improving or renewing

the function

resectio, ōnis f — a resection, a surgical removal of a part, usually of some

magnitude, e. g. jaw, stomach, colon etc.

sectio, ōnis f — a section, the act of cutting

§ 211. Prefixes widely used in surgical names

Latin Meaning Latin example English equivalent and its meaning

200

prefix

a-,

ab-

away, from avulsio, ōnis f

aberratio, ōnis f

avulsion, the forcible removing a portion from

a hollow structure

aberration, a deviation from the normal

de(s)- away, from decapsulatio, ōnis f

descensus, us m

decapsulation, surgical removal of a capsule

or sheath descent, the sinking down or protru-

sion of a viscus or its part

dis- apart, sepa-

ration

disarticulatio, ōnis

f

disarticulation, separation or amputation in a

joint without cutting through bone

im-,

in-

in, into implantātum, i n

invasio, ōnis f

implant, any piece of tissue for use as a graft

invasion, the entrance and establishment of

parasites into the body of a host

e-, ex- from,

out of

extractio, ōnis f

evisceratio, ōnis f

extraction, the act or process of drawing out a

part of body or a foreign body evisceration,

removal of the contents of an organ or its part

re-

again

replantatio, ōnis f

replantation, the replacement a separated by

accident part of some anatomical structure

back to its natural place

trans-

through,

across

transplantatio, ōnis

f

transplantation, the operation of transfer of

tissue from one site to another

§ 212. Table of initial roots

Greek roots

and their

variants

Latin equivalents

in dictionary form English meaning

English word

building elements

blephar- palpĕbra, ae f eyelid blephar-

chir- manus, us f hand chir-

colp- vagīna, ae f vagina colp-

cry- gelu, us n cold cry-

crypt- latens, ntis hidden crypt-

desm- ligamentum, i n ligament desm-

embry- 1) embryo, ōnis m

2) fetus, us m

1) embryo, a living organism

from the fertilized ovum to the

first 8 weeks of intrauterine life

2) fetus, a living organism after

first 8 weeks of intrauterine life

embry-

kerat- cornea, ae f 1) cornea

2) the horny layer of the skin

kerat-

lapar- abdōmen, ĭnis n abdomen lapar-

pneum-,

pneumon-

pulmo, ōnis m lung pneum-,

pneumon-

salping- 1) tuba uterīna

2) tuba auditīva (=

tuba auditoria)

1) the uterine tube

2) the pharyngotympanic tube

(=auditory tube)

salping-

ten- tendo, ĭnis m tendon ten-

top- locus, i m place top-

§ 213. Table of final roots

Final roots elements English meaning

201

Final roots elements English meaning

-chirurgia surgical operation

-centēsis tapping or puncture of a cavity, -centesis

-dĕsis operative fixation of a structure, -desis

-ectomia amputation or excision of an organ or its part, -ectomy

-implantatio

the introduction of one tissue or structure into another with the aim

of improving the function of any part of the body, -implantation

-lўsis surgical freeing of a tissue from adhesions

-pexia surgical fixation by means of sutures, -pexis, -pexy

-plastĭca an operation dependent upon the transposition of skin or other tissue,

-plasty

-rrhaphia the suturing together of the cut or torn edges of a wound, -rrhaphy

-rrhexis rupture or bursting of an organ or vessel, -rrhexis

-stŏma an artificial opening created by surgical operation

-stomia creation of an artificial opening, -stomy

-tomia operative cutting, incision or section, -tomy

-transplantatio the operation of transference of a tissue or an organ from one place

to an other with the aim of improving or renewing the function, -

transplantation

§ 214. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form of Latin equivalents corresponding to the following

Greek roots:

blephar-, chir-, colp-, cry-, crypt-, desm-, embry-, kerat-, lapar-,

pneum-, salping-, ten-, top-.

2. Give the dictionary form of Latin words and Greek equivalents to the Latin

ones:

abdōmen, cornea, embryo, gelu, latens, locus, manus, palpĕbra, pulmo, tendo,

tuba uterīna.

3. Complete orally the dictionary form of each Latin noun and define the mean-

ing of each word building element. Write down in English the full definition of each

term and its English one-word equivalent:

avulsio; blepharītis; blepharoplastĭca; colpotomia; combustio; cryochirurgia;

cryotherapia; cryptophthalmia; decapsulatio; descensus; desmorrhexis; desmurgia; dis-

articulatio; embryologia; embryotomia; evisceratio; gastrostŏma; hyperkeratōsis; im-

plantatio; implantātum; keratotomia; laparoscopia; laparogastrostomia; pneumo-

centēsis; prolapsus; pneumoёmpyēma; replantatio; resection; salpingectomia; salpin-

golўsis; spondylodĕsis; tenorrhaphia; tenotomia; thoracocentēsis; toponeurōsis

4. Make up the Latin dictionary form of one-word terms with the following

meaning:

a concussion or a violent shaking of a soft structure; adenoma of the eyelid; a

medical practitioner skilled in general surgery, who specializes in the operative treat-

ment of diseases of the nervous system; a neoplasm originating in embryonic elements

or blighted ovum; any disease affecting ligaments; any morbid condition affecting the

lungs; any plastic operation to repair or reconstruct the urinary bladder; any plastic

surgical operation on the vagina; a tumor consisting of connective-tissue element; inci-

sion of the abdominal wall and excision of the uterus; inflammation of abdominal

202

muscles; inflammation of the cornea; polypus of the vagina; puncture of the cornea;

removal of an entire pathological structure, organ or part; retention of the menstrual

flow due to congenital or acquired genital-canal stenosis; surgical operation on small

structures with the aid of a microscope; the act or process of drawing out a part of

body or a foreign body; the entrance and establishment of parasites into the body of a

host; the operation for the relief of hernia and the resultant reduction of the size of the

latter; the operation of removal of the adenoid growth by excision; the operation of

transference of a tissue of an organ from one place to an other with the aim of improv-

ing or renewing a function; the surgical establishment of a permanent or semiperma-

nent opening into the urinary bladder; total or partial surgical removal of diseased lung

tissue; use of cold or freezing as a therapeutic measure

5. Give the full definition of each term and its Latin dictionary form:

arthrocentesis; autoplasty; blepharotomy; colpocystotomy; colpomyomectomy;

colpohysteropexy; congelation; cryosurgery; cryptolith; cryptopsoriasis; desmalgia;

desmotomy; dislocation; ectopia; embryectomy; embryopathology; implant; implanta-

tion; keratomycosis; keratoplasty; esophagostoma; pneumorrhaphy; pneumotomy;

puncture; salpingogram; salpingopexy; tenodesis; tenolysis; tonsillotomy; topography;

topophobia

Dictionaries to lesson 39 Latin–English vocabulary

avulsio, ōnis f – a forcible removing a portion from a hollow structure, avulsion

blepharītis, itĭdis f – an inflammation of the eyelids, blepharitis

blepharoplastĭca, ae f

– a plastic operation for restoration of an eyelid or any part of it, ble-

pharoplasty

colpotomia, ae f – any cutting operation on the vagina, colpotomy

combustio, ōnis f

– an injury caused by heat or by chemical or physical agents having

an effect similar to heat, burn

cryochirurgia, ae f – surgical procedures in which tissue is destroyed by

freezing, cryosurgery

cryotherapia, ae f – the science of the use of cold as a therapeutic measure, cryotherapy

cryptophthalmia, ae f – a congenital adhesion of the eyelids so that the eyeballs can not be

seen, cryptophthalmia

decapsulatio, ōnis f – a surgical removal of a capsule or sheath, decapsulation

descensus, us m – the sinking down or protrusion of a viscus or its part, descent

desmorrhexis, is f – rupture of a ligament, desmorrhexis

desmurgia, ae f – the science of applying ligatures or bandages to a part, desmurgy

disarticulatio, ōnis f – a separation or amputation at a joint, without cutting through bone,

disarticulation

embryologia, ae f

– a branch of biological science which is concerned with the origin

and development of the embryo from the ovum to the stage of extra-

uterine life, embryology

embryotomia, ae f – a dissection of an embryo or fetus, embryotomy

evisceratio, ōnis f – a removal of the contents of an organ or part, evisceration

gastrostŏma, ătis n – a natural or artificial gastric fistula, gastrostoma

hyperkeratōsis, is f – a hypertrophy of the stratum corneum of the skin, hyperkeratosis

203

implantatio, ōnis f

implantātum, i, n

– the introduction of one tissue or structure into another with the aim

of improving the function of any part of the body, implantation im-

plant, any piece of tissue for use as a graft

keratotomia, ae f – making an incision into the cornea, keratotomy

laparoscopia, ae f – the act or process of examining the peritoneal cavity and its con-

tents by means of a laparoscope, laparoscopy

laparogastrostomia, ae

f

– the operation to create an artificial opening in the stomach, laparo-

gastrostomy

pneumocentēsis, is f – a lung puncture in order to aspirate the contents of a cavity, pneu-

mocentesis

pneumoёmpyēma,

ătis n

– the presence of pus and gas within the pleural space, pneumoёmpy-

ema

prolapsus, us m – the sinking down or protrusion of a viscus or its part, prolapse

replantatio, ōnis f

– the replacement a separated by accident part of some anatomical

structure back to its natural place, a replantation

resectio, ōnis f – a surgical removal of a part, usually of some magnitude, e.g. jaw,

stomach, etc., a resection

salpingectomia, ae f –an excision of an uterine tube, salpingectomy

salpingolўsis, is f – breaking-down of adhesions in an uterine tube, salpingolysis

spondylodĕsis, is f

– the operation of fusion of the spine, usually by a bone graft, spon-

dylodesis

tenorrhaphia, ae f

– an operation for the suturing of the divided ends of a tendon, tenor-

rhaphy

tenotomia, ae f – the cutting of a tendon, tenotomy

thoracocentēsis, is f

– a puncture of the wall of the thorax to remove fluid, thoracocen-

tesis

toponeurōsis, is f – localized neurosis, a functional derangement in any part of the

body, toponeurosis

English–Latin glossary

the act or process of drawing out a part of

body or a foreign body, extraction

– extractio, ōnis f

adenoma of the eyelid, blepharoadenoma – blepharoadenōma, ătis n

arthrocentesis, the surgical procedure of puncturing a

joint

– arthrocentēsis, is f

autoplasty, the repair of a diseased or injured tissue or

organ by the material taken from another part of the body

– autoplastĭca, ae f

blepharotomy, an incision of an eyelid – blepharotomia, ae f

colpocystotomy, a surgical incision into the urinary blad-

der through the wall of the vagina

– colpocystotomia, ae f

colpohysteropexy, the operative fixation of the

uterus through the vagina

– colpohysteropexia, ae f

colpomyomectomy, a removal of a myoma

from the uterus by the vaginal route

colpomyomectomia, ae f

a concussion or a violent shaking of a soft structure – commotio, ōnis f

congelation, frostbite, a local morbid condition, caused

by freezing

– congelatio, ōnis f

204

cryosurgery, surgical procedures in which

tissue is destroyed by freezing

– cryochirurgia, ae f

cryptolith, a calculus contained in a crypt – cryptolĭthus, i m

cryptopsoriasis, hidden, latent psoriasis – cryptopsoriăsis, is f

desmalgia, pain in a ligament – desmalgia, ae f

desmotomy, incision of the ligament – desmotomia, ae f

any disease affecting the ligaments, desmopathia – desmopathia, ae f

dislocation, abnormal displacement of one bone upon an-

other in a joint

– dislocatio, ōnis f

ectopia, a morbid congenital malposition or traumatic

displacement of an organ or its part

– ectopia, ae f

embryectomy, the surgical removal of the embryo – embryectomia, ae f

embryopathology, the branch of pathology concerned

with defective or abnormal development of embryo

– embryopathologia, ae f

the entrance and establishment of parasites

into the body of a host, invasion

– invasio, ōnis f

implant, any piece of tissue used as a graft – implantātum, i n

implantation, the introduction of one tissue or structure

into another with the aim of improving t function of any

part of the body

– implantatio, ōnis f

incision of the abdominal wall and excision of

the uterus, laparohysteroectomy

– laparohysteroëctomia, ae f

inflammation of the abdominal muscles, laparomyositis – laparomyosītis, itĭdis f

inflammation of the cornea, keratitis – keratītis, itĭdis f

the introduction of one tissue or structure into another

with the aim of improving the function of any part of the

body

– implantatio, ōnis f

keratomycosis, a disease of cornea caused by a fungus – keratomycōsis, is

keratoplasty, plastic surgery on the cornea – keratoplastĭca, ae f

a medical practitioner skilled in general surgery who spe-

cializes in the operative treatment of diseases of the

nervous system, a neurosurgeon

– neurochirurgus, i m

any morbid condition affecting the lungs, pneumopathy – pneumopathia, ae f

a neoplasm originating in embryonic elements

or blighted ovum, an embryoneoplasm

– embryoneoplasma, ătis n

esophagostoma, any opening into the esophagus apart

from the normal entrance and exit

– oesophagostŏma, ătis n

the operation for the relief of hernia and the

resultant reduction of the latter, herniotomia

– herniotomia, ae f

the operation of removal of the adenoid growth by exci-

sion, adenotomy

– adenotomia, ae f

the operation of transference of a tissue of an organ from

one place to an other with the aim of improving or re-

newing of a function, transplantation

– transplantatio, ōnis f

ophthalmorrhexis, rupture of the eyeball – ophthalmorrhexis, is f

205

a plastic operation to repair or reconstruct

the urinary bladder, cystoplasty

– cystoplastĭca, ae f

a plastic surgical operation on the vagina, colpoplasty – colpoplastĭca, ae f

pneumocentesis, a lung puncture in order to

aspirate the contents of the cavity

– pneumocentēsis, is f

pneumoёmpyema, the presence of pus and

gas within the pleural space

– pneumoёmpyēma, ătis n

pneumorrhaphy, the operation of suturing a

wound of the lung

– pneumorrhaphia, ae f

pneumotomy, making an incision into the lung – pneumotomia, ae f

a polypus of the vagina, colpopolypus – colpopolўpus, i m

a prolapse, the sinking down or protrusion of

a viscus or its part

– prolapsus,us m

puncture, the operation of piercing a viscus or a swelling

either to establish the nature of its content or to empty it

– punctūra, ae f; punctio, ōnis f

a puncture of the cornea, keratocentesis – keratocentēsis, is f

removal of an entire pathological structure,

organ or part, amputation

– amputatio, ōnis f

removal of an entire pathological structure, an

organ or part, extirpation

– extirpatio, ōnis f

retention of the menstrual flow due to congenital or ac-

quired genital canal stenosis, cryptomenorrrhoea

– cryptomenorrrhoea, ae f

salpingogram, the radiograph made during he radiograph-

ic visualization of the uterus and uterine tubes

– salpingogramma, ătis n

salpingopexy, surgical fixation of the uterine tube – salpingopexia, ae f

the surgical establishment of a permanent or semiperma-

nent opening into the urinary bladder, cystostomy

– cystostomia, ae f

a surgical operation on small structures

with the aid of a microscope, microsurgery

– microchirurgia, ae f

tenodesis, operative fixation of a tendon – tenodēsis, is f

tenolysis, the freeing of a tendon from adhesions – tenolўsis, is f

tonsillotomy, the surgical operation for removal of a part

of a tonsil

– tonsillotomia, ae f

topography, the anatomical description of any

particular part of the body

– topographia, ae f

topophobia, unreasoned fear of certain places – topophobia, ae f

total or partial surgical removal of diseased

lung tissue, pneumonectomy

– pneumonectomia, ae f

a tumor consisting of connective tissue elements, desmo-

neoplasm

– desmoneoplasma, ătis n

use of cold or freezing as a therapeutic measure, cryo-

therapy

– cryotherapia, ae f

206

LESSON 40

MULTIWORD CLINICAL TERMS. (PART 1)

§ 215. The structure and vocabulary of multiword clinical terms

Multiword terms are widely used in medical diagnoses and other kinds of the

professional medicinal information. Any multiword term consists, as a rule, of two or

three words. The noun containing the cardinal information of the term is placed first,

and then one or two nouns or one or two adjectives follow. The second and third nouns

indicate the localization of the diseased organ or tissue; adjectives give qualitative and

quantitative characteristics of the morbid condition:

infarctus cerĕbri — cerebral infarct, an infarct of cerebral tissue due to failure

of blood supply resulting from vascular thrombosis, embolism or spasm

tachycardia ventricŭli sinistri — tachycardia of the left ventricle, abnormally

rapid rate of the left ventricle

anaemia haemorrhagĭca — hemorrhagic anemia, anemia caused by acute or

chronic loss of blood because of whatever cause

myocardītis bacterialis acūta — acute bacterial myocarditis, acute in- flam-

mation of the myocardium due to invasion of bacteria

The combination of a noun and an adjective after the first noun of the term can

be present too:

cirrhōsis biliāris infantium — biliary cirrhosis of children, cirrhosis of young

children due to congenital anomalies of the bile ducts

luxatio coxae congenĭta — congenital dislocation of the hip.

To sum up, we can say that multiword clinical terms are built similar to anatom-

ical ones. First of all, the dictionary form of every word should be given. After that, the

term is built according to the already known rules.

§ 216. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form of every word and the full definition of the italicized

words; translate the multiword terms into English:

abdōmen acūtum; diabētes mellītus; diagnōsis aetiologĭсa; febris continua; foe-

tor ex ore sive halitōsis; herpes labiālis; indigestio gastris; infarсtus thrombotĭcus; in-

sufficientia renālis chronĭca; morbus maculōsus neonatōrum; palpatio et percussio

hepătis; polyuria diabetĭca; prophylaxis morbōrum allergicōrum; syndrŏmum ungui-

um flavōrum; toxicōses gravidārum; vitium cordis congenĭtum

2. Give the dictionary form of every word and the full definition of the italicized

words; translate the multiword terms into Latin:

acute suppurative bronchitis; allergic stomatitis; cardinal symptoms; cerebro-

spinal hereditary paralysis; chronic superficial dermatitis; collapse of the lung; endog-

enous eczema; exogenous tuberculosis; hypoglycemic coma; intermittent hepatic fe-

ver; plasma transfusion; primary atypical pneumonia; simple urethritis; spongiform

subacute encephalopathy; syndrome of the cerebral peduncle; tissue emphysema; ul-

trasonic tomography

207

Dictionaries to lesson 38

Latin — English vocabulary

abdōmen, ĭnis n – abdomen

acūtus, a, um – acute

aetiologĭcus, a, um

– etiologic, based on the etiology — the science of the investigation of

the cause or origin of any phenomenon

allergĭcus, a, um – allergic

chronĭcus, a, um – chronic, long continued

congenĭtus, a, um – congenital

continuus, a, um – continued

cor, cordis n – heart

diabētes, ae m – diabetes, a group of diseases in which there is polyuria and a disturbed

metabolism

diabetĭcus, a, um – diabetic, suffering from or relating to diabetes

diagnōsis, is f – diagnosis, medical denotation of the disease from which a person suffers

febris, is f – fever

foetor, ōris m – fetor, a foul odor or stench

gaster, tris f – stomach

gravĭda, ae f – gravida, a woman who is pregnant

halitōsis, is f – halitosis, fetid or offensive breath

hepar, ătis n – liver

herpes, ētis m

– herpes, inflammation of the skin or mucous membrane, with clusters of

deep-seated vesicles

indigestio, ōnis f – indigestion, any disturbance of the normal process of digestion

infarctus, us m – infarct (infarction), a wedge-shaped area of dead tissue, with or without

hemorrhage, produced by the obstruction of an end artery

insufficientia, ae f – insufficiency, the state of being inadequate to perform normal function

labiālis, e – labial

mellītus, a, um (di-

abētes)

– mellitus (diabetes), characterized by a high — fasting blood sugar

maculōsus, a, um – maculate, marked by maculae

morbus, i m – a disease

neonātus, i m – a newly born child

palpatio, ōnis f

– palpation, the method of physical examination in which the hands are

applied to the surface of the body, so that by sense of touch information is

obtained about the condition of inner organs

sive – or

syndrŏmum, i n

syndrome, a distinct group of signs which form a characteristic clinical

picture of a disease

percussio, ōnis f

– percussion, the art of striking the thoracic or abdominal wall in order to

produce sound vibration from which the nature of the underlying struc-

tures can be assessed

polyuria, ae f polyuria, increase in the amount of the urine exerted

prophylaxis, is f – prophylaxis, the art of preventing disease

renālis, e – renal

thrombotĭcus, a, um – thrombotic, characterized or caused by thrombosis

toxicōsis, is f – toxicosis, the pathological condition caused by the adsorption of poison

vitium, i n – a defect, a vice

208

English — Latin glossary

acute – acūtus, a, um

alimentary – alimentarius, a, um

atypical – atypĭcus, a, um

bronchitis, an inflammated condition of the bronchi – bronchītis, itĭdis f

cardinal – cardinālis, e

cerebral – cerebrālis, e

cerebrospinal – cerebrospinālis, e

chronic – chronĭcus, a, um

collapse, a state of extreme weakness with physical and mental de-

pression

– collapsus, us m

coma, the state of complete loss of consciousness from which the pa-

tient cannot be roused by any ordinary external stimulus

– coma, ătis n

dermatitis, inflammation of the skin – dermatītis, itĭdis f

eczema, a non-contagious inflammatory disease of the skin with

much itching and burning

– eczĕma, ătis n

emphysema, a condition in which the alveoli of the lungs are dilated – emphysēma, ătis n

encephalopathy, any morbid condition of the brain –encephalopathia, ae f

endogenous, having origin within the organism – endogĕnus, a, um

exogenous, belonging to aetiological factors outside the organism – exogĕnus, a, um

fever – febris, is f

hepatic – hepatĭcus, a, um

hereditary – hereditarius, a, um

hypoglycemic, relating or belonging to, or bringing about hypogly-

cemia, a low blood sugar concentration

– hypoglykaemĭcus,

a, um

intermittent, coming and going at intervals – intermittens, ntis

lung – pulmo, ōnis m

paralysis, loss of motor power due to a functional or organic disorder

of neural or neuromuscular mechanisms

– paralўsis, is f

plasma, the fluid portion of the blood in which the blood corpuscles

are suspended

– plasma, ătis n

pneumonia, an inflammation of the spongy tissue of the lung – pneumonia, ae f

peduncle – peduncŭlus, i m

primary – primarius, a, um

simple – simplex, ĭcis

spongiform, having resemblance to a sponge – spongiformis, e

stomatitis, inflammation of the oral cavity – stomatītis,itĭdis f

subacute, (disease) running a moderately rapid and severe course for

which the word acute would not be appropriate

– subacūtus, a, um

superficial – superficiālis, e

suppurative, pus-forming – suppuratīvus, a, um

a symptom, the consciousness of a disturbance in a bodily function – symptōma, ătis n

a syndrome, a distinct group of signs which form a characteristic

clinical picture of the disease

– syndrŏmum, i n

a tissue – textus, us m

tomography, body-section radiography – tomographia, ae f

209

a transfusion, the introduction into the blood vessels of the circulato-

ry system of sterile fluids such as blood, plasma, serum and other so-

lutions

– transfusio, ōnis f

tuberculosis, the disease caused by infection with the Mycobacterium

tuberculosis

– tuberculōsis, is f

ultrasonic, ultrasound – ultrasonarius, a, um

urethritis, inflammation of theurethra – urethrītis, itĭdis f

LESSON 41 MULTIWORD CLINICAL TERMS. (PART 2)

§ 217. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form of every word and the full definition of the italicized

words; translate the multiword terms into English:

alopecia occipitālis neonatōrum; gastrorrhoea continua chronica; granulōma

benignum glandŭlae thyroideae; infectio latens; infammatio bacteriālis; insufficientia

arteriārum mesentericārum; lymphangiōma simplex; melanōsis irĭdis; myasthenia

laryngis; myelītis traumatĭca; neuralgia faciālis vera; neuritīs puerperālis; osteītis de-

formans; osteōma spongiōsum; prolapsus recti; psychōsis senīlis; situs viscĕrum in-

versus; spasmus intestīni

2. Give the dictionary form of every word and the full definition of the italicized

words; translate the multiword terms into Latin:

acquired immune deficiency syndrome (AIDS); benign lymphocytic meningi-

tis; cerebral edema; chronic glossitis with anemia; diffuse goiter; direct metastasis;

dropsy of the gall bladder; fetal gigantism; geminated composite odontome; intrave-

nous narcosis; infective hepatitis; monostotic fibrous dysplasia; odontogenic fibroma;

pelvic hematoma; postoperative thrombosis; psychogenic headache; secondary glau-

coma; senile osteoporosis; viral enteritis

Dictionaries to lesson 41 Latin — English vocabulary

alopecia, ae f – alopecia, loss of hair

bacteriālis, e – bacterial, belonging to, originating or derived from bacteria

benignus, a, um – benign

continuus, a, um – continued

deformans, ntis – deforming

gastrorrhoea, ae f

– gastrorrhea, the secretion by the stomach of an abnormally large

quantity of gastric juice or of mucus

glandŭla, ae f – gland

granulōma, ătis n – a granulome, a tumor composed of granulation tissue

infectio, ōnis f

– an infection, the invasion of a pathogenic organism into the body

and its subsequent multiplication

inflammatio, ōnis f – an inflammation

insufficientia, ae f – insufficiency, the state of being inadequate to perform normal

function

inversus, a, um – inverse

210

latens, ntis – hidden

lymphangiōma, ătis n – lymphangioma, a tumor formed of lymphatic tissue

melanōsis, is f

– melanosis, an abnormal deposition of the black pigment (mela-

nin) in the skin or other tissues

mesenterĭcus, a, um – mesenteric

myasthenia, ae f – myasthenia, weakness of muscles from whatever cause

myelītis, itĭdis f – myelitis, an inflammation of the bone marrow

neuralgia, ae f – neuralgia, a painful affection of the nerves due to functional dis-

turbances or to neuritis

neurītis, itĭdis f – neuritis, an inflammation of a nerve

occipitālis, e – occipital

osteītis, itĭdis f – osteitis, an inflammation of a bone due to infection or injury

osteōma, ătis n – osteoma, an innocent tumor of a bone

prolapsus, us m

– prolapse, the sinking down or protrusion of a part of a viscus or

its part

psychōsis, is f – psychosis, any kind of mental disorder

puerperālis, e – puerperal

senīlis, e – senile

situs, us m – a position, a site

spasmus, i m – a spasm, a sudden, powerful, involuntary contraction of a mus-

cle

spongiōsus, a, um – spongy (spongious), full of small holes, similar to a sponge

thyreoideus, a, um – thyroid

traumatĭcus, a, um – traumatic

verus, a, um – true

viscus, ĕris n – a viscus or viscera, the internal organs of the body which are

closely related to the great serous cavities–pleural, pericardial or

peritoneal

English–Latin glossary

acquired – acquisītus, a, um

anemia, changes in the red cells resulting in a reduction in

the total amount of blood

– anaemia, ae f

benign – benignus, a, um

bladder – vesīca, ae f

cerebral – cerebrālis, e

chronic – chronĭcus, a, um

composite – composĭtus, a, um

deficiency – deficientia, ae f

diffuse – diffūsus, a, um

direct – directus, a, um

211

dropsy, the abnormal accumulation of fluid in tissue or

cavity space

– hydrops, ōpis m

dysplasia, abnormal development of tissue – dysplasia, ae f

enteritis, inflammation of the mucous

membrane of the intestines

– enterītis, itĭdis f

edema, the presence of excessive amounts of fluid in the

intercellular tissue spaces of the body

– oedēma, ătis n

fetal – fetalis, e

fibroma, an innocent tumor composed chiefly of connec-

tive tissue

– fibrōma, ătis n

fibrous – fibrōsus, a, um

gall – biliāris, e; felleus, a, um

gall bladder – vesīca biliāris (fellea)

geminated – geminātus, a, um

gigantism, a condition of excessive tallness – gigantismus, i m

glaucoma, a condition of increased intraocular pressure

and its consequences

– glaucōma, ătis n

glossitis, an inflammation of the tongue – glossītis, itĭdis f

goiter, an enlargement of the thyroid gland – struma, ae f

hematoma, a tumor or swelling composed of blood – haematōma, ătis n

headache – dolor (ōris m) capitis

(caput, ĭtis n)

hepatitis, inflammation of the liver – hepatītis, itĭdis f

immune – immūnus, a, um

immunodeficiency – immunodeficientia, ae f

infective – infectīvus, a, um

intravenous – intravenōsus, a, um

lymphocytic – lymphocytĭcus, a, um

meningitis, inflammation of the membranes of the brain of

spinal cord

– meningītis, ĭdis f

metastasis, the transfer of disease from its primary site to

distant parts of the body by blood vessels, lymphatic or

direct contiguity

– metastăsis, is f

monostotic, pertaining to a single bone – monostotĭcus, a, um

narcosis, stupor produced by drugs and tending to insensi-

bility and paralysis

– narcōsis, is f

odontome, a solid or cystic tumor occurring in the jaws

which is derived from cells concerned in tooth develop-

ment

– odontōma, ătis n

odontogenic, relating to the development of the teeth – odontogĕnus, a, um

osteoporosis, a rarefaction of bone – osteoporōsis, is f

pelvic – pelvĭcus, a, um

postoperative – postoperatīvus, a, um

psychogenic, developing or originating

because of mental causes

– psychogĕnus, a, um

212

secondary – secundarius, a, um

senile – senīlis, e

thrombosis, intravascular coagulation during

life, producing a thrombus

– thrombōsis, is f

viral – virālis, e

with (+Abl.) – cum

LESSON 42

MULTIWORD CLINICAL TERMS. PART 3

§ 218. Exercises

1. Give the dictionary form of every word and the full definition of the italicized

words; translate the multiword terms into English:

abscessus gingivālis; avulsio nervi phrenĭci; calсŭlus venōsus; carcinōma in

situ; combustio thermālis faciēi; commotio cerěbri; congelatio digitōrum pedis dextri;

ectopia ocŭli; erosio cervīcis utěri; extractio corpŏris aliēni; insultus haemorrhagĭcus

(ischaemĭcus); polўpi laryngis; punctio lumbālis; ruptūra ligamentōrum hepătis; sectio

cadavěris; transplantātum corneae; ulcus perfŏrans duodēni; verrūcae planae

2. Give the dictionary form of every word and the full definition of the italicized

words; translate the multiword terms into Latin:

breast amputation; chemical burn of the esophagus; closed fracture of the right femur;

concussion of the retina; evisceration of the eye; functional aortic stenosis; internal

injury; lung calculi; open operation; partial ophthalmoplegy; rib resection and resec-

tion of a joint; splenic puncture; subcutaneous wound; replantation of the left hand;

tendon transplantation; traumatic erythema; ulceration of the stomach

Dictionaries to lesson 42

Latin–English vocabulary

abscessus, us m

– abscess, an accumulation of pus circumscribed in a cavity pro-

duced by tissue disintegration

aliēnus, a, um – foreign

avulsio, ōnis f – avulsion, the forcible removing a portion from a follow structure

cadāver, ěris n cadaver, dead body, a corps

combustio, ōnis f

– burn, an injury caused by heat or by chemical or physical agents

having an effect similar to heat

commotio, ōnis f – concussion, a violent shaking of a structure

congelatio, ōnis f – congelation, frostbite, a local morbid condition caused by freezing

ectopia, ae f – ectopia, a morbid congenital malposition or traumatic displace-

ment of an organ or part

erosio, ōnis f – erosion, any superficial destructive process

extractio, ōnis f

– extraction, the act or process of drawing out a part of body or for-

eign body

gingivālis, e – gingival

haemorragĭcus, a,

um

– hemorrhagic, belonging to hemorrhage, escape of blood from any

part of the vascular system

insultus, us m – stroke, a sudden seizure as a result of an acute vascular cerebral

disturbance

213

ischaemĭcus, a, um – ischemic, relating to ischemia, insufficient blood supply to a part

of the body

lumbālis, e – lumbar

partiālis, e – partial

perfŏrans, ntis – perforating

phrenĭcus, a, um – phrenic

planus, a, um – plane

polўpus, i m

– a polyp, a tumor with a stalk arising from mucous membranes or

the body surface

punctio, ōnis f

(punctūra, ae f)

– a puncture, the operation of piercing a viscus or a swelling either

to establish the nature of its content or to empty it

ruptūra, ae f

– rupture, the breaking or forcible disruption of continuity of a bone

or another structure

sectio, ōnis f – a section, the act of cutting

sectio cadavěris – a post - mortem examination of dead body, an autopsy

thermalis, e – thermal

transplantātum, i n – a transplant, a piece of tissue to transfer from one site to another

ulcus, ěris n – ulcer, a localized necrotic lesion of the skin or a mucous surface

verrūca, ae f – a wart, a small circumscribed cutaneous excrescence having a

papilliferous surface

English–Latin glossary

amputation, the surgical removal of a limb or portion of a

limb or of any other appendage

– amputatio, ōnis f

aortic – aortĭcus, a, um

breast – mamma, ae f

burn – combustio, ōnis f

calculus (plur. calculi), a solid pathological concretion,

usually of inorganic matter, formed in any part of the body

– calcŭlus, i m

chemical – chemĭcus, a, um

closed – clausus, a, um

concussion, a violent shaking of a soft structure – commotio, ōnis f

erythema, redness of the skin due to hyperemia – erythēma, ătis n

evisceration, a removal of the contents of an organ or part

of the body

– evisceratio, ōnis f

fracture, a break in the continuity of a bone – fractūra, ae f

functional – functionālis, e

injury – laesio, ōnis f

open – apertus, a, um

operation – operatio, ōnis f

ophthalmoplegy, palsy (paralysis) of the ocular muscles – ophthalmoplegia, ae f

partial – partiālis, e

puncture, the operation of piercing a viscus or a swelling

either to establish the nature of its content or to empty it

– punctūra, ae f;

punctio, ōnis f

resection, surgical removal of a part, usually of some mag-

nitude, e.g. jaw, stomach, colon etc.

– resectio, ōnis f

splenic – splenĭcus, a, um

214

stenosis, narrowing or stricture of an orifice or of the lu-

men of a hollow or tubular organ

– stenōsis, is f

stomach – gaster, tris f

subcutaneous – subcutaneus, a, um

tendon – tendo, ĭnis m

transplantation, the operation of transfer of a tissue or an

organ from one place to an other with the aim of improving

or renewing the function

– transplantatio, ōnis f

traumatic – traumatĭcus, a, um

ulceration, the process of formation of an ulcer – ulceratio, ōnis f

wound – vulnus, ěris n

§ 219. Model (Sample) of the final test in clinical terminology

1. Give Greek initial roots and Latin equivalents (in the dictionary form) with

the following meaning:

1) ear 2) child 3) head 4) voice 5) quick 6) short 7) many 8) lachrymal sac

2. Compose one-word terms with the dictionary form with the following mean-

ing:

1) specialist studying the man in the process of his evolution 2) results of quan-

titative and qualitative examination of blood 3) any kind of pain affecting a joint 4)

any morbid condition or abnormal growth of the hair 5) the origin and development of

bone marrow 6) a person with an unusually small size of head 7) acute inflammation

of the gray mater of the brain 8) calculus on the teeth

3. Write down the Latin dictionary form and give the full definition of the fol-

lowing terms in English:

1) iatrogenic 2) psychiatrist 3) apnoea 4) phlebography 5) erythema 6) megadu-

odenum 7) galactostasis 8) typhlocele

4. Give the dictionary form of each word and the full definition of italicized

words; translate into Latin the multiword terms:

1) acquired immune deficiency syndrome 2) secondary glaucoma 3) replanta-

tion of the left hand 4) partial ophthalmoplegy 5) chemical burn of the esophagus 6)

dropsy of the gall bladder 7) monostotic fibrous dysplasia 8) benign lymphocytic men-

ingitis

215

LITERATURE

1. Алексеева, Г. З. Пособие по латинскому языку для студентов 1 курса медици-

нского университета, обучающихся на английском языке / Г. З. Алексеева / под ред. Р.

В. Кадушко : Витебск, ВГМУ, 2010. 128с.

2. Англо-русский медицинский словарь : более 90 000 терминов / Сост.

И. Ю. Марковина и др. М. : Медицинское информационное агенство, 2008. 896 с.

3. Болотина, А. Ю. Словарь лекарственных растений (латинский, английский,

немецкий, русский). Ок. 12 000 терминов. М. : РУССО, 1999. 384 с.

4. Волмянская, О. А. Англо-русский словарь для специалистов-медиков /

О. А. Волмянская. Минск : Асар, 2000. 304 с.

5. Международная анатомическая номенклатура (с официальным списком русс-

ких эквивалентов) / под ред. Л. Л. Колесникова. М. : Медицина, 2003. 424 с.

6. Общая рецептура = General prescription : учеб.-метод. пособие / А. В. Волчек

[и др.]. Минск : БГМУ, 2015. 32 с.

7. Русско-англо-латинский словарь крылатых слов и выражений / сост.

А. С. Альбов. М. : АСТ ; СПб. : Сова, 2006. 606 c.

8. Цисык, А. З. Латинский язык = The Latin Language : учеб. пособие / А. З. Ци-

сык : пер. на англ. яз. А. З. Цисык. Минск : БГМУ, 2010. 212 с.

9. Цисык, А. З. Латинский язык : учеб. для студентов учреждений, обеспечи-

вающих получение высш. мед. образования / А. З. Цисык. Минск : ТетраСистемс,

2006. 448 с.

10. Цисык, А. З. Латинский язык для студентов фармацевтического факультета:

учеб.-метод. пособие в 2-х частях / А. З. Цисык, Н. А. Круглик, С. К. Ромашкевичус.

2-е изд. Ч. 1. Минск : БГМУ, 2013. 244 с. ; Ч. 2. Минск : БГМУ, 2013. 108 с.

11. Цисык, А. З. Краткий этимологический словарь фармацевтических терминов,

обозначающих классы, группы и подгруппы лекарственных средств / А. З. Цисык.

Минск : БГМУ, 2015. 84 с.

12. Arnaudov, G. Terminologia medica polyglotta. Медицинская терминология на

пяти языках. София : Медицина и физкультура, 1979. 943 с.

13. Butterworths Medical Dictionary. 2nd ed. London – Boston – Sydney – Welling-

ton – Durban – Toronto : Butterworth, 1979. 1942 p.

14. Kondratiev, D. Latin and Fundamentals of Medical Terminology for Medical Stu-

dents / Д. К. Кондратьев, О. Е. Вылегжанина, Ю. В. Князевa Гродно : Гр. ГМУ, 2005.

250 с.

15. Stadman’s Medical Dictionary. 25th ed. Baltimore – Hong Kong – London – Syd-

ney : Williams and Wilkins, 1989. 1751 p.

216

LATIN – ENGLISH VOCABULARY

A

abdōmen, ĭnis n abdomen

abscessus, us m abscess, an accumulation of

pus circumscribed in a cavity produced by

tissue disintegration

achlorhydria, ae f achlorhydria,

complete lack of free hydrochloric acid in

the gastric juice

acūtus, a, um acute

adenalgia, ae f adenalgia, a painful condition

of a gland

adenasthenia, ae f adenasthenia,

functional deficiency in a gland

adenocarcinōma, ătis n adenocarcinoma,

a carcinomatous tumor of glandular

epithelium and connective tissue

aёrobion, i n aerob, aerobion, a microorgan-

ism which utilizes and assimilates atmospher-

ic oxygen during growth

aetiologĭcus, a, um aetiologic, based on the

aetiology – the science of the investigation of

the cause or origin of any phenomenon

aliēnus, a, um foreign

allergĭcus, a, um allergic

alopecia, ae f alopecia, loss of hair

amenorrhoea, ae f amenorrhoea,

the pathological absence or stoppage of the

menstrual discharge from the uterus

amnesia, ae f amnesia,

loss of memory of varying degree anaёrobi-

on, i n anaerobe, a microorganism which is

able to exist and multiply beeng deprived of

either free oxygen or air

anaesthesiolŏgus, i m a specialist in the ad-

ministration of anaesthetics, anaesthesiologist

angiopathia, ae f angiopathy,

any disease of blood vessels

anthropogĕnus, a, um antropogenic, caused

by human activities

anthropologia, ae f anthropology, science

studying the man in the process of his evolution

anthropolŏgus, i m anthropologist,

specialist studying the man in the

process of his evolution

apodia, ae f apodia, congenital ab-

sence of feet

arteria, ae f artery

arthromalacia, ae f arthromalacia,

softening of the joints

asthenia, ae f loss of vital forces,

asthenia

autohaemotherapia, ae f autohaem-

otherapy, a method of treatment in

which the patient’s own blood is ad-

ministered to him

autopepsia, ae f autopepsia,

the process of spontaneous disintegra-

tion of cells and tissues resulting from

the action of intracellular enzymes

avulsio, ōnis f avulsion,

the forcible removing a portion from

a hollow structure

B

bacteriālis, e bacterial, originating,

derived from, belonging to or consist-

ing of bacteria

benignus, a, um benign

biologia, ae f biology, science study-

ing forms of life and living organ-

isms

blepharītis, itĭdis f blepharitis,

inflammation of the eyelids blephar-

oplastĭca, ae f a plastic operation to

restore an eyelid

brachycephălus, i m brachycephalic,

an individual with disproportion-

ately short head

brachydactylia, ae f brachydactylia,

a condition in which there are abnor-

mally short fingers or toes

bradyphagia, ae f bradyphagia

slowing of swallowing

217

bradypnoё, ёs f bradypnoea, an abnormally slow rate of breathing broncholithiăsis, is f broncholithiasis, the condition in which calculi occur in the lumen of bronchial tubes

C cadāver, ĕris n a corps; dead body calcŭlus, i m calculus, a solid pathological concretion, usually of inorganic matter, formed in any part of the body carcinōma, ătis n a carcinoma malignant epithelial tumor carcinomatōsis, is f carcinomatosis,the con-dition in which carcinoma is widely distribut-ed throughout the body cardiogĕnus, a, um cardiogenic, arising be-cause of the heart cardiolŏgus, i m a cardiologist, specialist treating heart diseases cerēbrum, i n cerebrum, brain cervix, īcis f cervix cholecystītis, itĭdis f cholecystitis, inflammation of the gallbladder chondropathia, ae f chondropathy, any disease affecting a cartilage chronĭcus, a, um chronic, long continued chylothōrax, ācis m chylothorax, the condi-tion in which there is an effusion of the lymph into the thoracic cavity colpotomia, ae f colpotomy, any cutting operation on the vagina combustio, ōnis f burn, an injury caused by heat or by chemical or physical agents having an effect similar to heat commotio, ōnis f a concussion or a violent shaking of a structure congelatio, ōnis f congelation, frostbite, a local morbid condition caused by freezing congenĭtus, a, um congenital continuus, a, um continued cor, cordis n heart cornea, ae f cornea corpus, ŏris n body craniometria, ae f craniometry, measure-ment of the skull,

cryochirurgia, ae f cryosurgery surgi-cal procedures in which tissue is destroyed by freezing cryotherapia, ae f cryotherapy, the science of the use of cold as a therapeutic measure cryptophthalmia, ae f cryptoph-thalmia, congenital adhesion of the eyelids so that the eyeballs can not be seen cystorrhagia, ae f cystorrhagia hemorrhage from the urinary bladder cystoschĭsis, is f cystoschisis, a con-genital fissure of urinary bladder

D dacryostenōsis, is f dacryostenosis, narrowing or stricture of the duct of the lacrimal gland dactylospasmus, ae f dactylospasm, spasmodic contraction of a finger or toe decapsulatio, ōnis f decapsulation, surgical removal of a capsule or sheath deformans, ntis deforming dermatomycōsis, is f dermatonycosis, a generic term for all cutaneous infec-tions due to fungi dermatōsis, is f dermatosis, any dis-ease of the skin descensus, us m descent, the sinking down or protrusion of a viscus or its part desmorrhexis, is f desmorrhexis, rupture of a ligament desmurgia, ae f desmurgy, the sci-ence of applying ligatures or bandages to a part dexter, tra, trum right diabētes, ae m diabetes, anyone of a group of diseases in which there is polyuria and a disturbed metabolism diabetĭcus, a, um diabetic, suffering from or relating to diabetes

diagnōsis, is f diagnosis, medical deno-

tation of the disease from which a per-

son suffers

218

digĭtus, i m finger, toe

disarticulatio, ōnis f disarticulation,

separation or amputation in a joint, without

cutting through bone

dolichocephalia, ae f dolichocephalia,

the state of having a relatively long skull

duodēnum, i n duodenum

dysgeusia, ae f dysgeusia, impairment or

perversion of the sense of taste

dysthyreōsis, is f imperfect functioning of

the thyroid gland, dysthyreosis

E

ectopia, ae f ectopia,a morbid congenital

malposition or traumatic displacement of an

organ or part

embryologia, ae f the branch of biological

science which is concerned with the origin

and development of the embryo from the

ovum to the stage of extrauterine life, embry-

ology

embryotomia, ae f dissection of an embryo

or fetus, embryotomy

empyēma, ătis n a collection of pus in a cav-

ity, empyema

encephalogramma, ătis n any X-ray film

obtained in the radiological examination of

the ventricles and subarachnoid space of the

brain, encephalogram

enterocolītis, itĭdis f an inflammed condition

of the small intestine and the colon, enterocolitis

erosio, ōnis f any superficial destructive pro-

cess, erosion

erythropenia, ae f a state in which there are

too few erythrocytes, erythropenia

evisceratio, ōnis f removal of the contents of

an organ or part, evisceration

extractio, ōnis f the act or process of drawing

out a part of body or foreign body, extraction

F

faciālis, e facial

facies, ēi f face

febris, is f fever

foetor, ōris m a foul odour or stench, fetor

flavus, a, um yelow

G

galactorrhoea, ae f an excessive

flow of milk, galactorrhoea

gaster, tris f stomach

gastrocēle, es f hernia of the stomach

or of a portion which has become

pouched, gastrocele

gastrorrhoea, ae f gastrorrhoea,

the secretion by the stomach of an ab-

normally large quantity of gastric

juice or of mucus

gastrospasmus, i m gastrospasm,

an involuntary contraction of the

stomach muscle,

gastrostŏma, ătis n gastrostoma,

natural or artificial gastric fistula

geriāter, tri m geriatrician, a special-

ist treating diseases of the aged

glandŭla, ae f gland

gingivālis, e gingival

glossoplegia, ae f glossoplegia,

paralysis of the tongue

glycaemia, ae f glycaemia, a condi-

tion in which the circulating

blood contains a quantity of sugar

above normal amounts

granulōma, ătis n granuloma, a tu-

mour composed of granulation tissue

gravĭda, ae f gravid, a woman who is

pregnant

gynaecolŏgus, i m gynecologist,

a specialist for treatment genital

diseases in women

H

haemarthrōsis, sis f haemarthrosis,

extravasation of blood into a joint

haematologia, ae f , hematology,

branch medicine studying

blood and its diseases

haemorrhagĭcus, a, um haemorrhag-

ic, belonging to haemorrhage, escape

of blood from any part of the vascu-

lar system

219

halitōsis, is f halitosis, fetid or offensive

breath

hemianopsia, ae f (=hemianopia, ae f) hem-

ianopsia (hemianopia), loss of half the vision

in each eye

hemicrania, ae f hemicrania,

a periodic morbid condition with localized

headaches

hemiplegia, ae f hemiplegia,

paralysis of one half of the body

hepar, ătis n liver

herpes, ētis m herpes, inflammation of the

skin or mucous membrane, with clusters of

deep-seated vesicles

hidradenītis, itĭdis f hidradenitis,

inflammation of the sweat glands,

histolўsis, is f histolysis, spontaneous dis-

solution of living organic tissue

hydromētra, ae f hydrometra,

an accumulation of watery fluid in

the cavity of the uterus

hyperaemia, ae f hyperaemia, an excess of

blood in any part of the body

hyperkeratōsis, is f hyperkeratosis, hyper-

trophy of the stratum corneum of the skin,

hyperthermia, ae f hyperthermia,

very high body temperature

hypochylia, ae f hypochylia

a condition in which the amount of gastric

juice is lessened

hyposalivatio, ōnis f hyposalivation,

a condition in which there is abnormal de-

crease in the secretion of saliva

hypotonia, ae f hypotonia,

lessened tension in any body structure

I

iatrogĕnus, a, um iatrogenic,

happening because of the physician’s manner

or injudicious remarks

implantatio, ōnis f implantation,

the introduction of one tissue or structure

into another with the aim of improving the

function of any part of the body

implantātum, i n implant, any piece

of tissue for use as a graft

indigestio, ōnis f indigestion,

any disturbance of the normal pro-

cess of digestion

infarctus, us m infarct, infarction,

a wedge-shaped area of dead tis-

sue, with or without haemorrhage,

produced by the obstruction of an end

artery

infectio, ōnis f infection, the invasion

of a pathogenic organism into the body

and its subsequent multiplication

inflammatio, ōnis f an inflammation

insufficientia, ae f insufficiency,

the state of being inadequate to per-

form normal function

insultus, us m a stroke, a sudden sei-

zure as a result of an acute cerebral

vascular disturbance

intestīnum, i n intestine

inversus, a, um inverse

iris, ĭdis f iris

ischaemĭcus, a, um ischemic, relat-

ing to ischemia, insufficient blood

supply to a part of the body

K

keratotomia, ae f keratotomy, mak-

ing an incision into the cornea

L

labiālis, e labial

laparogastrostomia, ae f laparogas-

trostomy, the operation to create an

artificial opening in the stomach

laparoscopia, ae f laparoscopy,

the act or process of examining the

peritoneal cavity and its contents by

means of a laparoscope

larynx, yngis m larynx

latens, ntis hidden

leucocytōsis, is f leucocytōsis,

an increase in the total number of

leucocytes in the blood

ligamentum, i n ligament

220

lipuria, ae f lipuria, the presence of

an oily emulsion or fat in the urine lum-

bālis, e lumbar

lymphangiōma, ătis n lymphangioma, a tu-

mor formed of lymphatic tissue

lymphostăsis, is f lymphostasis,

cessation of the flow of lymph

M

maculōsus, a, um maculate, marked by

maculae

mastogramma, ătis n result of breast X-ray

examination, mastogram

megacōlon, i n megacolon, a condition in

which there is great dilatation of the large in-

testine

melanoderma, ătis n melanoderma,

a condition in which there is an unusually

large accumulation of melanin in the skin

melanōsis, is f melanosis,

an abnormal deposition of the black pigment

(melanin) in the skin or other tissues

mellītus, a, um mellitus (diabetes)

characterized by a high -

fasting blood sugar

menalgia, ae f menalgia, painful menstrua-

tion

meningiōma, ătis n meningioma, a

meningeal tumor, thought to arise

from the arachnoidal villi

mesenterĭcus, a, um mesenteric

metamorphōsis, is f metamorphosis,

change of form or structure

microgenia, ae f microgenia, a

condition in which the chin is

of unusually small size

micromyelia, ae f micromyelia,

general reduction in size of the

spinal cord

micronychia, ae f micronychia,

small nail or nails

monodactylismus, i m monodactylism, a

congenital condition in which one finger or

toe only is present on the hand or the foot

morbus, i m a disease

myasthenia, ae f myasthenia, weak-

ness of muscles from whatever cause

myelītis, itĭdis f myelitis,

inflammation of bone marrow

myocēle, es f hernia of a muscle,

myocele

myoplegia, ae f myoplegia, paralysis

of muscle or a condition in which is

decreased muscular force

N

necropneumonia, ae f necropneu-

monia, gangrene of the lung

neonātus, i m a newly born child

neoplasma, ătis n neoplasm,

any new and morbid formation of

tissue

nephrolithiăsis, is f nephrolithiasis,

a condition characterized by the

presence of gravel or of renal calculi

nervus, i m nerve

neuralgia, ae f neuralgia, a painful

affection of the nerves, due to func-

tional disturbances or to neuritis

neurītis, itĭdis f neuritis,an inflam-

mation of a nerve

neuropatholŏgus, i m neuropa-

thologist, a specialist treating diseas-

es of nervous system

O

occipitālis, e occipital

ocŭlus, i m eye

odontolĭthus, i m odontolith, calculus

on the teeth

odontogenĕsis, is f odontogenesis,

the origin and formative development

of teeth

oligocytaemia, ae f oligocythaemia

a condition in the blood in which

there is cell deficiency

oligophrenia, ae f oligophrenia,

congenital lack of the mentality

oncolŏgus, i m oncologist,

a specialist treating tumors

onychomycōsis, is f onychomycosis,

221

infection of nail caused by a

fungus

ophthalmoscopia, ae f ophthalmoscopy, in-

strumental-visual examination of the eye

os, oris n mouth

osteītis, itĭdis f osteitis, inflammation of bone

due to infection or injury

osteōma, ătis n osteoma, an innocent tumor

of bone

osteomalacia, ae f osteomalacia,

softening of the bones

osteonecrōsis, is f osteonecrosis,

death of bony tissue

osteopathia, ae f osteopathia,

disease of bones

osteoporōsis, is f osteoporosis,

rarefaction of bone

otorhinolaryngologia, ae f otorhinolaryn-

gology, branch of medicine for treating dis-

eases of ear, nose and larynx

P

pachydactylia, ae f pachydactyly,

abnormal thickening of a finger or toe

palatoplegia, ae f palatoplegia,

paralysis affecting the soft palate

palpatio, ōnis f palpation, the method of

physical examination in which the hands are

applied to the surface of the body, so that by

sense of touch information is obtained about

the condition of inner organs

pantalgia, ae f pantalgia, pain

affecting all parts of the body

partialis, e partiāl

percussio, ōnis f percussion,

the art of striking the thoracic or abdominal

wall in order to produce sound vibration from

which the nature of the underlying structures

can be assessed

perfŏrans, ntis perforating

pes, pedis m leg

phlebocarcinōma, ătis n phlebocarcinōma,

a malignant epithelial tumour affecting a

vein

photophobia, ae f photophobia, ab-

normal intolerance to light

phrenĭcus, a, um phrenic

phthisiāter, tri m phthisiotherapist ,

a specialist treating tuberculosis

physiologia, ae f physiology,

science studying normal vital pro-

cesses in human body

phytotherapia, ae f phytotherapy,

method of treatment by means of

medical plants

planus, a, um plane

pneumocentēsis, is f pneumocen-

tesis, lung puncture in order to aspi-

rate the contents of a cavity

pneumoёmpyēma, ătis n pneumoempyema, the presence

of pus and gas within pleural space

poliomyelītis, itĭdis f poliomyelitis,

an acute inflammation of anterior

horn cells of the spinal cord due to

polioviruses

polymastia, ae f polymastia, the

state in which in human beings there

are more than two distinct mammary

glands

polўpus, i m a tumor with a stalk aris-

ing from mucous membranes or the

body surface, a polyp (plur. polypi)

polyuria, ae f polyuria, increase in

the amount of the excreted urine

proctolŏgus, i m proctologist,

a specialist treating diseases of

rectum

prognathia, ae f prognathism,

a condition in which there is ab-

normal projection of one or both jaws

prolapsus, us m prolapse,

the sinking down or protrusion of a

viscus or its part

prophylaxis, is f prophylaxis, the art

of preventing disease

pseudoarthrōsis, is f pseudarthrosis,

222

a false joint formed between the

fragments of a fractured bone

which have failed to unit

psychiatria, ae f psychiatry, branch of med-

icine treating mental diseases

psychōsis, is f psychosis, any kind of mental

disorder

puerperalis, e puerperal

punctio, ōnis f a puncture, the operation of

piercing a viscus or a swelling either to esta-

blish the nature of its content or to empty it

pyelītis, itĭdis f pyelitis,

inflammation of the pelvis of the kidney

pyogĕnus, a, um pyogenic, forming or pro-

ducing pus

pyopneumothōrax, ācis m pyopneumotho-

rax, an inflammatory condition characterized

by the presence of purulent fluid and gas in a

pleural cavity

pyosalpinx, ngis f pyosalpinx,

an inflammation of the uterine tube which

has progressed to pus formation

R

rectum, i n rectum

renālis, e renal

replantatio, ōnis f replantation, the plantation

of a removed part of the whole again

resectio, ōnis f resection, surgical removal of

a part, usually of some magnitude, e. g. jaw,

stomach, colon etc.

rhinogramma, ătis n rhinogram, X-ray film

of the nose

ruptūra, ae f a rupture, the braking or forci-

ble disruption of continuity of the bone or an

other structure

S

salpingectomia, ae f salpingectomy,

excision of a uterine tube

salpingolўsis, is f salpingolysis,

breaking-down of adhesions in a

uterine tube

sarcōma, ătis n sarcoma, a malignant tumor

of connective tissue or its derivatives

sclerōma, ătis n scleroma, an area

of indurated tissue, particularly in

the mucous membrane of the nose

or larynx

sectio, ōnis f a section, the act of

cutting

sectio cadavěris a post - mortem

examination of dead body

senīlis, e senile

simplex, ĭcis simple

situs, us m a position, a site

sive or

somatologia, ae f somatology,

branch of anthropology, studying

structure of human body

spasmophilia, ae f spasmophilia,

a morbid state in which there is a

tendency to convulsions and spasm

spasmus, i m a spasm,

a sudden, powerful, involuntary con-

traction of muscle sphygmogramma,

ătis n sphygmogram, a record of the

arterial pulse waves

splanchnosclerōsis, is f splanchno-

sclerosis, hardening of any viscus

splenomegalia, ae f splenomegalia,

enlargement of the spleen

spondylītis, itĭdis f spondilitis,

inflammation of the spine

spondylodĕsis, is f spondylodesis,

the operation of fusion of the

spine, usually by a bone graft

spongiōsus, a, um spongy (spongi-

ous), full of small holes, like a sponge

stenothōrax, ācis m stenothorax,

a short, narrow thorax or chest

stomatomycōsis, is f stomatomyco-

sis, any morbid condition of the oral

cavity caused by a microscopial fun-

gus

stomatoscopia, ae f stomatoscopy,

visual-instrumental examination

of the oral cavity

syndrŏmum, i n a syndrome,

223

a distinct group of signs which form a char-

acteristic clinical picture of the disease

T

tachycardia, ae f tachycardia,

rapid action of the heart

tenorrhaphia, ae f tenorrhaphy,

an operation for the suturing of the divided

ends of a tendon

tenotomia, ae f tenotomy, the cutting

of a tendon

thermālis, e thermal

thermotherapia, ae f thermotherapy,

the use of heat in the treatment of disease,

thoracocentēsis, is f thoracocenthesis, a

puncture of the wall of the thorax with the

aim of any diagnostic

thrombocytopoёsis, is f thrombocytopoiesis,

the formation of blood platelets throm-

botĭcus, a, um thrombotic,

characterized or caused by thrombosis,

thyroideus, a, um thyroid

thyr(e)otoxicōsis, is f thyrotoxicosis,

any toxic condition attributable to

hyperactivity of the thyroid gland toponeu-

rōsis, is f toponeurosis,

localized neurosis, a functional

derangement in any part of the body

toxicomania, ae f toxicomania,

an insane desire for poison

toxicōsis, is f toxicosis, the

pathological condition caused by

the absorption of poison

transplantātum, i n transplant, a piece of tis-

sue to transfer from one site to another

traumatĭcus, a, um traumatic

typhlectasia, ae f typhlectasia,

dilatation of the caecum

U

ulcus, ĕris n ulcer, a localized necrotic le-

sion of the skin or a mucoce tissue

unguis, is m nail

uraemia, ae f uraemia

the condition which is associated with

the retention of metabolic products in

the blood and disturbance of acid-

base ratio of the latter

uranoschĭsis, is f uranoschisis, cleft

palate, a congenital fissure in the mid-

line of the hard palate

utĕrus, i m uterus

V

venōsus, a, um venous

verrūca, ae f wart, a circumscribed

cutaneous excrescence

verus, a, um true

viscus, ĕris n the internal organs of

the body which are closely related to

the great serous cavities : pleural, per-

icardial or peritoneal

vitium, i n a defect or a vice

X

xanthopsia, ae f xanthopsia, a dis-

turbance of color vision, when every-

thing appears yellow

xanthōsis, is f xanthosis, yellowish

discolor-ration, especially of the skin

xerophthalmia, ae f xerophthalmia

(=xeroma), a morbid condition of

eyes characterized by a shrunken ap-

pearance of the conjunctiva

224

ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY

A

an abnormally long colon of normal di-

ameter, dolichocolon dolichocōlon, i n

abnormally rapid breathing, tachyp-

noea tachypnoё, ёs f

abnormal narrowing of the internal di-

ameter of a vessel, angiostenosis an-

giostenōsis, is f

abnormal narrowing of the mouth,

stenostomy stenostomia, ae f

abnormal quickness in eating, tachy-

phagia tachyphagia,ae f

abnormal slowness and weakness of the

process of digestion, hypopepsia hy-

popepsia, ae f

abnormal sluggishness of physical

movements , bradykinesis bradykine-

sia, ae f

abnormal thickening of a finger or toe,

pachydactyly pachydactylia, ae f

an accumulation of pus in the pericar-

dium, pyopericardium pyopericardi-

um, i n

achylia, absence of acid and pepsin

from the gastric juice achylia, ae f

acquired acquisītus, a, um

the act or process of drawing out a part

of body or a foreign body, extrac-

tion extractio, ōnis f

acute acūtus, a, um

acute inflammation of the gray matter

of the brain, polioencephalitis polio-

encephalītis, itĭdis f

adenoma of the eyelid, blepharo-

adenoma blepharoadenōma, ătis n

adiponecrosis, necrosis affecting the fat-

ty tissue of the body adiponecrōsis, is

f

aerobe, a microorganism which utilizes

and assimilates atmo-spheric oxygen aёrobion, i n

aerobic, requiring gaseous oxygen in

order to live aёrobĭcus, a, um

aglossia, the congenital condition of be-

ing without a tongue aglossia, ae f

alimentary alimentarius, a, um

allergic allergĭcus, a, um

amputation, the surgical removal of a

limb or a portion of a limb or of any

other appendage amputatio, ōnis f

anaerobe, a microorganism which is

able to exist although deprived of

free oxygen or air anaёrobion, i n

anaerobic, able to sustain life without

free oxygen anaёrobĭcus, a, um

anemia, changes in the red cells result-

ing in a reduction in the total amount

of blood anaemia, ae f

angiology, the science of the blood ves-

sels angiologia, ae f

angioma, a tumor composed of blood

vessels or of lymphatic vessels angi-

ōma, ătis n

anthropologist, a specialist studying the

man in the process of his

tion anthropolŏgus, i m

any disease affecting ligaments, desmo-

pathy desmopathia, ae f

any fluid that has passed through

the membrane of the skin,

transudate transsudātum, i n

aortic aortĭcus, a, um

apnoea, the cessation in breathing ap-

noё, ёs f

arthrocentesis, the surgical procedure

of puncturing a joint arthrocentēsis,

is f

arthralgia, any kind of pain affecting a

joint arthralgia, ae f

atrichia, not having hair atrichia, ae f

atrophy, a condition of general malnu-

trition from whatever cause atrophia,

ae f

atypical atypĭcus, a, um

autolaryngoscopy, the examination of

one’s own larynx with a laryngo-

scope autolaryngoscopia, ae f

225

autoplasty, the repair of a diseased or

injured tissue or organ by material

taken from another part of the body autoplastĭca, ae f

autopsy, post-mortem examination of a

body in order to establish the cause

of death autopsia, ae f

B

benign benignus, a, um

biopharmaceutics, study of physical and

chemical proprieties of medicinal

substances biopharmaceutĭca, ae f

biopsy, examination for purposes of di-

agnosis of tissue cut from the living

body biopsia, ae f

bladder vesīca, ae f

blepharotomy, incision of an eyelid ble-

pharotomia, ae f

brachyoesophagus, a congenitally short

oesophagus brachyoesophăgus, i m

bradycardia, slowing of the heart rate bradycardia, ae f

branch of clinical medicine treating

diseases of children, paediatrics pae-

diatria, ae f

branch of clinical medicine treating rec-

tum diseases, proctology proctologia,

ae f

breast mamma, ae f

bronchitis, an inflammated condition of

the bronchi bronchītis, itĭdis f

burn, an injury caused by heat, by

chemical or physical agents having

an effect similar to heat combustio,

ōnis f

C

calculosis, the condition in which a

number of calculi are present in any

part of the body calculōsis, is f

calculus (plur. calculi), a solid patholog-

ical concretion, usually of inorganic

matter formed in any part of body calcŭlus, i m

calculus on the teeth, odontolith odon-

tolĭthus, i m

cancerogenic (= carcinogenic), produc-

ing carcinoma cancerogĕnus, a, um

carcinoma, a malignant epithe-

lial tumor carcinōma, ătis n

a carcinoma the fragment of which con-

tains cartilaginous elements, chon-

droma chondrōma, ătis n

a carcinomatous tumor of glandular ep-

ithelium and connective tissue, ade-

nocarcinoma adenocarcinōma, ătis n

cardinal cardinālis, e

cardiogram 1) result of X-ray examina-

tion of the heart 2) graphical picture

of heart work cardiogramma, ătis n

cardiography 1) X-ray examination of

the heart 2) graphical recording of

heart activity cardiographia, ae f

causing the growth of tumors, oncoge-

nous oncogĕnus, a, um

cephalalgia, pain in the head cephalal-

gia,ae f

cerebral cerebrālis, e

cerebrospinal cerebrospinālis,e

changes in the red cells resulting in a

reduction in the total amount of

blood, anemia anaemia, ae f

chemical chemĭcus, a, um

cholecystolithiasis, the condition in

which there are gall-stones in the gall

bladder or bile duct cholecysto-

lithiăsis, is f

chondroporosis, a porous condition of

cartilage shown in thinning of carti-

lage and formation of spaces and si-

nuses chondroporōsis, is f

chronic chronĭcus, a, um

a chronic disease of the skin, character-

ized by the appearance of laminated

scales, psoriasis psoriăsis, is f

chyluria, the condition in which the

urine contains lymph chyluria, ae f

closed clausus, a, um

collapse, a state of extreme weakness

with physical and mental depres-

sion collapsus, us m

226

colonorrhagia, haemorrhage from the

colon colonorrhagia, ae f

colpocystotomy, surgical incision into the

urinary bladder through the wall of

the vagina colpocystotomia, ae f

colpohysteropexy, the operative fixation

of the uterus through the vagina col-

pohysteropexia, ae f

colpomyomectomy, removal of a my-

oma from the uterus by the vaginal

route colpomyomec-tomia, ae f

coma, the state of complete loss of con-

sciousness from which the pa-tient

cannot be roused by any ordinary ex-

ternal stimulus coma, ătis n

composite composĭtus, a, um

a concussion, a violent shaking of a soft

structure commotio, ōnis f

a condition characterized by the pres-

ence of gravel or of renal calculi,

nephrolithiasis nephrolithiăsis, is f

a condition in which the ability to swal-

low is lacking, aphagia aphagia, ae f

a condition in which the amount of gas-

tric juice is lessened, hypochylia hy-

pochylia, ae f

a condition in which there are abnor-

mally short fingers or toes, brachy-

dactylia brachydactylia, ae f

a condition of enlargement of the liver,

hepatomegalia hepatomegalia, ae f

congelation, frostbite, a local morbid

condition caused by freezing conge-

latio, ōnis f

congenital cleft of a vertebral arch or

several arches, spondyloschisis spon-

dyloschĭsis, is f

congenital fissure of the urinary blad-

der, cystoschisis cystoschĭsis,

is f

cryosurgery, surgical procedures in

which tissue is destroyed by freez-

ing cryochirurgia, ae f

cryptolith, a calculus contained in a

crypt cryptolĭthus, i m

cryptopsoriasis, hidden, latent psoriasis cryptopsoriăsis, is f

cystitis, inflammation of the urinary

bladder cystītis, itĭdis f

cytology, the science of the form and

functions of cells cytologia, ae f

D

dacryorrhoea, an excessive flow of tears dacryorrhoea, ae f

deficiency deficientia, ae f

dermatitis, inflammation of the skin

dermatītis, itĭdis f

desmalgia, pain in a ligament desmal-

gia, ae f

desmotomy, incision of the ligament

desmotomia, ae f

diagnosis via examination of iris, iri-

dodiagnostics iridodiagnostĭca,

ae f

didactylism, the congenital condition of

having only two fingers on a hand or

two toes on a foot didactylismus, i m

diffuse diffūsus, a, um

dilatation of the stomach, gastrectasia gastrectasia, ae f

direct directus, a, um

a discharge of pus, pyorrhoea – pyor-

rhoea, ae f

a disease morbus, i m

any disease affecting a joint, arthropa-

thy arthropathia, ae f

the disease caused by infection with the

mycobacterium tuberculosis tubercu-

lōsis, is f

any diseased condition of the viscera,

splanchnopathy splanchnopathia, ae f

any disease of skin, dermatosis derma-

tosis, is f

a disturbance of color vision when eve-

rything appears yellow,

thopsia xanthopsia, ae f

dislocation, abnormal displacement of

one bone upon another in a joint dis-

locatio, ōnis f

dolichocolon, an abnormally long colon

of normal diameter dolichocōlon, i n

227

dropsy, the abnormal accumu- lation of

fluid in tissue or cavity space hy-

drops, ōpis m

dysmenorrhoea, pain occurring in the

back and lower abdomen at or about

the time of the menses dysmenor-

rhoea, ae f

dysplasia, abnormal development of tis-

sue dysplasia, ae f

dystonia, a state of disordered tonicity dystonia, ae f

dystrophy, a disorder of the structure

and functions of an organ or tissue

due to perverted nutrition dystro-

phia, ae f

E

ectopia, a morbid congenital malposi-

tion or traumatic displacement of an

organ or part ectopia, ae f

eczema, a non contagious inflammatory

disease of the skin with much itching

and burning eczĕma, ātis n

embolaemia, a condition in which em-

boli are present in the blood embo-

laemia, ae f

embryectomy, the surgical removal of

the embryo embryectomia, ae f

embryopathology, the branch of pa-

thology concerned with defective or

abnormal development of embryo embryopathologia, ae f

emphysema, a condition in which the

alveoli of the lungs are dilated em-

physēma, ătis n

encephalomalacia, softening of the

brain encephalomalacia, ae f

encephalopathy, any morbid condition

of the brain encephalopathia, ae f

endogenous, having origin within the

organism endogĕnus, a, um

endometritis, an inflammation of the

inner mucous membrane of the uter-

us endometrītis, itĭdis f

enophthalmus, recession of the eyeball

into the cavity of the orbit enoph-

thalmus, i m

enteritis, inflammation of the mucous

membrane of the intestines enterītis,

itĭdis f

enterogastritis, inflammation of the

small intestine and the stomach en-

terogastrītis, itĭdis f

enterolithiasis, the formation of calculi

or concretions in the intestine en-

therolithiăsis, is f

enteromegalia, an unusually large size

of the intestine enteromegalia, ae f

the entrance and establishment of para-

sites into the body of a host, inva-

sion invasio, ōnis f

erythema, redness of the skin due to

hyperaemia erythēma, ătis n

evisceration, a removal of the contents

of an organ or part evisceratio, ōnis f

an excessive flow of milk, galactorrhoea galactorrhoea, ae f

excessive sensitiveness of any organ or

part of the body, hyperaesthesia hy-

peraesthesia, ae f

exogenous, belonging to aetiological fac-

tors outside the organism exogĕnus,

a, um

eye ocŭlus, i m

F

fetal fetālis, e

femur femur, ŏris n

fever febris, is f

fibroma, an innocent tumor composed

chiefly of connective tissue fibrōma,

ătis n

fibrous fibrōsus, a, um

any fluid that has passed through the

membrane of the skin, transudate transsudātum, i n

the formation of concretions, lithiasis lithiăsis, is f

fracture, a break in the continuity of a

bone fractūra, ae f

functional functionālis, e

G

galactostasis, arrest or stagnation in the

secretion of milk galactostăsis, is f

228

gall biliāris, e; felleus, a, um

gall bladder vesīca fellea (biliāris)

geminated geminātus, a, um

gerontology, science studying living

processes in the aged gerontologia, ae

f

gigantism, a condition of excessive tall-

ness gigantismus, i m

glaucoma, a condition of increased in-

traocular pressure and its conse-

quences glaucōma, ătis n

glossitis, inflammation of the tongue glossītis, itĭdis f

gnathalgia, pain in one or both jaws gnathalgia, ae f

gnathoschisis, a congenital fissure in the

maxilla gnathoschĭsis, is f

goitre, an enlargement of the thyroid

gland struma, ae f

H

haematology, branch of medicine stud-

ying blood and its diseases haemato-

logia, ae f

haematoma, a tumor or swelling com-

posed of blood haematōma, ătis n

haematomyelia, bleeding within the

substance of the spinal cord haema-

tomyelia, ae f

haematosalpinx, collection and reten-

tion of blood in a uterine

tube haematosalpinx, ngis f

haemogram, results of quantitative and

qualitative examination of blood haemogramma, ătis n

haemophilia, a severe hereditary bleed-

ing disease affecting males and tran-

smitted by females haemophilia, ae f

hand manus, us f

hardening of bony spaces, osteosclerosis osteosclerōsis, is f

headache dolor (ōris m) capĭtis (caput,

ĭtis n)

hemiatrophy, atrophy only affecting one

half of the body, or one half of an or-

gan hemiatrophia, ae f

hepatic hepatĭcus, a, um

hepatitis, inflammation of the liver

hepatītis, itĭdis f

hepatomegalia, a condition of enlarge-

ment of the liver hepatomegalia, ae f

hereditary hereditarius, a, um

herniation of the uterus, metrocele met-

rocēle, es f

hidrosis 1) the process of secreting

sweat 2) abnormally profuse sweat-

ing hidrōsis, is f

hydrarthrosis, a watery effusion into the

cavity of a joint hydrarthrōsis, is f

hydrometra, an accumulation of watery

fluid in the cavity of the uterus hy-

dromētra, ae f

hyperaesthesia, excessive sensitiveness

of any organ or part of the body hy-

peraesthesia, ae f

hyperglycaemia, an excessive amount of

sugar in the blood hyperglycaemia, ae

f

hypersalivation, excessive secretion of

saliva hypersalivatio, ōnis f

hypertension, high arterial blood pres-

sure hypertensio, ōnis f

hypogalactia, the secretion of too small

quantity of milk hypogalactia, ae f

hypoglycaemic, relating or belonging to,

or bringing about

hypoglycaemia, a low blood sugar

concentration hypoglycaemĭcus, a,

um

hypomnesia, a weak or defective state of

the memory hypomnesia, ae f

hypophrenia, feebleness of mind hy-

pophrenia, ae f

hypoplasia, underdevelopment of a tis-

sue or part hypoplasia, ae f

hypothermia, deficiency of body heat hypothermia, ae f

I

iatrogenic, happening because

of the physician’s manner or

injudicious remarks, iatrogenic

immune immūnus, a, um

229

immunodeficiency immunodeficientia, ae f

impairment of the voice, dysphonia dysphonia, ae f

implant, any piece of tissue used as a

graft implantātum, i n

implantation, the introduction of one

tissue or structure into another with

the aim of improving the function of

any part of the body implantatio, ōnis

f

incision of the abdominal wall and exci-

sion of the uterus, laparohyster-

oectomy laparohysteroectomia, ae f

an increase in the total number of leu-

cocytes, leucocytosis leucocytōsis, is f

infective infectīvus, a, um

inflammation of the cornea, keratitis

keratītis, itĭdis f

~ affecting the pelvis of the kidney and

the urinary bladder, pyelocystitis pyelocystītis, itĭdis f

~ in the nail fold, panaris panaritium, i n

~ of the abdominal muscles, laparomyo-

sitis laparomyosītis, itĭdis f

~ of the inner mucous membrane of the

uterus, endometritis endometrītis,

itĭdis f

~ of the liver, hepatitis hepatītis, itĭdis f

~ of the membranes of the brain or spi-

nal cord, meningitis meningitis, itĭdis

f

injury laesio, ōnis f

intermittent, coming and going at inter-

vals intermittens, ntis

internal internus, a, um

intravenous intravenōsus, a, um

iridodiagnostics, diagnosis via examina-

tion of iris iridodiagnostĭca, ae f

J

joint articulatio, ōnis f

K

keratomycosis, disease of cornea caused

by a fungus keratomycōsis, is f

keratoplasty, plastic surgery of the cor-

nea keratoplastĭca, ae f

any kind of pain affecting a joint, ar-

thralgia arthralgia, ae f

L

left sinister, tra, trum

lung pulmo, ōnis m

lymphangiitis, inflammation of lym-

phatic vessels lymphangiītis, itĭdis f

lymphocytic lymphocytĭcus, a, um

lymphocytosis, an increase in the num-

ber of lymphocytes lymphocytōsis, is f

M

any morbid condition affecting the

lungs, pneumopathy pneumopathia,

ae f

any morbid condition of the nose, rhi-

nopathy rhinopathia, ae f

any morbid condition or abnormal

growth of the hair, trichopathy tri-

chopathia,ae f

macrocyte, a red blood cell that is larger

than normal macrocўtus, i m

macronychia, excessive length or size of

the nails macronychia, ae f

mammogram (= mastogram) result of

breast X-ray examination, mammo-

gramma, ătis n

a malignant tumor of connective tissue

or its derivatives, sarcoma sarcōma,

ătis n

mastopathy, any diseased condition of the

mammary gland mastopathia, ae f

measurement the size of pelvis in

women, pelvimetry pelvimetria, ae f

a medical practitioner skilled in general

surgery, who specializes in the opera-

tive treatment of diseases of the

nervous system, neurosurgeon neu-

rochirurgus, i m

medical specialist treating

~ blood diseases, hematologist haema-

tolŏgus, i m

~ children’s diseases, pediatrician pae-

diāter, tri m

230

~ ear and larynx diseases, otolaryngolo-

gist, otolaryngolŏgus, i m

~ inner organs, therapeutist therapeu-

tista, ae m

~ mental diseases, psychiatrist

psychiāter, tri m

~ tumorous diseases, oncologist on-

colŏgus, i m

~ tuberculosis, phthisiologist phthisiāter,

tri m

megaloduodenum, duodenum of ab-

normally large size megaloduo-

dēnum, i n

megalomania, a mental condition in

which a person has grandiose delu-

sions about himself and his own intel-

lect, power, importance and so on megalomania, ae f

melanocarcinoma, a darkly pigmented

malignant epithelial tumor mela-

nocarcinōma, ătis n

a meningeal tumor thought to arise

from the arachnoidal villi, meningi-

oma meningiōma, ătis n

menalgia, painful menstruation menal-

gia, ae f

meningitis, inflammation of the mem-

branes of the brain or spinal

cord meningītis, itĭdis f

meningoencephalitis, an inflammatory

condition of the brain and its menin-

ges meningoencephalītis, itĭdis f

metastasis, the transfer of disease from its

primary site to distant parts of the

body by blood vessels, lymphatics or

direct continguity metastăsis, is f

micromastia, abnormal smallness of the

mammary glands micromastia, ae f

microsphygmy, diminished strength of

pulse microsphygmia, ae f

monocytopoiesis, the production of

monocytes in the bone

row monocytopoёsis, is f

monopathophobia, fear of a particular

disease monopathophobia, ae f

monostotic, pertaining to a single bone monostotĭcus, a, um

myelocytaemia, the presence of myelo-

cytes in the blood myelocytaemia, ae f

myopia, short sight myopia, ae f

N

narcosis, stupor produced by drugs and

tending to insensibility and paraly-

sis – narcōsis, is f

narrowing or stricture of the duct of the

lacrimal gland, dacryostenosis dacry-

ostenōsis, is f

necraemia, a condition in which the

blood loses its vitality – necraemia, ae

f

neoarthrosis, an artificial joint implant-

ed by the surgical operation neo-

arthrōsis, is f

a neoplasm originating in embryonic

elements or blighted ovum, embryo-

neoplasm embryoneoplasma, ătis n

nephrogenic, produced by or originat-

ing in a kidney nephrogĕnus, a, um

nephropathy, disease of the kidney nephropathia, ae f

neurogenic, happening because of the

nervous system neurogĕnus, a, um

O

odontogenic, relating to the develop-

ment of the teeth odontogĕnus, a, um

odontome, a solid or cystic tumour oc-

curring in the jaws which is derived

from cells conserved in tooth devel-

opment odontōma, ătis n

oedema (edema), the presence of exces-

sive amounts of fluid in the intercel-

lular tissue spaces of the body oedēma, ătis n

oesophagostenosis (esophagostenosis),

narrowing of the oesophagus oe-

sophagostenōsis, is f

oesophagostoma (esophagostoma), any

opening into the oesophagus apart

from the normal entrance and exit oesophagostŏma, ătis n

oesophagus (esophagus) oesophăgus, i m

231

oligodactylia, a congenital deficiency of

fingers, or toes oligodactylia, ae f

oncologist, a specialist treating tumor-

ous diseases oncolŏgus, i m

oncotherapy, the treatment of tumours oncotherapia, ae f

onychodystrophy, malformation of the

nails due to impaired nutrition

onychodystrophia, ae f

open apertus, a, um

operation operatio, ōnis f

the operation for the relief of hernia

and the resultant reduction of the lat-

ter, herniotomia herniotomia, ae f

the operation of removal of the adenoid

growth by excision, adenotomy ade-

notomia, ae f

the operation of transference of a tissue

of an organ from one place to an oth-

er with the aim of improving or re-

newing a function,

tion transplantatio, ōnis f

ophthalmoplegia, palsy (paralysis) of

the ocular muscles ophthalmoplegia,

ae f

ophthalmorrhexis, rupture of the eye-

ball ophthalmorrhexis, is f

ophthalmoscopy, instrumental-visual

examination of the eye ophthal-

moscopia, ae f

the origin and development of bone

marrow, myelogenesis myelogenĕsis,

is f

the origin and development of morbid

condition,

pathogenesis pathogenĕsis, is f

the origin, formation and development

of body tissue, histogenesis histogenĕsis, is f

osteochondrosis, a degenerative change

in bony and cartilage tissues oste-

ochondrōsis, is f

osteodystrophy, a disorder of bone nu-

trition osteodystrophia, ae f

osteomalacia, softening of the bones osteomalacia, ae f

osteoporosis, rarefaction of bone osteo-

porōsis, is f

otogenic, happening because of the ear otogĕnus, a, um

otolaryngologist, a specialist treating

ear and larynx diseases otolaryn-

golŏgus, i m

P

pachycheilia, abnormal thickness or

swelling of the lips pachycheilia, ae f

panaris, inflammation in the nail fold panaritium, i n

paralysis affecting the soft palate, pala-

toplegia palatoplegia, ae f

paralysis, loss of motor strength due to

a functional or organic disorder of

neural or neuromuscular mechanis-

mus paralўsis, is f

paralysis of similar parts on both sides

of the body, diplegia diplegia, ae f

paranephritis, an inflammatory condi-

tion involving the connective tissue

adjacent to the kidney paranephrītis,

itĭdis f

partial partiālis, e

a pathological condition in which one

muscle, one group of muscle or one

part of the body is only affected,

monoplegia monoplegia, ae f

a pathological condition involving many

joints, polyarthropathy poly-

arthropathia, ae f

pathological softening of cartilage,

chondromalacia chondromalacia, ae f

pediatrician, a specialist treating chil-

dren’s diseases paediāter, tri m

peduncle peduncŭlus, i m

pelvic pelvĭcus, a, um

pericystitis, inflammation in which the

structures around the urinary blad-

der are affected pericystītis, itĭdis f

a person with an unusually small size of

head, microcephalus microcephălus, i

m

232

pharmacophobia, morbid fear of taking

drugs or medicines pharmacophobia,

ae f

pharmacotherapia, science studying

drugs and their usage, pharma-

cotherapy pharmacotherapia, ae f

phlebography 1) radiographic visuali-

zation of veins 2) the tracing of the

venous pulse by means of a phleb-

ograph phlebographia, ae f

phoniatrics (= phoniatry), the treatment

of disorders of speech phoniatria, ae f

phonocardiogram, the record produced

by an instrument for recording heart

sounds phonocardiogramma, ătis n

photophobia, abnormal intolerance of

light photophobia, ae f

phthisiologist, a specialist treating tu-

berculosis phthisiāter, tri m

phytotherapy, method of treatment by

means of medical plants phytothera-

pia, ae f

plasma, the fluid portion of the blood

in which the blood corpuscles are

suspended plasma, ătis n

any plastic operation for repair or recon-

struction of the urinary bladder, cys-

toplasty cystoplastĭca, ae f

any plastic surgical operation on the

vagina, colpoplasty colpoplastĭca, ae f

pneumocentesis, lung puncture in order

to aspirate the contents of the cavi-

ty pneumocentēsis, is f

pneumoempyema, the presence of pus

and gas within the pleural space

pneumoempyēma, ătis n

pneumohaemothorax, an accumulation

of gas, air and blood in the cavity of

the thorax pneumohaemothōrax, ācis

m

pneumonia, an inflammation of the

spongy tissue of the lung pneumonia,

ae f

pneumorrhaphy, the operation of sutur-

ing a wound of the lung pneumor-

rhaphia, ae f

pneumotomy, the making of an incision

into the lung pneumotomia, ae f

podagra, gout, a disease of the purine

metabolism characterized by attacks

of arthritis with an assotiated raised

serum uric acid podăgra, ae f

podalgia, sensation of pain in the foot podalgia, ae f

polioencephalopathy, any pathological

condition of the gray matter of the

brain polioencephalopathia, ae f

polyavitaminosis, a morbid condition

caused by deficiency of several vita-

mins polyavitaminōsis, is f

polyposis, a condition in which the co-

lon is studded with polypi growing

from the mucous membrane polypōsis, is f

polypus of the vagina, colpopolypus colpopolўpus, i m

postoperative postoperatīvus, a, um

primary primarius, a, um

proctodiagnostics, examination of the

functional state of the rectum proc-

todiagnostĭca, ae f

proctoscopy, instrumental-visual exam-

ination of the rectum proctoscopia, ae

f

proctospasm, spasmatic contraction of

the rectum proctospasmus, i m

profuse discharge of mucous fluid from

the nose, rhinorrhoea rhinorrhoea, ae

f

prolapse, the sinking down or protru-

sion of a viscus or its part prolap-

sus,us m

psychiatrist, specialist treating mental

diseases psychiāter, tri m

psychogenic, developing or originating

of mental causes psychogĕnus, a, um

psychologist, specialist studying mental

activities of a human personality

psycolŏgus, i m

puncture, the operation of piercing a

viscus or a swelling either to establish

233

the nature of its content or to empty

it punctūra, ae f; punctio, ōnis f

puncture of the cornea, kerato- centesis keratocentēsis, is f

pyuria, a condition in which pus is pre-

sent in the urine pyuria, ae f

R

a red blood cell that is larger than nor-

mal, macrocyte macrocўtus, i m

removal of an entire pathological struc-

ture, organ or part,

tion amputatio, ōnis f

removal of an entire pathological struc-

ture, organ or part, extirpation ex-

tirpatio, ōnis f

replantation, the plantation of a

removed part of the whole to its site

again replantatio, ōnis f

resection, surgical removal of a part,

usually of some magnitude, e.g.

jaw, stomach, colon etc. resectio, ōnis

f

results of quantitative and qualitative

examination of blood, hemogram haemogramma, ătis n

retention of the menstrual flow due to

congenital or acquired genital canal

stenosis, cryptomenorrrhoea cryp-

tomenorrrhoea, ae f

retina retĭna, ae f

rhinolith, a concretion in the

cavity of the nose rhinolĭthus, i m

rhinopathy, any morbid condition of the

nose rhinopathia, ae f

rhinoscopy, instrumental-visual exami-

nation of the nose rhinoscopia, ae f

rib costa, ae f

right dexter, tra, trum

S

salpingogram, the radiograph made

during the radiographic visualization

of the uterus and uterine tubes sal-

pingogramma, ătis n

salpingopexy, surgical fixation of the

uterine tube salpingopexia, ae f

sarcomatosis, the condition in which a

number of sarcomata develops here

and there on the body sarcomatōsis, is

f

science studying drugs and their usage,

pharmacotherapy pharmacothera-

pia,ae f

scientist studying normal vital processes

in human organism physiolŏgus, i m

sclerodermatitis, inflammation and in-

duration of the skin sclerodermatītis,

itĭdis f

secondary secundarius, a, um

senile senīlis, e

separation of a tissue as a result of its

death, necrolysis necrolўsis, is f

sialolith, a salivary calculus sialolĭthus, i

m

simple simplex, ĭcis

somatology, branch of anthropology

studying structure of human

body somatologia,ae f

spasm of the caecum, typhlospasm typhlospasmus, i m

specialist studying forms of life and vi-

tal organisms, biologist biolŏgus, i m

specialist studying the man in process of

his evolution, anthropologist an-

thropolŏgus, i m

splenic splenĭcus, a, um

splenohepatomegaly, enlargement of

the spleen splenohepatomegalia ae f

spondylopathy, any disease of the ver-

tebrae spondylopathia, ae f

spongiform, having resemblance to a

sponge spongiformis, e

a state in which most of the teeth are

lacking, oligodentia oligodentia, ae f

a state in which there are too few

erythrocytes, erythropenia erythro-

penia, ae f

stenosis, narrowing or stricture of an

orifice or of the lumen of a hollow or

tubular organ stenōsis, is f

stomach gaster, tris f

234

stomatology, branch of clinical medicine

treating diseases of the oral

ty stomatologia, ae f

stomatitis, inflammation of the oral cav-

ity, stomatītis, itĭdis f

subacute, (disease) running a moderate-

ly rapid and severe course for which

the word acute would not be ap-

propriate subacūtus, a, um

subcutaneous subcutaneus a, um

a sudden blocking of a blood vessel,

usually an artery, by the emboli,

thromboembolism thromboёmbolis-

mus, i m

superficial superficiālis, e

suppurative, pus-forming suppuratīvus,

a, um

surgical operation on the small struc-

tures with the aid of a microscope,

microsurgery microchirurgia, ae f

symblepharon, adhesion of the eyelid to

the eyeball symblephăron, i n

symptom, the consciousness of a dis-

turbance in a bodily function symptōma, ătis n

syndrome, a distinct group of signs

which form a characteristic clinical

picture of the disease syndrŏmum, i n

synphalangism, a condition in which the

joints of certain fingers or toes are

fused synphalangismus, i m

T

tachyphagia, abnormal quickness in

eating, tachyphagia tachyphagia,ae f

tendon tendo, ĭnis m

tenodesis, operative fixation of a tendon tenodĕsis, is f

the presence of air or gas within a thor-

ax, pneumothorax pneumothōrax,

ācis m

the presence of blood in the tympanic

cavity, haemotympanum haemotympănum, i n

the presence of blood in the urine, hae-

maturia haematuria, ae f

the production and evolution of form,

morphogenesis morphogenĕsis,is f

the production of urinary calculi and

the morbid state due to the presence

of calculi in the urinary system, uro-

lithiasis urolithiăsis, is f

the rash or eruption on the mucous tis-

sue, enanthema – enanthēma, ătis n

the surgical establishment of a perma-

nent or semipermanent opening into

the urinary bladder, cystostomy cys-

tostomia, se f

therapeutist, specialist for treating dis-

eases of inner organs therapeutista, ae

m

thoracometry, measurement of the size

of the thorax thoracometria, ae f

thromboembolism, a sudden blocking of

a blood vessel, usually an artery, by

the emboli thromboёmbolismus, i m

tenolysis, the freeing of a tendon from

adhesions tenolўsis, is f

thrombosis, intravascular coagulation

during life producing a thrombus thrombōsis, is f

tissue textus, us m

tomography, body-section radiography tomographia, ae f

tonsillitis, inflammation of the tonsil tonsillītis, itĭdis f

tonsillotomy, the surgical operation for

removal of a part of a tonsil tonsil-

lotomia, ae f

topography, the anatomical description

of any particular part of the

body topographia, ae f

topophobia, unreasoning fear

of certain places topophobia, ae f

total or partial surgical removal of dis-

eased lung tissue,

my pneumonectomia, ae f

toxicosis, the pathological condition

caused by the absorption of poi-

sons toxicōsis, is f

transfusion, the introduction of sterile

fluids such as blood, plasma, serum

235

and other solutions into the blood

vessels of the circulatory system

transfusio, ōnis f

transplantation, the operation of trans-

fer of a tissue or an organ from one

place to an other with the aim of im-

proving or renewing the function transplantatio, ōnis f

traumatic traumatĭcus, a, um

treatment by means of medical plants,

phytotherapy phytotherapia, ae f

treatment by means of natural or artifi-

cial physical factors, physiothera-

py physiotherapia, ae f

tuberculosis, the disease caused by in-

fection with the Mycobacterium tu-

berculosis tuberculōsis, is f

a tumor consisting of connective tissue

elements, desmoneoplasm desmo-

neoplasma, ătis n

typhlocele, a hernia involving the cae-

cum typhlocēle, es f

U

ulceration, the process of formation of

an ulcer ulceratio, ōnis f

ultrasonic, ultrasound ultrasonarius, a,

um

urethritis, inflammation of the urethra

urethrītis, itĭdis f

use of cold or freezing as a therapeutic

measure, cryotherapy cryotherapia,

ae f

V

viral virālis, e

X

xerostomia, dryness of the mouth due to

failure of the salivary gland xerosto-

mia, ae f

the X-ray examination of the great ves-

sels and the chambers of the heart,

angiocardiography angiocardiograph-

ia, ae f

the X-ray examination of breast, mam-

mography mammographia, ae f

W

a watery effusion into the cavity of a

joint, hydrarthrosis hydrarthrōsis, is f

wound vulnus, ĕris n

236

THE INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS’ ANTHEM “GAUDEAMUS”

Gaudeāmus igĭtur, Let us rejoice therefore

Juvĕnes dum sumus! While we are young!

Post jucundam juventūtem, After a pleasant youth,

Post molestam senectūtem After a troubling old age

Nos habēbit humus. (bis) The earth will have us.

Ubi sunt qui ante nos Where are they who before us

In mundo fuēre? Were in the world?

Transeas ad supĕros, You may go up to the gods,

Transeas ad infĕros, You may cross into the underworld,

Hos si vis vidēre. (bis) If you wish to see them.

Vita nostra brevis est, Our life is brief,

Brevi finiētur: It will shortly end:

Venit mors velocĭter, Death comes quickly,

Rapit nos atrocĭter, Snatches us cruelly,

Nemĭni parcētur. (bis) It spares no one.

Vivat Academia! Long live the academy!

Vivant professōres! Long live the teachers!

Vivat membrum quodlĭbet, Long live each student!

Vivant membra quaelĭbet, Long live all students!

Semper sint in flore! (bis) May they always flourish!

Vivant omnes virgĭnes, Long live all girls,

Gracĭles, formōsae! Slender and beautiful!

Vivant et muliĕres, Long live wives as well,

Tenĕre, amabĭles, Tender, loveable,

Bonae, laboriōsae. (bis) Good and productive.

Vivat et Respublĭca Long live the state as well

Et qui illam regunt! As they who rule it!

Vivat nostra civĭtas, Long live our city

Maecenātum carĭtas, [And] the charity of benefactors

Qui nos hic protēgunt! (bis) Who protect us here!

Pereat tristitia, Let sadness perish,

Pereant dolōres! Let sorrows perish!

Pereat diabŏlus,

Quivis antiburschius

Atque irrisōres!

The most popular stanzas

Let the devil perish,

Let [perish] whoever who is anti-student

As well those who mock us!

nowadays are typed in black type

237

LATIN PROVERBS AND QUOTATIONS

1. Aes debitōrem leve, grave

inimīcum facit

If you want to keep a friend,

never borrow, never lend

2. Amīcus certus in re incerta

cernĭtur

A friend in need is a friend indeed

3. Amor non est medicabĭlis herbis No herb will cure love

4. Amor tussisque non celantur Love and cough cannot be hidden

5. Aquĭla muscas non captat An eagle doesn’t catch the flies

6. Arte et humanitāte, labōre et

scientia

By art and humanity, by labor and

knowledge

7. Audiātur et altĕra pars Let’s hear the opposite side!

8. Aurōra Musis amīca He that will thrive, must rise at five

9. Bis dat qui cito dat He gives twice who gives in a trice

10. Bona valetūdo melior est quam

maxĭmae divitiae

Good health is above wealth

11. Cogitatiōnes posteriōres saepe

sunt meliōres

Second thoughts are the best

12. Cogĭto ergo sum I think, therefore I am

13. Consuetūdo est altĕra natūra Custom is second nature

14. Copia non est inopia Store is no sore

15. Cum promisĕras, facias Promise is a debt

16. De gustĭbus non est

disputandum

Tastes are not to be argued

17. De mortuis aut bene aut nihil Speak nothing but good of the dead

18. Diabŏlus non est tam ater, ac

pingĭtur

The devil is not so black as he is painted

19. Dictum – factum Said and done

20. Dies levat lucrum Time heals most sorrows

21. Divĭde et impĕra Divide and rule

22. Domus propria domus optĭma My house is my castle.

(East or west, home is best)

23. Dum spiro spero As long as I breathe, I hope

24. Duos qui lepōres sequĭtur,

neutrum capit

If you run after two hares, you will

catch neither

25. Dura lex sed lex The law is the law and must be obeyed

26 Experientia est optĭma magistra

(=Usus est optĭmus magister)

Experience is the best teacher

27. Ebriĕtas est voluntaria insania Drunkenness is nothing but

voluntary madness

28. E cantu dignoscĭtur avis A bird may be known by its song

29. Equi donāti dentes non sunt

inspiciendi

Don’t look a gift horse in the mouth

238

30. Errāre humānum est It’s human to err

31. Est avis in dextra melior quam

quattuor extra

A bird in the hand is worth one

hundred in flight

32. Facĭle dictu, difficĭle factu Easier said than done

33. Facta, non verba Better to do well than to say well

34. Festīna lente Make haste slowly

35. Finis corōnat opus All is well that ends well

36. Fronti nulla fides Appearances are deceitful

37 Fortes fortūna adjŭvat Fortune favors the brave

38. Homĭnes amplius oculis credunt

quam aurĭbus

A picture is worth a thousand

words

39. Homo a se ortus A self - made man

40. Homo doctus in se divitias

habet

The wealth of the mind is the only

true wealth

41. Homo est anĭmal sociāle Man is by nature a political animal

42. Homo homĭni lupus est Man is a wolf to man

43. Homo propōnit, sed Deus

dispōnit

Man proposes but God disposes

44. Homo sum, humāni nihil a me

alienum esse puto

I am a man, I count nothing

human alien to me

45. Ignorantia non est argumentum Lack of knowledge is no excuse

(= Ignorance is no argument)

46. In medio stat virtus Virtue stands in the middle

47. Ira furor brevis est Anger is short madness

48. Labor et patientia omnia vincunt Diligence is the mother of success

49. Mala herba cito crescit Great weeds grow apace

50. Manus manum lavat One hand washes the other

51. Mare verbōrum, gutta rerum Great boast, small roast

52. Medĭcus curat, natūra sanat The physician heals, nature convalesces

53. Mens sana in corpŏre sano A healthy mind in a healthy body

54. Nemo sine vitio est No one is without a fault

55. Ne diffĕras in crastīnum Never put off till tomorrow what

you can do today

56. Ne noceas, si juvare non potes Do no harm, if yon can not help

57. Nomen est omen The name is the sign

58. Ne Juppiter quidem omnĭbus

placet

He who pleased everybody died

before he was born

59. Nihil volenti difficĭle est Anything is possible if you wish hard enough

60. Non est fumus absque igne There is no smoke without fire

61. Non est via in medicīna sine

lingua Latīna

There is no way in medicine

without Latin

62. Non scholae, sed vitae

discĭmus

We learn not for school but for life

239

63. Nulla aetas ad discendum sera It is never too late to learn

64. Nulla regŭla sine exceptione There is no rule without exception

65. Nulla dies sine linea Not a day without a line

66. Nullum malum sine aliquo bono No great loss without some small gain

67. Omnia fluunt, omnia mutantur Everything flows and everything changes

68. Omnia mea mecum porto All I have, I carry with me

69. O tempŏra, o mores! What times! What customs!

70. Otium post negotium Work done, have your fun

71. Pacta sunt servanda Agreements should be obeyed

72. Paulātim summa petūntur Learn to creep before you leap

73. Per aspĕra ad astra Through the thorns (hard-ships) to the stars!

74. Pigritia est mater vitiōrum Idleness is the mother of all evil

75. Plenus venter non studet

libenter

A fill stomach is deaf to learning

76. Potius sero quam nunquam Better is late than never

77. Primum noli nocēre First, do no harm

78. Principium dimidium totīus Well begun is half done

79. Procul ex ocŭlis – procul ex

mente

Out of sight, out of mind

80. Quem Deus perdĕre vult,

dementat prius

Whom God wishes to ruin, he first

deprives him of reason

81. Quidquid latet apparēbit What is done by night appears by day

82. Quidquid Latĭne dictum sit,

altum vidētur

Anything said in Latin sounds

profound

83. Qui non est nobiscum adversus

nos est

He that is not with us is against us

84. Qui quaerit, repĕrit He will find who is searching

85. Qui scribit, bis legit He who writes reads twice

86. Qui semĭnat mala, metet mala The ill you do will rebound upon you

87. Qui tacet consentīre vidētur Silence gives consent

88. Quod erat demonstrandum Which was to be proved

89. Quod licet Jovi, non licet bovi What Jupiter is allowed to do cattle

are not

90. Quot capĭta, tot sententiae So many men, so many minds

91. Radīces litterārum amārae,

fructus dulces

Whatever is good to know is

difficult to learn

92. Repetitio est mater studiōrum Repeating is the mother of learning

93. Saltāre ad tibiam alicūjus To dance after somebody’s tune

94. Scientia potentia est Knowledge is power

95. Scio me nihil scire I know that I know nothing

96. Sero venientĭbus ossa There is nothing left for the late-comers

97. Sine ira et studio Without ill-will and without favor

98. Sine labōre non erit panis in ore No pains, no gains

240

99. Si vis amari, ama! To be loved, love!

100. Suae quisque fortūnae faber est Each man is the maker of his own

fortune

101. Sudōre et sanguĭne, opera et

studio

By blood, toil, tears and sweat

102. Suis quaeque temporĭbus There is a time and place for everything

103. Suum cuīque To each his own

104. Tamdiu discendum est,

quamdiu discendum vivis

Live and learn

105. Tantum possŭmus, quantum

scimus

We can do as much as we know

106. Temperantia est custos vitae Excesses destroy our powers

107. Tempŏra mutantur et nos

mutāmur in illis

The times change and we are changing

with them

108. Tempŏris filia verĭtas Truth is a daughter of time

109. Totus mundus agit histriōnem All the world’s a stage

110. Ubi concordia ibi victoria Where is the unity, there is the

victory

111. Umbram suam timēre He is afraid of his own shadow

112. Una hirundo non facit ver One swallow makes no summer

113. Ut salūtas, ita salutabĕris As the call, so the echo

114. Verba docent, exempla trahunt Words are teaching, examples are

pulling

115. Verum amīcum pecunia non

parābis

Money cannot buy friendship

116. Vincuntur molli pectŏra dura

prece

A word warmly said gives comfort

even to a cat

117. Vox popŭli – vox Dei The voice of the people is the

God’s voice

241

MEDICAL PROFESSIONAL EXPRESSIONS

1. Abactus venter Artificially induced abortion

2. Abalienatio mentis Insanity; mental derangement

3. Ad aurem (ad aur.) At the ear

4. Ad libĭtum (ad lib.) At pleasure, freely

5.

6.

7.

Ad usum externum

(internum)

Alienatio partis

To be taken externally (internally); for external (in-

ternal) use

Gangrene

8. Alternis diēbus (alt. d.) Every other day

9 Alternis horis (a. h.) Every other hour

10. Ante meridiem (a. m.) Morning, before noon

11. Ante mortem Before death

112. Ante partum Before childbirth

113. Ante prandium (a. p.) Before dinner

114. Auris dextra (a. d.) Right ear

115. Auris laevis (sinistra)

(a. l., a. s.)

Left ear

16. Aures utrae Both ears

17. Bipăra A woman who has had born two children at

separate births

18. Bis in die (b. i. d.) Twice a day

19. Compos mentis Of sound mind

20. Dolōres vagi Wandering pains

21. Facies hippocratĭca The appearance of a dying person

described by Hippocrates: a pale or livid

face with dull sunken eyes, pinched

nose, hollow cheeks and temples, open

mouth and dropped lower jaw

22. Habĭtus aegrōti The general physical appearance

of a diseased person ; habit

23. Horrĭda cutis

(=cutis anserīna)

Goose flesh

24. Impotentia coёundi Sexual impotence in the male

25. Impotentia erigendi Sexual impotence due to lack of the

power of erection of the penis

26. Impotentia generandi Inability to reproduce

27. In articŭlo mortis At the instant of death

28. In extrēmis At the point of death

29. In situ 1. In the normal, natural or original position

2. In a given place

30.

31.

Inter alia

In utĕro

Among the other

Within the uterus

242

32. In vacuo In a vacuum

33. In vitro Within a glass vessel; applied to changes

taking place in the test - tube method of

investigation

34. In vivo Within the living organism

35. Intra vitam During life

36. Locum tenens A medical practitioner who acts as deputy

for another

37. Locus minōris

resistentiae

The place of least resistance (an organ or

tissue most likely to be a particular

disease)

38. Lusus natūrae A teratism or other freak of nature

39. Malum aegyptĭcum Diphtheria (literally – Egyptian evil)

40. Malum arteriārum

senīle

Senile arteriosclerosis (literally – senile evil

of arteries)

41. Malum cadūcum Epilepsy (literally – falling evil)

42. Malum venereum Syphilis (literally – venereal evil)

43. Minĭmum audibĭle The auditory threshold; the least sound that

can be heard

44. Minĭmum cognoscibĭle The visibility threshold for recognizing shapes

45. Minĭmum sensibĭle The threshold of consciousness

46. Muscae volitantes The appearance in the fields of vision of

variously shaped figures caused by defect

of the vitreous humor (literally – flying

flies)

47. Noli - me - tangĕre An old but colorful name for rodent

ulcer (literally – do not touch me)

48. Non compos mentis A person who is not sufficiently sound of

mind to manage his own affairs

49. Nostrum A quack remedy or a medicine the ingredients of

which are kept secret

50. Nullipăra A woman who has not given birth to a child

51. Ocŭlus dexter

(OD, o. d.)

Right eye

52. Omnĭbus alternis horis

(o. alt. hor.)

Every other hour

53. Omni mane (o. m.) Every morning

54. Omni nocte (o. n.) Every night

55. Per rectum (p. r.) Per rectum (through the rectum)

56. Post meridiem (p. m.) Evening or afternoon

57. Post mortem After death

58. Post partum After childbirth

59. Post prandum After dinner

243

60. Potentia coёundi The capacity to have sexual intercourse

61. Potentia concipiendi The capacity to conceive

62. Potentia generandi The power to beget children

63. Primigravĭda One who is pregnant for the first time

64. Primipăra A woman who has had one child

65. Prognōsis anceps An uncertain prognosis

66. Prognōsis fausta A good prognosis

67. Prognōsis infausta An unfavorable prognosis

68. Prognōsis quoad vitam An opinion as to whether the patient will live

69. Pro ratiōne aetātis (p. r. aet.) According to age

70. Pro re nata (p. r. n.) Occasionally, when required

71. Pubertas plena The attainment of full sexual maturity

72. Pubertas praecox Puberty occurring at an abnormally early age

73. Quantum libet (=quantum placet) As much as you please

74. Quaqua hora (q. q. h.) Every hour

75. Quater in die (q. i. d.) Four times a day

76. Secundigravĭda A woman who is pregnant for the second time

77. Secundipăra A woman who has had 2 children, in two

different pregnancies

78. Status asthmatĭcus

A severe and continuous attack of asthma in

which there is marked dyspnoea

and finally exhaustion and collapse

79. Status convulsīvus sive epilep-

tĭcus

Repeated and prolonged epileptic seizures

without recovery of consciousness

between attacks

80. Status praesens The present condition

81. Ter de die (t. d. d.) Thrice a day

82. Unipăra A woman who has given birth once only

83. Vix conservātrix The innate strength of an organism enabling

it to withstand disease

84. Vix medicātrix natūrae The natural ability of the organism to prevail

over disease without external assistance

85. Vis vitae (vitālis) The life force

244

CONTENTS

Preface ............................................................................................................................. 3

Introduction to the subject ............................................................................................... 3

Part I. Phonetic rules of pronunciation ............................................................................ 6

Lesson 1. The latin alphabet. Pronunciation of vowels, consonants and letter combinations 6

§ 1. The latin alphabet ............................................................................................. 6

§ 2. Division of latin sounds .................................................................................... 7

§ 3. Pronunciation of vowels ................................................................................... 7

§ 4. Pronunciation of two vowels combination ....................................................... 7

§ 5. Pronunciation of consonants ............................................................................ 8

§ 6. Pronunciation of consonant combinations ....................................................... 9

§ 7. Pronunciation of some letter combinations ...................................................... 9

§ 8. Exercises ........................................................................................................... 9

Lesson 2. Accent rules ............................................................................................................ 10

§ 9. Accent in the words consisting of two syllables ............................................ 10

§ 10. Accent in polysyllabic words according length and brevity

of the second end syllable ............................................................................................. 11

§ 11. Long suffixes ................................................................................................ 11

§ 12. Short suffixes ................................................................................................ 12

§ 13. The way of accent determination when the second

end vowel is not a part of a long or a short suffix ......................................................... 12

§ 14. Some rules of syllable length determination ................................................ 12

§ 15.the rules of syllable brevity ........................................................................... 12

§ 16. Exercises ....................................................................................................... 13

Part II. Grammar fundamentals of making terms .......................................................... 14

Lesson 3. Noun and grammar categories of noun. 1-st declension

and pharmaceutical terms with nouns of the 1-st declension.............................................. 14

§ 17. Grammar categories of noun ........................................................................ 14

§ 18. Dictionary form of nouns ............................................................................. 14

§ 19. The stem of the noun and the way to determine it ....................................... 15

§ 20. Description of declensions ........................................................................... 15

§ 21. Nouns of greek origin not belonging to five types of latin declensions ...... 16

§ 22. Capital and small letters of nouns in the pharmaceutical terms ................... 17

§ 23. Preliminary information on drug forms names ............................................ 18

§ 24. 1st declension of nouns ................................................................................ 18

§ 25. Exercises ....................................................................................................... 19

Lesson 4. The 2nd declension of the nouns. The nouns of the 2nd declension

as trivial names of drugs. Prefixes, suffixes, greek and latin morphological

elements carrying information on pharmaceutical characteristics of drugs ................... 20

§ 26. Nouns of the masculine gender of the 2nd declension ................................. 20

245

§ 27. Nouns of the neutral gender of the 2nd declension ...................................... 20

§ 28. Gender exceptions in the 2nd declension ..................................................... 21

§ 29. Preliminary information on prepositions...................................................... 21

§ 30. Formation of the drug names — neutral gender nouns

of the 2nd declension ..................................................................................................... 21

§ 31. Word building elements (part 1) ................................................................... 22

§ 32. Prefixes in pharmaceutical names ................................................................ 23

§ 33. Personal names in pharmaceutical and clinical terms .................................. 23

§ 34. Exercises ....................................................................................................... 24

Lesson 5. Adjectives of the 1-st and 2-nd declensions, their grammar description

and dictionary form. Adjectives and nouns grammar agreement. Some features

of adjectives’ use in pharmaceutical terms ......................................................................... 25

§ 35. Grammar characteristics and dictionary form of adjectives of the 1st and

2nd declensions ............................................................................................................. 25

§ 36. Table of case endings of adjectives of the 1st group .................................... 26

§ 37. Grammar agreement of adjectives with nouns ............................................. 27

§ 38. Some peculiarities of adjectives use in pharmaceutical terminology .......... 28

§ 39. Word building elements (part 2) ................................................................... 28

§ 40. Exercises ....................................................................................................... 29

Lesson 6. Verb and its dictionary form. Stem of verb in the present tense system.

Praesens indicativi activi et passivi (3-rd person of singular et plural). Verb «esse»

in the praesens indicativi activi. The stem of the supine and the participle

in the past tense system. Word order in a simple sentence ................................................... 30

§ 41. Grammar characteristics of verb .................................................................. 30

§ 42. Dictionary form of verb ................................................................................ 31

§ 43. Stem of present tense .................................................................................... 31

§ 44. Indicative mood forms in present indicative tense of active voice

(praesens indicatīvi actīvi) ............................................................................................. 32

§ 45. Indicative mood forms in present indicative tense of passive voice

(praesens indicatīvi passivi) .......................................................................................... 32

§ 46. Present tense participle (participium praesentis activi) ............................... 33

§ 47. The stem of supine and participles of the past completed tense .................. 33

§ 48. The verb esse in the present tense forms ...................................................... 34

§ 49. Word order in simple narrative latin sentences ............................................ 34

§ 50. Word building elements (part 3) ................................................................... 36

§ 51. Exercises ....................................................................................................... 36

Lesson 7. Imperative mood (imperativus). Conjunctive mood

(praesens conjunctivi activi et passivi, 3-rd person of singular et plural).

Verb fieri in pharmaceutical formules .................................................................................... 37

§ 52. Formation and usage of the imperative (imperatīvus) ................................. 37

§ 53. Formation and usage of conjunctive mood (conjunctivus praesentis

actīvi et passīvi) ............................................................................................................. 38

246

§ 54. Verb fio, fiĕri in the indicative and conjunctive forms ................................. 39

§ 55. Word building elements (part 4) .................................................................. 40

§ 56. Exercises ....................................................................................................... 40

Lesson 8. 3-rd declension of the nouns and their consonant type. Systematization

of the endings of masculine gender nouns ................................................................... 41

§ 57. General description of nouns of the 3rd declension ..................................... 41

§ 58. Masculine gender endings and their systematization ................................... 42

§ 59. Grammar types of the 3rd declension. The consonant type ......................... 43

§ 60. Meaning and usage of suffixes -or, -sor, -tor, -xor in pharmaceutical

terminology.................................................................................................................... 43

§ 61. Word building elements (part 5) ................................................................... 44

§ 62. Exercises ....................................................................................................... 44

Lesson 9. Systematization of the endings of the feminine gender nouns

in the 3-rd declension. The mixed type of the 3-rd declension ............................................ 45

§ 63. Systematization of the feminine gender nouns of the 3rd declension .......... 45

§ 64. The mixed type of the 3rd declension .......................................................... 46

§ 65. Declining peculiarities of the nouns with ending -sis and the nouns

febris, tussis, pertussis .................................................................................................. 46

§ 66. The declining peculiarities of the noun vas, vasis n vessel .......................... 47

§ 67. Word building elements (part 6) ................................................................... 47

§ 68. Exercises ....................................................................................................... 48

Lesson 10. Systematization of the endings of the neutral gender nouns in the 3-rd

declension. The vowel type of the 3-rd declension .............................................................. 49

§ 69. Systematization of the neutral gender nouns of the 3rd declension ............. 49

§70. The vowel type of the 3rd declension ........................................................... 50

§ 71. Word building elements (part 7) ................................................................... 50

§ 72. Exercises ....................................................................................................... 51

Lesson 11. The adjectives of the 3-rd declension and variants of their dictionary form.

Peculiarities in declension of adjectives and present tense participles ................................ 52

§ 73. Adjectives of the 3rd declension .................................................................. 52

§ 74. Special features of case endings of the 3rd declension adjectives ............... 53

§ 75. Grammar agreement of the 3rd declension adjectives with the nouns ........ 54

§ 76. Specific features in declension of present tense participles ......................... 55

§ 77. Lexical variety of adjectives in some botanical names ................................ 55

§ 78. Word building elements (part 8) ................................................................... 55

§ 79. Exercises ....................................................................................................... 55

Lesson 12. Comparative and superlative grades of comparison and special

features of their formation, declension and usage ................................................................ 57

§ 80. Formation and declension of adjectives in the comparative grade .............. 57

§ 81. Formation and declension of adjectives in the superlative grade ................ 57

§ 82. Special forms of making the comparative and superlative grades ............... 58

247

§ 83. Word building elements (part 9) ................................................................... 59

§ 84. Exercises ....................................................................................................... 59

Lesson 13. The 4-th and 5 -th noun declensions. Nouns usus and species

in professional pharmaceutical expressions .......................................................................... 60

§ 85. The 4th declension and its case endings ....................................................... 60

§ 86. The name usus in expressing the drug rout administration .......................... 60

§ 87. The 5th declension and its case endings ....................................................... 61

§ 88. Word building elements (part 10) ................................................................. 61

§ 89. Exercises ....................................................................................................... 62

Lesson 14. Systematized information on prepositions and their use

in the pharmaceutical terminology ......................................................................................... 63

§ 90. Some general remarks on prepositions......................................................... 63

§ 91. Prepositions used with accusative case ........................................................ 64

§ 92. Prepositions used with ablative case ............................................................ 64

§ 93. Prepositions used with two cases (accusative and ablative as well) ............ 64

§ 94. Prepositions used with genitive .................................................................... 65

§ 95. Word building elements (part 11) ................................................................. 65

§ 96. Exercises ....................................................................................................... 65

Lesson 15. Numerals in pharmaceutical terminology .......................................................... 67

§ 97. Latin cardinal numerals ................................................................................ 67

§ 98. Declension of cardinal numerals .................................................................. 68

§ 99. Grammar agreement of numerals with nouns .............................................. 69

§ 100. The ordinal numerals .................................................................................. 70

§ 101. Expression of percentage correlation ......................................................... 70

§ 102. Designation of matter amount in latin pharmaceutical terms .................... 71

§ 103. Latin numerals as prefixes in pharmaceutical terms .................................. 72

§ 104. Greek numerals as prefixes in pharmaceutical terms ................................. 73

§ 105. Word building elements (part 12) ............................................................... 73

§ 106. Exercises ..................................................................................................... 73

Lesson 16. Pronouns. Adverbs. Conjunctions ....................................................................... 75

§ 107. Pronouns in pharmaceutical terminology ................................................... 75

§ 108. Adverbs ....................................................................................................... 76

§ 109. Conjunctions ............................................................................................... 77

§ 110. Word building elements (part 13) ............................................................... 77

§ 111. Exercises ..................................................................................................... 78

Lesson 17. Latin chemical terminology. Names of chemical elements, acids and oxides. 79

§ 112. Names of chemical elements ...................................................................... 79

§ 113. Latin names of acids ................................................................................... 80

§ 114. Latin names of oxides, hydroxides, peroxides ........................................... 81

§ 115. Word building elements reflecting chemical information (part 14) ........... 82

§ 116. Exercises ..................................................................................................... 83

248

Lesson 18. Latin chemical terminology. Salt names (part 1) ............................................... 84

§ 117. Names of anions including oxygen and those without oxygen .................. 84

§ 118. Latin names of salts, whose anions don’t contain oxygen ......................... 85

§ 119. Word building elements (part 15) ............................................................... 85

§ 120. Exercises ..................................................................................................... 85

Lesson 19. Latin salt names (part 2) ...................................................................................... 87

§ 121. Latin anion names in basic and acid salts .................................................. 87

§ 122. Two-component names of potassium and sodium salts ............................. 87

§ 123. Latin names of compound ethers ............................................................... 87

§ 124. Exercises ..................................................................................................... 88

Lesson 20. Names of vitamins. Names of hormone and ferment preparations.

Designation of duration and intensity of drug action ........................................................... 89

§ 125. Names of vitamins ...................................................................................... 89

§ 126. Names of hormone preparations ................................................................ 90

§ 127. Names of ferment preparations .................................................................. 91

§ 128. Designation of the drug effect duration and intensity ................................ 91

§ 129. Word building elements (part 16) ............................................................... 92

§ 130. Exercises ..................................................................................................... 94

Lesson 21. Latin botanical terminology. Genus and species names in botanic.

Botanical names in pharmaceutical terms. Latin names of medical plant parts ................. 95

§ 131. Common information on the latin botanical terminology .......................... 95

§ 132. Botanical genus and species names of plants ............................................. 95

§ 133. Character features of botanic names usage in the pharmaceutical terms ... 96

§ 134. Alkaloid and glycoside names .................................................................... 97

§ 135. Systematization of plant part names ........................................................... 97

§ 136. Word building elements (part 17) ............................................................... 97

§ 137. Exercises ..................................................................................................... 98

§ 138. List of botanical names and their pharmaceutical equivalents

used in this lesson .......................................................................................................... 99

Lesson 22. Medical prescription and the rules of writing out

the latin part of prescription ................................................................................................. 100

§ 139. Common information on prescriptions .................................................... 100

§ 140. The latin part of prescription .................................................................... 100

§ 141. Methodical advices for prescription translating ....................................... 104

§ 142. Exercises ................................................................................................... 105

Lesson 23. The use of the accusatuve in some pharmaceutical forms

in the first line of a medical prescription ............................................................................. 107

§ 143. General information on the use of the accusative

in the pharmaceutical forms in a medical prescription ............................................... 107

§ 144. The prescription of balsams, gels, creams, liniments, ointments and

aerosols in the accusative ............................................................................................ 108

249

§ 145. The prescription of tablets in the accusative singular and plural form .... 109

§ 146. The prescription of drops in the accusative form ..................................... 109

§ 147. The prescription of ophthalmic films and medical sponges ..................... 110

§ 148. The prescription of suppositories in the accusative case.......................... 111

§ 149. Exercises ................................................................................................... 111

Lesson 24. Systematisazion of the solid drug form names

and their prescription (part 1) ............................................................................................... 113

§ 150. Drug form which are divided after their substance state

and their rout of administration ................................................................................... 113

§151. Pharmaceutical proprieties of solid drug forms ........................................ 113

§ 152. Exercises ................................................................................................... 115

Lesson 25. Systematisazion of the solid drug form names

and their prescription (part 2) ............................................................................................... 117

§ 154. Exercises ................................................................................................... 117

Lesson 26. Systematization of liquid drug form names and their prescription (part 1) ...... 119

§ 155. Common information on the liquid drug forms ....................................... 119

§ 156. Pharmaceutical description of the liquid drug forms ............................... 119

§ 157. Exercises ................................................................................................... 120

Lesson 27. Systematization of liquid drug form names and their prescription (part 2) ... 122

§ 158. Pharmaceutical information on the liquid drug forms ............................. 122

§ 159. Exercises ................................................................................................... 123

Lesson 28. Systematization of the soft drug form names and their prescription .............. 125

§ 160. Pharmaceutical information on the soft drug forms ................................. 125

§ 161. Exercises ................................................................................................... 126

Lesson 29. Systematization of non standaro drug forms and their prescription ............... 128

§ 162. The drug forms which differ from traditional solid, liquid

and soft ones ............................................................................................................... 128

§ 163. Exercises ................................................................................................... 128

Lesson 30. Shortened latin designations in prescriptions ................................................... 129

§ 164. Rules of shortening designation ............................................................... 129

§ 165. Table of the shortened latin designations ................................................. 130

§ 166. Exercises ................................................................................................... 131

Lesson 31. Systematization of the word building elements

and their orthography (part 1) ............................................................................................... 135

§ 167. The alphabet list of learnt word building elements, part 1 ....................... 135

§ 168. Exercises ................................................................................................... 138

Lesson 32. Systematization of the word building elements

and their orthography (part 2) ............................................................................................... 139

§ 169. The alphabet list of learnt word building elements, part 2 ....................... 139

§ 170. Exercises ................................................................................................... 141

250

Lesson 33. Systematization of special spelling cases in the pharmaceutical nouns ......... 142

§ 171. Peculiarities of using letters «s», «z», «k» ............................................... 142

§ 172. Vowel and consonant combinations which are not considered

to belong to the word building elements ..................................................................... 142

§ 173. Exercises ................................................................................................... 143

Latin – English vocabulary .......................................................................................... 145

English-Latin vocabulary ............................................................................................ 153

Clinical terminology .................................................................................................... 165

Lesson 34. Introduction into the Latin clinical terminology. One-word terms

and their morphological structure. Initial and final morphological elements used

for word building. Names of medical branches and specialists.

Names of medical examinations .......................................................................................... 165

§ 174. General remarks on latin clinical terminology ......................................... 165

§ 175. The morphological structure of one-word clinical terms ......................... 165

§ 176. Some notes on the word stressing in clinical names ................................ 166

§ 177. Initial and final root elements ................................................................... 167

§ 178. Names of the main branches of clinical medicine ................................... 167

§ 179. Names of medical specialists ................................................................... 168

§ 180. Some notes on the names of medical specialists in latin and english ...... 168

§ 181. Names of medical examinations and methods of treatment ..................... 169

§ 182. Table of initial root elements .................................................................... 169

§ 183. Table of final root elements ...................................................................... 170

§ 184. Exercises ................................................................................................... 170

Lesson 35. One-word names of function disorders, pathological processes

and abnormal conditions ...................................................................................................... 173

§ 185. One-word names of functional disorders ................................................. 173

§ 186. One-word names of pathological processes and abnormal conditions .... 174

§ 187. Initial greek roots and their latin equivalents ........................................... 175

§ 188. Table of final root elements ...................................................................... 175

§ 189. Exercises ................................................................................................... 176

Lesson 36. Names of qualitative and quantitative abnormalities in morphological

structures and physiological processes ................................................................................ 179

§ 190. Increase and decrease in different quantitative conditions....................... 179

§ 191. Increase or decrease in dimension of anatomical

and histological structures ........................................................................................... 179

§ 192. Increase and decrease in the quantity of anatomical and histological

structures ...................................................................................................................... 180

§ 193. Table of initial root elements .................................................................... 180

§ 194. Table of final roots .................................................................................... 181

§195. Exercises .................................................................................................... 182

251

Lesson 37. Names of inflammatory processes which occur in organs and tissues.

Names of abnormalities in the states of physiological fluids ............................................. 185

§ 196. Names of inflammatory conditions .......................................................... 185

§ 197. Names of morbid conditions of physiological fluids ............................... 185

§ 198. Table of initial roots.................................................................................. 187

§ 199. Table of final roots .................................................................................... 188

§ 200. Exercises ................................................................................................... 188

Lesson 38. Names of endogenous pathological changes and malformations ................... 191

§ 201. Names of abnormal adhesions and fissures.............................................. 191

§ 202. Names of pathological cavities ................................................................ 192

§ 203. Names of tumors ...................................................................................... 192

§ 204. Names of concrements ............................................................................. 193

§ 205. Names of abnormal hardening and softening of tissues ........................... 193

§ 206. Table of initial roots.................................................................................. 194

§ 207. Table of final roots .................................................................................... 194

§ 208. Exercises ................................................................................................... 195

Lesson 39. Names of tissue deformations caused by exogenous factors.

Names of surgical operations ............................................................................................... 198

§ 209. General names of tissue deformations caused by different exogenous

factors .......................................................................................................................... 198

§ 210. Names of surgical operations ................................................................... 199

§ 211. Prefixes widely used in surgical names .................................................... 199

§ 212. Table of initial roots.................................................................................. 200

§ 213. Table of final roots .................................................................................... 200

§ 214. Exercises ................................................................................................... 201

Lesson 40. Multiword clinical terms. (part 1) ..................................................................... 206

§ 215. The structure and vocabulary of multiword clinical terms ...................... 206

§ 216. Exercises ................................................................................................... 206

Lesson 41. Multiword clinical terms. (part 2) ..................................................................... 209

§ 217. Exercises ................................................................................................... 209

Lesson 42. Multiword clinical terms. Part 3 ........................................................................ 212

§ 218. Exercises ................................................................................................... 212

§ 219. Model (sample) of the final test in clinical terminology .......................... 214

Literature ..................................................................................................................... 215

Latin – English vocabulary .......................................................................................... 216

English-Latin vocabulary ............................................................................................ 224

The international students’ anthem «Gaudeamus» ...................................................... 236

Latin proverbs and quotations ..................................................................................... 237

Medical professional expressions ................................................................................ 241

252

Учебное издание

Цисык Андрей Зиновьевич

ФАРМАЦЕВТИЧЕСКАЯ ЛАТЫНЬ

THE PHARMACEUTICAL LATIN

Учебно-методическое пособие

На английском языке

Ответственная за выпуск Н. А. Круглик

Компьютерный набор О. М. Новиковой

Компьютерная верстка А. В. Янушкевич

Подписано в печать 15.06.16. Формат 60×84/16. Бумага офсетная.

Ризография. Гарнитура «Times».

Усл. печ. л. 14,65. Уч.-изд. л. 14,16. Тираж 70 экз. Заказ 666.

Издатель и полиграфическое исполнение: учреждение образования

«Белорусский государственный медицинский университет».

Свидетельство о государственной регистрации издателя, изготовителя,

распространителя печатных изданий № 1/187 от 18.02.2014.

Ул. Ленинградская, 6, 220006, Минск.